Harris Ridge Condos Panel Submittal REV A

SUBMITTAL DOCUMENTS
REVISION A
for
Harris Ridge Condominiums

on the
Control Panel
for the Submersible Non-Clog Sewage Pumps
CONTRACTOR:
C.C. Carlton Industries, Ltd
ENGINEER:
Hanrahan, Pritchard Engineering, Inc.
SPECIFICATIONS:
Section 11306: Submersible Non-clog Pump
Smith Pump Company
Project Number: 172221
For questions please contact
Smith Pump Company, Inc.
301 M&B Industrial
Waco, Texas 76712
Attention:
Larry Wingo / Joseph Scott
Phone:
Facsimile:
E-mail:
Website:
254.776-0377
254-776-0023
JosephS@smithpump.com
www.smithpump.com
Note to Contractor:
The proposed equipment will not be available or purchased from our vendors until written approval of the
Submittal is provided. Smith Pump Company will provide the equipment, as approved, and may not be
identical to the Engineers specifications. Please review carefully. It is the Contractors responsibility to
verify field conditions including voltage, elevations, etc. Changes after approval may result in additional
charges for modifications, field service, restocking, or other services.
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC,
172221HarrisRidgeCondominiumsRevision:Original
LarryWingo/JosephScott
July27,2015
Table of Contents
Contractor: C.C. Carlton Industries, Ltd
Project: Submersible Non-clog Pump
SPCO Project Number: 172221
Section 11306
Control Panel for Submersible Non-Clog Pump
ITEM
1
---------------- DESCRIPTION -------------------Cover Page
Table of Contents
TAB: General Information

Control Panel Data Sheet
Revised Comments and Clarifications
Original Comments and Clarifications
Layout Drawings
Control Panel Exterior Layout
Control Panel Interior Layout
Schematics
Control Panel - 480V Power
Control Panel - Starters
Control Panel - Control Logic
Control Panel - Crystal Ball
Control Panel - Annunciator
Control Panel - Terminal Block ID
Bill of Materials
Sheet 1
Sheet 2
TAB: Cut Sheets
July27,2015
TAB: GENERAL INFORMATION
July27,2015
SMITH
PUMP
COMPANY, INC.
301 M&B Industrial

(800) 299-8909 (254) 776-0377
Waco, Texas 76712

FAX (254) 776-0023
Duplex Control Panel

Operation Summary Sheet
Panel No.
Project No.
Project:
6002-334
172221-02
Harris Ridge Condos
Pump Voltage:
H.P. Pump 1: 7.5
H.P. Pump 2: 7.5
460 VAC
August 17, 2015
Phase: 3
Hz: 60
FLA: 10.8
FLA: 10.8
DESCRIPTION:
NEMA 12 Painted Steel Enclosure (60 x 60 x 24)
- 3 Point Latching Mechanism on Overlapping Exterior Doors
- 12 Leg Kits
- Door Stops
- Operator Controls on Exterior Door
Power Distribution Blocks
Ground Bus Bar with Insulating Barrier
Separate control circuit from motor power circuits
Fused Solid State Power Monitoring Unit
Molded Case Main Circuit Breaker with Auxiliary Shunt for RTU Interface
Molded Case Motor Circuit Protectors for Pump Motors
Molded Case Odor Control Circuit Breaker
Molded Case Control Circuit Breaker for External 2KVA Transformer (Shipped Loose)
20 Amp Duplex GFCI Outlets (located on the Back Plate & Exterior Door)
250VA Control Transformers (One per Motor Starter)
NEMA 2 Motor Contactors with Solid State Electronic Overload Relays
Solid State Overload Relay Displays on Exterior Door
NEMA 4X Overload Reset Pushbuttons on Exterior Door
Analog Phone Modem with Surge Protective Device for RTU (Modicon PLC) Output to
Walnut Creek WWTP
850VA Un-Interruptible Power Supply For Control Circuit
Modicon PLC with CPU module, rack extension module, 4 ch analog input module, 8 ch
digital output module, 16 ch digital input module
Devar Pump Controller (On Exterior Door) with Operation by Submersible Transducer & Two
(2) Normally Open Floats (Low & High Level)
Dual Channel Pump Protection Relays
Monitors Motor High Winding Temperatures & Moisture within Pump Seal Chamber
Adjustable On-Delay Timers for Pump Start Delay
11 Pin Control Relays (As Needed)
Fluorescent Interior Work Lights with Manual Off/ On Switch
Elapsed Timer Meters 7 Digits, Non-Resettable
3 Position HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC Rotary Switches 30mm, NEMA 4X, Maintained
2 Position HORN ENABLE-DISABLE Rotary Switch 30mm, NEMA 4X, Maintained
Red PUMP RUN LED Indicator Lights 30mm, NEMA 4X, Push-To-Test
Page 1 of 2
SMITH
PUMP
COMPANY, INC.
301 M&B Industrial

(800) 299-8909 (254) 776-0377
Waco, Texas 76712

FAX (254) 776-0023
Duplex Control Panel

Operation Summary Sheet
Panel No.
Project No.
Project:
6002-334
172221-02
Harris Ridge Condos
Pump Voltage:
H.P. Pump 1: 7.5
H.P. Pump 2: 7.5
460 VAC
August 17, 2015
Phase: 3
Hz: 60
FLA: 10.8
FLA: 10.8
DESCRIPTION:
Green PUMP STOP LED Indicator Lights 30mm, NEMA 4X, Push-To-Test
Black PUMP FAILURE Pushbuttons 30mm, NEMA 4X, Momentary
12 Channel Annunciator Unit with Soft Pushbuttons for Various Alarms & Resets
Terminals for Field Connections
Exclusions:
Smith Pump will not be responsible for:
Programming of RTU/PLC; programming to be performed by others.
Bubbler System w/ corresponding components
Page 2 of 2
Comments and Clarifications

Contractor: C.C. Carlton Industries, Ltd
Project: Submersible Non-clog Pump
SPCO Project Number: 172221
Revised Submittal Comments
1. We are not including generators, generator receptacles, bubbler system & components
relating to the bubbler system, SCADA, instrumentation, conduit, PFCC, MCC, power
drop, special tools, or tool chest. Unloading and installation is by others.
2. Smith Pump does not provide breaker panel LP or the transformer powering it.
Remote horn and alarm beacon are not provided.
3. PLC wiring shall be 18 AWG SIS wire, not 14 AWG.
PLC manual states 15 AWG wire maximum on screw terminals.
4. Annunciator lights are red, not amber. Amber lights are not available in current models.
5. In lieu of heat shrink tubing, Brady nylon cloth wire markers shall be utilized for wire
identification.
6. Terminal block group numbers are assigned based upon function (i.e. Crystal Ball, PLC
Operation, Pump Motor, etc.)
7. The wire color code has been modified from the specifications to eliminate repetitive
colors for different voltages:
AC Hot / Controls
Red
AC Neutral Controls
White
Annunciator Contacts
Yellow
DC+ Controls
Blue w/ Red Tracer
DC- Controls
Blue w/ White Tracer
PLC/RTU Contacts
Purple (18 AWG into PLC connector terminals)
8. Smith Pump has concerns with specified method of wiring UPS hot swap relays.
If CR-UPS closes before CR-UPS1 opens, fuses can blow when UPS voltage is higher
or lower than line voltage. This can be avoided with an on-delay timer located in front of
CR-UPS2. While Smith Pump is making this recommendation, the control panel is being
constructed per the design of the electrical engineer of the project.
9. Contractor to verify the following information:
a. Voltage and Wye/Delta configuration
b. Elevations shown on drawings.
10. Warranty: Warranty will be for 12 months after acceptance, but not to exceed 18
months after delivery.
July27,2015
Original Submittal Comments

1. We are not including generators, generator receptacles, SCADA, instrumentation,
conduit, PFCC, MCC, power drop, special tools, or tool chest. Unloading and
installation is by others.
2. Smith Pump does not provide breaker panel LP or the transformer powering it.
Remote horn and alarm beacon are not provided.
3. Proposed bubbler deviates from specification. Bubbler systems includes:
a. Dual air compressors
b. Air tank
c. Automatic purge based on air flow restriction
d. RS-232 serial port for SCADA system / Modbus communication
e. 4-20ma output signal representing liquid depth
f. Fault signals
g. See data sheets for additional information
4. Contractor to verify the following information:
a. Voltage and Wye/Delta configuration
b. Elevations shown on drawings.
5. Warranty: Warranty will be for 12 months after acceptance, but not to exceed 18 months
after delivery.
July27,2015
Rack 1 Slot 3
120 VAC
LP-2
Rack 1 Slot 2
Rack 1 Slot 1
120 VAC
LP-2 / UPS
120 VAC
LP-2 / UPS
120 VAC
LP-1
120 VAC
LP-2
24 VDC
--
--/--/--
---
---
120 VAC
LP-5
SMITH PUMP
COMPANY
PRODUCT CONTROLS
PROJECT HARRIS RIDGE CONDOS
CONTROL PANEL
INTERIOR LIGHTING
OWNER
HARRIS RIDGE CONDOS
CONTRACTOR C.C. CARLTON
Rack 1 Slot 4
ENGINEER
JSRA ENGINEERS
PROJECT
172221-02
DWG. NO. T:\CAD\CONTROL\SCHEMATIC\6002-334
SHEET 3 OF 6
DATE
8/14/15
SCALE
NA
BY
LSW
CK
JDS
REV
---
Control Panel Pricing

6002-334
quote: 6000-0668
Duplex, 460V, 3P, 7.5 Hp each
NEMA 12 Enclosure
Flowserve 3MSX8A October 28, 2014

10.8 FLA
J. McHattie
Transducer & Bubbler Harris Ridge Condominums
Project: 172221-02-01
ref: 6002-249
BILL OF MATERIAL
HARRIS RIDGE CONDOMINUMS
CONTRACTOR: C.C CARLTON
DUPLEX NEMA 12 PAINTED STEEL CONTROL PANEL
ITEM
35
36
53
57
37
58
48
21
59
56
50
49
60
11
61
38
42
52
55
62
23
2
2
46
46
12
25
28
26
27
24
29
30
31
19
32
46
1
1
14
13
73
15
17
16
63
64
65
66
67
33
68
39
6
QTY
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
4
1
1
2
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
5
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
160
4
6
2
21
3
3
9
2
1
2
2
2
2
DESCRIPTION
MANUFACTURER
NEMA 12 Painted Steel Enclosure: 60" x 60" x 24", 3PT, Door Stops, 12" LegsHoffman
Painted Steel Panel Plate: 60" x 60"
Hoffman
Insulated Barrier: Bolt-On, 60" x 6"
Hoffman
Quarter-Turn Non-Locking Wing Handle
EXM
UPS, 850VA, 510 Watts, 120 Volt, Din Rail Mount
Sola
Ground Bar with 20 pre-drilled connection points
Square D
Two Wire Temperature Transmitter for 2 or 3 Wire RTDs, 0-200 F
Devar
Pump Controller, 120VAC, 4-20ma Input, 4 SPDT
Devar
Submersible Transducer, 4-20mA, 15 PSI, 60 Ft Cable, Intrinsically Safe
Dwyer
3 Pole Power Distribution Block, 175 Amp, 600 Volt, Phenolic
Marathon
1 Pole Power Splice Block, 115 Amp, 600 Volt, Thermoplastic
Marathon
1 Pole Power Distribution Block, 115 Amp, 600 Volt Thermoplastic
Marathon
3 Pole Power Splice Block, 90 Amp, 600 Volt, Thermoplastic
Bussmann
3 Pole Circuit Breaker: 60 Amp, 600VAC, 25K AIC
Square D
Circuit Breaker Auxillary Contact Field Installable
Square D
Motor Circuit Protector, 30 Amp, 1.5-25 Amp Full Load Range
Square D
2 Pole Circuit Breaker: 15 Amps, 480 Volt, 18/25K AIC
Square D
3 Pole Circuit Breaker: 30 Amps, 480 Volt, 18/25K AIC
Square D
Three Pole Fuse Block, Class CC, 600V, Isolating, Non-indicating
Allen Bradley
1 Amp Class CC Fuse, 600 Volt, Time Delay, Rejection Type
Mersen
Current Transformer, 200:5 ratio
Simpson
PM800 Power Monitor: Base Meter Unit with integrated display
Square D
PM800 Module, 2 digital outputs (relays), 6 digital inputs
Square D
Single White Receptacle, 20 Amp, 120 Volt
Leviton
Stainless Steel Cover: Single Receptacle
Leviton
DC Power Supply: 24V@2.5A, DIN Rail
Sola
24VDC Power Supply Module: 1.04 Amps, 36 Watts
Modicon
CPU Module: Ethernet/ USB/ Modbus Serial Port, 256 Inputs/ Outputs, 24VDCModicon
Analog Input Module, 16 Channels, 120VAC
Modicon
Analog Output Module, 8 Channel, 120VAC
Modicon
Analog Input Module: 4 Channel, 4-20 mA Inputs
Modicon
Rack Extenstion Module, 8 Slots
Modicon
Protective Covers for Rack Extenstion Module
Modicon
Protection Bar for Rack Extension Module
Modicon
Dual Line RJ11 Jacks Surge Protector
L-Com
Analog Phone Modem: Serial RS232 w/ DB9 Connector, RJ-11 Modular Jack Telenetics
Weatherproof Gray Gang Box - Duplex
Red Dot
RJ11 Stainless Steel Cover Plates
Various
RJ11 Connectors
Various
End Barrier for Terminal Block, White
Allen Bradley
Terminal Block, 600 Volt, 30 Amp, #30-#12 AWG, White
Allen Bradley
Side Jumper, 10 Pole
Allen Bradley
End Anchor for Terminal Block
Allen Bradley
End Barrier for Isolating Fuse Block
Allen Bradley
Fuse Block, 300V, 1/4-1-1/4" Fuse, Isolating, Non-indicating
Allen Bradley
0.125 Amp Fuse, 250 Volt
Goulds
0.5 Amp Fuse, 250 Volt
Goulds
2 Amp Fuse, 250 Volt
Goulds
Goulds
Goulds
Dual Channel Pump Protection Relay: HMWT & Seal Failure
Multi-Tech
14 Pin Rectangular Base
Multi-Tech
NEMA 2 Contactor, 45 Amps, 120 Volt
Square D
3 Phase Electronic Overload Relay
Symcom
BOM 1 of 2
PROJECT #: 172221-02
MODEL NO: 6002-334
7.5 HP, 480 Volt , 3 Phase
PART NO.
A606024LP-MOD
A60P60
F88BK60
880 SCQ4-WNH
SDU-850
PK18GTA
SM812EC-0012
3020-4-420
PBLTX-15-60
1423570
1411300
1411400
NDN111-WH
HGL36060
S29450
HJL36030M71
FAL24015
FAL34030
1492-FB3C30
ATQR1
37022
PM820MG
3020-PM8M26
T5020-W
84004-40
SDN2.5-24-100P
BMX CPS 3500
BMX P34 2020
BMX DAI 1604
BMX DRA 0805
BMX AMI 0410
BMX XBP 0800
BMX XEM 010
BMX XSP 0800
HGLN-D2T
MIU14.4
IH3-1
43080-1S1
41108-RW3
1492-N36
1492-HM1
1492-SJ6-10
1492-N47
1492-N37
1492-H6
GGC-1/8
GGC-1/2
GGC-2
GGC-3
GGC-7
MOS-1P
PB12P
8502SDO2V02S
777-P2
BILL OF MATERIAL
BOM 2 of 2
HARRIS RIDGE CONDOMINUMS
PROJECT #: 172221-02
CONTRACTOR: C.C CARLTON

DUPLEX NEMA 12 PAINTED STEEL CONTROL PANEL
ITEM
40
40
18
69
43
45
45
45
34
7
8
9
54
20
3
5
22
44
22
4
70
71
72
10
QTY
2
2
2
4
2
1
1
1
1
2
8
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
30
6
30
125"
2
21
2
33
39
6
9
3
4
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
5
2
DESCRIPTION
Communication Module for 777 Remote Display
Local Display/ Controller for 777 Overload Relay
Two Pole Fuse Block, Class CC, 600V, Isolating, Non-indicating
1 Amp Class CC Fuse, 600 Volt, Time Delay, Rejection Type
250VA Control Transformer: 240/480 Volts IN, 110 Volts OUT
Stainless Steel Cover: Duplex GFCI Receptacle
Weatherproof Gray Outlet Box: Duplex GFCI Receptacle
Duplex GFCI Ivory Receptacle, 20 Amp, 120 Volt
Annunciator: 12 LED Red Lights, 4 NO Pushbuttons
30mm Maintained 3 Position Selector Switch, 2 NO & 2 NC
NEMA 4X 30mm Pushbutton, NO & NC Contact
Red Push-To-Test LED Light: 30mm, NEMA 4X, 120VAC
30mm Maintained 2 Position Selector Switch
External Elapsed Time Meter, 110 Volt, Non-resettable, 7 figure Display
Multi-Function Timer, 5 timing ranges, DPDT, 120V, 11 pin
11 Pin Socket: 300 Volt, 10 Amp, 3PDT
120 Volt Fluorescent Light Enclosure - 18"
PANELITE Remote Door Switches
120 Volt Flurorescent Light Bulb
Control Relay, 5 Amp, 120VAC, 3PDT, LED Indicator
Circuit Protection Varistor: 130VAC, 170VDC; 340V; 10A; Metal Oxide; 180pF
11 Pin Socket: 300 Volt, 10 Amp, 3PDT
Corrosion Inhibitor Strip
Green Push-To-Test LED Light: 30mm, NEMA 4X, 120VAC
MODEL NO: 6002-334

7.5 HP, 480 Volt , 3 Phase
MANUFACTURER
Symcom
Symcom
Allen Bradley
Mersen
Hammond
Crouse-Hinds
Red Dot
Leviton
Ametek
Square D
Square D
Square D
Square D
Redington
Square D
Idec Corporation
Hoffman
Hoffman
Sylanvia
Square D
Little Fuse
Idec
Hoffman
Square D
PART NO.
RS485-MS-2W
RM1000
1492-FB2C30
ATQR1
SP250MQMJ
HUWIS26
IH3-1
7899-I
AN-3196B-F3A-B-X-NR-AR-PM-NR-Y
9001SKS43BH2
9001SKR1BH13
9001SKT38LRR31
9001SKS11B
711-0160-G
9050JCK70V20
SR3P-05
LF120V18
ALFSWD
F18T8TW/K24
8501-KP13
V07E130P
SR3P-05
AHC160R
9001SKT38LGG31
Devar
Square D
Multi-Tech
Square D
Symcom
Square D
Square D
Square D
Square D
3020-4-420
PM820MG
MOS-1P
8502SDO2V02S
777-P2
9001SKT38LRR31
9050JCK70V20
8501-KP13
9001SKT38LGG31
SPARE PARTS
Pump Controller, 120VAC, 4-20ma Input, 4 SPDT
PM800 Power Monitor: Base Meter Unit with integrated display
Dual Channel Pump Protection Relay: HMWT & Seal Failure
NEMA 2 Contactor, 45 Amps, 120 Volt
3 Phase Electronic Overload Relay
Red Push-To-Test LED Light: 30mm, NEMA 4X, 120VAC
Multi-Function Timer, 5 timing ranges, DPDT, 120V, 11 pin
Control Relay, 5 Amp, 120VAC, 3PDT, LED Indicator
Green Push-To-Test LED Light: 30mm, NEMA 4X, 120VAC
TAB: CUT SHEETS
172221HarrisRidgeCondominiums
Revision:Original
July27,2015
Bulletin 1492
IEC Terminal Block Accessories

Marking Systems
Blank Markers
Photo
For Use With
Markers
per Card
Snap-In Individual Markers

1492-M
1492-L
1492-L
1492-J, L
1492-J, L
Marker Size
Pkg
Qty.
100
3 x 5 mm
1492-M3X5
120
3 x 12 mm
1492-M3X12
Cat. No.
200
5 x 5 mm
1492-M5X5
144
5 x 8 mm
1492-M5X8
144
5 x 10 mm
1492-M5X10
144
5 x 12 mm
1492-M5X12
96
5 x 15 mm
1492-M5X15
20
5 x 30 mm
1492-M5X30
200
6 x 5 mm
1492-M6X5
120
6 x 10 mm
1492-M6X10
120
6 x 12 mm
1492-M6X12
108
7 x 12 mm
1492-M7X12
160
8 x 5 mm
1492-M8X5
NEMA (1492-HM1, -HM2, -HM3) Terminal Blocks,

1492-CB Circuit Breakers
120
6 x 10 mm
1492-MN81
NEMA (1492-HM3) Terminal Blocks, 1492-CB Circuit

Breakers
40
10 x 10 mm
1492-MN83
1492-J, L, 1738 ArmorPoint

1492-J, L
56
8 x 9 mm
1492-MS8X9
56
8 x 12 mm
1492-MS8X12
700-HN204, -HN205, Relay Sockets
40
8 x 17 mm
1492-MS8X17
1667 PanelConnect
40
9 x 20 mm
1492-MS9X20
100-C, -D Contactors, 700-CF Relays, 140 Circuit

Breakers, 193-E1, -E3
40
10 x 17 mm
1492-MS10X17
120
5 x 8 mm
1492-MR5X8
1492-W,R, 700-HA Relays
Snap-In Linked Markers

1492-MR
120
6 x 8 mm
1492-MR6X8
120
5 x 12 mm
1492-MR5X12
120
6 x 12 mm
1492-MR6X12
84
8 x 12 mm
1492-MR8X12
1492-WM3, -WMD1
80
5 x 5 mm
1492-MS5X5
1492-W, 700-HA, 800F Contact Block
80
5 x 9 mm
1492-MS5X9
1492-J, -L
1492-W, 700-H Relays
80
5 x 12 mm
1492-MS5X12
1492-W, -R, 700-H Relays
80
6 x 9 mm
1492-MS6X9
1492-W, 700-H Relays
80
6 x 12 mm
1492-MS6X12
96
5 x 10 mm
1492-MH5X10
96
5 x 15 mm
1492-MH5X15
80
6 x 12 mm
1492-MH6X12
External Diameter (mm)
Markers
per Card
Marker Size
Pkg.
Qty.
Cat. No.
from 0.276 in. (from 7.0 mm)
32
9 x 24 mm1
1492-MW9X24
32
5 x 23 mm1
1492MW10X23
32
8 x 23 mm1
1492MW14X23
12
11 x 44 mm1
1492MW11X60
0.1620.193 in. (414.9 mm)
32
5 x 21 mm
1492-MW5-21
0.1850.229 (0.268) in. (4.75.8 [6.8] mm)
32
6 x 21 mm
1492-MW6-21
0.2290.276 (0.335) in. (5.87.0 [8.5] mm)
32
7 x 21 mm
1492-MW7-21
Snap-In Hinged Markers
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1492-L
Cable Markers
1492-MW
9
10
11
12
1 Requires cable ties.
Requires Cat. No. 1492-GMC

Requires Cat. No. 1492-PLOTPLTA
13
www.ab.com/catalogs
Preferred availability cat. nos. are bold.
Publication A117-CA001A-EN-P
12-91
Bulletin 1492
NEMA Terminal Block Accessories

End Anchors
1492-EAHJ35
1492-15A, 1492-25A
1492-N23
1.25 (31.8 mm)
1492-15E, 1492-25E
C
0.56
(14.3 mm)
1.44 (36.5 mm)
1492-N2
A = Width
B = Height
A = Width
B = Height
1492-N47
Cat. No.
1.70 (43.2 mm)
.013 (3.2 mm)
0.34
(8.6 mm)
1492-15A
1.5 in.
1.03 in.
0.594 in. 0.234 in.
0.75 in.
(38.1 mm) (26.2 mm) (15.1 mm) (5.9 mm) (19.1 mm)
1492-15E
1.5 in.
1.03 in.
0.594 in. 0.234 in.
(38.1 mm) (26.2 mm) (15.1 mm) (5.9 mm)
1492-25A
1.88 in.
1.19 in.
0.688 in. 0.203 in.
0.97 in.
(47.8 mm) (30.2 mm) (17.5 mm) (5.2 mm) (24.6 mm)
1492-25E
1.88 in.
1.19 in.
0.688 in. 0.234 in.
(47.8 mm) (30.2 mm) (17.5 mm) (5.9 mm)
3
4
1.50 (38.1 mm)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1 The 1492-SJS Insulating Sleeve reduces exposure to live parts on the 1492-N39 and 1492-N49. The 1492-SJS used with the 1492-N39 and 1492-H1 or 1492-
HM1 provides IEC 947 IP2X finger protection.
www.ab.com/catalogs
12-111
13
Bulletin 1492

Specifications
Multiple Wire Connection Combination for Stranded Copper Conductors of the Same Gross Section for Allen-Bradley
Terminal Blocks
Terminal Blocks
Wire Size AWG (mm2)
#22
Cat. No.
1492-H4, -H5, -H6, -H7
#20 (0.5)
#18 (0.75)
#16 (1.5)
Number of the Same-Size Wires Per Terminal

3
2
#14 (2.5)
#12 (4)
Fingersafe Terminal Blocks
Fingersafe Terminal Blocks

#22
#20 (0.5)
#18 (0.75)
#16 (1.5)
#14 (2.5)
#12 (4)
#10 (6)
#8 (10)
Number of the Same-Size Wires Per Terminal
Cat. No.
1
1492-HM1
1492-HM2
1492-HC6
1
1492-HM3
1 Dimensions for other colors are identical.
NEMA and IEC Terminal Block Component Specifications1

Tie Point Terminal Blocks Type HM2C and WD4C
The total current flow through these terminal blocks (the sum of all inputs or the sum of all outputs)
must not exceed the rated current for the device.
6
7
Description
Type
Rating
Maximum Total Current Flow Through the Terminal Block
H2C, HM2C
10 A
Maximum Working Voltage
H2C, HM2C
600V
Operating Ambient Temperature Range
All
-4+104 F (-20+40 C)
Storage Temperature Range
All
-40+167 F (-40+75 C)
Diode Terminal Blocks Types H2D, HHM2D, WD2D, WD2DR, RD3DF and RD3DR
Description
8
9
Symbol
Type
Rating
Peak Repetitive Reverse Voltage
V (RRM)
H2D, HM2D
600V
Working Peak Reverse Voltage
V (RWM)
V (R)
RD3DF, RD3DR
WD4DF, WD4DR
300V
Non-Repetitive Peak Reverse Voltage (Halfwave, single-phase, 60 Hz)
V (RSM)
H2D, HM2D
600V
RMS Reverse Voltage
V (Rms)
H2D, HM2D
600V
I (O)
All
1.0 A
30 A (1 cycle)
Average Rectified Forward Current Single-Phase, Resistive Load, 60 Hz

Non-Repetitive Peak Surge Current (Surge applied at rated load)
10
I (FSM)
All
Maximum Forward Voltage Drop [I (f) = 1.0 A]
V (F)
All
1.1V
Maximum Reverse Current
I (R)
All
10 A
Operating Ambient Temperature Range
T (A)
All
4+104 F (20+40 C)
Storage Temperature Range
T (S)
All
40+167 F (40+75 C)
The maximum voltage rating of the diode terminal blocks listed in the above table should not be exceeded even through the maximum reverse voltage rating of
the diode alone is 1000V.
11
All parameters measured at 77 F (25 C).
12
13
www.ab.com/catalogs
12-114
Bulletin 1492
Screw Connection Terminal Blocks

Fuse Blocks
1492-H...
1492-WFB4
1.55" (39.4 mm)
Dimensions are not intended to be used

for manufacturing purposes.
Note: Height dimension is measured
from top of rail to top of terminal
block.
1.85" (47 mm)
0
0.36"
(9.1 mm)
0.31"
(8 mm)
3.20" (81.3 mm)
2.0" (50.7 mm)
Specifications
Certifications
H6/WFB4
H5/WFB424
H4/WFB4250
Voltage Rating
Maximum Current
Wire Range (Rated Cross Section)

Wire Strip Length
Recommended Tightening Torque
Density
Housing Temperature Range
H6/WFB4
H5/WFB424
H4/WFB4250
H6/WFB4
H5/WFB424
H4/WFB4250
Fuse Size (Not Supplied)
Short-Circuit Current Rating
Terminal Blocks
Color:
Black No-indication
Black w/LED
Black w/Neon
Accessories
Mounting Rails:
1 m Symmetrical DIN (Steel)
1 m Symmetrical DIN (Aluminum)
1 m Hi-Rise Sym. DIN (Aluminum)
1 m Angled Hi-Rise Sym. DIN (Steel)
3 ft Scored A-B Rail
3 ft Rigid A-B Rail
3 ft High Rise A-B Rail
Standoff Brackets (Use Every 12 in.)
End Barrier
End Anchors and Retainers:
Screwless End Retainer
DIN Rail Normal Duty
DIN Rail Heavy Duty
A-B Rail Heavy Duty
10-Pole Side Jumper
Side Jumper Insulating Sleeve
Other Accessories:
Partition Plate
Marking Systems:
Snap-In Marker Card For Base
Block
For Handle
Adhesive Labels
Single-circuit fusible terminal block with or without fuse

Single-circuit fuse block with or without fuse indication.
indication.
CSA
IEC
CSA
IEC
300V AC/DC
500V AC/DC
300V AC/DC
500V AC/DC
1057V AC/DC
1057V AC/DC
100300V AC
85264V AC
15 A
15 A
15 A 1
0.5
#3012 AWG
#3012 AWG
0.54 mm2
4 mm2
0.38 in. (9.7 mm)
0.31 in. (8 mm)
7.1 lbin (0.8 Nm)
2.655.3 lbin (0.30.6 Nm)
33 pcs/ft (109pcs /m)
38 pcs/ft (125 pcs/m)
-40+195 F (-40+90 C)
-40+195 F (-40+90 C)
Indicator Type
Non-Indicating
Non-Indicating
Red LED
Red LED
Neon
Neon
Leakage Current
2 mA @ 24V
2 mA @ 24V
2 mA @ 300V
2 mA @ 300V
1/4 x 1-1/4 in.
5 x 20 mm
See page 12-42
Cat. No.
1492-H6
1492-H5
1492-H4
Pkg Qty.
25
25
25
Cat. No.
1492-WFB4
1492-WFB424
1492-WFB4250
Pkg Qty.
50
50
50
Cat. No.
Pkg Qty.
Cat. No.
Pkg Qty.
199-DR1
10
199-DR1
10
1492-DR5
1492-DR6
1492-DR7
1492-N1
1492-N22
1492-N44
1492-N25
1492-N37
10
2
2
20
20
2
2
50
1492-DR5
1492-DR6
1492-DR7
Not Required
10
2
2
1492-ERL35
20
1492-ERL35
20
1492-EAJ35
1492-EAHJ35
1492-N23
1492-N49
1492-SJS
100
50
10
10
10
1492-EAJ35
1492-EAHJ35
1492-SJFB8-10
100
50
10
1492-PPSL3
50
1492-MS8X12 (56/card)
1492-MS8X9 (56/card)
1492-MS8X12 (56/card)
1492-MS8X9 (56/card)
1492-ALHFB (50/sheet)
5
5
1
1492-MS8X9 (56/card)
1492-ALHFB (50/card)
1 IEC standards for 5 x 20 mm fuses do not include ratings above 6.3 A.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Cat. No. 1492-N49 is uninsulated. Cat. No. 1492-SJFB8-10 is insulated.
www.ab.com/catalogs
12-39
Bulletin 1492

Jumpers
Side Jumpers
For Use With
Pkg
Qty.
Cat. No.
1492-WM4, W4
50
1492-N42
1492-H4, H5, H6, H7
1
2
1492-N49
1
1492-SJS
10
1492-SJ5-10
1492-JD3, JD3C, JD3F, JDG3, JD3DF,

JD3DR, JD3SS, JDG3P
50
1492-SJ5A-10

JD3DR, JD3SS, JDG3P
50
1492-SJ5A-24

JD3DR, JD3SS, JDG3P
50
1492-SJ5B-24

JD3DR, JD3SS, JDG3P
50
1492-SJ5B-10
1492-WM4, W4, W4TW
10
1492-JT3M
1492-W10
10
1492-SJ8-10
1492-JD3FB, JDG3FB
50
1492-SJ8A-4
1492-SJ8A-3
1492-SJ6-10
1492-SJ6A-50
1492-JD3FB, JDG3FB
50
1492-JD3FB, JDG3FB
50
1492-SJ8A-2
1492-LMP3, LMP3Q, LMJ3, LM3, LM3Q,

LMP3E, LMP3QE
50
1492-SJLM5-2
1492-WMD1
10
1492-WFB4, WFB424, WFB4250
10
1492-SJFB8-10
5
6
10
1492-W3, WR3
3
4
10
1492-SJMD5-12
1492-WM3
10
1492-SJM5-10
1492-WTF3, WTS3, WTF3LP, WTS3LP,

WTF3LP, WTF3LN, WTS3LN
10
1492-SJT5-20-R

10
1492-SJT5-20-B
Note: Side jumpers carry the same current rating as the terminal block used
with it
1 Side jumper insulating sleeve only for use with Cat. No. 1492-N49
Use jumper on single side of terminal block only
Uninsulated
Two-Level Jumper
For Use With

1492-LTF3
(Connects Two Levels within a 1492-LTF3
Terminal Block)
Pkg
Qty.
Cat. No.
20
1492-CJL5D
9
10
11
12
13
www.ab.com/catalogs
12-86
Bulletin 1492

Specifications
Technical Specifications for Fuse Plugs
0
1
1492-FPK2
1492-FPK224
1492-FPK248
1492-FPK2120
Non-Indicating
LED
LED
LED
LED
Leakage Current
1.6 mA @ 24V
1.6 mA @ 24V
1.6 mA @ 24V
1.6 mA @ 264V
Working Voltage
Per Fuse Rating
1036V AC/DC
3570V AC/DC
60150V AC/DC
140250V AC
Characteristic
Indicator Type
Fuse Size
5 x 20 mm
Marker
1492-M5X5
1492-FPK2250
IEC standards for 5 x 20 mm fuses do not include ratings above 6.3 A.
2
3
4
5
6
UL/CSA File and Guide Numbers Arranged by Base Cat. Nos.

UL Number
CSA Number
Base Cat. No.
File
Guide
File
Class
1492-H4, -H5, -H6, -H7
E40735
XCFR2
LR67896
622801
1492-R
E40735
E187022
XCFR2
XCIB2
XCFR8
1492-RG
E160646
E40735
E187022
KDER2
XCFR2
XCIB2
1492-UF3
E40735
XCFR2
LR67896
622801
1492-W
E40735
E187022
XCFR2
XCIB2
LR67896
LR14074
622801
622801
1492-WG
E40735
E187022
XCFR2
XCIB2
LR67896
LR14074
622801
622801
1492-J
E40735
XCFR2
XCIB2
223923
622801
622801
1492-JG
E40735
E187022
XCFR2
XCIB2
223923
622801
622801
1492-L
E40735
E187022
XCFR2
XCIB2
223923
622801
622801
1492-LG
E40735
E187022
XCFR2
XCIB2
223923
622801
622801
These numbers are actually UL file and guide numbers, as these products are UL Recognized Components per Canadian Safety Standards (cUR).
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
www.ab.com/catalogs
12-98
Bulletin 1492

Specifications
Maximum number of multiple wire connections for copper conductors of the same cross-section and type for Allen-Bradley IEC Terminal
Blocks. Cat. Nos. 1492-J and L products are all recommended for one conductor per terminal. Wire range is defined in the cat. page for each
of the products.
In general, accessories for terminal blocks are not eligible for recognition by UL, CSA, or other third party approval agencies. The suitability of
the installation must be judged in the end use application due to the wide variety of possible uses. However, accessories are designed to
meet, and are tested to, the terminal block assembly requirements such as electrical spacings, etc.
Wire Size [AWG]

#30
#28
#26
#24
#22
#20
#18
#16
#14
#12
#10
#8
1492-CA1
1492-CAM1
1492-H4
1492-H5
1492-H6
1492-H7
1492-HM3
#6
#4
#2
#1
1/0
2/0
3/0
Number of the Same Size Wires Per Terminal
Cat. No.
1492-J10
1492-J16
1492-J2Q
1492-J3
1492-J35
1492-J3F
1492-J3P
1492-J3TW (single side)
1492-J3TW (twin side)
1492-J4
1492-J4CTB
1492-J4Q
1492-J4TW
1492-J50
1492-J6
1492-J70
1492-JC3
1492-JD3
1492-JD3DF
1492-JD3DR
1492-JD3F
1492-JD3FB
1492-JD3PSS
1492-JD3PSSTP
1492-JD3PTP
1492-JD3RB***
1492-JD3RC001
1492-JD3SS
1492-JD4
1492-JD4C
1492-JDC3
1492-JDG3
1492-JDG3FB
1492-JDG3P
1492-JDG3PSS
1492-JDG3PSSTP
1492-JDG3PTP
1492-JDG4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
www.ab.com/catalogs
12-95
Bulletin 1492

End Anchors
1492-EAHJ35
1492-15A, 1492-25A
1492-N23
1.25 (31.8 mm)
1492-15E, 1492-25E
C
0.56
(14.3 mm)
1.44 (36.5 mm)
1492-N2
A = Width
B = Height
A = Width
B = Height
1492-N47
Cat. No.
1.70 (43.2 mm)
.013 (3.2 mm)
0.34
(8.6 mm)
1492-15A
1.5 in.
1.03 in.
0.594 in. 0.234 in.
0.75 in.
(38.1 mm) (26.2 mm) (15.1 mm) (5.9 mm) (19.1 mm)
1492-15E
1.5 in.
1.03 in.
0.594 in. 0.234 in.
(38.1 mm) (26.2 mm) (15.1 mm) (5.9 mm)
1492-25A
1.88 in.
1.19 in.
0.688 in. 0.203 in.
0.97 in.
(47.8 mm) (30.2 mm) (17.5 mm) (5.2 mm) (24.6 mm)
1492-25E
1.88 in.
1.19 in.
0.688 in. 0.234 in.
(47.8 mm) (30.2 mm) (17.5 mm) (5.9 mm)
3
4
1.50 (38.1 mm)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1 The 1492-SJS Insulating Sleeve reduces exposure to live parts on the 1492-N39 and 1492-N49. The 1492-SJS used with the 1492-N39 and 1492-H1 or 1492-
HM1 provides IEC 947 IP2X finger protection.
www.ab.com/catalogs
12-111
13
Bulletin 1492-FB
Fuse Holders
UL Listed for Branch Circuit Protection
Features and Benets

Silver-plated fuse clips
Improved fuse contact
Available bus bars
80 A and 100 A ampacity
UL, CSA, CE certied
Ventilated housing
Allows good air ow and
fuse ventilation
Marker-ready feature
For circuit and wire identication
Optional blown fuse indicator
Allow easy troubleshooting
of electrical circuits
Finger-safe design
Front-nger protection per
IEC/ EN 60529 protects from
accidental contact with
energized circuits
Compact size
Requires less panel space than
open-style fuse holders
No special tools required
Easy insertion/removal of fuses
Versatile
Versions for 12V to 1000V
1-, 2-, and 3-pole versions
Safe, compact and unique

design, now amplied by
the bus bar oering
Overview
The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 1492-FB fuse holder line from Rockwell Automation
has a distinctive, standalone design with many unique features. These fuse
holders provide ease of use and installation (no special tools are needed),
with a versatile, space saving and nger-safe design. This product line also
stands out among the competition because of its distinct look, marker
ready feature, and expanded ventilation. The fuse clips are silver-plated
for improved fuse contact and there is a standardized LED indication
feature for both AC and DC voltages.
The class CC and J holders are UL listed for branch circuit protection.
Class CC and J fuses are ideal for wire protection, small motor loads,
and for group protection of small motor loads. The midget holders are
a UL recognized product where supplementary (1 1/2 x 13/32) fuses
are applied. The midget fuse holder is also approved for 10 x 38 IEC
midget fuses.
The 1492-FB fuse holder family is designed for use in many OEM applications
such as power supplies, equipment protection, primary and secondary
control transformers, solenoids, lighting and heater loads, and drives.
Product Selection
Fuse Holders
For Class CC Fuse
30 A*
Cat. No.
1492-FB1C30
1492-FB1C30-L
1492-FB1C30-D1
Description
Fuse Holder
Fuse Holder with Indication (110-600V)
Fuse Holder with Indication, 1272V
Pieces per Carton
Fuse Holder
Fuse Holder with Indication
Pieces per Carton
Fuse Holder
Fuse Holder with Indication
Pieces per Carton
1-Pole
2-Pole
3-Pole
For Class J Fuse

30 A
60 A
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
1492-FB1J30
1492-FB1J60
1492-FB1J30-L
1492-FB1J60-L
6
1492-FB2J30
1492-FB2J60
1492-FB2J30-L
1492-FB2J60-L
3
1492-FB3J30
1492-FB3J60
1492-FB3J30-L
1492-FB3J60-L
2
1492-FB2C30
1492-FB2C30-L
1492-FB3C30
1492-FB3C30-L
For Midget Fuse

30 A
Cat. No.
1492-FB1M30
1492-FB1M30-L
1492-FB1M30-D1
1492-FB2M30
149-FB2M30-L
1492-FB3M30
1492-FB3M60-L
* All major fuse brands and current ranges have been evaluated for this fuse holder. Due to the heat they generate, the following fuses must be de-rated:
Ferraz Shamut ATQR 1.25 1 = 0.42 A max.
Ferraz Shamut ATQR 1.40 1 = 0.47 A max.
Specications
CC
1492-FBnC30 B
1492-FB1C30-D1 B
1492-FBnC30-L B
Approvals
Class CC
UL, CSA, CE
Maximum Voltage
600V Max
Maximum Current
30 A
M
1492-FBnM30 B
1492-FB1M30-D1 B
1492-FBnM30-L B
Midget
13/32 X 1 1/2
10 x 38 mm
UR, CSA, CE
600V Max
(690V AC max IEC)
30 A
(32 A IEC)
200 kA sym
Fuse Dependent
50 kA max UL
Product Type
(n = # of poles)
For Fuse Type:
Maximum Current Withstand

(UL/CSA)
(This is the rating of the fuse not the holder.)
J60
1492-FBnJ60 B
1492-FBnJ60-L B
Class J
UL, CSA, CE
600V Max
30 A
60 A
200 kA sym
-4 130 F
-20 55 C
Cu, Stranded
Operating Temperature Range

Conductor Material
Conductor
Strip Length
Conductor Range
J30
1492-FBnJ30 B
1492-FBnJ30-L B
One wire
per Terminal
Two wires
per Terminal
(both wires must be same size)
0.43 in
(11 mm)
#18 4 AWG
(0.75 25 mm2)
0.79 in
(20 mm)
#18 1 AWG
(0.75 50 mm2)
#14 1 AWG
(2.5 50 mm2)
#18 8 AWG
(0.75 10 mm2)
#18 6 AWG
(0.75 16 mm2)
#14 #6 AWG
(2.5 16 mm2)
# 18 # 8 22 lbin
#6 #4 26 lbin
(0.75 25 mm2 2.5 nm)
Terminal
Tightening Torque
35 lbin
(4 nm)
Accessories
Bus Bars, Pin Style, When used with 1492-FB, type CC fuse holders, 600V AC
Cuttable, copper bus bar provided in 1 m length. UL 508 Listed, E56639, Category NMTR, cULus. CE to IEC 664
100 kA SCCR when used with Bus Protection, noted in table below.
Bus bars may also be used with 1492-FB - midget (10 x 38) fuse holders and 1492-SP Miniature Circuit Breaker/Supplementary Protector
Description
Devices per Meter
1-Phase
57
2-Phase
29
3-Phase
19
End Cap for 1-Phase

End Cap for
2-Phase & 3-Phase
Protective Shroud
Terminal Lug
Package Quantity
(1) 1 Meter Bus Bar
Bus Protection
Max. Fuse Type J
175 A
200 A
175 A
200 A
175 A
200 A
Ampacity
80 A
100 A
80 A
100 A
80 A
100 A
Cat. No.
1492-A1B8
1492-A1B1
1492-A2B8
1492-A2B1
1492-A3B8
1492-A3B1
1492-A1E
10
10
1492-AME
10
10
80 A/100 A
1492-AAP
1492-AAT1
Allen-Bradley and Rockwell Software are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.

Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Publication 1492FB-PP001G-EN-P April 2011

Supersedes Publication 1492FB-PP001F-EN-P March 2010
Copyright 2011 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Printed in USA.
Bulletin 1492

Jumpers
Side Jumpers
For Use With
Pkg
Qty.
Cat. No.
1492-WM4, W4
50
1492-N42
1492-H4, H5, H6, H7
1
2
1492-N49
1
1492-SJS
10
1492-SJ5-10

JD3DR, JD3SS, JDG3P
50
1492-SJ5A-10

JD3DR, JD3SS, JDG3P
50
1492-SJ5A-24

JD3DR, JD3SS, JDG3P
50
1492-SJ5B-24

JD3DR, JD3SS, JDG3P
50
1492-SJ5B-10
1492-WM4, W4, W4TW
10
1492-JT3M
1492-W10
10
1492-SJ8-10
1492-JD3FB, JDG3FB
50
1492-SJ8A-4
1492-SJ8A-3
1492-SJ6-10
1492-SJ6A-50
1492-JD3FB, JDG3FB
50
1492-JD3FB, JDG3FB
50
1492-SJ8A-2
1492-LMP3, LMP3Q, LMJ3, LM3, LM3Q,

LMP3E, LMP3QE
50
1492-SJLM5-2
1492-WMD1
10
1492-WFB4, WFB424, WFB4250
10
1492-SJFB8-10
5
6
10
1492-W3, WR3
3
4
10
1492-SJMD5-12
1492-WM3
10
1492-SJM5-10

10
1492-SJT5-20-R

10
1492-SJT5-20-B
Note: Side jumpers carry the same current rating as the terminal block used
with it
1 Side jumper insulating sleeve only for use with Cat. No. 1492-N49
Use jumper on single side of terminal block only
Uninsulated
Two-Level Jumper
For Use With

1492-LTF3
(Connects Two Levels within a 1492-LTF3
Terminal Block)
Pkg
Qty.
Cat. No.
20
1492-CJL5D
9
10
11
12
13
www.ab.com/catalogs
12-86
Bulletin 1492

Space-Saver Feed-Through Blocks
1492-W3
1492-W4
1492-W6
1.38" (35 mm)
1.38" (35 mm)

block.
0.20"
(5 mm)
1.78" (45.3 mm)
Specifications
Certifications
Voltage Rating
Maximum Current
Wire Strip Length
Density
Terminal Blocks
Color:
Grey
Red
Blue
Black
Green
Yellow
Orange
Brown
White
Accessories
Mounting Rails:
End Barrier
DIN Rail Heavy Duty
Jumpers:
Insulated Side Jumper
Center Jumper 50-pole
Center Jumper Link
Center Jumper Cover White1
Other Accessories:
Partition Plate
Separation Plate
Test Plug
Stackable Test Plug (with Legs)
Stackable Test Plug (without Legs)
Test Plug Adapter
Electrical Warning Plate (1-pole)
Electrical Warning Plate (4-pole)
Marking Systems:
Snap-in Marker Cards
1.61" (41 mm)
0
1
0.24"
(6 mm)
1.78" (45.3 mm)
0.28"
(7 mm)
1.87" (47.6 mm)
Single-circuit terminal block.

IEC
CSA
ATEX
IEC
CSA
ATEX
IEC
CSA
ATEX
600V
800V
600V
550V
600V
800V
600V
550V
600V
800V
600V
550V
AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC
20 A
24 A
20 A
24 A
30 A
32 A
30 A
32 A
40 A
41 A
40 A
41 A
#2210 0.54.0 #2210
#2210 0.56.0 #2210
#3014 0.52.5 #2214
2
2
2.5 mm
4.0 mm
6.0 mm2
AWG
AWG
mm2
AWG
AWG
mm2
AWG
AWG
mm2
0.39 in. (10 mm)
0.35 in. (9 mm)
0.47 in. (12 mm)
5.05.6 lbin (0.6 Nm)
5.05.6 lbin (0.6 Nm)
5.66.8 lbin (0.7 Nm)
-40+195 F (-40+90 C)
-40+195 F (-40+90 C)
-40+195 F (-40+90 C)
Pkg
Pkg
Pkg
Cat. No.
Qty.
Cat. No.
Qty.
Cat. No.
Qty.
1492-W3
1492-W4
1492-W6
50
50
50
1492-W3-RE
1492-W4-RE
1492-W6-RE
50
50
50
1492-W3-B
1492-W4-B
1492-W6-B
50
50
50
1492-W3-BL
1492-W4-BL
1492-W6-BL
50
50
50
1492-W3-G
1492-W4-G
1492-W6-G
50
50
50
1492-W3-Y
1492-W4-Y
1492-W6-Y
50
50
50
1492-W3-OR
1492-W4-OR
1492-W6-OR
50
50
50
1492-W3-BR
1492-W4-BR
50
50
1492-W6-BR
50
1492-W3-W
1492-W4-W
1492-W6-W
50
50
50
Pkg
Pkg
Pkg
Cat. No.
Qty.
Cat. No.
Qty.
Cat. No.
Qty.
199-DR1
10
199-DR1
10
199-DR1
10
1492-DR5
1492-DR6
1492-DR7
1492-EB3
10
2
2
50
1492-DR5
1492-DR6
1492-DR7
1492-EB3
10
2
2
50
1492-DR5
1492-DR6
1492-DR7
1492-EB10
10
2
2
50
1492-ERL35
20
1492-ERL35
20
1492-ERL35
20
1492-EAJ35
1492-EAHJ35
100
50
100
50
10
1492-CJ5-50
1492-CJ5-10
1492-CJ5-5
1492-CJ5-4
1492-CJ5-3
1492-CJ5-2
1492-CJL5
1492-CJCW5
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
100
50
50
10
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
1492-EAJ35
1492-EAHJ35
1492-SJ5-10 (10-pole)
1492-EAJ35
1492-EAHJ35
1492-N42 (2-pole)
1492-SJ6-10 (10-pole)
1492-CJ6-50
1492-CJ6-10
1492-CJ6-5
1492-CJ6-4
1492-CJ6-3
1492-CJ6-2
1492-CJL6
1492-CJCW6
1492-CJ7-40
1492-CJ7-10
1492-CJ7-5
1492-CJ7-4
1492-CJ7-3
1492-CJ7-2
1492-CJL7
1492-CJCW6
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
1492-PP3
50
1492-PP3
50
1492-PP10
50
1492-SP3
1492-TA285
1492-EWP5
1492-EWP5-4
50
10
10
10
1492-SP3
1492-TP28
1492-TP6EWL
1492-TP6E
1492-TA40
1492-EWP6
1492-EWP6-4
50
10
10
10
10
10
10
1492-TP28
1492-TA40
1492-EWP7
1492-EWP7-4
10
10
10
10
1492-MS5X12 (80/card)
1492-MS6X12 (80/card)
1492-MS6X12 (80/card)
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1 May only be used as a marking surface. Cannot be installed over a center jumper.
www.ab.com/catalogs
12-11
Bulletin 1492

Specialty Feed-Through Blocks
1.56" (39.5 mm)

block.
0.24"
(6 mm)
Specifications
Certifications
Voltage Rating
Maximum Current
3
4

Wire Strip Length
Density
Short-Circuit Current Rating
Terminal Blocks
Color:
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Grey
Grey/Green/Yellow
Red
Blue
Black
Green
Yellow
Orange
Brown
White
Accessories
Mounting Rails:
End Barriers
Grey
DIN Rail Heavy Duty
Jumpers:
Side Jumper 10-pole insulated
Screw Center Jumper 50-pole
Center Jumper Cover White
Center Jumper Link
Screw Type Jumper Notching Tool
Other Accessories:
Partition Plate
End Cover
Test Plug Socket
Test Plug
Test Adapater
Electrical Warming Plate
Marking Systems:
Snap-in marker cards
2.36" (60 mm)
1.78" (45.3 mm)
Feed-through terminal block with 3

connection points, 2 on one side
CSA
IEC
600V
600V
800V
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
30 A
20 A
32 A
#1810
#2212
0.54 mm2
AWG
AWG
0.35 in. (9 mm)
5.05.6 lbin (0.6 Nm)
-40+195 F (-40+90 C)
Cat. No.
1492-W4TW
1492-W4TW-RE
1492-W4TW-B
1492-W4TW-BL
1492-W4TW-G
1492-W4TW-Y
1492-W4TW-OR
1492-W4TW-BR
1492-W4TW-W
Pkg Qty.
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Single-circuit terminal block with

terminals on common side.
CSA
IEC
500V
300V AC/DC
AC/DC
15 A
15 A
0.52.5
#2214 AWG
mm2
0.39 in. (10 mm)
5.05.6 lbin (0.6 Nm)
-40+195 F (-40+90 C)
See page 12-42
Cat. No.
1492-WR3
Pkg Qty.
50
Motor connection terminal block

cluster with 3 feeds and ground
Certifications on
individual blocks
(1492-J4, JG4)
#2210 AWG
4 mm2
0.39 in. (10 mm)
9.0 lbin (1.0 Nm)
-58+248 F (-50+120 C)
Cat. No.
1492-J4M
Pkg Qty.
20
Cat. No.
Pkg Qty.
Cat. No.
Pkg Qty.
Cat. No.
Pkg Qty.
199-DR1
10
199-DR1
10
199-DR1
10
1492-DR5
1492-DR6
1492-DR7
1492-EB3TW
10
2
2
50
1492-DR5
1492-DR6
1492-DR7
1492-EBR3
10
2
2
50
1492-DR5
1492-DR6
1492-DR7
Not Required
10
2
2
1492-ERL35
20
1492-ERL35
20
1492-ERL35
20
1492-EAJ35
1492-EAHJ35
100
50
1492-EAJ35
1492-EAHJ35
100
50
1492-EAJ35
1492-EAHJ35
100
50
1492-SJ6-101
10
1492-SJ5-10
10
1492-CJ6-50
1492-CJ6-10
1492-CJ6-5
1492-CJ6-4
1492-CJ6-3
1492-CJ6-2
1492-CJCW6
1492-CJL6
5
10
10
10
10
10
20
10
1492-CJD5-50
1492-CJD5-10
1492-CJD5-5
1492-CJD5-4
1492-CJD5-3
1492-CJD5-2
1492-CJCW5
1492-CJL5
5
10
10
10
10
10
20
10
1492-CJJ6-10
1492-CJJ6-4
1492-CJJ6-3
1492-CJJ6-2
1492-T1
20
50
50
50
1492-PP10
50
1492-EBR3
50
1492-EBJ16
20
1492-EC3TW
1492-TP28
1492-TA40
10
10
10
1492-TA285
10
50
20
25
50
1492-MS6X9 (80/card)
1492-MS5X9 (80/card)
1492-TPS23L
1492-TP23
1492-TPJ6
1492-EWPJ5
1492-M6X12
(120/card)
1 Use side jumpers on the single conductor side only.

Provides IP2X Finger Safety when a W4 is mounted on open side of Cat. No. 1492-W4TW.
May only be used as a marking surface. Cannot be installed over a center jumper.
13
www.ab.com/catalogs
12-16
0.965"
(24.5 mm)
0.20"
(5 mm)
2.05" (52.1 mm)
1492-J4M
1.99" (50.5 mm)
1492-WR3
1.64" (41.6 mm)
1492-W4TW
Terminal Blocks With High Short-Circuit Current Ratings

NDN111-WH-UL
Agency/Standards
UL 1059 Recognized, Guide XCFR2, File E62622
General Industry Class per UL 1059, usage category C
Electrical
600Vac or dc
Short-Circuit Current Rating up to 100kA, See table page 16
90A ampacity
Wire range 2 to 18 AWG CU
Mechanical
Panel mount
35mm DIN rail and C-rail mount
.635 (16.13mm) pole to pole spacing
3 pole configuration
Marking tape MT12-12
Flammability, UL94 V2
Mtg. holes
.18 (4.57) dia.
.28 (7.11) c'bores
1.46
(37.13)
1.71
(43.48)
Dovetail
Option
.62
(15.75)
1.87
(47.50)
1.44
(36.57)
07-05-07
BU-SB07255
Form No. PDB

Page 18 of 23
Data Sheet #1049
2F
Condulet Stainless Steel Conduit

Device Boxes, Covers and Gaskets
2F
Eaton's Crouse-Hinds Condulet Stainless Steel Device Boxes

deliver power where you need it, saving you time and money
throughout the life of your facility.
Superior resistance to corrosion and heat, combined with unmatched
strength, make stainless steel Condulet bodies and boxes a longterm solution for even the most extreme environments.
Applications:
Cast device boxes are installed in conduit systems to:
Accommodate wiring devices
Act as pull boxes for conductors in a conduit system
Provide openings to make splices and taps in conductors
Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future
system changes
Connect conduit systems
Features:
Self-healing properties of stainless steel fittings help reduce the
penetration of rust/corrosion and eliminate damage to the fitting
Stainless steel fittings retain their strength in extreme heat and
extreme cold conditions
Fitting surface is easy to maintain and keep clean
Easy cleaning capabilities make these fittings perfect for food
processing and other hygienic areas where wash downs are
common
Superior strength and durability greatly reduce replacement of
fittings - this will lower your total cost of ownership and increase
your return on investment
Stainless steel fittings do not require harsh environment-damaging
cleaners to keep them looking like new
Internal green grounding screw - standard
Tapered threads for protection of wire insulation
Wide selection of covers available
Single or double conduit entry
Ample wiring room provided for easy installations
Dimension
A
B
C
D
E
F
Length of box
Overall length (including hubs)
Width of box
Overall width (including hubs)
Height of box
Overall height (including hubs)
Certifications and Compliances:

UL Standard 514A
CSA Standard C22.2 No. 18.1-04
Raintight - when installed with cover and gasket
Standard Materials:
Bodies - 316 stainless steel

Covers - 316 stainless steel
Cover Screws - 316 stainless steel
Gasket - neoprene
www.crouse-hinds.com
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Copyright 2013 Eatons Crouse-Hinds Business
35
2F
Condulet Stainless Steel Conduit Device Boxes,

Covers and Gaskets
2F
The Ultimate in Corrosion Resistance and Durability

Ordering Information
FD Device Body
Catalog Number
Trade Size
FD2SS
/ 4"
4.63
5.41
2.94
2.94
3.03
3.03
Catalog Number
Trade Size
FDC2SS
/ 4"
4.63
6.19
2.94
2.94
3.03
3.03
FDC Device Body
FDS Device Body

Catalog Number
Trade Size
FDS2SS
/ 4"
4.63
5.41
2.94
2.94
3.03
3.03
Catalog Number
Trade Size
FDA2SS
/ 4"
4.63
4.63
2.94
2.94
3.03
3.80
FDA Device Body
FDX Device Body
Catalog Number
Trade Size
FDX2SS
/ 4"
4.63
6.19
2.94
4.50
3.03
3.03
Ordering Information - Device Box Cover and Gasket

Blank Cover
Blank Formed Cover

Catalog Number
Catalog Number
DS7000BC
DS7000BF
Receptacle Formed Cover
Switch Formed Cover
36
www.crouse-hinds.com
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
DS7000SF
DS7000RF
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Copyright 2013 Eatons Crouse-Hinds Business
Device Boxes, Covers & Accessories

T&B Catalog Number:
IH3-1
04226939210
UPC Number:
Active
Status:
Description:
1-gang silver universal weatherproof box with 3 -1/2 in. holes, 17.3 cu.in.
Features
Alloy A380 aluminum, certified zinc alloy and stainless steel springs provide increased corrosion resistance
Die Cast construction and industrial design combine to produce a rugged protective enclosure for
devices.
Clean cover edges provide good gasket sealing.
Precision cast and machined surfaces permit safer
wire pulling.
Clear UL and cubic content markings speed approval by inspectors
Convenient mounting lugs for a variety of mounting
methods
Securely fastened mounting plates reduce costly
call backs
Application
Dry-tite boxes and covers protect wiring devices,
switches, electronic components and terminal
blocks in dry, damp and wet locations
Accessible wiring chamber provides a convenient
location to maintain or change a system, pull conductors and make splices
Junction box for branch conduits
General
Material
Die Cast Aluminum
Finish
Powder-coated
Color
Silver
Volume (cu.in.)
17
Number of Gangs
One
Dimension Information
Hub Size (inches)
1/2
A (inches)
4 9/16
B (inches)
2 13/16
C (inches)
D (inches)
5/8
G (inches)
3 1/4
H (inches)
1 7/8
J (inches)
1 1/2
Packaging
T&B Inner Pack
Package in Units
50
T&B Sold in UOM
Each
T&B Weight Per UOM
0.53 lbs. Each
Application Support
D-Pak Merchandising System
Available on Website
Industry Cross Reference
Available on Website
Notes
Rain tight when used with appropriate Red Dot covers.
Certifications
RoHS Compliance
Yes
Certifications
File Nbr:
E 28688
For further technical assistance, please contact us...

Thomas & Betts - USA
8155 T&B Blvd.
Memphis, TN 38125
www.tnb.com
T&B Technical Support

MS 3B-50
8155 T&B Blvd.
Memphis, TN 38125
Hours: 7AM - 6PM CDT

Monday-Friday
Phone: (888) 862-3289
Fax: (901) 252-1321
Email:techsupport@tnb.com
[RTD] TEMPERATURE
2 WIRE TRANSMITTER
MODEL SM812EC
* LOW COST
* THERMO-HEAD
INSTALLATION
* 0.1% ACCURACY
*
LOW 8.5 VDC DROP
DESCRIPTION
Conversion of RTD, (Resistance Temperature Detector)
signals is accomplished using the DEVAR Model
SM812EC signal transmitter. Surface mount technology
provides a slim profile allowing the SM812EC to mount
directly within miniature thermal connection heads. The
SM812EC accommodates Pt 100 RTDs and provides
a 4 to 20 mA output current proportional to the detected
temperature.
The SM812EC is available in a varety of precalibrated
temperature ranges. The span and zero potentiometers
provide span and zero adjustments of + 25% of the
normal range. Standard ranges, model numbers and
RTD resistance values at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100% are
listed in table 1.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy:
+ 0.1% span, includes effects of linearity,
hysterisis, and repeatability referred to
temperature input.
Nonlinearity:
0.1% relative to a 100 Pt RTD,
= 0.00385 standard curve for nominal range.
4:1 minimum improvement on nonlinearity
otherwise.
Thermal Effect:
1) Zero Shift of + 0.02% / Span / F
2) Span Shift of + 0.02% / Span / F
Circuitry:
Epoxy Encapsulated
Analog Circuitry w/ sealed potentiometers.
Power Supply:
1) Working voltage of 8.5 to 35 VDC
2) Supply Voltage Effect < + 0.001% / Span / Volt
Loop Considerations:
1) Loop Resistance Load Effect < + 0.002% Span /
300 Ohms
2) Maximum Loop resistance (V supply -8.5V) /
20mA
RFI immunity:
Rated class 3-C: 0.25% of span per SAMA PMC
33.1 -1987-2abc
Frequency Response:
Output -3dB @ 3Hz Input
Temperature range:
1) Ambient: -13 to 185F
2) Storage: -85 to 257F
Humidity:
0 to 95% noncondensing
Input:
100 Pt RTD, = 0.00385
Output:
1) Signal range: 4 to 20 mADC
2) Absolute Limit: 2 to 29 mA
3) Open RTD Indication: Output > 22mA
Calibration Range Adjustabilty:
1) Zero 25% of normal span
2) Span 25% of normal span
Table 1: Input Ranges

Model
-0011
-0012
-0013
-0014
-0015
-0016
-0017
-0018
-0019
-0021
-0022
-0023
-0024
-0025
-0026
-0027
-0028
-0029
-0030
-0031
-0032
-0033
-0034
-0035
-0036
-0037
-0038
-0039
-0040
-0041
-0042
Range F
-40/120
0/200
0/300
0/500
0/750
0/1000
-30/130
40/140
50/85
0/150C
0/100
20/120
0/150
0/200C
30/100
35/85
0/250
-40/25C
0/50C
32/122
-200/0
0/100C
30/110
-100/0C
-50/50C
0/320C
30/130
-30/20
-40/25
30/65
50/100
0%
84.27
93.03
93.03
93.03
93.03
93.03
86.47
101.74
103.90
100.00
93.03
97.39
93.03
100.00
99.57
100.65
93.03
84.27
100.00
100.00
48.46
100.00
99.57
60.25
80.31
100.00
99.57
86.47
84.27
99.57
103.90
25%
93.03
103.90
109.30
120.04
133.33
146.48
95.21
107.15
105.80
114.57
98.48
102.82
101.19
119.40
103.36
103.36
106.61
90.69
104.88
104.88
59.80
109.73
103.90
70.33
90.19
130.90
104.98
89.21
87.84
101.46
106.61
50%
101.74
114.68
125.37
146.48
172.36
197.69
103.90
112.53
107.69
128.98
103.90
108.22
109.30
138.50
107.15
106.07
120.04
97.07
109.73
109.73
71.00
119.40
108.22
80.31
100.00
161.04
110.38
91.94
91.40
103.36
109.30
75%
110.38
125.37
141.24
172.36
210.14
246.65
112.53
117.90
109.57
143.23
109.30
113.61
117.36
157.31
110.92
108.76
133.33
103.42
114.57
114.57
82.07
128.98
112.53
90.19
109.73
190.45
115.75
94.67
94.94
105.25
111.99
100%
118.97
135.97
156.90
197.69
246.65
293.38
121.11
123.24
111.46
157.31
114.68
118.97
125.37
175.84
114.68
111.46
146.48
109.73
119.40
119.40
93.03
138.50
116.83
100.00
119.40
219.12
121.11
97.39
98.48
107.15
114.68
( = 0.00385 100 Pt RTD Values at % of input Span)

0.750"
LOAD
3-WIRE
RTD
+
POWER
SUPPLY
LOAD
0.375"
0.269" DIA
1 3/4"
ZERO
SPAN
0.191" DIA
THRU (2) PLACES
1 9/32"
BULLETIN SM812EC 4/02
706 Bostwick Ave, Bridgeport, CT 06605-2396

TEL: 203-368-6751, TOLL FREE 1-800-566-6822
FAX: 203-368-3747
http://www.devarinc.com e-mail: info@devarinc.com
PUMP CONTROLLER
MODEL 3020
* UP TO 4 PUMP CONTROLS
WITH OR WITHOUT
ALTERNATION
* 14 SEGMENT L.E.D. DISPLAY
FOR TRUE ALPHANUMERICS
* 7.5 AMP S.P.D.T. CONTROL
CONTACTS
* 4 TO 20mA, ANALOG
RETRANSMISSION
AVAILABLE
* 17 POINT STRAPPING TABLE

* LATCHING OR NON-LATCHING RELAYS
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Imagine with a simple touch of a button
youll have this controller doing what you
want it to do. Turn a pump on! Turn a
pump off! Sound an alarm! All easily
done by following the plain English
prompts.
The stand alone Model 3020 Pump
Controller accepts all continuous analog
level inputs. To control level, simply enter
the
input
range,
the
units
of
measurement and the pump control
points. If the well or tank is odd shaped,
the response of the transducer can be
corrected to fit the shape, using the 17
point linearization feature.
An isolated 24VDC power output is
provided to power the external level
trans-mitter.
Other selectable features include:

* Up to 4 sets of on/off control points
* The ability to designate each control
point as a pump or an alarm
* Alternation of pumps (lead/lag)
* Flashing of display or sounding of horn
during pumping or alarm
* Security code lockout -* Sensor failure detection
* 0/240 Second trip & reset delay
The 3020 is housed in an 1/8 DIN
aluminum housing with a splash proof
front panel. The six digit 0.54 inch high
LED display provides easy viewing under
all ambient light conditions and its 14
segment alphanumeric display provides
plain English prompting during configuration. Four active characters display
process values between +9999 and
-1999. The fourth and fifth characters
display engineering units (e.g. FT., IN.).
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL 3020
INPUT
0/20mA, 4/20mA, 0/5V, 1/5V, 0/10V, or -10/10V
selected from keypad
ENCLOSURE
1/8 DIN, polycarbonate bezel, aluminum body
splash proof front panel
Open Input Indication:

Indication goes to zero input (Note: for 4/20 mA, zero
input will display -25% of span)
ALARMS
Status Indication: Front panel LEDs, flashing display, horn;
flashing display and horn active or inactive, menu selectable
Impedance:
Voltage input: > 1 Megohms
Current input: 10 Ohms
Points: 4 independently set, trip and reset points (100%

hysteresis); Alarm action high or low determined by
respective value of trip and reset points
PERFORMANCE
Accuracy: 0.01%of input range
Latching: All alarms can be latching or non latching, menu

selectable, reset from keypad
A/D Resolution: 20 bits
Audible Alarm: An audible alarm can be enabled or

disabled for each channel during configuration; Options
include: 1. Always sound while in alarm, 2. Sounds while in
alarm but can be reset from keypad, 3. Sounds during and
continues after an alarm condition, must be reset from
keypad, 4. Sounds going into or coming out of alarm,
continues sounding until acknowledged
Display Resolution: +9999 to -1999 in one count steps

Common Mode Rejection: Greater than 120 dB at 50/60 Hz
Normal Mode Rejection: Greater than 64 dB at 50/60 Hz
Operating Temperature: 0 to 70C
Temperature Effect Zero: 0.01% of reading per C
Contacts:
SPDT (form C) relays; 1 phase; 7.5 amps at 240 VAC / 24
VDC; 1/3HP at 120VAC 7.2FLA; 1/2HP at 240 VAC, 4.9FLA
Temperature Effect Span: 0.01% of reading per C
POWER / VOLTAGE
Connections: 15 position, plug-in terminal block for power
and relay contacts; 9 position, plug-in terminal block for input,
output and excitation voltage; 24 to 14 AWG
DISPLAY
Six bright red LED, 0.54 inch high, 14 segment alphanumeric
characters. Four characters are used for process indication,
and two characters for dummy zeros or process descriptors.
Display range is +9999 to -1999 counts. Display provides
plain English prompts during configuration.
Excitation Voltage: Isolated 24 VDC at 100mA (factory set);

Current limit 150mA; isolation strength: 150 VAC
OPTIONS
-420
-020
-D232
-D485
-005
-010
-105
4 to 20mA Analog Retransmission

0 to 20mA Analog Retransmission
RS-232 Retransmission
RS-485 Retransmission
0 to 5 VDC Retransmission
-NE4C
-NE4S
-NE4D
-NE7
-M36G
NEMA 4 Cover
NEMA 4X Enclosure (1 Unit)
NEMA 4X Enclosure (2 Units)
Explosion Proof Housing
2 Pipe Mount Kit (NE4S,NE4D,NE7)
Power Requirement: 90 to 140 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 10VA

SECURITY PASSWORD
6 digit security password to enter configuration menu, user
selectable, enabled or disabled by internal switch setting
WARRANTY:
2 YEARS
Made in USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.
3020-4
indicator / controller with 4 alarms
-XXX
select desired options
3020-4-420
Note: Analog retransmission ranges can be recalibrated in

the field.
BULLETIN 990027-0004 4/02

Filename d:\data\bulletins\3020.ppt
706 Bostwick Ave, Bridgeport, CT 06605-2396

TEL: 203-368-6751, TOLL FREE 1-800-566-6822
FAX: 203-368-3747
http://www.devarinc.com - e-mail (info@devarinc.com)
Series
PBLT2
&
PBLTX
Submersible Level Transmitters

Perfect for Sludge and Slurries, Lightning Protected
8-3/32
[205.58]
1/2 NPT
1 [25.40]
SUBMERSIBLE
CABLE
PBLTX
3-7/16
[87.31]
1/4 [6.35] x THRU

ON A 1-39/64 [40.88] B.C.
2-3/16
[55.56]
BREATHER TUBE
1/4 x THRU
[6.35 x THRU]
7-63/64
[202.80]
1-1/2 1/2 NPT
[38.10]
60
TYP
SUBMERSIBLE
CABLE
PBLT2
2-3/16
[55.56]
Scan here
to watch
product video
BREATHER TUBE
PBLT2 and PBLTX Submersible Level Transmitters are manufactured for years of
trouble free service in the harshest applications. Both measure the height of liquid above
the position in the tank referenced to atmospheric pressure. The transmitters consist of a
piezoresistive sensing element, encased in a 316 SS housing. Perfect for wastewater and
slurry applications with features to protect the unit from these demanding applications.
Large diameter 316 SS diaphragm seal is non-clogging and damage resistant to floating
solids.
The PBLT2 incorporates lightning and surge protection utilizing dual arrestor technology,
grounded to case, eliminating both power supply surges and lightning ground strike
transients (surge protection is not guaranteed and is not covered by warranty). The PBLTX
is UL approved intrinsically safe for use in hazardous locations when used with proper
barrier.
Units come equipped with a 270-pound tensile strength shielded and vented cable.
Ventilation tube in the cable automatically compensates for changes in atmospheric
pressure above the tank. The vent is protected with a maintenance free filter eliminating
particulate or water droplets from entering the transducers.
Level Transmitters,
Submersible
LEVEL
FEATURES
Excellent chemical compatibility with 316 construction and ETFE cable
Lightning and surge protection on PBLT2 models
Maintenance free vent filter
UL approved intrinsically safe on PBLTX models
Large diameter, non-clogging, damage resistant, 316 SS diaphragm seal
APPLICATIONS
Wastewater: Sludge pits, clarifiers, digesters; Alum tanks; Chemical storage tanks;
Oil tanks; Lime slurry; Sumps; Reservoirs.
Model
PBLT2-5-40
PBLT2-10-40
PBLT2-15-60
PBLT2-20-60
PBLT2-5-40-PU
PBLT2-10-40-PU
PBLT2-15-60-PU
PBLT2-20-60-PU
PBLT2-3.5M-5M-PU
PBLT2-5M-10M-PU
PBLT2-10M-18M-PU
320
Range psi
(ft w.c.) [m w.c.]
5 (11.54) [3.52]
10 (23.09) [7.04]
15 (34.63) [10.56]
20 (46.18) [14.08]
5 (11.54) [3.52]
10 (23.09) [7.04]
15 ( 34.63) [10.56]
20 (46.18) [14.08]
4.97 (11.48) [3.5]
14.21 (32.81) [10]
25.58 (59.06) [18]
Cable Length
ft (m)
40 (12.2)
40 (12.2)
60 (18.3)
60 (18.3)
40 (12.2)
40 (12.2)
60 (18.3)
60 (18.3)
16.40 (5)
32.81 (10)
59.06 (18)
Cable Type
ETFE
ETFE
ETFE
ETFE
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC. | www.dwyer-inst.com
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS, 316L SS,
epoxy, cable: ETFE or polyurethane.
Accuracy: 0.25% full-scale (includes
linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability).
Temperature Limit: PBLT2: 0 to 200F
(-18 to 93C); PBLTX: 0 to 176F (-18
to 80C).
Compensated Temperature Range:
PBLT2: 0 to 180F (-18 to 82C);
PBLTX: 0 to 176F (-18 to 80C).
Thermal Effect: 0.02% FS/F.
Pressure Limit: 2X full-scale.
Power Requirement: PBLT2: 13 to 30
VDC, PBLTX: 10 to 28 VDC.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC, two

wire.
Response Time: 50 ms.
Loop Resistance: 900 .
Electrical Connection: Wire pigtail.
Mounting Orientation: Suspended in
tank below level being measured.
Weight: 4.3 lb (2.0 kg).
Electrical Protection: PBLT2:
Lightning and surge protection, PBLTX:
none.
Agency Approvals: PBLT2: None,
PBLTX: CE,cULus intrinsically safe for
Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D;
Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class
III,Div. 1. (According to control drawing
01-700797-00).
OPTIONS
Intrinsically Safe Approval - Change model number from PBLT2 to PBLTX
Custom ranges or Cable Lengths - Contact the factory
ACCESSORIES
MTL5041, intrinsically safe galvanic isolator
MTL7706, intrinsically safe zener barrier
A-297, Dessicant Filter for vent tube. Removes humidity for

protection of the sensor. Changes color to show saturation
A-625, 316 SS Cable Hanger use with NPT option for attaching
chain for easy pulling out of application
ES SERIES DOOR LOCKS AND HANDLES

Industrial door locks - 880 SCQ4 series
Th 880 SCQ4 series door
accessories were designed to fit
Eurobex 'ES' style industrial
enclosures. A full range of accessories are available to a.ccomodate a variety of applications.
These accessories include :

- 14 types of lock inserts (p.343)
- Key lock, padlock and combina-
11on lock provisions (p.344)
Locking mechanisms can be

ordered as complete units or in
parts. Parts include individual
Inserts, cams and housings.
- Operating handles (p.344)

- ~turn lock dust cap (p.345) ...
1.751
11:1.881
t
1.142
.791
Available accessories, amongst others :
locu
Lockln.erta
Key locks
p.843
p.344
p.344
p.344
'T' handl. .
Wing handlu
Wing padlock
p.344
p.344
p.344
lntertor handle
p.344
Combination
Padlocks
'L' handlu
p.344
Duet cap
p.346
The 880 SCQ4 acceaorlea are to be uaed with theee encloure .ertea, amongst othera :
5100 ES
6412 ES
5412 DDS
8412
5412 ESA
ES SERIES DOOR LOCKS AND HANDLES

'ES' style key locks, pad locks and combination locks
Key lock
Combination lock
llO~K
CATALOG # :
KEY NUMBER :
K-1.1
K8y Included? :
M...rtal:
ForuHwllh :
p1a11111.-1
ESri-.1412
EBA, 6412 ESDD..
CATALDG#:
KEY NUMBER:
K8y Included? :
.......
Foruwlth:
llOSCQ4-NL
Non
No
Plllbld ....I
ES Hrln, 1412
E8A, 6412 ESDD. ..
Padlock provisions
Weatherproof padlock 3/8"
CATALOG # :
KEY NUMBER:
CATALOG# :
880 PDLK375
KEY NUMBER: K-1.1
K8y Included? : YH
Matertal :
BteelJPIMllc
For u wllh :
880 PLESQ31
General purpo
880 PLES0375
P9cllock
K8y Included? : No
Material :
For UH wllh :
Stalnleu ateel
ES Mrt... 8412
ESA, 6412 ESDD.
General purpose padlock
Stainless steel padlock
CATAlDG # :
KEY NUMBER :
K8y Included? :
Mmertal :
For UM with :
CATALOG# :
KEY NUMBER :
880 PL
UH padlock
No
Plated steel
ES ri-, 8412
ESA, 5412 ESDD...
B80 Pl.SS
U.. padlock
K8y Included?: No
M...rial:
For UH wfth :
Stlllnl... lll:MI
ES urlea, 8412
ESA, 5412 ESDD.
Industrial door handles

Key lock 'L' handle
Key lock 'r handle
1 point lock :
880 ~L
a point lock :
1e& ESL2A
KEY NUMBER: K-1.1
IC8y Included? : V..
Material :
Zinc CUI
For uH wllh :
ES rt-. 1412
CATALDG # :
KEY NUMBER:
K.-v Included? :
11.mrtal :
For u with :
Key lock wing handle

CATALOG # :
880 SCQ4.WN
KEY NUMBER: KrWN
IC8y Included? : V..
Material:
Polyamlda GF/Zlnc
For uH wllh :
ES rt-. 1412
ESA, 6412 ESDD...
Wing knob
CATALOG ti:
KEY NUMBER :
IC8y Included? :
Material:
Foruwllh :
~-
180 SCQ4.T
"-T
~
Palyamlde GFJ21nc
ES Hrlea, 1412
E8A, 6412 ESDD...
Key lock straight handle

CATALOG II :
KEY NUMBER :
Kay lncludad? :
11.mrtal :
For UH with :
880 SCQ4.8H
K.SH
V..
Polyamlde GiF/Zlnc
ES HrtH, 1412
ESA. &412 ESDD...
Star handle
l80 &CQt.WNH
None
NCI
Polyamld GF/Zlnc
ESrl-,1412
EBA, M12 ESDD.
CATALOG#:
KEY NUMBER:
Key Included? :
M...rial:
For UH with :
llO SCQ4.STH
Nona
No
Polyamlde GF/Zlnc
ES ...lea, 8412
ESA, 15412 ESDD.-
Interior handle
Padlockable wing handle
CATALOG ti :
880 SCQ4.DIH
KEY NUMBER : Nona
* C.nnm be uaed with by lock.
Mnlrial :
Red polyamld
For u with :
ES rt-. 9412
E&A, M12 ESDD...
CATALOG# :
KEY NUMBER :
IC8y Included? :
M"'9rtal:
Foruwllh:
l80 8CQ4.WNP
Padlock
Na
Polyamlde OF/Zinc
ESri-.1412
ESA, IS412 ESDD..,
ELECTRONIC/GLASS FUSES
GGC / GGC-V
GGM / GGM-V
Glass Body
Fast Acting
1/4 x 1-1/4
1-1/2 Axial Leads Optional
Glass Body
Fast Acting
5mm x 20mm
1-1/2 Axial Leads Optional
1/100A through 10A, 250VAC, ULListed and CSA Certified

12A and 15A, 125VAC, ULListed and CSA Certified
20A through 30A, 32VAC
1/16A through 3A, 250VAC, ULListed and CSA Certified

4A through 8A, 125VAC, ULListed and CSA Certified
10A and 15A, 250VAC, ULRecognized
Standard
Fuse Ampere Ratings
Standard
Fuse Ampere Ratings
CATALOG
NUMBER
GGC1/100
GGC1/32
GGC1/16
GGC1/10
GGC1/8
GGC15/100
GGC175/1000
GGC3/16
GGC2/10
GGC1/4
GGC3/10
GGC3/8
GGC4/10
GGC1/2
GGC6/10
GGC3/4
GGC8/10
GGC1
GGC1-1/4
GGC1-1/2
GGC1-3/4
GGC1-6/10
GGC2
GGC2-1/4
GGC2-1/2
GGC3
GGC3-2/10
GGC4
GGC5
GGC6
GGC6-3/10
GGC7
GGC7-1/2
GGC8
GGC10
GGC12
GGC15
GGC20
GGC25
GGC30
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
AXIAL LEAD
CAT. NO
AMPERE
RATING
VOLTS
GGC-V1/100
GGC-V1/32
GGC-V1/16
GGC-V1/10
GGC-V1/8
GGC-V15/100
GGC-V175/1000
GGC-V3/16
GGC-V2/10
GGC-V1/4
GGC-V3/10
GGC-V3/8
GGC-V4/10
GGC-V1/2
GGC-V6/10
GGC-V3/4
GGC-V8/10
GGC-V1
GGC-V1-1/4
GGC-V1-1/2
GGC-V1-3/4
GGC-V1-6/10
GGC-V2
GGC-V2-1/4
GGC-V2-1/2
GGC-V3
GGC-V3-2/10
GGC-V4
GGC-V5
GGC-V6
GGC-V6-3/10
GGC-V7
N/A
GGC-V8
GGC-V10
GGC-V12
GGC-V15
GGC-V20
GGC-V25
GGC-V30
1/100A
1/32A
1/16A
1/10A
1/8A
15/100A
175/1000A
3/16A
2/10A
1/4A
3/10A
3/8A
4/10A
1/2A
6/10A
3/4A
8/10A
1A
1-1/4A
1-1/2A
1-3/4A
1-6/10A
2A
2-1/4A
2-1/2A
3A
3-2/10A
4A
5A
6A
6-3/10A
7A
7-1/2A
8A
10A
12A
15A
20A
25A
30A
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
125V
125V
32V
32V
32V
250VAC @ 35A I.R./125VAC @ 10kA I.R.

250VAC @ 200A I.R./125VAC @ 10kA I.R.
250VAC @ 10kA I.R.
125VAC @ 10kA I.R.
32VAC @ 1000A I.R.
I.R.
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
5
5
5
CATALOG
NUMBER
AXIAL LEAD
CAT. NO
AMPERE
RATING
VOLTS
I.R.
GGM1/16
GGM1/10
GGM1/8
GGM2/10
GGM1/4
GGM3/10
GGM4/10
GGM1/2
GGM6/10
GGM7/10
GGM3/4
GGM8/10
GGM1
GGM1-2/10
GGM1-1/4
GGM1-1/2
GGM1-6/10
GGM2
GGM2-1/2
GGM3
GGM4
GGM5
GGM6
GGM7
GGM8
GGM10
GGM15
GGM-V1/16
GGM-V1/10
GGM-V1/8
GGM-V2/10
GGM-V1/4
GGM-V3/10
GGM-V4/10
GGM-V1/2
GGM-V6/10
GGM-V7/10
GGM-V3/4
GGM-V8/10
GGM-V1
N/A
GGM-V1-1/4
GGM-V1-1/2
GGM-V1-6/10
GGM-V2
GGM-V2-1/2
GGM-V3
GGM-V4
GGM-V5
GGM-V6
GGM-V7
GGM-V8
GGM-V10
GGM-V15
1/16A
1/10A
1/8A
2/10A
1/4A
3/10A
4/10A
1/2A
6/10A
7/10A
3/4A
8/10A
1A
1-2/10A
1-1/4A
1-1/2A
1-6/10A
2A
2-1/2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
7A
8A
10A
15A
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
125V
125V
125V
125V
125V
250V
250V
2
3
3
3
3
3
1
3
1
3
3
1
3
2
3
3
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
250VAC @ 35A I.R./125VAC @ 10kA I.R.

250VAC @ 100A I.R./125VAC @ 10kA I.R.
250VAC @ 200A I.R./125VAC @ 10kA I.R.
125VAC @ 10kA I.R.
250VAC @ 100A I.R.
C 14
Gross Automation (877) 268-3700 www.ferrazshawmutsales.com sales@grossautomation.com
Primary Voltage:
Secondary Voltage:
240 x 480
120 x 240
230 x 460
115 x 230
220 x 440
110 x 220
Overall
Dimensions
50/60 Hertz
Mounting
Centers
Mounting
Slot
Height
with
Fuse
Block
Adapter
Approx.
Ship
Weight
Lbs.
1.7
GXH
Height
with
Finger
Guard
0.42/0.21
2.60
3.35
2.60
2.13
2.17
0.22 x 0.44
2.98
2.79
0.83/0.42
2.99
3.74
2.85
2.52
2.60
0.22 x 0.44
3.23
3.04
1.25/0.63
2.99
4.29
2.85
2.52
3.15
0.22 x 0.44
3.23
3.04
4.3
SP250MQMJ
2.08/1.04
3.78
4.09
3.40
3.31
2.99
0.22 x 0.44
3.78
3.59
6.5
SP350MQMJ
2.92/1.46
3.78
4.69
3.40
3.31
3.58
0.22 x 0.44
3.78
3.59
8.2
300
SP500MQMJ
4.17/2.08
4.49
4.69
3.78
3.78
3.66
0.31 x 0.81
4.16
3.97
11
500
SP750MQMJ
6.25/3.13
5.25
4.691
4.37
4.50
3.66
0.31 x 0.81
4.75
4.56
16
1000
650
SP1000MQMJ
8.33/4.17
5.25
5.471
4.37
4.50
4.45
0.31 x 0.81
4.75
4.56
21
1500
1000
SP1500MQMJ
12.5/6.25
5.25
6.851
4.37
4.50
5.83
0.31 x 0.81
4.75
4.56
28
2000
1300
SP2000MQMJ
16.7/8.33
3000
2000
SP3000MQMJ
25.0/12.5
5000
3000
SP5000MQMJ
41.7/20.8
VA
Rating
CE VA
Rating
Catalog
Number
Mtg.
Fig.
Output
Amps
50
50
SP50MQMJ
100
100
SP100MQMJ
150
150
SP150MQMJ
250
160
350
250
500
750
6.38
5.87
5.31
5.75
4.84
0.31 x 0.81
5.50
5.31
35
7.50
7.50
6.50
6.30
7.28
0.44 x 1.00
6.50
6.50
64
8.98
9.88
7.76
7.40
7.28
0.44 x 1.00
N/A
N/A
97
Primary and Secondary voltage links/jumpers supplied standard with all transformers.
Special voltages and VA sizes available upon request.
1
Note For 750 through 2000 VA units actual overall depth is 0.24 plus the value in column B.
* See page 10 for dimensional drawings.
Primary Voltage:
Secondary Voltage:
VA
Rating
CE VA
Rating
Catalog
Number
240 x 480
12 x 24
Mtg.
Fig.
Output
Amps
All dimensions in inches
230 x 460
11.5 x 23
220 x 440
11 x 22
Overall
Dimensions
A
Mounting
Centers
C
50/60 Hertz
Mounting
Slot
GXH
Height
with
Finger
Guard
Height
with
Fuse
Block
Adapter
Approx.
Ship
Weight
Lbs.
50
50
SP50QR
4.17/2.08
2.60
3.35
2.60
2.13
2.17
0.22 x 0.44
2.98
2.79
1.7
100
100
SP100QR
8.33/4.17
2.99
3.54
2.85
2.52
2.40
0.22 x 0.44
3.23
3.04
150
150
SP150QR
12.5/6.25
2.99
4.29
2.85
2.52
3.15
0.22 x 0.44
3.23
3.04
4.3
250
160
SP250QR
20.8/10.4
3.78
4.09
3.40
3.31
2.99
0.22 x 0.44
3.78
3.59
6.5
350
250
SP350QR
29.2/14.6
3.78
4.69
3.40
3.31
3.58
0.22 x 0.44
3.78
3.59
8.3
500
300
SP500QR
41.7/20.8
4.49
5.47
3.78
3.78
3.66
0.31 x 0.81
4.16
3.97
11
Primary and Secondary voltage links/jumpers supplied standard with all transformers.
Special voltages and VA sizes available upon request.
* See page 10 for dimensional drawings.
All dimensions in inches
Page 5
Dimensional Drawings
Some actual transformer units may differ from dimensional drawings shown below.
C
GxH
GxH
FIGURE B
FIGURE A
GxH
FIGURE C
Page 10
Visit our website: www.hammondpowersolutions.com
Floor-Mount Enclosures Type 12 Floor-Mount Enclosures

MILD STEEL
FLOOR-MOUNT ENCLOSURES
TYPE 12 FLOOR-MOUNT ENCLOSURES
SPEC-00295
K63.422.2211
7
763.422.2600
TWO-DOOR WITH FLOOR STANDS, TYPE 12

SPECIFICATIONS

eams continuously welded and ground smooth; no holes or

S
knockouts
Gasketed overlapping doors with no centerpost
3-point latch mechanism operated by oil-tight key-lock handle
Concealed, easy-to-remove hinges
Data pocket is high-impact thermoplastic
12-in. floor stands welded to enclosure
Heavy-duty lifting eyes
P anel supports
Oil-resistant gasket
Collar studs for mounting optional panel
Bonding provision on door
Provision for mounting fluorescent light
FINISH
Two finishes available: ANSI 61 gray, polyester powder paint outside

and inside; or ANSI 61 gray outside and white, polyester powder
paint inside. Optional panels available with a white or conductive
finish.
ACCESSORIES
Blower Fan Package

Drip Shield Kit for Type 12 Enclosures
INTERSAFE Data Interface Ports, Type 4/4X/12
PANELITE Enclosure Lights
Hole Seals
Window Kits
See also the Popular Cooling Products and Accessories tables following
the Standard Product table
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
MODIFICATION AND CUSTOMIZATION
UL 508A Listed; Type 12; File No. E61997

cUL Listed per CSA C22.2 No. 94; Type 12; File No. E61997
Hoffman excels at modifying and customizing products to your

specifications. Contact your local Hoffman sales office or distributor
for complete information.
NEMA/EEMAC Type 12
CSA, File No. 42186, Type 12
IEC 60529, IP55
BULLETIN: A12L
APPLICATION
Enclosures have gasketed, overlapping doors to keep the elements

at bay and floor stands that provide additional height and access for
cleaning under the enclosure. Because there is no centerpost, it is
simple to install and remove panels.
Standard Product
Catalog Number
A544208LPG
A544208LP
A604808LPG
A604808LP
A604810LPG
A604810LP
A606010LPG
A606010LP
A726010ULPG
A726010ULP
A727210ULPG
A727210ULP
A604812LPG
A604812LP
A606012LPG
A606012LP
A726012ULPG
A726012ULP
A727212ULPG
A727212ULP
A604816LPG
A604816LP
A606016LPG
A606016LP
A726016ULPG
A726016ULP
AxBxC in.
54.00 x 42.00 x 8.00
54.00 x 42.00 x 8.00
60.06 x 48.06 x 8.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 8.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 10.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 10.06
60.06 x 60.06 x 10.06
60.06 x 60.06 x 10.06
72.06 x 60.06 x 10.06
72.06 x 60.06 x 10.06
72.06 x 72.06 x 10.06
72.06 x 72.06 x 10.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 12.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 12.06
60.06 x 60.06 x 12.06
60.06 x 60.06 x 12.06
72.06 x 60.06 x 12.06
72.06 x 60.06 x 12.06
72.06 x 72.06 x 12.06
72.06 x 72.06 x 12.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 16.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 16.06
60.06 x 60.06 x 16.06
60.06 x 60.06 x 16.06
72.06 x 60.06 x 16.06
72.06 x 60.06 x 16.06
Mild Steel
AxBxC mm
1372 x 1067 x 203
1372 x 1067 x 203
1526 x 1221 x 205
1526 x 1221 x 205
1526 x 1221 x 256
1526 x 1221 x 256
1526 x 1526 x 256
1526 x 1526 x 256
1830 x 1526 x 256
1830 x 1526 x 256
1830 x 1830 x 256
1830 x 1830 x 256
1526 x 1221 x 306
1526 x 1221 x 306
1526 x 1526 x 306
1526 x 1526 x 306
1830 x 1526 x 306
1830 x 1526 x 306
1830 x 1830 x 306
1830 x 1830 x 306
1526 x 1221 x 408
1526 x 1221 x 408
1526 x 1526 x 408
1526 x 1526 x 408
1830 x 1526 x 408
1830 x 1526 x 408
Interior
Finish
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gauge
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
Panel
A54P42
A54P42
A60P48
A60P48
A60P48
A60P48
A60P60
A60P60
A72P60
A72P60
A72P72
A72P72
A60P48
A60P48
A60P60
A60P60
A72P60
A72P60
A72P72
A72P72
A60P48
A60P48
A60P60
A60P60
A72P60
A72P60
Conductive
Panel
A54P42G
A54P42G
A60P48G
A60P48G
A60P48G
A60P48G
A60P60G
A60P60G
A72P60G
A72P60G
A72P72G
A72P72G
A60P48G
A60P48G
A60P60G
A60P60G
A72P60G
A72P60G
A72P72G
A72P72G
A60P48G
A60P48G
A60P60G
A60P60G
A72P60G
A72P60G
Panel
Gauge
12
12
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
Panel Size (in.)

50.00 x 38.00
50.00 x 38.00
56.00 x 44.00
56.00 x 44.00
56.00 x 44.00
56.00 x 44.00
56.00 x 56.00
56.00 x 56.00
68.00 x 56.00
68.00 x 56.00
68.00 x 68.00
68.00 x 68.00
56.00 x 44.00
56.00 x 44.00
56.00 x 56.00
56.00 x 56.00
68.00 x 56.00
68.00 x 56.00
68.00 x 68.00
68.00 x 68.00
56.00 x 44.00
56.00 x 44.00
56.00 x 56.00
56.00 x 56.00
68.00 x 56.00
68.00 x 56.00
Panel Size (mm)

1270 x 965
1270 x 965
1422 x 1118
1422 x 1118
1422 x 1118
1422 x 1118
1422 x 1422
1422 x 1422
1727 x 1422
1727 x 1422
1727 x 1727
1727 x 1727
1422 x 1118
1422 x 1118
1422 x 1422
1422 x 1422
1727 x 1422
1727 x 1422
1727 x 1727
1727 x 1727
1422 x 1118
1422 x 1118
1422 x 1422
1422 x 1422
1727 x 1422
1727 x 1422
Stiffener
(in.)
15.00
15.00
15.00
15.00
15.00
15.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
24.00
24.00
15.00
15.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
24.00
24.00
15.00
15.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
Stiffener
(mm)
381
381
381
381
381
381
533
533
533
533
610
610
381
381
533
533
533
533
610
610
381
381
533
533
533
533
S (in.)
15.92
15.92
15.92
15.92
19.92
19.92
19.92
19.92
23.92
23.92
15.92
15.92
19.92
19.92
19.92
19.92
23.92
23.92
15.92
15.92
19.92
19.92
19.92
19.92
S (mm)
404
404
404
404
506
506
506
506
608
608
404
404
506
506
506
506
608
608
404
404
506
506
506
506
EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
Spec-00295 K
Floor-Mount Enclosures Type 12 Floor-Mount Enclosures
Catalog Number
A727216ULPG
A727216ULP
A604820LPG
A604820LP
A726020ULPG
A726020ULP
A727220ULPG
A727220ULP
A604824LPG
A604824LP
A606024LPG
A606024LP
A726024ULPG
A726024ULP
A727224ULPG
A727224ULP
AxBxC in.
72.06 x 72.06 x 16.06
72.06 x 72.06 x 16.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 20.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 20.06
72.06 x 60.06 x 20.06
72.06 x 60.06 x 20.06
72.06 x 72.06 x 20.06
72.06 x 72.06 x 20.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 24.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 24.06
60.06 x 60.06 x 24.06
60.06 x 60.06 x 24.06
72.06 x 60.06 x 24.06
72.06 x 60.06 x 24.06
72.06 x 72.06 x 24.06
72.06 x 72.06 x 24.06
Interior
Finish
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
AxBxC mm
1830 x 1830 x 408
1830 x 1830 x 408
1526 x 1221 x 510
1526 x 1221 x 510
1830 x 1526 x 510
1830 x 1526 x 510
1830 x 1830 x 510
1830 x 1830 x 510
1526 x 1221 x 611
1526 x 1221 x 611
1526 x 1526 x 611
1526 x 1526 x 611
1830 x 1526 x 611
1830 x 1526 x 611
1830 x 1830 x 611
1830 x 1830 x 611
Gauge
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
Panel
A72P72
A72P72
A60P48
A60P48
A72P60
A72P60
A72P72
A72P72
A60P48
A60P48
A60P60
A60P60
A72P60
A72P60
A72P72
A72P72
Conductive
Panel
A72P72G
A72P72G
A60P48G
A60P48G
A72P60G
A72P60G
A72P72G
A72P72G
A60P48G
A60P48G
A60P60G
A60P60G
A72P60G
A72P60G
A72P72G
A72P72G
Panel
Gauge
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Panel Size (in.)

68.00 x 68.00
68.00 x 68.00
56.00 x 44.00
56.00 x 44.00
68.00 x 56.00
68.00 x 56.00
68.00 x 68.00
68.00 x 68.00
56.00 x 44.00
56.00 x 44.00
56.00 x 56.00
56.00 x 56.00
68.00 x 56.00
68.00 x 56.00
68.00 x 68.00
68.00 x 68.00
Panel Size (mm)

1727 x 1727
1727 x 1727
1422 x 1118
1422 x 1118
1727 x 1422
1727 x 1422
1727 x 1727
1727 x 1727
1422 x 1118
1422 x 1118
1422 x 1422
1422 x 1422
1727 x 1422
1727 x 1422
1727 x 1727
1727 x 1727
Stiffener
(in.)
24.00
24.00
15.00
15.00
21.00
21.00
24.00
24.00
15.00
15.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
24.00
24.00
Stiffener
(mm)
610
610
381
381
533
533
610
610
381
381
533
533
533
533
610
610
S (in.)
23.92
23.92
15.92
15.92
19.92
19.92
23.92
23.92
15.92
15.92
19.92
19.92
19.92
19.92
23.92
23.92
S (mm)
608
608
404
404
506
506
608
608
404
404
506
506
506
506
608
608
Purchase panels separately.

<
<

&

%

$

$

<<
&&
Popular Cooling Products

Enclosure Depth (C Dimension)
8.06 in. (205 mm)
10.06 in. (256 mm)
12.06 in. (306 mm)
16.06 in. (408 mm)
24.06 in. (611 mm)
Popular Cooling Solutions*

T150116G120 (Air Conditioner)
T150116G120 (Air Conditioner)
N280416G050 (Air Conditioner)
N280416G050 (Air Conditioner)
G280416G050 (Air Conditioner)
*Important: Visit tools.hoffmanonline.com/attachments to access our Cooling Selection Tool to determine the
appropriate cooling solution for your application.
Popular Accessories
Enclosure Width (B Dimension)
42.00 in. (1067 mm)
48.06 in. (1221mm)
60.06 in. (1526mm)
72.06 in. (1830mm)
Lights
LED24V15
LED24V15
LED24V15
LED24V15
PH 763.422.2211 FAX 763.422.2600 pentairprotect.com
Spec-00295 K
Hole Seals
AS050
AS050
AS050
AS050
Window Kits
APWK53NF
APWK53NF
APWK53NF
APWK53NF
Mild Steel
Panels and Panel Accessories Panels for Enclosures
Panels for Type 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 Enclosures

Steel panels are 12 gauge, finished with white polyester powder paint or a conductive, corrosion-resistant coating. Larger panels have
flanges on two or four sides. Some larger steel panels are 10 gauge and include extra holes for panel lifting. Aluminum panels are 5052H32 aluminum alloy. Larger panels have flanges on four sides. Aluminum panels are protected on one side with a plastic film. Stainless
steel panels are Type 316 stainless steel. Panel mounting hardware is furnished with all enclosures which accept these panels.
Bulletin: PNLFS, PNLJ, PNLWM
Catalog Number
A12P24
A12P24G
A16P12
A16P12G
A16P12SS6
A16P12AL
A16P16
A16P16G
A16P16SS6
A16P16AL
A18P18
A18P18G
A20P12
A20P12G
A20P16
A20P16G
A20P16SS6
A20P16AL
A20P20
A20P20G
A20P20SS6
A20P20AL
A24P16
A24P16G
A24P16SS6
A24P20
A24P20G
A24P20SS6
A24P20AL
A24P24
A24P24G
A24P24SS6
A24P24AL
A30P16
A30P16G
A30P20
A30P20G
A30P20SS6
A30P24
A30P24G
A30P24SS6
A30P24AL
A30P30
A30P30G
A30P30SS6
A36P16
A36P16G
A36P24
A36P24G
A36P24SS6
A36P24AL
A36P30
A36P30G
A36P30SS6
A36P30AL
A36P36
A36P36G
A36P36SS6
A40P24
A40P24G
A40P30
A40P30G
A42P24
A42P24G
A42P30
A42P30G
A42P30SS6
A42P36
A42P36G
A42P36SS6
A42P42
7
Material
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Painted steel
Accessories
Panel Size
D x E (in.)
9.00 x 21.00
9.00 x 21.00
13.00 x 9.00
13.00 x 9.00
13.00 x 9.00
13.00 x 9.00
13.00 x 13.00
13.00 x 13.00
13.00 x 13.00
13.00 x 13.00
15.00 x 15.00
15.00 x 15.00
17.00 x 9.00
17.00 x 9.00
17.00 x 13.00
17.00 x 13.00
17.00 x 13.00
17.00 x 13.00
17.00 x 17.00
17.00 x 17.00
17.00 x 17.00
17.00 x 17.00
21.00 x 13.00
21.00 x 13.00
21.00 x 13.00
21.00 x 17.00
21.00 x 17.00
21.00 x 17.00
21.00 x 17.00
21.00 x 21.00
21.00 x 21.00
21.00 x 21.00
21.00 x 21.00
27.00 x 13.00
33.00 x 27.00
27.00 x 17.00
27.00 x 17.00
27.00 x 17.00
27.00 x 21.00
27.00 x 21.00
27.00 x 21.00
27.00 x 21.00
27.00 x 27.00
27.00 x 27.00
27.00 x 27.00
33.00 X 13.00
33.00 x 13.00
33.00 x 21.00
33.00 x 21.00
33.00 x 21.00
33.00 x 21.00
33.00 x 27.00
33.00 x 27.00
33.00 x 27.00
33.00 x 27.00
33.00 x 33.00
33.00 x 33.00
33.00 x 33.00
37.00 x 21.00
37.00 x 21.00
37.00 x 29.00
37.00 x 29.00
39.00 x 21.00
39.00 x 21.00
39.00 x 27.00
39.00 x 27.00
39.00 x 27.00
39.00 x 33.00
39.00 x 33.00
39.00 x 33.00
39.00 x 39.00
Panel Size
D x E (mm)
229 x 533
229 x 533
330 x 229
330 x 229
330 x 229
330 x 229
330 x 330
330 x 330
330 x 330
330 x 330
381 x 381
381 x 381
432 x 229
432 x 229
432 x 330
432 x 330
432 x 330
432 x 330
432 x 432
432 x 432
432 x 432
432 x 432
533 x 330
533 x 330
533 x 330
533 x 432
533 x 432
533 x 432
533 x 432
533 x 533
533 x 533
533 x 533
533 x 533
686 x 330
838 x 686
686 x 432
686 x 432
686 x 432
686 x 533
686 x 533
686 x 533
686 x 533
686 x 686
686 x 686
686 x 686
838 X 330
838 x 330
838 x 533
838 x 533
838 x 533
838 x 533
838 x 686
838 x 686
838 x 686
838 x 686
838 x 838
838 x 838
838 x 838
940 x 533
940 x 533
940 x 737
940 x 737
991 x 533
991 x 533
991 x 686
991 x 686
991 x 686
991 x 838
991 x 838
991 x 838
991 x 991
Panel Gauge
or Thickness
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
Edge
Flanges
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
T (in.)
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
T (mm)
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
Number
of Holes
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
6
6
4 (no D dim. center hole)
4 (no D dim. center hole)
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
Spec-00310 P
Panels and Panel Accessories Panels for Enclosures
Catalog Number
A42P42G
A48P24
A48P24G
A48P30
A48P30G
A48P36
A48P36G
A48P36SS6
A48P36AL
A48P42
A48P42G
A48P48
A48P48G
A54P42
A54P42G
A60P24
A60P24G
A60P30
A60P30G
A60P36
A60P36G
A60P36SS6
A60P36AL
A60BFP42
A60BFP42G
A60P48
A60P48G
A60P60
A60P60G
A72P36
A72P36G
A72P60
A72P60G
A72P72
A72P72G
Material
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Spec-00310 P
Panel Size
D x E (in.)
39.00 x 39.00
45.00 x 21.00
45.00 x 21.00
45.00 x 27.00
45.00 x 27.00
45.00 x 33.00
45.00 x 33.00
45.00 x 33.00
45.00 x 33.00
45.00 x 39.00
45.00 x 39.00
44.00 x 44.00
44.00 x 44.00
50.00 x 38.00
50.00 x 38.00
57.00 x 21.00
57.00 x 21.00
57.00 x 27.00
57.00 x 27.00
57.00 x 33.00
57.00 x 33.00
57.00 x 33.00
57.00 x 33.00
56.00 x 38.00
56.00 x 38.00
56.00 x 44.00
56.00 x 44.00
56.00 x 56.00
56.00 x 56.00
69.00 x 33.00
69.00 x 33.00
68.00 x 56.00
68.00 x 56.00
68.00 x 68.00
68.00 x 68.00
Panel Size
D x E (mm)
991 x 991
1143 x 533
1143 x 533
1143 x 686
1143 x 686
1143 x 838
1143 x 838
1143 x 838
1143 x 838
1143 x 991
1143 x 991
1118 x 1118
1118 x 1118
1270 x 965
1270 x 965
1448 x 533
1448 x 533
1448 x 686
1448 x 686
1448 x 838
1448 x 838
1448 x 838
1448 x 838
1422 x 965
1422 x 965
1422 x 1118
1422 x 1118
1422 x 1422
1422 x 1422
1753 x 838
1753 x 838
1727 x 1422
1727 x 1422
1727 x 1727
1727 x 1727
Panel Gauge
or Thickness
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
12 ga.
12 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
12 ga.
10 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
Edge
Flanges
4
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
PH 763.422.2211 FAX 763.422.2600 HOFFMANONLINE.COM
T (in.)
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.88
0.88
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.88
0.88
0.88
0.88
0.88
0.88
0.75
0.75
0.88
0.88
0.88
0.88
T (mm)
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
22
22
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
22
22
22
22
22
22
19
19
22
22
22
22
Number
of Holes
8
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
10
10
12
12
10
10
8
8
12
12
10
10
Accessories
Feed-Through Wireway Feed-Through NEMA Type 12 Wireway
Standard Product Selection Matrix

Description
12.00-in. (305-mm) Straight Section
90 Elbow
45 Elbow
22.50 Elbow
Cross
Closure Plate
Tee
Telescope Fitting
Cutoff Fitting
Swivel Nipple (Box Entry)
Swivel Nipple (Regular)
1.00-in. (25-mm) Nipple
Box Connector
Flexible Fitting
Reducer Bushings: 4.00-in. (102-mm) to 2.50-in. (64-mm) Center Hole
Reducer Bushings: 4.00-in. (102-mm) to 2.50-in. (64-mm) Edge Hole
8.00-in. (203-mm) to 6.00-in. (152-mm) Edge Hole
Drop Hanger
Bracket Hanger
Barrier Kit, bolton barrier 60.00 in. (1524 mm)
Barrier, bracketmounted Each barrier 60.00 in. (1524 mm)a
Barrier Brackets, 2 compartmenta
Barrier Brackets, 3 compartmenta
Gasket and Screwsb
a
2.50 x 2.50 in.

(64 x 64 mm)
F22W12c,d
F22W24c,d
F22W36c,d
F22W48c,d
F22W60c,d
F22W120c,d
F22WE90c,d
F22WE45c,d
F22WE225c,d
F22WCc,d
F22WPc
F22WTc,d
F22WA
F22WX
F22WSAc,d
F22WSCc,d
F22WN1c,d
F22WN2c,d
F22WN3c,d
F22WN6c,d
F22WB
F22WFF
F22HD
F22HB
F22WG
4.00 x 4.00 in.

(102 x 102 mm)
F44W12c,d
F44W24c,d
F44W36c,d
F44W48c,d
F44W60c,d
F44W120c,d
F44WE90c,d
F44WE45c,d
F44WE225c,d
F44WCc,d
F44WPc
F44WTc,d
F44WA
F44WX
F44WSAc,d
F44WSCc,d
F44WN1c,d
F44WN2c,d
F44WN3c,d
F44WN6c,d
F44WB
F44WFF
F44WR22c,d
F44WRE22c,d
F44HD
F44HB
F44BK60
F44B360
F44BB2C
F44BB3C
F44WG
6.00 x 6.00 in.

(152 x 152 mm)
F66W12c,d
F66W24c,d
F66W36c,d
F66W48c,d
F66W60c,d
F66W120c,d
F66WE90c,d
F66WE45c,d
F66WE225c,d
F66WCc,d
F66WPc
F66WTc,d
F66WA
F66WX
F66WSAc,d
F66WSCc,d
F66WN1c,d
F66WN2c,d
F66WN3c,d
F66WN6c,d
F66WB
F66WFF
F66WR44c,d
F66WRE44c,d
F66HD
F66HB
F66BK60
F66B560
F66BB2C
F66BB3C
F66WG
8.00 x 8.00 in.

(203 x 203 mm)
F88W12c,d
F88W24c,d
F88W36c,d
F88W48c,d
F88W60c,d
F88W120c,d
F88WE90c,d
F88WE45c,d
F88WE225c,d
F88WCc,d
F88WPc
F88WTc,d
F88WA
F88WX
F88WSAc,d
F88WSCc,d
F88WN1c,d
F88WN2c,d
F88WN3c,d
F88WN6c,d
F88WB
F88WFF
F88WR66c,d
F88WRE66c,d
F88WR44c,d
F88WRE44c,d
F88HD
F88HB
F88BK60
F88WG
Package consists of five barriers or five barrier brackets. Each barrier is 60-in. long.
Standard packages of wireway contain one gasket and one set of screws to join sections, except Cross fittings which contain three of each, Tee fittings which contain two of each and Telescope fittings which contain
none. Additional gasket and screw sets may be ordered by catalog number.
Certified by Canadian Standards Association.
UL 870
EQUIPMENT PROTECTION SOLUTIONS

Spec-00323 I
Cable and Wire Management
Feed-Through Wireway Feed-Through NEMA Type 12 Wireway
Box Connector
When wireway enters an enclosure, a box connector should be used
on the inside of the enclosure to ensure a tight and stable seal.
Bulletin: F20
D
in./mm
3.88
99
5.38
137
7.62
194
9.62
244
Catalog Number
F22WB
F44WB
F66WB
F88WB
E
in./mm
3.88
99
5.38
137
7.62
194
9.62
244
All dimensions are to outside surfaces. Allow .12 in. (3 mm) additional for gasket at joints.
Barrier Kits
3 Compartment
Divides wireway into two or three compartments. Plated spring

steel brackets hold barriers in place by friction fit inside wireway.
Order barrier and bracket separately. Recommended spacing
increments of 3 ft.
W = 3.00 in. (76 mm) for 4.00 x 4.00 in. (102 x 102 mm)
W = 4.50 in. (114 mm) for 6.00 x 6.00 in. (152 x 152 mm)
Catalog Number
F44BB3C
F66BB3C
in.
0.00
0.00
mm
W (in.)
3.00
4.50
W (mm)
76
114
Package consists of five barriers or five barrier brackets. Each barrier is 60 in. long.
Bulletin: F10, F20
Bracket Mounted
Catalog Number
F44B360
F66B560
AxB in.
0.00
0.00
AxB mm
W (in.)
3.00
4.50
W (mm)
76
114
2 Compartment
Catalog Number
F44BB2C
F66BB2C
in.
0.00
0.00
mm
W (in.)
3.00
4.50
W (mm)
76
114
Bolt-On
Catalog Number
F44BK60
F66BK60
F88BK60
Gasket and Screws

Standard packages of wireway contain one gasket and one set of
screws to join sections, except Cross fittings which contain three of
each, Tee fittings which contain two of each and Telescope fittings
which contain none. Additional gasket and screw sets may be
ordered by catalog number.
Bulletin: F20

Spec-00323 I
in.
4.00 x 4.00
6.00 x 6.00
8.00 x 8.00
Catalog Number
F22WG
F44WG
F66WG
F88WG
mm
102 x 102
152 x 152
203 x 203
W (in.)
3.00
4.50
6.00
W (mm)
76
114
152
AxB in./mm
2.50 x 2.50
64 x 64
4.00 x 4.00
102 x 102
6.00 x 6.00
152 x 152
8.00 x 8.00
203 x 203
Cable and Wire Management
Accessories: Corrosion Inhibitors
Corrosion Inhibitors
Industrial Corrosion Inhibitors
Life Expectancy and Usage

The normal useful life-span of Hoffman corrosion inhibitors is in
excess of one year. However, inhibitor life expectancy is shortened by
approximately 25 percent when exposed to temperatures above 104
F (40 C). This product is not recommended for use where temperature
exceeds 199 F. Since Hoffman corrosion inhibitors are vapor-phase
protective, all surfaces to be protected should be accessible to the
vapors. The maximum distance the vapors can travel is approximately
1.50 ft. (.46 m). Protection of long, narrow enclosures can be achieved
with tape or multiple inhibitors.
Storage and Handling
Each Hoffman corrosion inhibitor is individually packaged in a
resealable bag for maximum effectiveness at the time of usage.
Corrosion inhibitors should be stored at temperatures not exceeding
120 F (45 C ). Hoffman corrosion inhibitors are not returnable.
When determining the proper corrosion inhibitor for your
application, assume the enclosure volume to be protected is greater
than calculated if (1) cabinet doors are opened frequently, (2) cabinet
is located in an extremely corrosive area and/or (3) cabinet length
divided by depth is greater than four.
AHCI1DV
Foam device protects one cubic foot (28 liters) of enclosure volume
for approximately one year.
Size: .25 x 1.25 x 3.00 in. (6 x 32 x 76 mm)
AHCI5E
Emitter protects 5 ft. 3 (142 liters) of enclosure volume for
Hoffman corrosion inhibitors protect
approximately
two years from the date of manufacture. Emitters
Interior components of electrical enclosures, boxes, consoles and
contain additional red metal (non-ferrous) inhibitors.
wireways
Size: 2.31 in. (diameter) x 0.81 in. (high) (59 mm x 21 mm)
Interior components of electronic enclosures
AHCI10E
Electrical and electronic equipment and controls
3
Parts and components that are packaged in crates during shipping Emitter protects 10 ft. (283 liters) of enclosure volume for
approximately
two
years
from the date of manufacture. Emitters
and storage
contain additional red metal (non-ferrous) inhibitors.
Switch gear and relay cabinets
Size: 2.31 in. (diameter) x 1.38 in. (high) (59 mm x 35 mm)
Interiors of pipes, conduits and fuse boxes
AHCI60R
Process control computers, instruments and recording devices
Tape protects 60 ft. 3 of enclosure volume per roll. Use
Tool chest interiors and contents
approximately 2.50 in. (63 mm) of tape per cubic foot (28 liters) of
Equipment stored at construction sites
enclosure volume to be protected. Each roll of tape is packaged
Chief Advantages
individually in a resealable bag.
Protects against salt and high humidity
Size: .25 in. x .75 in. x 12.00 ft. (6 mm x 19 mm x 3.6 m)
Eliminates the need of oiling, plating or dipping metal
Puts protected equipment to use immediately without degreasing AHCI240R
Tape protects 240 ft. 3 of enclosure volume per roll. Use
or coating removal
approximately 1.00 in. (25 mm) of tape per cubic foot (28 liters) of
How They Work
Each inhibitor contains a special chemical combination that vaporizes enclosure volume to be protected. Each roll of tape is packaged
individually in a resealable bag.
and condenses on all surfaces in an enclosed area. Vapors will
Size: .25 in. x 2.00 in. x 20.00 ft. (6 mm x 51 mm x 6.1 m)
redeposit as needed in the event of condensation of moisture on
surfaces. These vapors reach every part of an enclosure, protecting all AHCI238S
Spray is a non-conductive, nonflammable, vapor-phase film and is
interior components. Spraying, wiping or greasing are not required.
non-toxic. It has essentially neutral pH value. Application provides
This eliminates precoating, special wraps and drying agents.
instant protection against corrosion. Spray is water soluble and can
Protection is effective even in salt-water atmospheres. The AHCI5E
and AHCI10E emitters have additional red-metal inhibitors for further be easily flushed away with water if desired. This product should
be kept from freezing and has a shelf life of 2+ years in normal
protection. Enclosures containing corrosion inhibitors must be
warehouse conditions.
reasonably sealed.
Bulletin: A80
Standard Product
Catalog Number
AHCI1DV
AHCI5E
AHCI10E
AHCI60R
AHCI240R
AHCI238S
Enclosure Volume Protected (ft. 3 )

1
5
10
60 per roll
240 per roll
Corrosion Inhibitor Spray
Enclosure Volume Protected (liters)

28.32
141.6
283.2
1699 per roll
6797 per roll
Corrosion Inhibitor Spray
Package Qty.
50
25
12
3
1
6
Metal Protection Chart

Protected by Chemical
Metal
Aluminum
Marked reduction of surface attack; no pitting
a
Brass
Decreased tarnish; very minor surface attack
Steel, Iron
No change
a
Copper
Slight staining
Zinc Plate
Slight discoloration
Tin Plate
Slight discoloration
a
AHCI5E and AHCI1OE emitters are recommended for these materials
Subject to change without notice
Unprotected by Chemical
Severe surface attack; tarnish; pitting
Surface discoloration; pitting
Severe corrosion
Heavy corrosive attack
Severe corrosion
Moderate corrosive attack
PH (763) 422-2211 FX (763) 422-2600 hoffmanonline.com
2009 Hoffman Enclosures Inc.

Spec-00566 B
Accessories: Electrical Accessories
Lighting Packages
PANELITE LED Enclosure Light
2
4 VDC operation for superior
lighting performance with minimal
power consumption
140-degree cone angle casts a
broad covering of neutral light
Center section rotates 120 degrees
to re-direct light where needed
Long life; 70 percent of initial
luminance at 50,000 hours (at 25 C)
High power LED emitters produce
470 Lumens for superior lighting
performance; provides up to 50
percent more usable light than
comparable length fluorescent
lights
Can be wired using optional
PANELITE Cable Accessories or
can be hard-wired with terminal
blocks included in hardware kit
Up to five lights can be daisychained together using hard-wired
connection to power supply or
catalog number LPC72 power
cable with leads
Catalog Number
LED24V15
Description
LED Light, 15 in.

PP
VDC
24
Amps
.5
W
in./mm
15.00
381
X
in./mm
8.00
203

PP

PP

PP

PP

Bulletin: A80LT
PANELITE Fluorescent Enclosure Light
1
20 VAC, 50/60 Hz operation
Can be wired using optional
PANELITE Cable Accessories or
can be hard-wired with terminal
blocks included in hardware kit
Available in 15-, 18- and 28-in.
lengths with ability to daisy chain
up to five lights together using
one power supply
Fluorescent bulb not included
W
VAC Hz
Amps in./mm
Catalog Number Description
LF120V15
Fluorescent Light, 15 in. 120 50/60 .13
14.50
368
LF120V18
17.50
445
LF120V28
27.75
705
X
in./mm
9.63
245
12.63
321
22.88
581
Bulb
(purchase
separately)
F6T5
F8T5
F14T5
Bulletin: A80LT

PP
:
;

PP

PP

Subject to change without notice
PH (763) 422-2211 FX (763) 422-2600 hoffmanonline.com
2010 Pentair Technical Products

Spec-00581 B
Electrical Accessories Lighting Packages
Remote Door Switches
emote door switch activates the

R
light when the enclosure door is
opened
Mounts on enclosure frame and
includes mounting hardware
Mounting plate is 14 gauge steel
with a plated finish
C an be hard-wired to the
PANELITE LED or Fluorescent
light or connected via the
PANELITE Door Switch Cable
Catalog Number
ALFSWD
PLFSWD
Description
Door switch assembly (order connection cable separately)
Door switch assembly for PROLINE (order connection cable separately)
Bulletin: A80LT, P20
Touch-Safe UL Light Switch
FEATURES

L listed for a touch-safe wire connection

U
E asily mounted to various enclosure types; common bracket
and hardware included for many enclosure types (NEMA,
CONCEPT/FUSION G7, PROLINE, Freestanding Type 12)
C able PG compression hub
W ide operating temperature range: -49F to +158F (-45C to
70C)
Rugged die-cast anodized zinc construction
Connection 3 cage clamps for solid and stranded wire AWG 20-14
(0.5-2.5mm)
Protection class I (grounded)
Bulletin: A80LT
APPLICATION
The Touch-Safe light switch is designed to be used with Hoffman

light kits (AC and DC). It provides a UL listed touch-safe switch that
can be used on many enclosure types and includes hardware for
most applications. The light switch maintains enclosure overall
rating up to UL 508A Type 4X or 12.
Max. Cable Dia.

.375 in.
Catalog Number
LDSWITCH
Mounting Bracket Kit for Light Package
.25
[6]
Kit simplifies mounting light package in Hoffman PROLINE

disconnect enclosures. Includes brackets, all mounting hardware
and complete instructions.
.25
[6]
Bulletin: A80LT
Catalog Number
PDLFBRKT
LED Puck Light
Description
Mounting Bracket Kit
The LED Puck Light is ideal for

remote and darkened applications.
This versatile light provides
mounting flexibility; it can be
magnetically attached to flat steel
surfaces or can be hung with a
swivel hook. This small form factor,
light-weight LED light provides
superior lighting performance with
minimal power consumption. It can
be used as a three-LED flashlight
or as a 24-LED work light with
operating temperature of 40 F to 120
F (4 C to 48 C). An on/off switch is
incorporated in the light and three
AAA batteries are included.
Max. Voltage
250 AC / 48 DC
1.08
[27]
5.70
[145]
.88
[22]
7.25
[184]
87574479
Catalog Number
LEDPUCK
AxBxC in./mm
2.25 x 3.75 x 1.38
57 x 95 x 35
Product Weight
0.22 lbs.

Bulletin: A80LT

Spec-00581 H
Accessories
Sockets
SR Series: DIN Rail Snap-Mount
DEC
SR3P Sockets
SR3P-05
Style
11-pin octal, snap-mount/surface mount
32when
using BAA
M3.5 screws with captive wire clamp
Tenninal/Torque
(9 - 11.5 inlbsl
WireSiza
Maximum up to 2-#12AWG
Electrical Rating
300V, 10A
Compatible Relay
RR3PA. RR2KP
Compatible Timer
GT3 (11-pinl. RTE-P2
Hold-Down Spring
SR3B-02F1 for RR3P; SR3P-OBF3 for RR2KP
Hold-Down Clip
SFA-203 (limers)
8.5
a
SR3P-05C Fingersafe
Style
11-pin octal. snap-mount/surface mount
Tenninal/Torque
M3.5 screws with captive wire clamp,

fingersafe (9 - 11.5 inI bs)
Wire Size
Elactrical Rating
300V. 10A
Compatible Relay
RR3PA. *RR2KP (*latching relay)
Compatible Timer
GT3 (11-pin), RTE-P2
Hold-Down Spring
SR3B-02F1 for RR3PA; SR3P-06F3 fur RR2KP
Hold-Down Clip
SFA-203 (Timers)
Terminal
Arrangement
DIN Rail (BAA)

2-a4.2 Mounting Hole
(M4 screw hole
--:n
1
I
I
I
I
~-,-~
{TOPVIEW)
(cannot use ring terminal)
SR3P-06
Style
11-pin octal, snap-mount/surface mount
Tenninal/Torque
M3.5 screws with captive wire clamp

{9 - 11.5 inlbs)
Wire Size
Electrical Rating
30DV. 10A
Compatible Relay
RR3PA, *RR2KP (*latching relay)
Compatible Timer
GT3 (11-pinl, RTE-P2
Tenninal
Arrangement
2-ill4.2 Moundng Hole !~
(M4 screw hole
~
)
'~,
33
Hold-Down Spring
SR3B-02F1 fur RR3PA; SR3P-06F3 for RR2KP
Hold-Down Clip
SFA-202 (Timers)
F-12
1. For socket 11101111ting accessories, see page F-29.

2. For hold-dawn clip/spring selections, see page F-4.
www_idec.com
_ _ _ _...-t_5_m_1n.
(i
~~'
'
(TOPVIEW)
All dimensions are in mm.
USA: (800) 262-IDEC or (408) 747-0550, Canada: (888) 317-IDEC
Indoor Dual Line DSL/Telephone Gas Tube Lightning Surge Protector

Model: HGLN-D2T
Applications
DSL/Telephone lines
T1/E1/J1 Telco lines
Features
Protects 2 telephone/DSL lines

Reliable differential gas tube protection
Industrial grade cast aluminum construction
RJ11 Jacks with provision for shielded cables
Description
The HGLN-D2T is a high performance lightning and surge protector
that provides superior protection for two DSL, Telephone and T1
lines from transients and surges.
The design of the HGLN-D2T incorporates the use of three terminal
differential gas discharge tubes which provide superior common
and differential mode protection against conducted transients
versus the use of lower cost two terminal tubes. The HGLN-D2T
utilizes the gas discharge tubes on each pair to provide superior
power handling capability.
The HGLN-D2T features two RJ11 jacks for ease of installation. Additional features include a ground lug directly on
the lightning protector housing providing superior grounding. Integral mounting feet are provided on the cast
aluminum house.
Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Connections
(2) RJ11 Jacks
Clamping Voltage
230 volts
Pinout
Line 1: Pins 3/4

Line 2: Pins 2/5
L-COM, INC. 45 BEECHWOOD DRIVE NORTH ANDOVER, MA 01845

WWW.L-COM.COM E-MAIL: SALES@L-COM.COM PHONE: 1-800-343-1455 FAX: 1-978-689-9484
L-com, Inc. All Rights Reserved. L-com Global Connectivity and the L-com logo are registered marks.
Mechanical Specifications
Enclosure Material
Cast Aluminum
Ground Lug
10 AWG Max.
Operating Temperature
-40 C (-40 F) to +80 C (+176 F)
Weight
.28 lbs. (.13 kg)
Dimensions (H x W X D)
3.6 x 1.4 x 1.2 in (91.4 x 35.5 x 38.1 mm)
RoHS Compliant
Yes
L-COM, INC. 45 BEECHWOOD DRIVE NORTH ANDOVER, MA 01845

WWW.L-COM.COM E-MAIL: SALES@L-COM.COM PHONE: 1-800-343-1455 FAX: 1-978-689-9484
L-com, Inc. All Rights Reserved. L-com Global Connectivity and the L-com logo are registered marks.
T5020-W
Description
20 Amp, 125 Volt, NEMA 5-20R, 2P, 3W, Narrow Body Single Receptacle, Straight
Blade, Tamper Resistant, Commercial Grade, Grounding, Back & Side Wired, Steel
Strap, - WHITE
Product Features
Color: White
NEMA: 5-20R
Grounding: Self Grounding

Amperage: 20 Amp
Voltage: 125 Volt
NEMA: 5-20R
Pole: 2
Wire: 3
Termination: Back & Side
Face Material: Thermoplastic Nylon
Body Material: Thermoplastic Nylon
Strap Material: Steel
Color: White
Standards and Certifications: UL/CSA
Warranty: 10 Year Limited
AC Horsepower Ratings
At Rated Voltage 1 HP
Environmental Specifications
Flammability Rated V-2 per UL94
Operating -40C to 60C
Temperature
Terminal ID Brass-Hot, GreenGround, WhiteNeutral
Terminal Accom. 14-10 AWG
Product ID Ratings are
permanently marked
on device
Dielectric Voltage Withstands 2000V per
UL498
Current Limiting Full Rated Current
Temperature Rise Max 30C after 250
cycles OL at 200
percent rated current
Material Specifications
Face Material Thermoplastic Nylon
Body Material Thermoplastic Nylon
Line Contacts Brass Triple-Wipe
UL498 File E13399
Terminal Screws Brass 10-32
Grounding Screw Brass 8-32
Yoke Zinc-Plated Steel
Clamp Nuts Zinc-Plated Steel
Ground Clips Brass-Plated
Standards and Certifications
NEMA WD-6
ANSI C-73
UL Fed Spec WC-596 File E13399
CSA C22.2 No. 42 File 152105
NOM 057
Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

201 North Service Road, Melville, NY 11747
Telephone: 1-800-323-8920 FAX: 1-800-832-9538 Tech Line (8:30AM-7:30PM E.S.T. MondayFriday): 1-800-824-3005
Leviton Manufacturing of Canada, Ltd.
165 Hymus Boulevard, Pointe Claire, Quebec H9R 1E9 Telephone: 1-800-469-7890
FAX: 1-800-824-3005 www.leviton.com/canada
Leviton S. de R.L. de C.V.
Lago Tana 43, Mexico DF, Mexico CP 11290 Tel.: (+52)55-5082-1040 FAX: (+52)5386-1797
www.leviton.com.mx
Visit our Website at: www.leviton.com
2007-2010 Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.
Leviton has a global presence.
If you would like to know where your local Leviton office is located please go to:
www.leviton.com/international/contacts/
N7899-I
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter

(GFCI)
Brand Features
Slim is in. New SmartlockPro Slim GFCIs Install Easily Industry-leading quality,
professional grade lockout action, and the slimmest profile on the market make
SmartlockPro Slim GFCIs the smartest choice in ground fault circuit interrupter
protection. Faster and easier to install in any wallbox because depth is reduced, the
slim GFCIs flush mount to the wall with minimal protrusion for a sleek, finished look.
Enhanced features include external back wiring for positive indication the wire is
properly seated, exceptional resistance to wire pullout and the ability to withstand high
torque. Tamper-Resistant to meet 2008 NEC Requirements for new or renovated
residential construction.
Item Description
20 Amp, 125 Volt Receptacle, 20 Amp Feed-Through, SmartLock Pro Slim GFCI,
monochromatic, back and side wired, wallplate and self grounding clip included - Ivory
Technical Information
AC Horsepower Ratings
At Rated Voltage: 1 HP
Standards and Certifications

NEMA: 5-20R
ANSI: C-73
UL498: File E13399
Dielectric Voltage: Withstands 2000V per CSA C22.2 No. 42: File LR-57811
UL498
NOM: 057
Short Circuit Current Rating: 10KA
UL 943: File E48380
Temperature Rise: Max 30C after 100
UL Fed Spec WC-596: Yes
cycles OL at 150 percent rated current
Color:
Environmental Specifications
Flammability: Rated V-2 per UL94
Operating Temperature: -35C to +66C
Ivory
UPC Code: 07847756091

Country of Origin: Please Contact Customer
Service
NEMA: 5-20R
Material Specifications
Face Material: Thermoplastic
Body Material: Polycarbonate
Line Contacts: Brass Triple Wipe .031
Thick
Terminal Screws: Plated Steel
Grounding Screw: Plated Steel
Yoke: Zinc-Plated Steel
Clamps: Brass
Notes: w/ Wallplate
Terminal ID: Brass-Hot, Green-Ground,
Silver-Neutral
Terminal Accom.: 14-10 AWG
Product ID: Ratings are permanently
marked on device
Product Features
Feature: SmartlockPro Slim
Amperage: 20 Amp
Voltage: 125 Volt
NEMA: 5-20R
Pole: 2
Wire: 3
Trip Level: Class A, 5mA plus or minus
1mA
Termination: Back & Side
Face Material: Thermoplastic
Body Material: Polycarbonate
Grounding: Self-Grounding
Strap Material: Galvanized Steel
Color: Ivory
UL Fed Spec WC-596: Yes
Warranty: 2-Year Limited
Notes: w/ Wallplate
Features and Benefits

Reduced depth of SmartlockPro Slim GFCI makes it easier to install in any
electrical box, even shallow ones.
Terminals allow for easy wiring options back and side wire capable.
External back wire clamps provide visual indication of proper wire seating.
Withstands high torque and resists wire pullout.
Standard brass self-grounding clip.
Automatically test the GFCI every time the RESET button is pushed in. The GFCI
will not reset if the GFCI circuit is not functioning properly.
By blocking reset of the GFCI if protection has been compromised, SmartlockPro
Slim GFCI reduces the possibility of end-users incorrectly assuming that a reset
GFCI outlet is providing ground fault protection when it actually is not.
A line-load reversal diagnostic feature is provided which prevents the GFCI from
being reset and stops power from being fed to the GFCI receptacle face or through
to downstream devices. A green LED indicator on the GFCI's face also illuminates
to alert the installer to the line-load wiring reversal.
Trip threshold meets or exceeds UL requirements for tripping time.
Improved immunity to high-frequency noise reduces nuisance tripping.
Advanced electronics design provides superior resistance to electrical surges and
over-voltages.
Compatible with all Decora devices and wallplates; available in select Decora
colors.
UL Fed Spec WC-596 rated.

Telephone: 1-800-323-8920 FAX: 1-800-832-9538 Tech Line (8:30AM-7:30PM E.S.T. Monday-Friday): 1-800-824-3005
Lago Tana 43, Mexico DF, Mexico CP 11290 Tel.: (+52)55-5082-1040 FAX: (+52)5386-1797 www.leviton.com.mx
2012 Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.
If you would like to know where your local Leviton office is located please go to: www.leviton.com/international/contacts/
84004-40
Wallplates
Brand Features
Familiar and functional, Leviton Traditional Wallplates are designed for use with
Traditional Leviton devices. They represent styles and form factors that have stood the
test of time. Their clean lines work in virtually any location, whether in new or retrofit
construction, and they install quickly and easily. Leviton offers Traditional Wallplates in
a vast array of colors and configurations.
Item Description
1-Gang Single 1.406 Inch Hole Device Receptacle Wallplate, Standard Size, 302
Stainless Steel, Device Mount, - Stainless Steel
Product Features
Type: Standard Size
Gang: 1
UPC Code: 07847742860

Country of Origin: Please Contact Customer
Service
Material: 302 Stainless Steel

Color: Brushed Stainless Steel
Color: Stainless Steel
Mount: Device
Warranty: 10-Year Limited

Telephone: 1-800-323-8920 FAX: 1-800-832-9538 Tech Line (8:30AM-7:30PM E.S.T. Monday-Friday): 1-800-824-3005
Lago Tana 43, Mexico DF, Mexico CP 11290 Tel.: (+52)55-5082-1040 FAX: (+52)5386-1797 www.leviton.com.mx
2012-2015 Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.
If you would like to know where your local Leviton office is located please go to: www.leviton.com/international/contacts/
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
43080-xSx, 43080-S12
Stainless-Steel QuickPort Wallplates
Leviton single-gang and dual-gang stainless-steel

wallplates offer field-configurable flexibility, and accept
QuickPort snap-in connectors and adapters to support
a variety of commercial and residential applications.
Available in several port configurations; the single-gang
wallplate comes with 1, 2, 3, 4, or 6 ports, and the
dual-gang version comes with 2, 4, 6, 8, or 12 ports.
Use different colored QuickPort connectors and
adapters for easy port identification.
FEATURES

Compatible with all individual QuickPort connectors and adapters

Fits standard NEMA electrical boxes
Individual port configurability allows specification flexibility
Brushed stainless-steel finish
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Fits standard NEMA single-gang back boxes

Not recommended for use with metal or plastic remodeler's-type
mud rings
For future expansion, install blanks (41084-BxB) in unused
ports
Specify port identification method (colored modules, designation
labels, and custom silk-screening available)
To identify ports, use different colored connectors for each
application, or Leviton pre-printed Port Designation Labels
(41080-LEB)
STANDARDS COMPLIANCE
cULus Listed (UL 1863 & CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 182.4)

ANSI/TIA-568-C.0
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATION
Single-gang and dual-gang stainless-steel wallplates

shall be field configurable, and accept QuickPort snap-in
connectors and adapters to support commercial and
residential applications. The single-gang wallplate shall
provide 1, 2, 3, 4, or 6 ports, and the dual-gang wallplate
shall provide 2, 4, 6, 8, or 12 ports. Each wallplate shall
have a brushed stainless-steel finish, fit standard NEMA
electrical boxes, be cULus Listed, and compliant with
ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 specifications.
Dimensions:
Materials:

Capacity:

See page two

Face - Stainless Steel (type 304)
Carrier - ABS Plastic
Single-gang: 1, 2, 3, 4, or 6 ports
Dual-gang: 2, 4, 6, 8, or 12 ports
COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
Taiwan
WARRANTY INFORMATION
For a copy of Leviton product warranties, visit

www.leviton.com/warranty.
ELECTRONIC FILES
For CAD files, typical specs, or technical drawings (.DXF, .DWG),

visit www.leviton.com.
Page 1 of 2
Leviton Network Solutions

2222 - 222nd St. SE
Bothell, WA 98021-4416
Asia / Pacific
T +1.631.812.6228
E infoasean@leviton.com
Canada
T +1.514.954.1840
E pcservice@leviton.com
Caribbean
T +1.954.593.1896
E infocaribbean@leviton.com
China
T +852.2774.9876
E infochina@leviton.com
Colombia
T +57.1.743.6045
E infocolombia@leviton.com
tel 1-800-824-3005
tel +1-425-486-2222
appeng@leviton.com
www.leviton.com
Europe
T +33.6.8869.1380
E infoeurope@leviton.com
India / SAARC
T +971.4.886.4722
E infoindia@leviton.com
Mexico
T +52.55.5082.1040
E lsamarketing@leviton.com
Middle East & Africa

T +971.4.886.4722
E lmeinfo@leviton.com
South Korea
T +82.2.3273.9963
E infokorea@leviton.com
Copyright 2015 Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.
Revised June 2015
43080-xSx, 43080-S12
APPLICATION
43080-xSx, 43080-S12
43080-1S2
43080-1S1
43080-1S3
43080-1S4
4.50"
43080-2S6
4.50"
4.50"
4.59"
4.59"
.45"
43080-2S8
43080-xSx, 43080-S12
43080-2S4
43080-2S2
43080-1S6
4.59"
.45"
.45"
43080-S12
4.50"
4.50"
4.59"
4.59"
.45"
.45"
PART NUMBERS
Description
Part No.
Stainless-Steel QuickPort Wallplate, 1 port, single gang
43080-1S1
Stainless-Steel QuickPort Wallplate, 2 ports, single gang
43080-1S2
43080-1S3
43080-1S4
43080-1S6
Stainless-Steel QuickPort Wallplate, 2 ports, dual gang
43080-2S2
43080-2S4
43080-2S6
43080-2S8
43080-S12
Page 2 of 2
F15 5629

2222 - 222nd St. SE
Asia / Pacific
T +1.631.812.6228
Canada
T +1.514.954.1840
Caribbean
T +1.954.593.1896
China
T +852.2774.9876
Colombia
T +57.1.743.6045
tel 1
-800-824-3005
tel +1-425-486-2222
appeng@leviton.com
www.leviton.com
Europe
T +33.6.8869.1380
India / SAARC
T +971.4.886.4722
Mexico
T +52.55.5082.1040

T +971.4.886.4722
South Korea
T +82.2.3273.9963
Revised June 2015
41108-Rx3
x = W (white) - Model: 41108-RW3
Cat 3 UTP QuickPort Connectors

APPLICATION
FEATURES
Dual wiring code label allows connector to be wired to either

T568A or T568B
Exclusive cutting ledge combines termination and trim into one
labor-saving step
Individual port configurability allows specification flexibility
Robust one-piece lead-frame design
Narrow connector allows high port density in a small area
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Designed for cable termination with a 110-type termination tool

Detailed installation instructions are included in the standard pack
All QuickPort connector performance grades have the same
design and termination method to promote installation
consistency
STANDARDS COMPLIANCE
SPECIFICATION
Cat 3 connectors shall be individual snap-in style,

and shall provide compliance with ANSI/TIA-568-C
specifications. Connectors shall comply with ANSI/
TIA-1096-A; UL listed; and CSA Certified. All plastics
used in construction of the connector bodies shall be
fire retardant with a UL flammability rating of 94V-0.
Termination of all connectors shall be 110-type (IDC)
with solder-plated phosphor bronze contacts. The
connector shall provide a ledge directly adjacent to
the 110-style termination, against which the wires
can be directly terminated and cut in one action by
the installer. Connector wiring label shall provide
installation color codes for both T568A and T568B
wiring schemes.
UL listed
CSA certified
NEC Article 800
ANSI/TIA-568-C
ANSI/TIA-1096-A
RoHS 2 (Directive 2011/65/EU)
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
See page two
Materials:

Connector body is high-impact, fire-retardant

plastic rated UL 94V-0. Connector 110 IDC
contacts are solder-plated phosphor bronze.
COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
USA
WARRANTY INFORMATION
For a copy of Leviton product warranties, visit

www.leviton.com/warranty.
Page 1 of 2

2222 - 222nd St. SE
Asia / Pacific
T +1.631.812.6228
Canada
T +1.514.954.1840
Caribbean
T +1.954.593.1896
China
T +852.2774.9876
Colombia
T +57.1.743.6045
tel 1-800-824-3005
tel +1-425-486-2222
appeng@leviton.com
www.leviton.com
Europe
T +33.6.8869.1380
India / SAARC
T +971.4.886.4722
Mexico
T +52.55.5082.1040

T +971.4.886.4722
South Korea
T +82.2.3273.9963
Revised April 2015
41108-Rx3
Leviton Cat 3 UTP connectors support voice-grade

applications. They are compatible with all QuickPort
housings, Multimedia Outlet Systems (with QuickPort
module adapter), patch panels, and patch blocks.
41108-Rx3
ELECTRONIC FILES
For CAD files, typical specs, or technical drawings (.DXF, .DWG), visit www.leviton.com.
41108-Rx3
Front View
Side View
.83
.83"
.64"
.64
1.18"
1.18
PART NUMBERS
Description
Part No.
Cat 3 UTP QuickPort Connector
41108-Rx3
x = colors: Ivory (I), White (W), Grey (G), Black (E), Orange (O), Blue (L), Yellow (Y), Dark Red (R), Brown (B),
Light Almond (T), Green (V), Purple (P), Crimson Red (C)
Page 2 of 2
D15 5496

2222 - 222nd St. SE
Asia / Pacific
T +1.631.812.6228
Canada
T +1.514.954.1840
Caribbean
T +1.954.593.1896
China
T +852.2774.9876
Colombia
T +57.1.743.6045
tel 1-800-824-3005
tel +1-425-486-2222
appeng@leviton.com
www.leviton.com
Europe
T +33.6.8869.1380
India / SAARC
T +971.4.886.4722
Mexico
T +52.55.5082.1040

T +971.4.886.4722
South Korea
T +82.2.3273.9963
Revised April 2015
Metal-Oxide Varistors (MOVs)

Radial Lead Varistors > UltraMOVTM Varistor Series
UltraMOVTM Varistor Series
RoHS
Description
The UltraMOV Metal Oxide Varistor Series is designed
for applications requiring high peak surge current ratings
and high energy absorption capability. UltraMOV
varistors are primarily intended for use in AC Line Voltage
applications such as Surge Protection Device (SPD),
Uninterruptable Power Supplies (UPS), AC Power Taps,
AC Power Meters, or other products that require voltage
clamping of high transient surge currents from sources
such as lightning, inductive load switching, or capacitor
bank switching.
Agency Approvals
Agency
Agency Approval
Agency File
Number
UL1449
E320116
CECC 42201-006
IEC 61051-1
IEC 61051-2
IEC 60950-1 (Annex Q) for 14mm
and 20mm only
116895
22.2-1
91788
CECC 42201-006
IEC 61051-1
IEC 61051-2
IEC 60950-1 (Annex Q) for 14mm
and 20mm only
E1273/F
Additional Information
Datasheet
Resources
These devices are produced in radial lead package

sizes of 7, 10,14 and 20mm and offered in a variety of
lead forms. UltraMOV varistor are manufactured with
recognized epoxy encapsulation and are rated for ambient
temperatures up to 85C with no derating. This Series is
LASER-branded and is supplied in bulk, ammo pack (fanfold), or tape and reel packaging.
Features
Leadfree, Halogen-Free Characterized for
and RoHS compliant.
maximum standby
current (Leakage)
High peak surge
current rating (ITM) up
Custom voltage
types available
to 10kA, single 8 x
20 pulse, (20mm)
Standard lead form and
lead space options
Standard operating
voltage range compatible
with common AC
line voltages (130
VAC to 625 VAC)
Samples
Absolute Maximum Ratings

For ratings of individual members of a series, see Device Ratings and Specifications chart
Continuous
UltraMOV Varistor Series
Units
130 to 625
1,750 to 10,000
Steady State Applied Voltage:

AC Voltage Range (VM(AC)RMS)
Transients:
Single-Pulse Peak Current (ITM) 8x20s Wave (See Figure 2)
12.5 to 400
Operating Ambient Temperature Range (TA)
Single-Pulse Energy Range (WTM) 2ms Square Wave
-55 to +85
Storage Temperature Range (TSTG)
-55 to +125
Temperature Coefficient (aV) of Clamping Voltage (VC) at Specified Test Current
<0.01
%/C
Hi-Pot Encapsulation (COATING Isolation Voltage Capability)
2500
COATING Insulation Resistance
1000
CAUTION: Stresses above those listed in "Absolute Maximum Ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress only rating and operation of the
device at these or any other conditions above those indicated in the operational sections of this specification is not implied.
2015 Littelfuse, Inc.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Revised: 03/06/15
Metal-Oxide Varistors (MOVs)
Radial Lead Varistors > UltraMOVTM Varistor Series
UltraMOV Series Ratings & Specifications

Maximum Rating (85C)
Continuous
Transient
Part Number
V07E130P
V10E130P
V14E130P
V20E130P
V07E140P
V10E140P
V14E140P
V20E140P
V07E150P
V10E150P
V14E150P
V20E150P
V07E175P
V10E175P
V14E175P
V20E175P
V07E230P
V10E230P
V14E230P
V20E230P
V07E250P
V10E250P
V14E250P
V20E250P
V07E275P
V10E275P
V14E275P
V20E275P
V07E300P
V10E300P
V14E300P
V20E300P
V07E320P
V10E320P
V14E320P
V20E320P
V07E385P
V10E385P
V14E385P
V20E385P
V07E420P
V10E420P
V14E420P
V20E420P
V07E440P
V10E440P
V14E440P
V20E440P
V07E460P
V10E460P
V14E460P
Branding
P7V130
P10V130
P14V130
P20V130
P7V140
P10V140
P14V140
P20V140
P7V150
P10V150
P14V150
P20V150
P7V175
P10V175
P14V175
P20V175
P7V230
P10V230
P14V230
P20V230
P7V250
P10V250
P14V250
P20V250
P7V275
P10V275
P14V275
P20V275
P7V300
P10V300
P14V300
P20V300
P7V320
P10V320
P14V320
P20V320
P7V385
P10V385
P14V385
P20V385
P7V420
P10V420
P14V420
P20V420
P7V440
P10V440
P14V440
P20V440
P7V460
P10V460
P14V460
RMS
Volts
DC
Volts
Energy
2ms
VM(AC)
VM(DC)
WTM
(V)
130
130
130
130
140
140
140
140
150
150
150
150
175
175
175
175
230
230
230
230
250
250
250
250
275
275
275
275
300
300
300
300
320
320
320
320
385
385
385
385
420
420
420
420
440
440
440
440
460
460
460
(V)
170
170
170
170
180
180
180
180
200
200
200
200
225
225
225
225
300
300
300
300
320
320
320
320
350
350
350
350
385
385
385
385
420
420
420
420
505
505
505
505
560
560
560
560
585
585
585
585
615
615
615
(J)
12.5
25
50
100
13.5
27.5
55
110
15
30
60
120
17
35
70
135
20
42
80
160
25
50
100
170
28
55
110
190
30
60
125
250
32
67
136
273
36
75
150
300
40
80
160
320
44
85
170
340
48
90
180
2015 Littelfuse, Inc.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Revised: 03/06/15
Peak Current
8 x 20s
ITM
ITM
1 x Pulse 2 x Pulse
(A)
(A)
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
Specifications (25C)
Maximum
Varistor Voltage
Clamping
Typical
at 1mA DC Test
Voltage
Capacitance
Current
8 x 20s
VNOM
VNOM
IPK
f = 1MHz
VC
Min
Max
(V)
(V)
(V)
(A)
(pF)
184.5
225.5
340
10
180
184.5
225.5
340
25
450
184.5
225.5
340
50
1000
184.5
225.5
340
100
1900
198
242
360
10
160
198
242
360
25
400
198
242
360
50
900
198
242
360
100
1750
216
264
395
10
150
216
264
395
25
360
216
264
395
50
800
216
264
395
100
1600
243
297
455
10
130
243
297
455
25
350
243
297
455
50
700
243
297
455
100
1400
324
396
595
10
100
324
396
595
25
250
324
396
595
50
550
324
396
595
100
1100
351
429
650
10
90
351
429
650
25
220
351
429
650
50
500
351
429
650
100
1000
387
473
710
10
80
387
473
710
25
200
387
473
710
50
450
387
473
710
100
900
423
517
775
10
70
423
517
775
25
180
423
517
775
50
400
423
517
775
100
800
459
561
840
10
65
459
561
840
25
170
459
561
840
50
380
459
561
840
100
750
558
682
1025
10
60
558
682
1025
25
160
558
682
1025
50
360
558
682
1025
100
700
612
748
1120
10
55
612
748
1120
25
140
612
748
1120
50
300
612
748
1120
100
600
643.5
786.5
1180
10
50
643.5
786.5
1180
25
130
643.5
786.5
1180
50
260
643.5
786.5
1180
100
500
675
825
1240
10
45
675
825
1240
25
120
675
825
1240
50
220

600 Volts
Specifications:
Connector, High Conductive Aluminum,

Tin Plated
Amp Rating Based on NEC Table 310-16
Using 75 C Copper Wire
*Wire Connector Rated 90 C
UL Recognized File No. E62806
CSA Certified File No. LR19766
Poles
1411403
1412403
1413403
1414403
1411400
1412400
1413400
1414400
1320570
1321570
1322570
1323570
1421570
1422570
1423570
1320580
1321580
1322580
1323580
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Adder
1
2
3
1
2
3
Adder
1
2
3
1402402
1403402
Load Wire
Range
Openings
Per Pole
#10-#18
AWG
#2-#14
AWG
#10-#16
AWG
2/0-#14
AWG
**
#4-#14
AWG
2/0-#14
AWG
**
#4-#14
AWG
2/0-#14
AWG
**
#4-#14
AWG
2/0-#14
AWG
Phenolic
2/0-#14
AWG
310
Phenolic
350 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#4-#14
AWG
310
Thermoplastic
350 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#2/0-#14
AWG
335
Phenolic
400 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#2-#14
AWG
335
Phenolic
400 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#2-#14
AWG
335
Phenolic
400 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#2-#14
AWG
335
Phenolic
400 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#2-#14
AWG
335
Thermoplastic
400 kcmil
- #6 AWG
***
#2-#14
AWG
Amps
Material
60
Thermoplastic
115
Thermoplastic
175
Thermoplastic
175
Phenolic
175
Thermoplastic
2
3
175
Phenolic
1402401
1403401
2
3
175
1402404
1403404
2
3
1331554
1332554
1333554
1441401
1442401
1443401
1431552
1432552
1433552
1431553
1432553
1433553
1441560
1442560
1443560
1331552
1332552
1333552
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Connector
Configuration
*** Openings rated for #2-14 AWG are multiple wire rated:
(2) #8 CU Str, (2) #10 CU Str, (2) #12 CU Str, And
(2) #14 CU Str
Line Wire
Range
Openings
Per Pole
#2-#14
AWG
*
*
39
Connector
Configuration
**
#4-#14
AWG
**
#4-#14
AWG
4
6
Power Blocks
Catalog #
** Openings rated for #4-14 AWG are multiple wire rated:

(2) #10 CU Str, (2 to 4) #12 CU Str, and (2 to 4) #14 CU Str.

600 Volts
Specifications:
Connector, High Conductive Aluminum,

Tin Plated
Amp Rating Based on NEC Table 310-16
Using 75 C Copper Wire
*Wire Connector Rated 90 C
UL Recognized File No. E62806
Poles
1411403
1412403
1413403
1414403
1411400
1412400
1413400
1414400
1320570
1321570
1322570
1323570
1421570
1422570
1423570
1320580
1321580
1322580
1323580
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Adder
1
2
3
1
2
3
Adder
1
2
3
1402402
1403402
Load Wire
Range
Openings
Per Pole
#10-#18
AWG
#2-#14
AWG
#10-#16
AWG
2/0-#14
AWG
**
#4-#14
AWG
2/0-#14
AWG
**
#4-#14
AWG
2/0-#14
AWG
**
#4-#14
AWG
2/0-#14
AWG
Phenolic
2/0-#14
AWG
310
Phenolic
350 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#4-#14
AWG
310
Thermoplastic
350 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#2/0-#14
AWG
335
Phenolic
400 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#2-#14
AWG
335
Phenolic
400 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#2-#14
AWG
335
Phenolic
400 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#2-#14
AWG
335
Phenolic
400 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#2-#14
AWG
335
Thermoplastic
400 kcmil
- #6 AWG
***
#2-#14
AWG
Amps
Material
60
Thermoplastic
115
Thermoplastic
175
Thermoplastic
175
Phenolic
175
Thermoplastic
2
3
175
Phenolic
1402401
1403401
2
3
175
1402404
1403404
2
3
1331554
1332554
1333554
1441401
1442401
1443401
1431552
1432552
1433552
1431553
1432553
1433553
1441560
1442560
1443560
1331552
1332552
1333552
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Connector
Configuration
*** Openings rated for #2-14 AWG are multiple wire rated:
(2) #8 CU Str, (2) #10 CU Str, (2) #12 CU Str, And
(2) #14 CU Str
Line Wire
Range
Openings
Per Pole
#2-#14
AWG
*
*
39
Connector
Configuration
**
#4-#14
AWG
**
#4-#14
AWG
4
6
Power Blocks
Catalog #
** Openings rated for #4-14 AWG are multiple wire rated:

(2) #10 CU Str, (2 to 4) #12 CU Str, and (2 to 4) #14 CU Str.
Power Splicer Blocks

600 Volts
Specifications:
Catalog #
For detailed SCCR information, please visit www.marathonsp.com
Hinge
Cover
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
Poles
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
Adder
1
2
3
1
2
3
2
3
1
2
3
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Connector
Configuration
Line Wire
Range
Openings
Connector Load Wire Openings
Per Pole Configuration
Range
Per Pole
Amps
Material
115
Thermoplastic
#2 - #14
AWG
#2 - #14
AWG
115
Phenolic
#2 - #14
AWG
#2 - #14
AWG
175
Thermoplastic
#2/0 - #14
AWG
#2/0 - #14
AWG
175
Phenolic
#2/0 - #14
AWG
#2/0 - #14
AWG
255
Phenolic
250 kcmil
- #6 AWG
250 kcmil
- #6 AWG
255
Phenolic
250 kcmil
- #6 AWG
250 kcmil
- #6 AWG
310
Phenolic
350 kcmil
- #6 AWG
350 kcmil
- #6 AWG
310
Phenolic
350 kcmil
- #6 AWG
350 kcmil
- #6 AWG
310
Thermoplastic
350 kcmil
- #6 AWG
350 kcmil
- #6 AWG
350
Thermoplastic
#2/0 -#14
AWG
#2/0 -#14
AWG
420
Phenolic
600 kcmil
- #4 AWG
600 kcmil
- #4 AWG
420
Thermoplastic
600 kcmil
- #2 AWG
600 kcmil
- #2 AWG
510
Thermoplastic
250 kcmil
- #1/0 AWG
250 kcmil
- #1/0 AWG
620
Phenolic
350 kcmil
- #4 AWG
350 kcmil
- #4 AWG
CH = Available with hinge cover attached (See page 54 for available covers)
See pages 56-59 for dimensional information
47
Power Blocks
1411300
1412300
1413300
1414300
1421552
1422552
1423552
1320572
1321572
1322572
1323572
1421572
1422572
1423572
1402801
1403801
1431123
1432123
1433123
1402303
1403303
1431126
1432126
1433126
1331126
1332126
1333126
1331305
1332305
1333305
1441557
1442557
1443557
1331360
1332360
1333360
1331320
1332320
1333320
1451129
1452129
1453129
Connector, High Conductive Aluminum, Tin Plated

Rated for Copper and Aluminum Wire
Amp Rating Based on NEC Table 310-16 Using 75C and 90C Copper Wire
UL Recognized File No. XCFR2.E62806
ATQR Time-delay/Class CC
Take control of fault currents headed for your control
transformer
ATQR small-dimension fuses feature time-delay characteristics ideally suited for the
high inrush currents of control transformers, solenoids, and similar inductive loads.
Mersens ATQR fuses provide superior protection for the branch circuits of electrical
distribution systems.
Features/Benefits:
Time-delay for control transformer inrush loads without nuisance opening

Highly current-limiting for low peak let-thru current
Rejection-style design prevents replacement errors (when used with
recommended fuse blocks)
High visibility orange label ensures instant brand recognition, and simplifies
replacement
Metal-embossed date and catalog number for traceability and lasting

identification
Fiberglass body provides dimensional stability in harsh industrial settings

High-grade silica filler ensures fast arc quenching and high current
limitation
Highlights:
Time-delay
Best choice for small transformer
protection
Current-limiting
Applications:
Ratings:
Volts : 600VAC

: 300VDC
Amps : 1/10 to 30A

IR
: 200kA I.R. AC
: 100kA I.R. DC
Control transformers
Solenoids
Inductive loads
Lighting, heating & generalpurpose loads
Note: See motor fuse applications

tables on page P7
Approvals:
UL listed to standard 248-4

File E2137
DC listed to UL standard 248

CSA certified to standard
C22.2 No. 248.4
A10
ATQR Time-delay/Class CC
ATQR1/10
ATQR8/10
ATQR2-8/10
ATQR7-1/2
ATQR1/8
ATQR1
ATQR3
ATQR8
ATQR3/16
ATQR1-1/8
ATQR3-2/10
ATQR9
ATQR2/10
ATQR1-1/4
ATQR3-1/2
ATQR10
ATQR1/4
ATQR1-4/10
ATQR4
ATQR12
ATQR3/10
ATQR1-1/2
ATQR4-1/2
ATQR15
ATQR4/10
ATQR1-6/10
ATQR5
ATQR17-1/2
ATQR1/2
ATQR1-8/10
ATQR5-6/10
ATQR20
ATQR6/10
ATQR2
ATQR6
ATQR25
ATQR2-1/4
ATQR6-1/4
ATQR30
ATQR2-1/2
ATQR7
ATQR3/4
Catalog Numbers (amps)
Recommended Fuse Blocks for Class CC Fuses

Catalog Numbers
Number
of
Poles
UltraSafe
Indicating
Fuse Holder
ADDER
Screw
Connector
w/ Double
Quick Connects
Pressure Plate
Connector
w/ Double
Quick Connects
Copper
Box
Connector
30310R
30320R
30350R
USCC1I
30311R
30321R
30351R
USCC2I
30312R
30322R
30352R
USCC3I
30313R
30323R
30353R
USFMCCI
Dimensions
For the most current product performance data visit us-ferrazshawmut.mersen.com and use catalog search.
A11
Contents chapter 3
Communication
Communication selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/2
3.1 - Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

b Embedded Web services
v Standard web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/4
v FactoryCast web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/5
v SOAP/XML Web services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/6
b Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication services

v Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/8
v Ethernet universal services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/9
v
v
v
v
v
v
Modbus communication protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/11

I/O Scanning service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/12
FDR replacement service for faulty devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/13
NTP time synchronization service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/13
Global Data service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/14
SNMP network management service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/15
b Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/16
b Description, specifications and references
v Ethernet solutions with Modicon platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/21

v Processors with integrated Ethernet port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/21
v Ethernet Modbus/TCP modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/21
b ConneXium cabling systems
v
v
v
v
v
Infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hub and transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unmanaged switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managed switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3/24
3/26
3/28
3/30
3/33
3.2 - CANopen machine and installation bus

b Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/38
b Connectable devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/38
b Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/40
b Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/40
b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/41
b Wiring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/42
3.3 - Serial link

b Modbus and character mode serial link
v Introduction, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/44
v Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/45
v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/45
b Wiring system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/46
10
3/1
Selection guide
Modicon M340
automation platform
Communication, integrated ports and modules
Applications
Processors with integrated

Ethernet Modbus/TCP port
Type
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
Ethernet Modbus/TCP modules
Structure
Physical interface
Connector type
Access method
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
RJ45
CSMA-CD
Data rate
10/100 Mbit/s
Medium
Configuration
Maximum number of devices

Maximum length
Number of links of the same type per
station
Other integrated port
Double twisted pair copper cable, category CAT 5E

Optical fiber via ConneXium wiring system
100 m (copper cable), 4,000 m (multi-mode optical fiber), 32,500 m (single-mode optical fiber)
1 (integrated port)
With BMX P34 1000 processor:
1 Ethernet module
With BMX P34 2000/2010 processor:
2 Ethernet modules
With BMX P34 2020/2030 processor:
2 Ethernet modules and 1 processor
integrated port
Serial link
CANopen bus
Standard services
Modbus/TCP messaging
Conformity class
Transparent Ready class B10
Embedded web server Standard services

services
Configurable services
Rack viewer PLC diagnostics

Data editor access to PLC data and variables
Transparent Ready
class B30
Alarm viewer
Graphic Data
Editor
Hosting and display
of user web pages
(14 Mb)
7
I/O Scanning service
Global Data service
NTP time synchronization
FDR service
SMTP E-mail notification service
Yes (client)
Yes, via EF function block of Unity Pro u 4.0
Yes
Yes
Yes (version module u 2.0)
Yes (client/server)
SOAP/XML Web services

SNMP network management service
Bandwidth management
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Compatibility with processor
Standard and Performance processors
Processor or module
BMX P34 2020
Page
3/22
Transparent Ready
communication
services
Transparent Ready
class C30
10
3/2
BMX P34 2030
BMX NOE 0100
3/23
Server
BMX NOE 0110
Processors with integrated machine and installation bus
Processors with integrated serial link
CANopen
Modbus and Character mode
ISO 11898 (9-way SUB-D connector)

9-way SUB-D
CSMA/CA (multiple access)
20 Kbit/s...1 Mbit/s depending on distance
Non-isolated, 4-wire RS 232/2-wire RS 485

RJ45
Master/slave with Modbus link,
Half duplex (RS 485)/Full duplex (RS 232) in character mode
0.3...19.2 Kbit/s
Double shielded twisted pair copper cable
Double shielded twisted pair copper cable
63 (1)
20 m (1 Mbit/s)...2,500 m (20 Kbit/s)
1
32 per segment, 247 max.

15 m (non-isolated), 1,000 m with insulating case
1
5
Serial link
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
CANopen
- PDO implicit exchange (application data)

- SDO explicit exchange (service data)
Class M20
Read/write bits and words, diagnostics with Modbus link

Send and receive character string in character mode
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
Yes, via EF function block of

Unity Pro u 4.0
BMX P34 2010
BMX P34 2030
BMX P34 1000

BMX P34 2000
9
BMX P34 2010
BMX P34 2020
3/41
3/45
(1) The maximum is 63, and depends on the type of the devices that are connected. It may be necessary to create a memory space table. See pages 6/8 and 6/9.
3/3
10
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction,
functions
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

Web services
Overview of the web services
In conformity with Schneider Electric Ethernet products (processors and Ethernet
modules on Modicon automation platforms, distributed I/O modules, variable speed
drives and gateways), standard web functions are integrated in BMX P34 2020/2030
processors and the BMX NOE 0100/110 Ethernet network modules on the
Modicon M340 platform.
From a simple Internet browser, the standard web server authorizes the following
ready-to-use functions:
b Remote diagnostics and maintenance of products
b Display and adjustment of products (read/write variables, status)
With the BMX NOE 0110 Ethernet network module supplied as standard with
BMX RWS FC032M memory card, the web server also offers the following functions:
b Management of PLC alarms (system and application) with partial or total
acknowledgement (ready-to-use Alarm Viewer function pages).
b Hosting and display of web pages created by the user.
The embedded web server is a realtime data server. The data can be presented in
the form of standard web pages in HTML format and can be accessed using any web
browser that supports the embedded Java code. The standard functions provided by
the web server are supplied ready-to-use and do not require any programming of
either the PLC or the client PC device supporting a web browser.
Standard web server on the Modicon M340 platform

Rack Viewer PLC diagnostics function
The Rack Viewer function can be used for PLC system and I/O diagnostics. It
displays the following in realtime:
b LED status on the front panel of the PLC
b The PLC type and version
b The hardware configuration of the PLC including the status of the system bits and
words
b Detailed diagnostics of:
v I/O module channels or application-specific channels in the configuration
v equipment connected on the CANopen bus.
6
Data Editor read/write function for PLC data and variables
Modicon M340 hardware configuration
The Data Editor function can be used to create tables of animated variables for
realtime read/write access to PLC data in the form of lists.
Various animation tables containing specific application variables to be monitored or
modified can be created by the user and saved in the standard web server module.
In addition when using FactoryCast web server of

the BMX NOE 0110 module:
b The variables can be entered and displayed by their
symbol (S_Pump 234)
b The write access option can be enable/desable for
each variable using the FactoryCast software. The
write access is protected by a dedicated password
b Dedicated data monitoring tool can be use on
pocket PC or PDA terminal.
9
Data editor variables table
.
10
Specifications:
pages 3/22
3/4
References:
pages 3/22
Functions (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
FactoryCast web services
BMX NOE 0110 module FactoryCast web server
Alarm display from the diagnostic buffer
With the BMX NOE 0110 Ethernet network module, the web server offers in addition
to the standard web services, the functions below:
Alarm Viewer function

Alarm Viewer is a ready-to-use, password-protected function. This function can be
used to process alarms (display, acknowledgment and deletion) managed at PLC
level by the system or using diagnostic function blocks known as DFBs
(system-specific diagnostic function blocks and application-specific diagnostic
function blocks created by the user).
These alarms are stored in the diagnostic buffer managed by the Modicon M340
platform (special memory space for storing the diagnostics events).
.
The diagnostics viewer is a web page comprised of a list of messages that provide
the following information for each alarm:
v Dates and times of the occurrence/removal of a detected fault
v Alarm message
v Alarm status
v Type of associated diagnostic function block (DFB)
Graphic Data Editor function
This function is used to create the graphic views animated by the PLC variables that
can be accessed via their address or their symbol (access to located data). The
ready-to-use graphic editor is available online, connected to the BMX NOE 0110
module.
Library of predefined graphic objects
These views are created from a library of predefined graphic objects by simple
copy/paste operations. The objects are configured to suit the users requirements
(color, PLC variables, name, and so on).
List of proposed graphic objects:
b Analog and digital indicators
b Horizontal and vertical bar charts
b Boxes for displaying messages and entering values
b Push-button boxes
b Functions for recording trends
b Vats, valves, motors, and so on
Customized graphic objects can be added to this list. They can be reused in user
web pages that have been created using standard software for editing HTML pages.
The views created are saved in the BMX NOE 0110 module and displayed using any
web browser.
User web page hosting and display function
The BMX NOE 0110 Ethernet network module has a 16 Mbyte non-volatile memory
(accessible as a hard disk). This allows hosting of web pages and any user-defined
Word or Acrobat Reader document (for example, maintenance manuals, wiring
diagrams, etc).
The web pages can be created using any standard tool for creation and editing in
HTML format. These pages can be enhanced by inserting animated graphic objects
linked to PLC variables. These animated objects are created using the Graphic Data
Editor. They are then downloaded to the BMX NOE 0110 module via configuration
software of FactoryCast web server.
Realtime supervision graphic interface
The web pages created can be used, for example, to:

b Display and modify PLC variables in real time
b Create hyperlinks to other external web servers (documentation, suppliers)
This function is particularly suitable for creating graphic interfaces used for the
following purposes:
v Realtime display and supervision
v Production monitoring
v Diagnostics and help with maintenance
v Operator guides
10
3/5
Modicon M340
automation platform
FactoryCast web services and SOAP/XML web services
FactoryCast web server configuration software
The FactoryCast web server configuration software is supplied on CD-ROM with the
BMX NOE 0110 FactoryCast module.
This software is used for configuration and administration of the web server
embedded in these modules. It is compatible with Microsoft Windows 2000 and
Windows XP operating systems. It provides the following functions:
b Setting the parameters of the FactoryCast functions
v Definition of access security, passwords
v Importing of PLC symbol databases
v Definition of access to write-enabled variables
b Management of the web site:
v Management of default web site pages
v Management of user web site pages
v Graphic object editor for animating web pages
v Downloading of web pages between the PC and the module
v Debugging of web pages in online mode or in simulation mode (including
animations and Java beans)
b Simulation mode
The application and the web site (including the Java animations) can be set up in
online mode or in simulation mode. Simulation mode is used to test the operation of
the web application without a FactoryCast module (with no physical connection to a
PLC) which simplifies debugging.
A graphics editor integrated in the configuration software can be used to easily
customize graphic objects (bar charts, gauges, LEDs, curves, cursors, operator
input fields, alphanumeric display fields, buttons, etc).
b Creation of user web pages (1)
Web pages are created graphically using an external HTML editor (Microsoft
FrontPage or similar, not supplied).
Web pages created in the FactoryCast environment are actual animated supervision
screens used to monitor your process. Based on HTML and Java web technologies,
they provide realtime access to PLC variables using the FactoryCast graphic object
library (Java beans).
The BMX NOE 0110 FactoryCast module incorporates a standard SOAP/XML data
server that provides direct interoperability between automation devices and computer
management applications (for example, MES, ERP, SAP, pNet application).
SOAP/XML web services
SOAP/XML web Services embedded in the PLC

Communication between platforms or applications is now a necessity in a market
where e-manufacturing and e-business are an essential fact of life for companies.
web service technology currently represents the most successful strategy for helping
to ensure interoperability of heterogeneous software applications via an Intranet or
the Internet, independently of any platform, operating system and programming
language.
The standardization of web services is a result of joint development between

Microsoft and IBM, which was validated at the W3C (World Wide Web
Consortium) as an open standard. It now provides the tools, specifications and
environments needed for each platform.
Web services are based on standards such as:

b XML (eXtensible Markup Language): the universal standard for data exchange
b SOAP (Single Object Access Protocol) protocol carried via the HTTP (Hyper Text
Transfer Protocol) channel.
b WSDL (web Services Description Language) the web Services description
languag, in XML format.
SOAP is currently considered to be the reference protocol. It has been adopted by
Microsoft (pNET, SQL Server, Office, etc), IBM (Java, web Sphere), Lotus, ORACLE,
Sub, SAP, and others.
(1) FactoryCast includes a plug-in for Microsoft FrontPage 2000. This plug-in makes it easier to
set up animations for realtime access to the PLC variables in user created HTML pages.
Pages are created in the HTML editor by inserting customized graphic objects.
10
Specifications:
pages 3/22
3/6
References:
pages 3/22
Modicon M340
automation platform

SOAP/XML web services
SOAP/XML web services (continued)
Embedded SOAP/XML web Services: ModbusXMLDa web services
This new Transparent Ready service offers the previously unused (or uncommon)
possibility of making an IT/e-business application interact directly with the control
system levels using the same standards.
With the implementation of ModbusXMLDa (Modbus XML Data access) web
services in FactoryCast web servers, the IT engineer can easily create applications
that will directly access the desired information in the PLC in real time. Data
exchanges are made in XML standard format in response to a request using
SOAP protocol.
The implementation of web services in control system equipment makes it easy to
achieve vertical integration of the control level and the creation of even more
collaborative architectures. These architectures can be used to link production
systems to the corporate management systems. It brings simplified access to
information, a reduction in the costs of training, development and deployments
costs, plus an increase in productivity.
Development tool
SOAP server
WSDL
1, 2
Visual Studio pNET
SOAP
request
BMX NOE 0110
FactoryCast
module
Implementation of the ModbusXMLDa web services: server interface

This implementation enables a SOAP client application (management level
computer application, MES, ERP) to communicate directly with a FactoryCast web
server module embedded in the PLC.
Exchanges are initiated by the SOAP client application and the server responds to
these requests.
b Step 1: Creation of the client application with web services training.
The development environment (for example, Visual Studio pNET) looks in the
FactoryCast server for the list of available services and their WSDL standard
interfaces provided by the module.
b Step 2: Development of the client application. The developer integrates the
web service functions using the code retrieved during training.
b Step 3: Execution of the client application. The client application communicates
in real time with the FactoryCast web server module using the SOAP protocol.
Requests implemented in the BMX NOE 0110 FactoryCast module listed provide
either physical or symbolic variables data access. They are defined in the table
below.
pNET Java
Access to data via

physical address
ModbusXMLDa functions implemented in each FactoryCast

module
ReadDeviceIdentification
ReadMultipleRegisters
WriteMultipleRegisters
ReadCoils
WriteMultipleCoils
ReadDiscreteInputs
Access to data via symbol Read, operation to read item list value
Write, operation to write item list value
Browse, operation to browse item list
10
Specifications:
pages 3/22
References:
pages 3/22
3/7
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction

Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication services
Introduction
BMX P34 2020/2030 processors, via their integrated Ethernet port (class 10) and the
BMX NOE 0100/0110 network module (class 30) provide transparent
communication on a single Ethernet Modbus/TCP network.
Services
Applications
Transportation
Network
management
Global
Data
SMTP
NTP
Transport
FDR automatic reconfiguration
RTPS
UDP
DHCP
FTP
TFTP
Web
server
E-mail
HTTP
SMTP
TCP
UDP
Messaging
I/O
Scanning
Modbus
TCP
IP
Link
IP
3
Physical
MIB Transparent Ready
Ethernet 802.3 - Ethernet II
In addition to universal Ethernet services (HTTP, BOOTP/DHCP, and FTP) the

Transparent Ready device communication services designed for use in automation
applications include:
b Modbus/TCP messaging for class 10 or 30 devices
b I/O Scanning service for class 30 devices
b FDR (Faulty Device Replacement) for class 10 or 30 devices
b SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) network management for class 10
or 30 devices
b Global Data, for class 30 devices
b Bandwidth management for class 10 or 30 devices
b NTP time synchronization (Network Time Protocol) for class 30 devices
b Electronic mail notification via SMTP server with function block of Unity Pro.
Note: The Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication services depends on the type of processor or
Ethernet module. For details, see Specifications of BMX P34 2020/2030 (page 3/22) or
BMX NOE 0100/0110 Ethernet modules (page 3/23).
Pages 3/9 to 3/21 present the various options available through these services to
facilitate the optimum choice of solutions when defining a system integrating
Transparent Ready devices.
10
Introduction:
pages 3/4
3/8
Performance:
pages 3/16
Selection:
page 3/21
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
Modicon M340
automation platform
Functions

Functions
Ethernet universal services
HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (RFC1945)
The HTTP protocol (HyperText Transfer Protocol) is a protocol used to transmit Web
pages between a server and a browser. HTTP has been used on the Web since
1990.
Web servers embedded in Transparent Ready automation products provide easy
access to products located anywhere in the world from a standard Internet browser
such as Internet Explorer.
BOOTP/DHCP (RFC1531)
BOOTP/DHCP is used to supply devices with IP parameters automatically. This

avoids having to manage each device address individually by transferring this
management to a dedicated IP address server.
The DHCP protocol (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used to assign
configuration parameters to devices automatically. DHCP is an extension of BOOTP.
The DHCP protocol consists of 2 components:
b One to supply the IP network address.
b One to supply the specific IP parameters to the device from a DHCP server.
Schneider Electric devices can be:
b BOOTP clients used to retrieve the IP address automatically from a server.
b BOOTP servers allowing the device to distribute IP addresses to the network
stations.
Schneider Electric has used BOOTP/DHCP standard protocols to offer the FDR
(Faulty Device Replacement) service.
FTP File Transfer Protocol (RFCs 959, 2228, and 2640)
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) provides the basic elements for file sharing. The FTP
protocol is used by several systems to exchange files between devices.
TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol (updated firmware)
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) is a network transfer protocol used to connect
to a device and download code to it.
For example, it can be used to transfer a boot code to a workstation without a disk
drive or to connect and download updates of network device firmware.
Note: Transparent Ready devices implement FTP and TFTP to transfer certain information to or
from products, in particular for downloads of firmware or user-defined Web pages.
10
Introduction:
pages 3/4
Performance:
pages 3/16
Selection:
page 3/21
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
3/9
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet universal services (continued)
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol (RFCs 1155, 1156 and 1157)
The Internet community has developed the SNMP standard to manage the various
network components via a single system. The network management system can
exchange data with SNMP agent devices. This function allows the manager to
display the status of the network and products, modify their configuration and feed
back alarms in the event of a detected fault.
Note: Transparent Ready products are compatible with SNMP and can be integrated naturally
in a network administered via SNMP.
COM/DCOM Distributed Component Object Model
COM/DCOM (Distributed Component Object Model) or OLE (Object Linking and

Embedding) is the name of the technology consisting of Microsoft Windows
objects that enables transparent communication between Windows applications.
Note: These technologies are used in the OFS (OLE for Process Control Factory Server) data
server software.
10
Introduction:
pages 3/4
3/10
Performance:
pages 3/16
Selection:
page 3/21
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
Modicon M340
automation platform

Modbus/TCP function codes
Bit access Read n input bits
Read n output bits
Read exception status
Write 1 output bit
Write n output bits
Read 1 input word
Read n input words
Write 1 output word
Write n output words
Read device ID
dec
02
01
07
05
15
04
03
06
16
43/14
hex
02
01
07
05
0F
04
03
06
10
2B/0E
Examples of Modbus/TCP function codes for accessing

data and diagnostics.
Modbus standard communication protocol

Modbus, the industry communication standard since 1979 has been brought
together with Ethernet Modbus/TCP, the medium for the Internet revolution, to form
Modbus/TCP, a totally open protocol on Ethernet. The development of a connection
to Modbus/TCP does not require any proprietary component, nor purchase of a
license.
This protocol can easily be combined with any product supporting a standard
Modbus/TCP communication stack. The specifications can be obtained free of
charge from the following web site: www.modbus-ida.org.
Modbus/TCP, simple and open
The Modbus application layer is very simple and universally familiar with its 9 million
installed connections. Thousands of manufacturers are already using this protocol.
Many have already developed a Modbus/TCP connection and numerous products
are presently available.
The simplicity of Modbus/TCP enables a field device, such as an I/O module, to
communicate on Ethernet without the need for a powerful microprocessor or a large
amount of internal memory.
Modbus/TCP, high-performance
Due to the simplicity of its protocol and the fast speed of 100 Mbps Ethernet, the
performance of Modbus/TCP is excellent. This allows this type of network to be used
in realtime applications such as I/O scanning.
Modbus/TCP, a standard
The application protocol is identical on serial link Modbus, Modbus Plus or

Modbus/TCP. This means that messages can be routed from one network to the
other without converting protocol.
Since Modbus is implemented on top of the Modbus/TCP layer, users can also
benefit from IP routing enabling devices located anywhere in the world to
communicate without worrying about the distance between them.
Schneider Electric offers a complete range of gateways for connecting a
Modbus/TCP network to existing Modbus Plus networks, a Modbus serial link or
AS-Interface bus. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
The IANA organization (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority) has allocated the
fixed port TCP 502 (Well known port) to the Modbus protocol. Thus Modbus has
become an Internet standard.
A study by the ARC Advisory Group, the market leader in analysis of the automation
and software sectors, has shown that Modbus/TCP is the world-leading Ethernet
industrial protocol in terms of units sold in 2004.
Modbus and Modbus/TCP are recognized by the IEC/EN 61158 international
standard as a fieldbus. They are also compliant with the Chinese National Standard
managed by ITEI.
Interfacing CANopen with Modbus/TCP
CiA DSP 309-2 provides standardized organization of CANopen data to be carried

on a Modbus/TCP Ethernet network. The specification reserves the Modbus 43/13
function code for this purpose. This function code is reserved exclusively for
CANopen.
Specifications of Modbus/TCP
Maximum size of data:

b Read: 125 words or registers
b Write: 100 words or registers
10
Introduction:
pages 3/4
Performance:
pages 3/16
Selection:
page 3/21
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
3/11
Modicon M340
automation platform
Word table
Read
1
Write
2
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
Input words
Output words
of devices
1 Modicon M340 equipment with I/O Scanning service

supported by BMX NOE 01p0 Ethernet module.
2 Device supporting a modbus TCP messaging in server
mode.
The I/O Scanning Service is used to manage the exchange of remote I/O states on
the Ethernet network after simple configuration, without the need for any special
programming.
I/O scanning is performed transparently by means of read/write requests according
to the Modbus client/server protocol on the Modbus/TCP profile.
This scanning principle via a standard protocol is used to communicate between a
equipment with the I/O Scanning service with any device supporting a Modbus TCP in
mode server.
This service allows you to define:
b A%MW word zone reserved for reading inputs.
b A%MW word zone reserved for writing outputs.
b Refresh periods independent of the PLC scan.
During operation, the module:
b Manages Modbus/TCP connections for each remote device.
b Scans devices and copies the I/O to the configured %MW word zone .
b Feeds back status words used to check that the service is working correctly from
the PLC application.
b Applies pre-configured fallback values if a communication problem occurs
An offer of hardware and software products used to implement the I/O Scanning
protocol on any type of device that can be connected to the Ethernet network is
available (please consult the Modbus-IDA web site: www.modbus-ida.org).
Specifications
b Each Modicon M340 station can exchange a maximum of:

v 100 write words
v 125 read words
b Maximum size in the Modicon M340 PLC that manages the service (64 stations max.)
with BMX NOE 0100/0110 network module, 2 %MW Kwords as inputs and
2 %MW Kwords as outputs.
Diagnostics of the I/O Scanning service
There are 5 ways to perform diagnostics on the I/O Scanning service:

b Via the application program from a specific PLC data zone.
b From the setup software debug screen.
b From the PLC system diagnostic function displayed by means of an internet
browser on a PC station.
b From the ConneXium diagnostic software TCS EAZ 01P SFE10.
b From the standard SNMP manager software.
10
Introduction:
pages 3/4
3/12
Performance:
pages 3/16
Selection:
page 3/21
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
Modicon M340
automation platform
FDR (Faulty Device Replacement) service
The faulty device replacement service uses standard address management
technologies (BOOTP, DHCP) and the TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) file
management service, in the aim of simplifying maintenance of Ethernet products.
It is used to replace an inoperative device with a new device that will be detected,
reconfigured and automatically rebooted by the system.
The main steps in replacement are:
1 A device using the FDR service becomes inoperative.

2 Another similar device is taken from the maintenance store, preconfigured with the Device
name for the inoperative device, then reinstalled on the network. Depending on the devices,
addressing can be performed using spin buttons (for example, Modicon STB distributed I/O,
a or Modicon OTB) or can be given via the keypad integrated in the device (for example
Altivar variable speed drives).
3 The FDR server detects the new device, allocates it an IP address and transfers the
configuration parameters to it.
4 The substituted device checks that these parameters are indeed compatible with its own
specifications and switches to operational mode.
NIM network module for

Modicon STB I/O
The FDR server can be a Ethernet module, BMX NOE 0100/0110.
NTP time synchronization service

Introduction
Modicon M340
BMX CPS
power
supply
Processor
BMX NOE
module
Internal
clock
NTP
server
NTP request
NTP
client
Ethernet network
NTP response
The time synchronization service is based on the NTP (Network Time Protocol) that
is used to synchronize the time of a client or a server on Ethernet from a server or
another reference time source (radio, satellite, etc).
Operation
BMX NOE 0100/0110 Ethernet communication modules have an NTP client

component. These modules can connect to an NTP server using a client request
(Unicast) to update their local time. The module clock is updated periodically (1 to
120 s) with a precision of 5 ms for processors. If the NTP server cannot be reached,
the Ethernet module switches to a standby NTP server.
The Modicon M340 processor clock is updated with a precision of 5 ms. A function
block is available for reading this clock. In each Unity Pro application, events or
variables can be time-stamped.
The Ethernet module is configured via a Web page. The time zone can be
configured. A time synchronization service (NTP) diagnostic Web page is also
available.
Information on the time synchronization service (NTP) is also available in the
Transparent Ready private MIB that can be accessed via the SNMP network
management service.
10
Introduction:
pages 3/4
Performance:
pages 3/16
Selection:
page 3/21
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
3/13
Modicon M340
automation platform
Global Data service
Distribution group 1
Data exchange 4 Kb max.
IP multicast 239.255.255.251
Modicon Premium
2
Modicon Quantum
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
Modicon Premium
Modicon M340
IP multicast 239.255.255.250
Data exchange 4 Kb max.
Distribution group 2
The Global Data service exchanges data in real time between stations belonging to
the same distribution group. It is used to synchronize remote applications, or even to
share a common database between a number of distributed applications.
Exchanges are based on a producer/consumer type standard protocol, helping to
guarantee optimum performances with a minimum load on the network. This RTPS
(Real Time Publisher Subscriber) protocol is promoted by Modbus-IDA (Interface for
Distributed Automation), and is already a standard adopted by several
manufacturers.
Specifications
A maximum of 64 stations can participate in Global Data within a single distribution

group.
Each station can:
b Publish 1 variable of 1024 bytes. The publication period can be configured from
1 to n processor master task (Mast) periods.
b Subscribe between 1 and 64 variables. The validity of each variable is controlled
by status bits (Health Status bits) linked to a refresh timeout configurable between 50
ms and 1 s. Access to an element of the variable is not possible. The total size of
subscribed variables amounts to 4 contiguous Kbytes.
To further optimize the performance of the Ethernet network, Global Data can be
configured with the multicast filtering option enabled. This, when combined with
switches in the ConneXium range, will distribute data only to Ethernet ports where
there is a station subscribed to the Global Data service. If these switches are not
used, Global Data is sent in multicast mode to each switch port.
Global Data service diagnostics
The diagnostic screens show the status of Global Data using a color code:
b Configured/not configured/detected fault
b Published/subscribed
There are 5 ways to perform diagnostics on the Global Data service:

b Via the application program from a specific PLC data zone.
b From the setup software debug screen.
b From the PLC system diagnostic function displayed by means of an internet
browser on a PC station.
b From the ConneXium diagnostic software TCS EAZ 01P SFE10.
b From the standard SNMP manager software.
10
Introduction:
pages 3/4
3/14
Performance:
pages 3/16
Selection:
page 3/21
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
Modicon M340
automation platform
SNMP network management service
From a network management station, the SNMP (Simple Network Management
Protocol) protocol monitors and checks components of the Ethernet architecture and
thus helps ensure quick diagnostics in the event of a problem.
It is used to:
b Interrogate network components such as computer stations, routers, switches,
bridges or terminal devices to display their status.
b Obtain statistics about the network.
This network management software adheres to the conventional client/server model.
However, to avoid confusion with other communication protocols that use this
terminology, we talk instead about:
b ConneXview network diagnostics software, TCS EAZ 01P SFE10. For more
information, please consult our Machines & Installations with industrial
communications catalog.
b Network manager for the client application that operates on the computer station.
b SNMP agent for the network device server application
Transparent Ready devices can be managed by any SNMP network manager,

including HP Openview and IBM Netview.
The SNMP standard protocol is used to access the configuration and management
objects that are contained in the device Management Information Base (MIB). MIBs
must comply with certain standards to be accessed. Depending on the complexity of
the products, manufacturers can add objects to customize databases.
Automatic recognition of IP devices via the ConneXview
diagnostic software for Ethernet industrial networks
The Transparent Ready private MIB presents management objects specific to the
Schneider Electric offer. These objects simplify the installation, setup and
maintenance of Transparent Ready devices in an open environment using standard
network management tools.
Transparent Ready devices support 2 levels of SNMP network management:
b The Standard MIB II interface: An initial level of network management is accessible
via this interface. It enables the manager to identify the devices making up the
architecture and retrieve general information on the configuration and operation of
Ethernet Modbus/TCP interfaces.
b The Transparent Ready MIB interface: The management of Transparent Ready
devices is improved via this interface. This MIB has a set of information enabling the
network management system to supervise the Transparent Ready services.
The Transparent Ready MIB can be downloaded from the FTP server of any
Transparent Ready Ethernet module in a PLC.
10
Introduction:
pages 3/4
Performance:
pages 3/16
Selection:
page 3/21
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
3/15
Modicon M340
automation platform
Performance

Performance
Selecting the communication architecture
When choosing an architecture, make certain to determine the system requirements.
The developer must:
1 Know exactly what he needs:
v quantity and type of devices to be connected to one another
v volume and type of exchanges
v expected response times
v environment
2 Compare his needs with the specifications of the available offersbeing aware
that the actual performance level between any 2 points in an architecture is
dependent on the weakest link in the chain which could depend on:
v hardware
v the applications size, architecture, operating system, machine power rating
and other parameters. These parameters are often vaguely defined at this stage
of the project.
3 Determine from this information the most suitable architecture.
The next few pages will provide information and instructions to determine the users
network performance needs. Given that the performance of an Ethernet architecture
is linked to several parameters, some of the information required to calculate the
network performance will not be supplied on these pages. The following will be
covered:
b Instructions for calculating the network load so as to design an Ethernet
network that meets the demands of the applications.
b Application response time to be obtained depending on the configuration used.
See page 3/17 to 3/19
b Processing capacities of Modicon M340, Modicon Premium and
Modicon Quantum platforms used to select the processor and define the
number of Ethernet connections required on the PLC depending on the application.
See pages 3/20 and 3/21.
Calculating the network load

Introduction
When calculating the load on an Ethernet network, the communication services of
the peripheral devices connected to the network need to be calculated.
Because of the outstanding performance of the Ethernet network, the load is often
less than the limits of the Ethernet network and does not affect the application
response time. This is explained by the high speed of the Ethernet network: the
network transaction time is 10% less than the application response time. To help
ensure a low network load and avoid large theoretical calculations, it is highly
advisable to separate the collision domain to limit the network load, using only the
switched network (tree, star or daisy-chain topology).
10
Introduction:
page 3/8
3/16
Functions:
page 3/9
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
Modicon M340
automation platform
Performance (continued)

Performance
Application response time
Event
Report
Modbus (or Uni-TE) messaging service response time
TT
CT1 CT1
CT1 CT1
Station 1
CT2 CT2
Station 2
The network access time (NAT) appearing in the table below in ms, adds together
the module transit time and the waiting time before the message can be sent on the
network.
Action
Processing
Modbus/TCP
message requests
Network access time

NAT
Exchanges between the PLC processor and the Ethernet module are synchronous
with the PLC scan time (CT), just like the I/O exchanges. On occurrence of the event (for
example, an input set to state 1), a message can only be sent after this input has been
taken into account (start of the next cycle) and execution of the PLC program
(Modicon M340, Modicon Premium or Modicon Quantum), are on average
around 1.5 cycle times after occurrence of the event.
Modicon M340
BMX NOE 0100
BMX NOE 0110
BMX P34 2020

BMX P34 2030
Modicon Premium
TSX ETY 210
TSX ETY 110WS
< 10 ms
< 10 ms
< 25 ms
TSX ETY 4103/5103

TSX WMY 100
TSX P57 10...57 60
Modicon Quantum
140 NOE 771 01/111
140 CPU 113/311 pp
140 CPU 434/534 1p
140 CPU 65 150/160

140 CPU 67 160
< 10 ms
< 10 ms
< 10 ms
The transaction time TT integrates the delay between sending a message from a
client station 1, its reception by the server station 2, processing the request, sending
the response and it being taken into account by the station 1 (for example, updating
an output).
As shown in the above block diagram:
b The transaction time TT should be between:
2 x CT1 + 2 x NAT < TT < 4 x CT1 + CT2 + 2 x NAT
b The average duration TTav is equivalent to:
TTav = 3 x CT1 + 0.5 x CT2 + 2 x NAT
Global Data service response time

Synchro feedback
Synchro pulse
TT
CT
CT
CT
Station 1
Publication
Subscription
Publication
CT
CT
Station 2
The transaction time TT integrates the delay between publication of a Global Data
service by station 1, its reception and its processing by the remote station 2 and it
being resent to the initial station 1:
For an exchanged variable:
b If CT < 5 ms,
transaction time:
TT = 5 to 6 x CT
b If CT u 10 ms,
transaction time:
TT = 3 x CT
10
Introduction:
page 3/8
Functions:
page 3/9
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
3/17
Modicon M340
automation platform

Performance
Application response time (continued)
I/O Scanning service response time

CT
Manager
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
The response time RT includes the time between taking a remote input into account
and updating the state of a remote output. It includes the processing time in the PLC.
RT
This response time RT consists of the following parameters:
Hub
Input
Device 1
Output
Device 2
Input
TMod I
TNet
N x cycle T
TNet
Response time RT
TMod Q
Output
v TMod In and TMod Out: Response time of the read/written device, excluding the
electrical transit time at the input/output (TMod depends on the device, usually
between 1 and 8 ms)
v TIOS In and TIOS Out: Time between 2 read/write operations on the same device
(0.3 ms x number of scanned devices), at least equivalent to the configured scan
time
As TIOS is executed in parallel with the PLC scan, it can be hidden with respect to
the response time RT).
v Cycle T: PLC scan time.
v TNet : propagation time on the network (depends on the application, usually
TNet = 0.05 ms at 10 Mbit/s and 0.005 ms at 100 Mbit/s).
The response time RT can be estimated with the following 3 formulas:

b RTmin, minimum response time with TIOS hidden and 1 PLC scan:
RTmin =
(TMod In + 0) x TIOS In + (Tnet + N) x cycle T + (0 x TIOS Out) + Tnet + TMod Out
b RTtyp., typical response time with 0.5 TIOS hidden:
RTtyp. =
(TMod In + 0,5) x TIOS In + (Tnet + N) x Cycle T + ( 0,5 x TIOS Out) + Tnet + TMod Out
b RTmax, maximum response time with TIOS not hidden:

RTmax = TMod In + TIOS In + (Tnet + N) x Cycle T + TIOS Out + Tnet + TMod Out
10
Introduction:
page 3/8
3/18
Functions:
page 3/9
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
Modicon M340
automation platform
Performance
Application response time (continued)
I/O Scanning service response time (continued)
Below are the TMod In and TMod Out response times:

Type of distributed I/O
Response time
TMod In
TMod Out
TMod In
TMod Out
TMod In
TMod Out
Momentum 170 ENT 110 02

Momentum 170 ENT 110 01
Modicon STB STB NIP 2212
Values
Min.
1 ms
5 ms
4 ms
4 ms
2 ms
2 ms
Typical
1 ms
5 ms
6 ms
6 ms
3 ms
3 ms
Max.
1 ms
5 ms
8 ms
8 ms
4 ms
4 ms
Below are the TIOS In/TIOS Out times measured between 2 scan cycles (Ethernet
network with switches)
Time (ms)
25
20
15
10
5
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
No. of scanned devices
Below is the number of processor cycles N:

Type of Ethernet module or processor
Modicon M340 platform with Ethernet modules:
BMX NOE 0100 and BMX NOE 0110
Modicon Premium platform with Ethernet modules:
TSX ETY 4103 and TSX ETY 5103
Modicon Quantum platform with Ethernet modules:
140 NOE 771 01 and 140 NOE 771 11
Modicon M340 processors:
BMX P34 2020 and BMX P34 2030
Modicon Premium processors: TSX P57 26/3634M,
TSX P57 26/2823M and TSX P57 36/4823AM
Modicon Premium processors:
TSX P57 4634M/5634M/6634M
Modicon Quantum processors:
140 CPU 651 50 and 140 CPU 651 60
No. of processor cycles N

Min.
Typical
Max.
2
2.5
3
6
1
10
Introduction:
page 3/8
Functions:
page 3/9
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
3/19
Modicon M340
automation platform
Performance
Processing capacities of Modicon platforms
Processing capacity
Use the table below to compare for each station, the total number of messages
received on the Modbus (or Uni-TE) messaging service if used (value R1, R2 or
Ri) with the station processor capacity.
Processing Modbus requests for each PLC scan
Modicon M340, Modicon Premium/Atrium platforms
Total messages received by the TSX 57 10
PLC from each communication
BMX P34 20/TSX 57 20
modules (1)
TSX 57 30
TSX 57 40
TSX 57 50/60 (2)
Modicon
Quantum
platform
Limitations of the
communication modules
All types of
Additional
communication read/write 4x
request
registers
1message/
4 messages/
140 CPU 113 (3)
cycle
cycle
140 CPU 311
1message/
4 messages/
cycle
cycle
140 CPU 434/534
4 messages/
8 messages/
cycle
cycle
140 CPU 651
16 messages/ 16 messages/ 4 messages/
8 messages/
cycle
cycle
cycle
cycle
messages/cycle: number of messages received per cycle from the PLC master task
(typical cycle of 50 to 100 ms)
Limitations of the integrated

port
All types of
Additional
communication read/write 4x
request
registers
Messages received
4 messages/cycle
8 messages/cycle
12 messages/cycle
16 messages/cycle
16/20 messages/cycle
Ethernet
modules
per PLC
max. 2
max. 2
max. 6
max. 6
Example:
Quantum 140 CPU 434 12p processor with 4 Ethernet 140 NOE 771 p1 modules:
- 20 messages/cycle for all types of communication request, and
- 32 messages/cycle for the read/write 4x registers
Ethernet transaction processing capacity

Compare for each station the total number of messages received [values Ri, Rj]
and the total number of messages sent [values Ei, Ej] (for example, for station N)
with the Ethernet transaction processing capacity indicated below.
Use the elements below for the Ethernet connection per PLC, rather than the number
of transactions required by the application.
Ethernet transaction
processing capacity
Modbus messaging
Subscription of Global Data
Modicon M340
BMX NOE 0100 BMX P34 2020
BMX NOE 0110 BMX P34 2030
500
transactions/s
2,000
transactions/s
800
500
transactions/s
Server mode
(4)
Service not
available
Modicon Premium
TSX ETY 210
TSX ETY 4103/5103
TSX ETY 110WS TSX WMY 100
TSX P57 10/20/30/40
60
450
transactions/s
transactions/s
Service not
2,000 transactions/s
available
(5)
Service not
800
available
Modicon Quantum
140 CPU 65 150
140 NOE 771 01
140 CPU 65 160
140 NOE 771 11
140 NWM 100 00 140 CPU 67 160
500
350
350
transactions/s transactions/s
transactions/s
2,000
2,000
2,000
transactions/s transactions/s (5) transactions/s
800
800
800
TSX P57 50
TSX P57 60
9
(1) A temporary overload, due for example to an adjustment terminal or the temporary connection
of an Internet browser, on which a few PLC scans are permitted.
(2) Only with Unity Pro software.
(3) Only with Concept/ProWORX software.
(4) BMX P34 20p0 processors having the Modbus/TCP messaging in server mode can be
scanned by a product having the I/O Scanning service.
(5) Modules TSX WMY 100 and 140 NWM 100 00: not featuring I/O Scanning and Global Data
services.
10
Introduction:
page 3/8
3/20
Functions:
page 3/9
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
Modicon M340
automation platform
Performance
Processing capacities of Modicon platforms (continued)
Maximum number of simultaneous Modbus/TCP connections
The maximum number of simultaneous Modbus/TCP connections depends on the
platform as well as the type of connection to the Ethernet network:
b The 10/100BASE-TX port in network modules.
b The 10/100BASE-TX port integrated in processors.
Number of
simultaneous
Modbus/TCP
connections
Client
Server
Modicon M340
BMX NOE 0100
BMX NOE 0110
BMX P34 2020

BMX P34 2030
16
16
16
16
Modicon Premium
Modicon Quantum
TSX ETY 210
TSX ETY 4103/5103 140 NOE 771 01/11
140 CPU 65 150
TSX ETY 110WS
TSX WMY 100
140 CPU 113/311 pp 140 CPU 65 160
TSX P57 10...57 60
140 CPU 434/534 14B
32
16 (1)
16 (1)
16 (1)
64 (1)
64 (1)
64 (1)
(1) With 64 simultaneous Modbus/TCP connections maximum (clients and servers).
Managing the passband of Ethernet Modbus/TCP modules

The passband management service indicates the load level of the Ethernet network
module. This allows the user to monitor any drift and anticipate any problems.
The Ethernet module load is indicated in 3 ways:
b Expected load in the Unity Pro/PL7 configuration screen.
b Actual load in the Unity Pro/PL7 diagnostics/debug screen, as well as in the
diagnostics pages via the Web. It is displayed in the form of a bar chart animated in
real time.
b In the SNMP interface for access by the SNMP network manager.
The passband is indicated as a percentage for each of the following services:

b Modbus (and Uni-TE) messaging
b I/O Scanning
b Global Data
b Other
Ethernet solutions with the Modicon platforms

The Modicon PLC has 2 types of connections to the Ethernet network:
b The 10/100BASE-TX port integrated in processor modules exchanges with other
modules supported by the rack and other communication ports (CANopen bus,
Modbus serial link, ).
b The 10/100BASE-TX port in the dedicated network module module where the
resources are only allocated to Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication.
Ethernet port integrated in

processor, example with
the BMX P34 2020/2030
Modicon M340
Introduction:
page 3/8
or
Ethernet dedicated
module, example with the
BMX NOE 0100/0110
Modicon M340
Functions:
page 3/9
These fundamentally different hardware specifications result in equally different

capacities in terms of services and performance:
b The integrated port is a low-cost way of satisfying applications that are not too
demanding in terms of communication (y 500 useful messages/s) in environments
seldom affected by interference.
b Where there are a large number of exchanges, or networks are heavily polluted,
use of a dedicated module is unavoidable.
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
3/21
10
Product data sheet
Modicon M340
automation platform
Processors with integrated
Modbus/TCP Ethernet port
Description
BMX P34 2020 and BMX P34 2030 Modicon M340 processors with integrated
Ethernet port have the following on the front panel:
1 Screw for securing the module in its slot (marked 0) in the rack
2 A display unit including at minimum 3 LEDs relating to the Ethernet port:
v ETH ACT LED (green): Activity on the Ethernet network
v ETH STS LED (green): Ethernet TCP/IP network status
v ETH 100 LED (red): Data rate on the Ethernet network (10 or 100 Mbit/s)
3 A mini B USB connector for a programming terminal (or Magelis XBT GT/GK/GTW
operator interface)
4 A slot equipped with its Flash memory card for saving the application and
activating the standard web server, Transparent Ready class B10.
5 An RJ45 connector for connection to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet
network
Also included, depending on the model:
6 BMX P34 2020 processor: An RJ45 connector for the Modbus serial link or
character mode link (RS 232C/RS 485, 2-wire, non-isolated)
7 BMX P34 2030 processor: A 9-way SUB-D connector for the master CANopen
machine and installation bus
On the back panel: 2 rotary switches for assigning the IP address in one of 3 modes:
v address set by the position of the two switches
v address set by the application parameters
v address set by the Ethernet BOOTP server
2
3
4
5
6
7
Specifications
Module type
Transparent Class
Ready
Standard web server
services
6
Structure
Modicon
M340
processor
BMX P34 2020

BMX P34 2030
B10
Rack Viewer access to the product description and status and to the PLC diagnostics
Data Editor access to the configuration functions and PLC variables
Ethernet Modbus/TCP basic communication service Modbus/TCP messaging (read/write data words)
Ethernet
I/O Scanning
Modbus/TCP
Global Data
advanced
communication
FDR Client
Automatic assignment of IP address and network parameters
services
SMTP E-mail notification
Yes, via EF function block (SEND_EMAIL) of Unity Pro u 4.0
SNMP network administrator

Yes
Yes
Physical interface
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45)
Data rate
10/100 Mbit/s with automatic recognition
Medium
Twisted pair
No. of discrete I/O
1024
No. of analog I/O
256
No. of application-specific channels
36
Max. no. of Ethernet Modbus/TCP connections
3 (integrated port and 2 BMX NOE 0100/0110 network modules)
Other integrated communication ports
Modbus serial link or character mode
CANopen bus
Operating temperature
0+ 60C
Relative humidity
10...95% non condensing during operation
Degree of protection
IP 20
Power supply
Via the power supply of the rack supporting the processor
Conformity to standards
IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA 22.2 n142, CSA 22.2 n213 Class 1 Division 2 , e
LED indicators
Activity on the Ethernet TCP/IP network (ETH ACT, green)
Status of the Ethernet TCP/IP network (ETH STS, green)
Data rate on the 10 or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet TCP/IP network, (ETH 100, red)
4 LEDs specific to processor operation (RUN, ERR, I/O, CARD ERR)
1 or 2 LEDs specific to the other communication ports (1)
References
Description
I/O capacity
Memory capacity
Processors with 1024 discrete I/O
256 analog I/O
integrated
36 app-sp. channels
Ethernet link
Other integrated
Reference
communication ports
Modbus serial link or BMX P34 2020
character mode
CANopen bus
BMX P34 2030
4096 Kb integrated
Transparent
Ready class B10
10
BMX P34 2020
BMX P34 2030

(1) SER COM LED for serial link or CAN RUN and CAN ERR LEDs for CANopen bus.
3/22
Weight
kg
0.205
0.215
Product data sheet

(continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network modules
Introduction
The BMX NOE 0100 and BMX NOE 0110 modules are a standard module
occupying a single slot in the rack of the Modicon M340 platform equipped with a
Standard or Performance processor.
Description
The BMX NOE 0100/NOE 0110 modules has the following on the front panel:
1 Screw for securing the module in its slot in the rack
2 A display unit consisting of 6 LEDs, including 3 relating to the Ethernet port:
v ETH ACT LED (green): Activity on the Ethernet network
v ETH STS LED (green): Ethernet network status
v ETH 100 LED (red): Data rate on the Ethernet network (10 or 100 Mbit/s)
3 A slot equipped with a Flash memory card for application saving and activating the
standard web server, Transparent Ready class B30 or C30 depending on model
4 An RJ45 connector for connection to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet
network
5 A pencil-point RESET pushbutton for a cold restart of the module
On the back panel: 2 rotary switches for assigning the IP address in one of 3 modes:
v address set by the position of the two switches
v address set by the application parameters
v address set by the Ethernet network BOOTP server.
3
4
Specifications
Module type
Transparent Class
Ready
Standard web server
services
Configurable web server
User Web pages (available size)
Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication service
Ethernet
I/O Scanning
Modbus/TCP
Global Data
advanced
communication
FDR server
services
SMTP E-mail notification
SNMP network administrator
Structure
Ethernet
module
Physical interface
Data rate
Medium
No. of Ethernet modules oer configuration
Relative humidity
Power supply
Conformity to standards
LED indicators
BMX NOE 0100

BMX NOE 0110
B30
C30
Rack Viewer access to the product description and status and to the PLC diagnostics
Data Editor access to PLC variable via
Data Editor access to PLC variable via
PC terminal
PC terminal, pocket PC or PDA terminal
Alarm viewer Graphic Data Editor
User Web page hosting and display (14 Mb)

Modbus/TCP messaging (read/write data words)
Yes
Yes
Yes, with version module u 2.0
Automatic assignment of IP address and network parameters
Server
Yes
Yes
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45)
10/100 Mbit/s with automatic recognition
Twisted pair
Max. 1 with BMX P34 1000 processor, max. 2 with BMX P34 20p0 processor
0+ 60C
10...95% non condensing during operation
IP 20
Via the power supply of the rack supporting the processor
IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA 22.2 n142, CSA 22.2 n213 Class 1 Division 2 , e
Activity on the Ethernet TCP/IP network (ETH ACT, green)
State of the Ethernet TCP/IP network (ETH STS, green)
Data rate on the 10 or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet TCP/IP network, (ETH 100, red)
3 LEDs specific to module operation (RUN, ERR, CARD ERR)
References
Description
Data rate
10/100 Mbit/s
Ethernet
Modbus/TCP
network module
Transparent Ready Reference

class
B30
BMX NOE 0100
C30
BMX NOE 0110
Weight
kg
0.200
0.200
Supplied as
standard with
BMX NOE 0100
BMX NOE 0110
Weight
kg
0.002
0.002
Replacement parts
Description
BMX NOE 0100/0110
Flash memory
cards
Size
8 Mb
32 Mb
Reference
BMX RWS B000M
BMX RWS FC032M
3/23
10
Wiring system
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Infrastructure
Introduction
Schneider Electric offers copper and fiber optic cables for connecting IP 20 and IP 67
Ethernet devices.
Examples
Mixed IP 20 and IP 67 wiring (copper)
2
2, 4
1, 3
1, 3
3
8
2, 4
2, 4
1, 3
1, 3
5
1, 3
1, 3
6
Key:
1, 3: Straight-through copper cables
2, 4: Crossed copper cables
8: Cables with IP 67 connector
10
3/24
Modicon M340
automation platform
Wiring system (continued)
Ethernet network
Infrastructure
Examples (continued)
Mixed copper and fiber optic wiring
1
Internet
MES client
Server
Firewall
1, 3
1, 3
Copper link
1, 3
Router
3
5, 6, 7
Fiber optic link
2, 4
2, 4
2, 4
Copper link
Magelis XBT
1, 3
1, 3
1, 3
2, 4
2, 4
1, 3
1, 3
1, 3
2, 4
2, 4
Preventa safety PLC
2, 4
Altivar 71
Modicon Quantum
Advantys STB
1, 3
1, 3
2, 4
Twido
1, 3
2, 4
Magelis XBT
1, 3
1, 3
Advantys STB
1, 3
Altivar 71
1, 3
7
Modicon M340
Modicon Premium
Ositrack
FactoryCast
gateway
8
Modbus
Managed
switch
Hub or
unmanaged switch
Key:
1, 3: Straight cables
2, 4: Crossed cord cables
5, 6, 7: Fiber optic cables
8: Cables with IP 67 connector
10
3/25
Wiring system
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium connection components

Shielded copper connection cables
ConneXium shielded connection cables are available in two versions to meet the
various current standards and approvals:
b EIA/TIA 568 shielded twisted pair cables for e market
These cables conform to:
v EIA/TIA-568, category CAT 5E
v IEC 11801/EN 50173-1, class D
Their fire resistance conforms to:
v NF C32-070, class C2
v IEC 322/1
v Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH)
b EIA/TIA 568 shielded twisted pair cables for UL market

The cable material is:
v CEC type FT-1
v NEC type CM
EIA/TIA 568 shielded twisted pair cables for e market

Description
Preformed at both ends Rep.
1
Straight cables 2 RJ45 connectors
For connection to terminal
devices (DTE)
4
490 NTp 000 pp
Crossed cord
cables
2
2 RJ45 connectors
For connections between
hubs, switches and
transceivers
Length
m (ft)
2 (6.6)
5 (16.4)
12 (39.4)
40 (131.2)
80 (262.5)
Reference
5 (16.4)
15 (49.2)
40 (131.2)
80 (262.5)
490 NTC 000 05

490 NTC 000 15
490 NTC 000 40
490 NTC 000 80
490 NTW 000 02

490 NTW 000 05
490 NTW 000 12
490 NTW 000 40
490 NTW 000 80
Weight
kg
EIA/TIA 568 shielded twisted pair cables for UL market

Description
Preformed at both ends Rep.
Straight cables 2 RJ45 connectors

3
For connection to terminal
devices (DTE)
Crossed cord
cables
4
2 RJ45 connectors
For connections between
hubs, switches and
transceivers
Length
m (ft)
2 (6.6)
5 (16.4)
12 (39.4)
40 (131.2)
80 (262.5)
Reference
490 NTW 000 02U
490 NTW 000 05U
490 NTW 000 12U
490 NTW 000 40U
490 NTW 000 80U
Weight
kg
5 (16.4) 490 NTC 000 05U

40 (131.2) 490 NTC 000 40U
80 (262.5) 490 NTC 000 80U
Do it Yourself cable and connectors

The Do It Yourself offer is comprised of 2 references for field installable connectors (M12 and
RJ45) and one reference for spooled cable measuring 300 m. These products are intented for
use in industrial Ethernet networks supporting transmission rates up to 100 Mbit/s over the
combined maximum cable lenght up to 80 m.
Quick on the floor assembly with only a knife and pliers.
Description
Ethernet copper cable
2 shielded twisted pairs
24 AWG
RJ45 connector
IP 20
M12 connector
D-Code,
IP 65/67
According to
Length
m (ft)
EIA/TIA-568 (80 m max. 300 m
link length)
(1000)
UL 508-CM, e
EN 50173 Class D
EIA/TIA-568-D,
category CAT 5E, e

IEC 60176-2-101,
EN 50173 Class D
(1) For Key to reference numbers, see pages 3/24 and 3/25.
10
3/26
Reference
TCS ECN 300R2
Weight
kg
TCS EK3 MDS
TCS EK1 MDRS
Wiring system (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium connection components

Glass fiber optic cables
These glass optical fibers are for making connections to:
b Terminal device (DTE)
b Between hubs, transceivers and switches
490 NOT 000 05

Description
490 NOC 000 05
Glass fiber optic
cables
Preformed at both
ends
Rep. Length
m (ft)
1 SC connector
1 MT-RJ connector
5 (16.4)
490 NOC 000 05
1 ST (BFOC) connector 6
1 MT-RJ connector
5 (16.4)
490 NOT 000 05
2 MT-RJ connectors
3 (9.8)
5 (16.4)
490 NOR 000 03

490 NOR 000 05
490 NOR 000 05
Reference
Weight
kg
Separate parts for TCS ESM switches

Description
Fiber optic
modules for
Gigabit ports with
LC connector
(1)
TCS EAA F1LFp 00
Configuration
backup key
Optical fiber
Type
Reference
Multimode 50/125 m
or 62.5/125 m
Single mode 9/125 m
1000BASE-SX TCS EAA F1LFU00
Weight
kg
0.040
1000BASE-LH TCS EAA F1LFH00
0.040
Multimode 50/125 m 1000BASE-LX TCS EAA F1LFS00

or 62.5/125 m
Single mode 62.5/125 m
Via the USB port on the front of the
TCS EAM 0100
switch, used to:
- Save and retrieve the switch
configuration
- Update the internal software
0.040
(1) Dimensions W x H x D = 20 x 18 x 50 mm
Connection components for IP 67 switch

Description
Copper cables
Power cables
Power
connectors
M12/RJ45
adaptor
Preformed at both
ends
Rep. Length
m (ft)
Reference
Weight
kg
1 IP 67 4-way M12
connector
and 1 RJ45 connector
1 (3.3)
3 (9.8)
10 (32.8)
25 (82)
40 (131.2)
TCS ECL 1M3M 1S2

TCS ECL 1M3M 3S2
TCS ECL 1M3M 10S2
TCS ECL 1M3M 25S2
TCS ECL 1M3M 40S2
2 IP 67 4-way M12
connectors
1 (3.3)
3 (9.8)
10 (32.8)
25 (82)
40 (131.2)
TCS ECL 1M1M 1S2

TCS ECL 1M1M 3S2
TCS ECL 1M1M 10S2
TCS ECL 1M1M 25S2
TCS ECL 1M1M 40S2
Female M12 straight

connector
Female M12 elbowed

connector
2 (6.6)
5 (16.4)
2.5 (8.2)
5 (16.4)
XZC P1164L2
XZC P1164L5
XZC P1264L2
XZC P1264L5
Female M12 straight

connector
Female M12 elbowed
connector
XZC C12 FDM 50B
XZC C12 FCM 50B
IP 67 female 4-way M12

connector and female
RJ45 connector
TCS EAA F11F13F00
10
3/27
Product data sheet
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium hub
Introduction
Hubs (concentrators) are used for transmitting signals between several media
(ports). Hubs are plug and play devices that do not need any configuration.
The use of hubs makes it possible to create the following topologies:
b Star topology using hubs
b Tree topology using hubs
Please consult our catalog Ethernet Modbus/TCP and the Web, Transparent
Ready.
Hub
DTE
DTE
Hub
Hub
DTE
Star topology
DTE
DTE
Hub
DTE
Tree topology
Specifications and reference
5
Hubs
Interfaces
6
Topology
Copper cable ports Number and type

Shielded connectors
Medium
Total length of pair
Fiber optic ports
Number and type
4 x 10BASE-T ports
RJ45
Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
100 m
Number of cascaded hubs

Number of hubs in a ring
Up to 4
P1 and P2 redundant power supplies
Redundancy
Power supply
Relative humidity
Dimensions
Mounting
Weight
Voltage
Consumption
Removable terminal block
Conforming to standards
LED indicators
Alarm relay
10
3/28
WxHxD
24 V c (1832), safety extra low voltage (SELV per IEC 61140)

80 mA (130 max. at 24 V c)
5-way
0+ 60C
1095% non-condensing
IP 30
40 x 125 x 80 mm
On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide
0.530 kg
cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142, UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1 Division 2,
e, GL, C-Tick
FM 3810, FM 3611 Class 1 Division 2
Power supply, activity, link
Power supply detected fault, Ethernet network detected fault or communication port detected
fault (volt-free contact 1 A max. at 24 V c)
Product data sheet
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium transceiver
Introduction
The use of ConneXium transceivers makes it possible to perform the following:
b Creation of linear fiber optic bus topologies for products with twisted pair cable
Ethernet connection
b Interfacing products with twisted pair cable Ethernet connection with a fiber optic
cable
Transceivers are plug and play devices that do not need any configuration.
ConneXium transceivers provide fiber optic connections for transmission in areas
subject to interference (high levels of electromagnetic interference) and for long
distance communications.
DTE
3
DTE
DTE
Linear topology on optical fiber
Specifications and reference
5
Transceivers
Interfaces
Copper cable ports
Fiber optic ports
Redundancy
Power supply
Number and type

Shielded connectors
Medium
Number and type
Connectors
Medium
Length of optical fiber
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
Attenuation analysis
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
Voltage
Consumption
Relative humidity
Dimensions
WxHxD
Mounting
Weight
LED indicators
Alarm relay
1 x 100BASE-TX port
RJ45
100 m
1 x 100BASE-FX port
SC
Multimode optical fiber
3000 m (1)
3000 m (1)
8 dB
11 dB
160 mA (190 max. at 24 V c)
5-way
0+ 60C
IP 20
47 x 135 x 111 mm
0.230 kg
e, GL, C-Tick
P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link/port status
(1) Length is dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fiber (typical
value: 2000 m).
3/29
10
Modicon M340
automation platform
Product data sheet
Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium unmanaged switches

Introduction
1
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
Collision
domain 1
Collision
domain 2
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
100 Mbps
fiber-optic ring
DTE
Collision
domain 3
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
Switches are used to increase the limits of

architectures based on hubs or transceivers by
separating collision domains.
Higher layer communication is provided between the
ports and collisions at link layer are not propagated
(filtering). The performance is improved by better
allocation of the pass band due to the reduction
of collisions and the network load.
Certain ConneXium switch models enable
redundant architectures to be created on twisted
pair copper ring or fiber optic.
Switches are plug & play devices that do not need
any configuration. They can also be managed
remotely via the SNMP or HTTP protocols for
monitoring and diagnostics purposes.
Please consult our catalog Ethernet Modbus/TCP
and the Web, Transparent Ready.
Specifications and references: Twisted pair
Switches
Copper twisted pair, unmanaged

Copper cable ports
Voltage
Consumption
mA max.
Relative humidity
Dimensions
WxHxD
Mounting
Weight
5 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports
8 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports
M12 (type D)
RJ45
100 m
Storage and re-routing of received data, auto

MDI/MDX, automatic negotiation of
10/100 Mbit/s and duplex mode (on each port),
automatic change of polarity
Unlimited

100
125 (290 max.)
5-way, M12 (type A, male)
5-way
0+ 60C
IP 67
IP 20
60 x 126 x 31 mm
47 x 135 x 111 mm
0.210 kg
0.230 kg
cUL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142
LED indicators
Power supply, link status, line activity
Alarm relay
Interfaces
Number and type

Shielded connectors
Medium
Ethernet services
6
Topology
Number of switches
Redundancy
Power supply
Cascaded
Redundant in a ring
9
Reference
IP 67 cables
10
TCS ESU 051F0
cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142,

UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1
Division 2, e, GL, C-Tick
P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link/port
status
Power supply detected fault, Ethernet network
detected fault or communication port detected
499 NES 181 00
Ethernet cables
Power supply cables
Preformed with connectors at each end (see page 3/27)

Preformed with M12 female straight
Preformed with female M12 angled connectors
connectors at each end
at each end
Length 2 m
Length 2 m
Length 2 m
Length 2 m
Reference
Power supply connectors
Reference
XZC P1164L2
XZC P1164L5
Female M12 straight connector
XZC C12 FDM 50B
3/30
XZC P1264L2
XZC P1264L5
Female M12 angled connector
XZC C12 FCM 50B
Product data sheet

(continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system

Specifications and references: 3, 4 and 5 ports, twisted pair and fiber optic
2
Switches
Interfaces
Copper cable ports
Fiber optic ports
Number and type
Shielded connectors
Medium
Number and type
Connectors
Medium
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
Ethernet services
Topology
Number of switches
Cascaded
Redundant in a ring
Redundancy
Power supply Voltage, safety extra low voltage
(SELV per IEC 61140)
Consumption
Connector
Relative humidity
Dimensions
Weight
LED indicators
Alarm relay
Reference
WxHxD
Twisted pair, unmanaged

4x
3x
10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX
ports
ports
RJ45
100 m
1 x 100BASE-FX port
Duplex SC
5000 m (1)
4000 m (1)
5x
ports
8 dB
11 dB
Storage and re-routing of received data, auto MDI/MDX (automatic switching depending on
whether cables are straight or crossed), automatic negotiation of 10/100 Mbit/s and duplex
mode (on each port), automatic change of polarity
Unlimited
24 V c (9.632 V c), safety extra low voltage (SELV)

2.2 W max.
3.9 W max.
3-way removable screw terminal block
0+ 60C
Max. 95% (non-condensing)
IP 30
25 x 114 x 79 mm
0.113 kg
0.120 kg
UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142
IEC/EN 61131-2, IEC 60825-1 class 1, CISPR 11A
Power supply, copper port activity, 10 or 100 Mbps data rate
Fiber port activity and status
2.2 W max.
0.113 kg
TCS ESU 033FN0

TCS ESU 043F1N0
TCS ESU 053FN0
value: 2000 m).
10
3/31
Product data sheet

(continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system

Specifications and references: 5 ports, twisted pair and fiber optic
2
Switches
Interfaces
Copper twisted pair and fiber optic, unmanaged

Copper cable ports
3
Fiber optic ports
Shielded connectors
Medium
Number and type
Connectors
Medium
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
9/125 m fiber
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
9/125 m fiber
Cascaded
Redundant in a ring
4x
3x
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
ports
ports
RJ45
100 m
1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports
SC
4x
3x
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
ports
ports
1 x 100BASE-FX port
2 x 100BASE-FX ports
Single mode optical fiber
5000 m (1)
4000 m (1)
32,500 m (2)
16 dB
Redundancy
8 dB
11 dB
Unlimited
Voltage
Power consumption
mA max.
Removable connector
Relative humidity
Dimensions
WxHxD
Mounting
Weight

200
240
200
5-way
- 40...+ 70C
IP 20
47 x 135 x 111 mm
0.330 kg
0.335 kg
0.330 kg
cUL 60950, cUL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142, UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1 Division 2,
e, GL, C-Tick
P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link status, transmission activity
Activity, power supply detected fault, Ethernet network detected fault or communication port
detected fault (volt-free contact 1 A max. at 24 V c)
Topology
Number of switches
Power supply
Number and type
LED indicators
Alarm relay
Reference
10
3/32
240
0.335 kg
499 NMS 251 01

499 NMS 251 02
499 NSS 251 01
499 NSS 251 02
value: 2000 m).
value: 15,000 m).
Product data sheet
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium managed switches

2
Switches
Interfaces
Copper twisted pair and fiber optic, managed

Copper cable ports
Fiber optic ports
Number and type
Shielded connectors
Medium
Number and type
Connectors
Medium
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
9/125 m fiber
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
9/125 m fiber
Ethernet services
Topology
Number of switches
Cascaded
Redundant in a ring
Redundancy
Power supply Voltage
Power consumption
Removable connector
Relative humidity
Dimensions
Mounting
Weight
LED indicators
Alarm relay
Reference
Operation
WxHxD
3x
2x
10/100BASE-TX
10/100BASE-TX
ports
ports
RJ45
100 m
Duplex SC
5000 m (1)
4000 m (1)
3x
10/100BASE-TX
ports
2x
10/100BASE-TX
ports
1 x 100BASE-FX port
32,500 m (2)
8 dB
11 dB
16 dB
FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol,
configuration via Web access
VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream
control, secure port
Unlimited
Up to 50
Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling
9.6...60 V c/1830 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV per IEC 61140)
6.5 W
7.3 W
6.5 W
7.3 W
6-way
0+ 60C
IP 20
47 x 131 x 111 mm
0.400 kg
TCS ESM 043F2CU0
TCS ESM 043F1CS0
IEC 61131-2, IEC 61850-3, UL 508, UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2, CSA 22.2 No. 142 (cUL),
CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1 Division 2 (cUL), e, GL, C-Tick
Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, copper
port status and copper port activity
Power supply detected fault, Ethernet network detected fault, communication port detected
fault, redundancy detected fault (volt-free contact 1 A max. at 24 V c)
TCS ESM 043F1CU0
TCS ESM 043F2CS0
value: 2000 m).
value: 15,000 m).
10
3/33
Product data sheet

(continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system

Specifications and references: 4 and 8 ports, twisted pair
2
Switches
Interfaces
Copper twisted pair, managed

Copper cable ports
3
Fiber optic ports
Number and type
4 x 10/100BASE-TX ports
Shielded connectors
Medium
Number and type
Connectors
Medium
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
9/125 m fiber
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
9/125 m fiber
RJ45
100 m
Ethernet services
5
Topology
Number of switches
Cascaded
Redundant in a ring
Redundancy

Power consumption
Removable connector
Relative humidity
Dimensions
Mounting
Weight
LED indicators
Alarm relay
Reference
10
3/34
Operation
WxHxD
Unlimited
Up to 50
5.3 W
5.3 W
6-way
0+ 60C
IP 20
47 x 131 x 111 mm
74 x 131 x 111 mm
0.400 kg
0.410 kg
IEC/EN 61131-2, IEC 61850-3, UL 508, UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2, CSA 22.2 No. 214 (cUL),
Power supply status, alarm relay status, active Power supply status, alarm relay status, active
redundancy, redundancy management,
redundancy, redundancy management, fiber
copper port status and copper port activity
port status and fiber port activity
TCS ESM 043F23F0
TCS ESM 083F23F0
Product data sheet

(continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system

2
Switches
Interfaces

Copper cable ports
Fiber optic ports
Number and type

Shielded connectors
Medium
Number and type
Connectors
Medium
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
9/125 m fiber
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
9/125 m fiber
Ethernet services
Topology
Number of switches
Cascaded
Redundant in a ring
Redundancy
Power consumption
Removable connector
Relative humidity
Dimensions
Mounting
Weight
LED indicators
Alarm relay
Reference
Operation
WxHxD
7 x 10/100BASE-TX
6 x 10/100BASE-TX
ports
ports
RJ45
100 m
Duplex SC
5000 m (1)
4000 m (1)
7 x 10/100BASE-TX
ports
6 x 10/100BASE-T
ports
1 x 100BASE-FX port
32,500 m (2)
8 dB
11 dB
16 dB
Unlimited
Up to 50
6.5 W
7.3 W
6.5 W
7.3 W
6-way
0+ 60C
IP 20
74 x 131 x 111 mm
0.410 kg
TCS ESM 083F2CU0
TCS ESM 083F1CS0
IEC/EN 61131-2, IEC 61850-3, UL 508, UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2, CSA 22.2 No. 214 (cUL),
Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, fiber
TCS ESM 083F1CU0
TCS ESM 083F2CS0
value: 2000 m).
value: 15,000 m).
10
3/35
Product data sheet

(continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system

Specifications and references: 16 and 24 ports, twisted pair and fiber optic
2
Switches
Interfaces
Copper cable ports
Number and type
Copper twisted pair,

managed
Fiber optic ports
Shielded connectors
Medium
Number and type
RJ45
100 m
Connectors
Medium
Duplex SC
5000 m (1)
4000 m (1)

50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
9/125 m fiber
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
9/125 m fiber
5
Ethernet services
Topology
Number of switches
Cascaded
Redundant in a ring
Redundancy

Power consumption
Removable connector
Relative humidity
Dimensions
Mounting
Weight
LED indicators
Alarm relay
Reference
Operation
WxHxD

8 dB
11 dB
Unlimited
Up to 50
9.4 W
11.8 W
15.5 W
6-way
0+ 60C
IP 20
111 x 131 x 111 mm
0.600 kg
0.650 kg
e, GL, C-Tick
Redundant power supplies,
Redundant power supplies, single ring, double ring
single ring
TCS ESM 163F23F0
TCS ESM 163F2CU0
TCS ESM 243F2CU0
value: 2000 m).
10
3/36
Product data sheet

(continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system

Specifications and references: 8 ports and 2 Gigabit ports, twisted pair, fiber optic
2
Switches
Interfaces
Copper cable ports
Fiber optic
Gigabit ports
(with SFP fiber module
to be mounted on SFP
connector)
Copper twisted pair, managed
Number and type
8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports and

2 x 10/100/1000BASE-TX (Gigabit) ports
Shielded connectors
Medium
Number and type
RJ45
100 m
2x
2x
2x
1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LH 1000BASE-LX
ports (1)
ports (2)
ports (3)
LC
Multimode
Single mode
Single mode
optical fiber
optical fiber
and multimode
optical fiber
Connectors
Medium

50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
9/125 m fiber
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
9/125 m fiber
Ethernet services
Topology
Number of switches
Cascaded
Redundant in a ring
Redundancy
Power consumption
Removable connector
Relative humidity
Dimensions
Mounting
Weight
LED indicators
Alarm relay
Reference
Operation
WxHxD
550 m
275 m
8 -72,000 m
550 m
550 m
20,000 m
7.5 dB
11 dB
7.5 dB
11 dB
6 - 22 dB
11 dB
Unlimited
Up to 50
8.9 W + 1 W per SFP fiber module
8.3 W
6-way
0+ 60C
IP 20
111 x 131 x 111 mm
0.410 kg
e, GL
Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, fiber
TCS ESM 103F2LG0
TCS ESM 103F23G0
(1) With TCS EAA F1LFU00 fiber optic module to be ordered separately. See page 3/27.
(2) With TCS EAA F1LFH00 fiber optic module to be ordered separately. See page 3/27.
(3) With TCS EAA F1LFS00 fiber optic module to be ordered separately. See page 3/27.
10
3/37
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction,
connectable devices
CANopen machine and installation bus
Introduction
Modicon M340
Lexium 15
Modicon STB
Lexium 05
Altivar 31
Modicon
Premium
1 to 63 slaves
CANopen is an open network supported by more than

400 companies worldwide, and is manufactured by
CAN in Automation. CANopen conforms to standards
EN 50325-4 and ISO 15745-2.
CANopen bus
Osicoder
Altivar 71
TeSys Quickfit
Schneider Electric has selected CANopen for its

products and installations because of its functioning
and how it benefits the automation industry. This
decision was based on the general acceptance of
CANopen, and the fact that CANopen products are
increasingly used in control system architectures.
FTB 1CN
Schneider Electric is heavily involved in working with

numerous standards and certification groups. These
groups are important for properly designing machine
and installation architectures, systems and products.
CANopen brings transparency to Ethernet

CAN in Automation and Modbus-IDA have worked together to create a standard
that helps ensure total transparency between CANopen and Modbus/TCP. The
result of this collaboration has been the CiA DSP309-2 specification, defining
communication standards between a Ethernet Modbus/TCP network and a
CANopen bus.
The specification defines mapping services enabling CANopen devices to
communicate with a Modbus/TCP network through a gateway. The data in a
CANopen device can be accessed in both read and write mode.
This specification is the first standard available for developing an open standard
communication between Modbus/TCP and CANopen. It is driving Schneider Electric
network solutions toward better integration, diagnostics and configuration of
distributed applications. It allows machines and installations to be connected to an
Ethernet network continuously, while combining the advantages of each network in
its specific area.
The CANopen bus is a multi-master bus that helps to ensure reliable, deterministic
access to real-time data in control system devices. The CSMA/CA protocol is based
on broadcast exchanges, sent cyclically or on an event, to help ensure optimum use
of the passband. A message handling channel can also be used to define slave
parameters.
On the Modicon M340 platform, the bus uses a double twisted pair cable. Up to 63
devices can be connected by using a daisy-chain or tap junction architectures. The
variable data rate between 20 Kbit/s and 1 Mbit/s depends on the length of the bus
(between 20 m and 2,500 m). Each end of the bus must be fitted with a line
terminator.
The CANopen bus is a set of profiles on CAN systems, possessing the following
specifications:
b Open bus system
b Data exchanges in real time without overloading the protocol
b Modular design allowing modification of size
b Interconnection and interchangeability of devices
b Standardized configuration of networks
b Access to device parameters
b Synchronization and circulation of data from cyclic and/or event-controlled
processes (short system response time)
Connectable devices
10
TeSys Quickfit
3/38
The Modicon M340 automation platform, via its BMX P34 2010/2030 processors with
integrated CANopen link, performs the role of master on the machine bus.
The following Telemecanique devices can be connected to the CANopen bus:
v 58 mm Osicoder multi-turn absolute encoders:
- XCC 3510P/3515C S84CB, version u 1.0
v TeSys U starter-controllers:
- with LUL C08 communication module, version u 1.2
v TeSys T motor management system:
- with LTM RppCpp controllers, version u 1.0
v TeSys D motor-starters, using the TeSys Quickfit installation help system:
- with APP 1CCO0/O2 communication module, version u 1.0
Connectable devices
(continued),
software setup
Modicon M340
automation platform
Connectable devices (continued)

v Modicon OTB IP 20 Optimum distributed I/O (with Twido I/O extension modules):
- with OTB 1C0 DM9LP interface module, version u 2.03
v Modicon STB IP 20 modular distributed I/O:
- with NIM module STB NCO 1010, version u 1.0 or STB NCO 2212, version u 2.02
v Modicon FTB/FTM IP 67 I/O splitter boxes:
- FTB 1CNppppp monobloc, ver. u 1.07 and FTM 1CN10 modular, all versions
v Preventa configurable safety controllers:
- XPS MC16ZC/32ZC, version u 1.10
v Altivar 31 variable speed drives for asynchronous motors 0.1815 kW:
- ATV 31H ppppp, version u 1.1 (1)
v Altivar 71/61 variable speed drives for asynchronous motors 0.75630 kW:
- ATV 61H /71H ppppp, version u 1.1 (1)
v Lexium 05 servo drives (0.4...6 kW) for BSH servo motors:
- LXM 05ApDpppp, version u 1.120 (2)
v Lexium 15 servo drives (0.9...42.5 kW) for BDH or BSH servo motors:
- LXM 15Lp, version u 1.45 (3) and LXM 15MD/15HP, version u 6.64 (4)
v IcLA intelligent compact motor-drives:
- IFA 6p, ver. u 1.105 (5), IFE 71, ver. u 1.104 (5) and IFS 6p/9p, ver. u 1.107 (5)
_____________________________________________________________________________
(1) Requires the PowerSuite software workshop VW3 A8 104, version u 2.00.
(2) Requires the PowerSuite software workshop for Lexium 05 VW3 A8 104, ver. 2.2.0 patch V2.B.
(3) Requires the Unilink software, version u 1.5.
(4) Requires the Unilink software, version u 4.0.
(5) Requires the IclA Easy software, version u 1.104.
Software setup via Unity Pro

Third party devices integration
Unity Pro software, version u 4.0, has a Hardware Catalog Manager tool for
integration of third party devices of the same level as Schneider Electric devices.
These third party devices, with its EDS file must be conform with the CIA standards
(CAN In Automation). The Hardware Catalog Manager tool allows:
v Integrating third party devices into Unity Pro software.
v Minimizing the size of the BMX P34 2010/2030 processor memory reserved for
PDO process variables.
v Customizing the Unity Pro device parameters.
Configuration of bus
Configuration of the CANopen bus on the Modicon M340 platform is fully
integrated in the Unity Pro software. From the Unity Pro graphic editor, simply select
the devices available in the catalog and assign them their CANopen slave address.
Exchanges between the CANopen bus and the Modicon M340 processor can be
assigned by configuration to the fast or master task.
Predefined profiles or functions are used to create the user interface automatically
using process variables (PDO), in such a way that any subsequent modification to
the mapping of these variables will have no impact on their topological addressing.
Hardware Catalog Manager for integration of third party devices Depending on the devices, dedicated configuration screens are used to assign the
initial parameters.
The dedicated screens are available for CANopen specialists who wish to optimize
the performance of the CANopen bus or to re-assign the Process Data Objects
(PDO) differently.
A cyclical access to the Service Data Object (SDO) corresponding to any CANopen
object of a particular device is possible using the applications standard
communication functions READ_VAR and WRITE_VAR, or even from the
Unity Pro diagnostic screens. These screens can be used to display the bus status
graphically, as well as to access the diagnostics sent by an inoperative device with a
single click of the mouse.
Example of Unity Pro configuration screen for Lexium 05

servo drive and Modicon FTB IP 67 I/O splitter box
Note: The max. number (63) of slave equipments connected on CANopen bus depends on the
type of devices. It is necessary to create an objects table (PDO/Cob Id) and occupation of memory
table (%Mi and Mwi). The sheet on pages 6/8 and 6/9, can be used to calculate by column (or
group of columns) and check that:
(objects x nb of products) y max. capacity
Introduction:
page 3/38
References:
page 3/41
Specifications:
page 3/40
Connection references:
pages 3/42
3/39
10
Modicon M340
automation platform
Description,
specifications
Description
Both of the performance processors on the Modicon M340 platform,
BMX P34 2010 and BMX P34 2030, have an integrated CANopen communication
port. They have the following on the front panel:
1 Screw for securing the module in its slot (marked 0) in the rack
2 A display block comprised of at least:
v CAN RUN LED (green): Integrated machine/installation bus operational
v CAN ERR LED (red): Integrated machine/installation bus inoperative
3 A mini B USB connector for a programming terminal
4 A slot equipped with Flash memory card for backing up the application
5 An RJ45 connector for serial link (with BMX P34 2010 model) or Ethernet
Modbus/TCP port (with BMX P34 2030 model)
6 A 9-way SUB-D connector for the CANopen Master machine and installation bus
2
3
4
BMX P34 2010
Specifications (1)
Type of bus
CANopen
services
BMX P34 2030
Structure
CANopen
M20
Conformity class
Standard
Device profile
Special
Physical interface
Topology
Access method
m
m
DS 301 V 04.02, 303-2

DS 405
9-way male SUB-D

Devices connected by daisy-chaining and/or tap junctions
CSMA/CA, carrier sense consumer/producer principle, collision detection and arbitration of
message priorities
Messages carrying objects: process data (PDO), service data (SDO), network management
(NMT), special functions (SYNC, EMCY, TIME)
20 Kbit/s1 Mbit/s depending on bus length
Double shielded twisted pair
Max. 63
1 Mbit/s
800 Kbit/s
500 Kbit/s
250 Kbit/s
125 Kbit/s
50 Kbit/s
20 Kbit/s
20
40
100
250
500
1000
2500
0.6
6
10
10
10
120
300
64
160
Kb
BMX P34 2010

BMX P34 2030
4 (4, 6, 8 or 12 slots)
48 for processor and modules (excluding power supply module)
1,024
256
Programmable loops (via CONT-CTL process control EFB library)
36 channels (counter, motion control and serial link)
Independent axes on CANopen bus (via MFB library)
1 RJ45 port, 10/100 Mbit/s

1 master (9-way SUB-D)
1 RJ45 port, Modbus master/slave or character mode
1 port, 12 Mbit/s
Max. 2 modules of one RJ45 port, 10/100 Mbit/s with Transparent Ready server:
- class B30 standard web server with BMX NOE 0100 module
- class C30 configurable web server with BMX NOE 0110 module
4,096 including 3,584 for the program, constants and symbols and 256 for data
Application layer
Transmission
CANopen
physical
configuration
(1)
Data rate
Medium
No. of slave devices
Data rate
Maximum length of bus (2)
Maximum length of tap-offs on one
tap junction (3)
Limitation per
segment
No. of devices
Maximum length
of segment (4)
Modicon M340
processor
No. of racks
Maximum no. of slots
Maximum no. in Discrete I/O
rack
Analog I/O
Process control
App. specific
Motion
Integrated
Ethernet
connections
CANopen bus
Serial link
USB port
Communication Ethernet
module
Modbus/TCP
Internal RAM capacity
32
185
16
205
(1) For more information, please refer to the Machines & Installations with industrial
communications catalog.
(2) Deduct 15 m per repeater from the length of the bus.
(3) For other restrictions, please refer to the CANopen hardware setup manual available at
www.schneider-electric.us/.
(4) With the use of TSX CAN Cp50/100/300 CANopen cables and TSX CAN CpDD03/1/3/5
preformed cordsets.
10
Introduction:
page 3/38
3/40
References:
page 3/41
pages 3/42
Modicon M340
automation platform
References,
connections
Modicon M340 Performance processors with integrated CANopen bus link

Modicon M340 processor modules are supplied with the BMX RMS 008MP Flash
memory card. This card performs the following actions transparently:
v Backing up the application (program, symbols and constants) supported in the
processor internal RAM that is not backed up
v Activation of the Transparent Ready class B10 standard web server (with
BMX P34 2030 processor)
This card can be replaced by another card featuring a file storage option.
See page 1/9.
I/O capacity
Memory
capacity
Max. no. of network Integrated

modules
communication ports
Reference
Weight
kg
Performance BMX P340 20, 4 racks
BMX P34 2010
1,024 discrete I/O

256 analog I/O
36 app-sp. channels
4,096 Kb
integrated
CANopen bus
Modbus serial link
2 Ethernet
Modbus/TCP
network
BMX P34 2010
0.210
CANopen bus
BMX P34 2030
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
network
0.215
BMX P34 2030
CANopen bus wiring system

Modicon M340 with
BMX P34 2010/2030 processor
Magelis
XBT Gp
12
Modicon STB
Modicon FTB
13
16
PC or
monitoring tool
16
Osicoder
17
24 V c
6a
5
10
14
6a
6b
IcLA
Modicon OTB
Altivar 31 Altivar 71
Lexium 05
Preventa
safety
controller
Lexium 15
TeSys Quickfit
Note: For numbers and references 1 through 17, see pages 3/42 and 3/43.
Different types of cables are available, making it possible to create any type of
application, including for harsh environments. For a definition of standard and harsh
environments, see page 3/42.
Several connectors are available to meet any requirement: straight or 90 angled
connectors, or angled connectors with the option of connecting a PC or diagnostic
pocket PC.
Power can be supplied to the equipment by means of cables, cordsets and tap
junctions: one AWG24 pair for the CAN signals, one AWG22 pair for the power
supply and the ground.
10
In addition to the IP 20 wiring offer, there is also an IP 67 wiring offer.

Introduction:
page 3/38
Description:
page 3/40
Specifications:
page 3/40
pages 3/42
3/41
Modicon M340
automation platform
References

Wiring system
Standard tap junctions and connectors
Designation
IP 20 CANopen tap
junction
TSX CAN TDM4
VW3 CAN TAP2
Description
No.
(1)
1
4 SUB-D ports. Screw terminal block for

connection of trunk cables
Line termination
90 angled
2
Straight (2)
90 angled with 9-way SUB-D for connecting a PC 4
or diagnostic tool
IP 20 connectors
CANopen female
9-way SUB-D.
Switch for line
termination
IP 67 M12 connectors Male
Female
2 RJ45 ports
IP 20 CANopen tap
junctions for Altivar
and Lexium 05
CANopen cables
(AWG 24)
Description
No.
(1)
Standard, e marking: low smoke. Halogen-free. 5
Flame-retardant (IEC 60332-1)
Standard, UL certification, e marking:
flame-retardant (IEC 60332-2)
5
TSX CAN KCD F180T
Reference
Weight
kg
0.196
TSX CAN TDM4
TSX CAN KCDF 90T

TSX CAN KCDF 180T
TSX CAN KCDF 90TP
0.046
0.049
0.051
FTX CN 12M5
FTX CN 12F5
VW3 CAN TAP2
0.050
0.050
Length
Unit
reference
TSX CAN CA50
TSX CAN CA100
TSX CAN CA300
TSX CAN CB50
TSX CAN CB100
TSX CAN CB300
TSX CAN CD50
TSX CAN CD100
TSX CAN CD300
IP 20 standard cables and preformed cordsets

Designation
TSX CAN KCD F90T
Length
For harsh environments (3) or mobile installation, 5

e marking: low smoke. Halogen-free.
Flame-retardant (IEC 60332-1). Resistance to
oils
CANopen preformed Standard, e marking: low smoke. Halogen-free. 6a
cordsets
Flame-retardant (IEC 60332-1)
One 9-way female
SUB-D connector at
each end
(AWG 24)
6a
Standard, UL certification, e marking:
flame-retardant (IEC 60332-2)
CANopen preformed One 9-way SUB-D connector,

cordsets
One RJ45 connector
(AWG 24)
6b
CANopen preformed Two 9-way SUB-D connectors, one male and

cordsets
one female
TSX CAN KCD F90TP
50 m
100 m
300 m
50 m
100 m
300 m
50 m
100 m
300 m
0.3 m
1m
3m
5m
0.3 m
1m
3m
5m
0,5 m
1m
3m
0.5 m
1.5 m
3m
5m
TSX CAN CADD03

TSX CAN CADD1
TSX CAN CADD3
TSX CAN CADD5
TSX CAN CBDD03
TSX CAN CBDD1
TSX CAN CBDD3
TSX CAN CBDD5
TCS CCN 4F3M05T
TCS CCN 4F3M1T
VW3 M38 05 R010 (4)
TCS CCN 4F3M3T
TLA CD CBA 005
TLA CD CBA 015
TLA CD CBA 030
TLA CD CBA 050
Weight
kg
4.930
8.800
24.560
3.580
7.840
21.870
3.510
7.770
21.700
0.091
0.143
0.295
0.440
0.086
0.131
0.268
0.400
IP 67 standard preformed cordsets

Designation
Description
CANopen preformed Preformed cordsets of two 5-way M12 A-coded

cordsets
angled connectors (one male connector and one
female connector)
No.
(1)
12
Length
0.3 m
0.6 m
1m
2m
3m
5m
Unit
reference
FTX CN 3203
FTX CN 3206
FTX CN 3210
FTX CN 3220
FTX CN 3230
FTX CN 3250
(1) For numbers, see page 3/41.

(2) For connection to Controller Inside programmable card, the VW3 CAN KCDF 180T connector can also be used.
(3) Standard environment:
- Without any particular environmental constraints
- Operating temperature between +5C and +60C
- Fixed installation
Harsh environment:
- Resistance to hydrocarbons, industrial oils, detergents, solder splashes
- Relative humidity up to 100%
- Saline atmoshphere
- Significant temperature variations
- Operating temperature between -10C and +70C
- Mobile installation
(4) Cordset includes the line termination.
10
Introduction:
page 3/38
3/42
Description:
page 3/40
Specifications:
page 3/40
Architecture:
page 3/41
Weight
kg
0.40
0.70
0.100
0.160
0.220
0.430
References (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Wiring system
IP 20 connection accessories
Designation
No.
(1)
CANopen connector 9-way female SUB-D. Switch for line termination.
for Altivar 71 drive (2) Cables exit at 180
VW3 CAN A71
Unit
Weight
reference
kg
VW3 CAN KCDF 180T
VW3 CAN A71
Preformed CANopen One RJ45 connector at each end

cordsets for Altivar
and Lexium 05 drives
10
0.3 m
1m
VW3 CAN CARR03

VW3 CAN CARR1
CANopen bus
Hardware interface for a link conforming to the
adaptor for Lexium 15 CANopen standard + one connector for a PC
servo drive
terminal
14
AM0 2CA 001V000
0.110
TCS CTN011M11F
No.
(1)
13
Length
m
Reference
FTX CNTL12
Weight
kg
0.010
16
0.6
1
2
5
1.5
3
5
FTX DP2206
FTX DP2210
FTX DP2220
FTX DP2250
FTX DP2115
FTX DP2130
FTX DP2150
FTX CNCT1
0.150
0.190
0.310
0.750
0.240
0.430
0.700
0,100
Sold
in lot of
Reference
FTX C78M5
FTX C78F5
XZ CC12MDM50B
XZ CC12FDM50B
XZ CC12MCM50B
XZ CC12FCM50B
FTX CM08B
FTX CM12B
0.050
0.050
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.100
0.100
FTX C78B
FTX CY1208
0.020
0.020
FTX CY1212
0.030
10
10
FTX DG12
FTX BLA10
FTX MLA10
0.020
0.010
0.010
Adaptor for Altivar 71

drive
Y-connector
Description
CANopen adaptor SUB-D to RJ45
CANopen/Modbus
Length
AM0 2CA 001V000
IP 67 connection accessories
For Modicon FTB monobloc I/O splitter boxes
Designation
Composition
Equipped with one M12 connector

(for end of bus)
24 V c power supply Equipped with two 5-way 7/8 connectors
connection cables
IP 67 line terminator
FTX DP21pp
T-junction box
for power supply
Equipped with one 5-way 7/8 connector at one

end and flying leads at the other end
17
Equipped with two 5-way 7/8 connectors
Connectors
XZ CC12pDM50B
Composition
7/8 type, 5-way

Straight, M12 type, 5 screw terminals
Angled, M12 type, 5 screw terminals
Sealing plugs
XZ CC12pCM50B
Y-connector
Diagnostics adaptor
Marker labels
FTX CY1208
Separate parts
Designation
Male
Female
Male
Female
Male
Female
For M8 connector (sold in packs of 10)

For M12 connector
(sold in packs of 10)
For 7/8 connector
Connection of two M8 connectors to M12 connector on
splitter box
Connection of two M12 connectors to M12 connector on
splitter box
Equipped with two M12 connectors
For plastic splitter boxes
For metal splitter boxes
Weigh
t
kg
(1) For numbers, see page 3/41.

(2) For ATV 71HpppM3, ATV 71HD11M3X, HD15M3X, ATV 71H075N4... HD18N4 drives, this
connector can be replaced with the TSX CAN KCDF 180T connector.
10
Introduction:
page 3/38
Description:
page 3/40
Specifications:
page 3/40
Architecture:
page 3/41
3/43
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction,
description
Modbus and character mode serial link
Introduction
Magelis XBT
Modicon M340
LU9 GC3
Modbus
3
Preventa
XPS MC
Modbus
third party product
Twido
Lexium 05
Altivar 71
The Modbus bus is used for master/slave architectures. It is necessary, however,

to check that the Modbus services used by the application are implemented on the
devices concerned.
The bus comprises one master station and several slave stations. Only the master
station can initiate the exchange (direct communication between slave stations is not
possible). Two exchange mechanisms are possible:
b Question/answer, where the requests from the master are addressed to a given
slave. The master then waits for the response from the slave that was interrogated.
b Broadcasting, the master broadcasts a message to the slave stations on the bus.
These stations execute the order without transmitting a response.
Description
The four BMX P34 1000 / 2000 / 2010 / 2020 processors in the Modicon M340
automation platform range integrate a serial link that can operate under Modbus
master/slave RTU/ASCII protocol or under character mode protocol.
For this serial port, these processors have the following on the front panel :
1 A display block comprised of among other LEDs:
v SER COM LED (yellow): Activity on the Modbus serial link (lit) or failure on
equipment present on the link (flashing).
2 An RJ45 connector for the Modbus serial link or character mode link
(RS 232C/RS 485, non-isolated) and its black indicator 3.
3
Note: For complete processor descriptions, see page 1/6.
BMX P34 1000/2000
8
1
3
2
3
BMX P34 2010
BMX P34 2020
References:
page 3/45
Connections:
pages 3/46
10
3/44
Specifications,
references
Modicon M340
automation platform
Specifications
Protocol
Structure
Transmission
Configuration
Type
Method of access
Physical Interface
Mode
Frame
Data rate
Medium
Number of devices
Maximum number of link addresses
Maximum length of bus
Maximum length of tap links
Services
Requests
Security, control parameters
Monitoring
Modbus
Non isolated serial link (1)
Master/slave type
RS 232, 2 wires
RS 485, 2 wires
Asynchronous in baseband
RTU/ASCII, Half duplex
0.3...19.2 Kbit/s (default 19.2 Kbit/s)
Shielded twisted pair
Character mode
RS 232, 4 wires
RS 485, 2 wires
Asynchronous in baseband
Full duplex
Half duplex
0.3...19.2 Kbit/s (default 19.2 Kbit/s)
Simple or double
Shielded twisted pair
shielded twisted pair
2 (point-to-point)
32 max. per segment 2 (point-to-point)
32 max. per segment
248
248
10 m non isolated link
15 m
10 m non isolated link 15 m
1000 m isolated link
1000 m isolated link

40 m isolated link
40 m isolated link
252 data bytes per RTU request
1 K data bytes per request
504 data bytes per ASCII request
One CRC on each frame (RTU)
One LRC on each frame (ASCII)
One LRC on each frame (ASCII)
Diagnostic counters, event counters
(1) For an isolated link, you must use the TWD XCA ISO terminal port cable connector.
Modbus functions
Modbus functions available on serial ports integrated to
Modicon M340 processors
Code
01
02
03
04
15
16
Modbus slave (server)

Read n output bits
Read n input bits
Read n output words
Read n input words
Write n output bits
Modbus master (client)

Read output bits
Read input bits
Read words
Read input words
Write n output bits
Other
code
Access any Modbus functions via using a DFB

user function block [DAT_EXCHG] (1)
(1) DFB user function block [DAT_EXCHG] can be used to send Modbus/TCP requests on
Ethernet network.
6
References
I/O capacity
Memory
capacity
Integrated
communication ports
Reference
Masse
kg
Standard processor with integrated serial link BMX P34 10, 2 racks
512 discrete I/O
128 E/S analog I/O
20 applicationspecific channels
2,048 Kb
integrated
Modbus serial link
BMX P34 1000
0.200
Performance processors with integrated serial link BMX P34 20, 4 racks
1024 discrete I/O
256 E/S analog I/O
36 applicationspecific channels
BMX P34 1000/2000
4,096 Kb
integrated
Modbus serial link
BMX P34 2000
0.200
Modbus serial link

CANopen bus
BMX P34 2010
0.210
BMX P34 2020

Modbus serial link
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
network
0.205
9
Serial link cabling system, see pages 3/46 and 3/47.
BMX P34 2020
10
Description:
pages 3/44
Connections:
pages 3/46
3/45
Modicon M340
automation platform
Connections

Cabling system
Cabling system
Magelis XBT
Modicon Premium
Modicon Quantum
10
11
Modbus RS 232
RS 232
RS 485
Out
In
2
7
12
Altivar 31
5
c 24 V
Modbus
7
Modbus
Modicon OTB
Preventa XPS MC third party product
Twido
Lexium 05
2 12
Modicon M340
Altivar 71
4
Extension and adaptation elements for RS 485 serial link
Designation
Description
No.
Length
Unit
reference
LU9 GC3
0.3 m
1m
VW3 A8 306 TF03

VW3 A8 306 TF10
0.190
0.210
Passive T-junction box - Tap-off point, extension of trunk cable

- Line termination adaptor
TSX SCA 50
0.520
- 2-channel tap-off point and extension 3

of trunk cable
- Address coding
- Line termination adaptor
TSX SCA 62
0.570
- Insulation of the RS 485 serial line

4
- Line termination adaptation
(R = 120 , C = 1 nF)
- Line pre-polarized (2 x R = 620 ) (1)
24 Vc power (2)
Mounting on 35 mm DIN rail
- Line termination adaptation

(R = 120 , C = 1 nF)
- Line pre-polarized (2 x R = 620 ) (1)
TWD XCA ISO
0.100
TWD XCA T3RJ
0.080
VW3 A8114
0.155
XGS Z24
0.100
Sold in
lots of 2
VW3 A8 306RC
0.200
- 1 x screw terminal block for trunk

cable: D(A), D(B), t and 0V
- 8 x RJ45 connectors for derivation
- 2 x RJ45 connectors for link in serial
LU9 GC3 splitter
T-junction boxes
- 2 x RJ45 connectors
dedicated for Altivar and - 1 x integrated cable with RJ45
Lexium
connector
Modbus splitter box
TSX SCA 50
LU9 GC3
TSX SCA 62
Passive 2-channel
subscriber socket, 2 x
15-way female SUB-D
connectors and 2 x
screw terminals
T-junction box
Screw terminals for main
cable.
1 x RJ45 connector for
derivation
T-junction box
3 x RJ45 connectors
VW3 A8 306 TFpp
- 1 x Bluetooth adaptor (10 m range,

class 2) with 1 x RJ45 connector,
- 1 x 0.1 m long cordset for PowerSuite
with 2 x RJ45 connectors,
- 1 x 0.1 m long cordset for TwidoSuite
with 1 x RJ45 connector and 1 x
mini-DIN connector,
- 1 x RJ45/SUB-D male 9-way adaptor
for Altivar speed drives
5
RS 232C/RS 485 line
24 Vc /20 mA power supply,
adaptor without modem 19.2 kbit/s
signals
Modbus / Bluetooth
adaptor
9
TWD XCA ISO
TWD XCA T3RJ
10
Line terminator
VW3 A8 114
3/46
XGS Z24
For RJ45 connector

(R = 120 W, C = 1 nF)
12
(1) Polarized terminals requires to connection of Twido controller master.

(2) 24 V c power supply external or thru the serial port integrated to Modicon M340 processors.
Weight
kg
0.500
Connections (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Cabling system
Cables and connecting cordsets for RS 485 serial link

Designation
RS 485 double
shielded twisted pair
trunk cables
Description
No.
Length
Modbus serial link, supplied without

connector
100 m
200 m
500 m
Unit
reference
TSX CSA 100
TSX CSA 200
TSX CSA 500
0.3 m
1m
3m
VW3 A8 306 R03

VW3 A8 306 R10
VW3 A8 306 R30
0.030
0.050
0.150
Modbus RS 485 cables 2 x RJ45 connectors
Cordsets for
Magelis XBT
display and terminal
Weight
kg
5.680
10.920
30.000
1 x RJ45 connector and

1 x 15-way SUB-D connector
1 x mini-DIN connector for Twido
controller and 1 x RJ45 connector
3m
VW3 A8 306
0.150
0.3 m
1m
3m
TWD XCA RJ003

TWD XCA RJ010
TWD XCA RJ030
0.040
0.090
0.16

1 end with flying leads
1 x miniature connector and
1 x 15-way SUB-D connector
3m
VW3 A8 306 D30
0.150
3m
TSX SCP CM 4530
0.180
11
2.5 m
XBT Z938
0.210
11
3m
VW3 A8 306 R30
0.150

1 x 25-way SUB-D connector for:
- XBT N200/N400/NU400
- XBT R410/411
- XBT GT2...GT7 (COM1 port) (1)
2 x RJ45 connectors for :
- XBT GT1 (COM1 port)
- XBT GT2...GT7 (COM2 port)
Connecting cordsets for RS 232 serial link

Designation
Description
Length
Cordset for Data

Terminal Equipment
(DTE: printer)
Serial link for Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) (2)

1 x 9-way SUB-D female connector
3m
Unit
Weight
reference
kg
TCS MCN 3M4F3C2
0.150
Cordset for Data

Communication
Equipment
(DCE: modem,
converter)
Serial link for point-to-point equipment (DCE)

1 x 9-way SUB-D male connector
3m
TCS MCN 3M4M3S2
0.150
(1) Must be associated with an XBT ZG909 adaptor.

(2) If the DTE is equipped with a 25-way SUB-D connector, a 25-way female / 9-way male SUB-D TSX CTC 07 adaptor
can be ordered.
10
3/47
Selection guide
Modicon M340
automation platform
Discrete I/O modules
Input modules and mixed I/O modules
Applications
16-channel input modules

Connection via cage clamp, screw clamp or spring-type removable terminals
3
c
Type
Voltage
100120V
Via BMX FTB 2000/2010/2020 20-way cage clamp, screw clamp or spring-type removable
terminals
Type 3
Type 1
Type 1 (a)
Type 3
IEC/EN 61131-2 conformity

Logic
Sensor compatibility in
accordance with standard
IEC/EN 60947-5-2
Positive
2-wire c, 3-wire c PNP any type
Fallback

Protection
Logic
Module
BMX
DDI 1602
Page
2/16
Compatibility with
installation help system
TeSys Quickfit
Compatibility with
Modicon Telefast ABE 7
pre-wired system
Connection sub-bases
Input and output adaptor

sub-bases
Passive connection
sub-base
Optimum Economy
Optimum Miniature
Universal
Fixed relays
Plug-in relays
Preformed cordsets with 40-way connector
Pages
9
Relay adaptor sub-base
10
a
48 V
Connection
Isolated outputs
c or a
24 V
16 isolated channels
48 V
Modularity
(Number of channels)
Isolated inputs
24 V
2/2
BMX
DDI 1603
Negative
2-wire c/a,
3-wire c PNP
or NPN any
type
2-wire a
BMX
DAI 1602
BMX
DAI 1603
BMX
DAI 1604
32/64-channel high-density input modules

Connection via 40-way connectors with preformed
cordsets
16/32-channel mixed I/O modules

Connection via cage clamp, screw clamp or spring-type
removable terminals
Connection via 40-way

connectors with
preformed cordsets
3
c
c
24 V I/O
24 V
c and a (outputs only)

24 V inputs, relay outputs
c
24 V I/O
8 isolated inputs and 8 isolated outputs
16 isolated inputs and

16 isolated outputs
Via one 40-way connector
Via two 40-way connectors
Type 3
Non-IEC
Via BMX FTB 2000/2010/2020 20-way cage clamp, screw

clamp or spring-type removable terminals
Type 3
Positive
2-wire c, 3-wire c PNP
any type
Positive
Positive
Configurable output fallback, continuous monitoring of output control and resetting of outputs
in case of detected internal fault
Yes
Protected
Not protected
Protected
Positive
Positive
BMX DDI 3202K
BMX DDI 6402K
BMX DDM 16022
2/16
2/17
LU9 G02 splitter boxes (8 motor starters) and

BMX FCC pp1/pp3 preformed cordsets
BMX DDM 16025
BMX DDM 3202K
LU9 G02 splitter boxes

(8 motor starters) and
BMX FCC pp1/pp3
preformed cordsets
Depending on model, 8- or 16-channel passive sub-bases, with or without LED, with common or 2 terminals per channel
Depending on model, 16-channel active sub-bases with solid state or electromechanical, fixed or removable relays, 5...48 V c, 24 V c, 24 V...240 V a or
volt-free, with common or 2 terminals per channel, screw or spring-type connection
ABE 7H34pp0
ABE 7H34pp0
ABE 7H16Cpp
ABE 7H16Cpp
ABE 7H08Rpp/7H08S21,
ABE 7H16R1p/7H16R50,
ABE 7H16R2p/7H16S21,
ABE 7H16S43,
ABE 7H16S43/7H16F43
ABE 7S16E2pp
ABE 7S16E2pp
ABE 7S16Sppp/7R16S
ABE 7P16F31pp
ABE 7P16F31pp
ABE 7R16Tppp/7P16Tppp
BMX FCC pp1/FCC pp3
BMX FCC pp3
5/8 to 5/11, 2/17
5/8 to 5/11,
2/17
10
2/3
Selection guide (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Output modules
Applications
32/64-channel high-density output modules

Connection via 40-way connectors with preformed cordsets
Type
c solid state
Voltage
24 V
Current
0.1 A per channel
Modularity
(Number of channels)
32 protected channels
Connection
Isolated outputs
Configurable output fallback, continuous monitoring of output control and resetting of outputs in
case of a detected internal fault
Yes
Protection
Current limiter with electronic tripping
Logic
Positive
Discrete output module
BMX DDO 3202K
Page
2/16
Compatibility with
installation help system
TeSys Quickfit
Compatibility with
pre-wired system
Connection sub-bases
Input adaptor sub-bases
Passive sub-base
Optimum Economy
ABE 7H34pp0
Optimum Miniature
ABE 7H16Cpp
Universal
ABE 7H16R3p
ABE 7H16F43
Fixed relays
ABE 7S16Sppp / 7R16S
Removable relays
ABE 7R16Tppp/7P16Tppp
8
Relay adaptor sub-base
Fallback
Preformed cordsets with 40-way connector
BMX FCCpp1/FCC pp3
Pages
5/8 to 5/11, 2/17
10
2/4
BMX DDO 6402K
16-channel output modules

Connection via cage clamp, screw clamp or spring-type removable terminals
8/16-channel output modules
c solid state
a triac
c/a relay
24 V c
100240 V
24 V c, 24...240 V a
0.5 A per channel
0.6 A per channel
3 A (Ith) per channel
2 A (Ith) per channel
16 non-protected channels
Via BMX FTB 2000/2010/2020 20-way cage clamp, screw clamp or spring-type removable terminals
Configurable output fallback, continuous monitoring of output
control and resetting of outputs in case of a detected internal
fault
Configurable output fallback
Yes
Yes
Current limiter with electronic tripping
Positive
Negative
2/16
10
2/5
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction,
description
Introduction
Discrete I/O modules in the Modicon M340 offer are standard modules occupying
a single slot, equipped with either of the following:
v A connector for a screw or spring-type 20-way removable terminal block
v One or two 40-way connector(s)
A wide range of discrete inputs and outputs can be used to meet whatever
requirements arise in terms of:
v functions, AC or DC I/O, positive or negative logic
v modularity, 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels per module
The inputs receive signals from the sensors and perform the following functions:
v
v
v
v
v
acquisition
adaptation
electrical isolation
filtering
protection against interference signals
The outputs memorize commands issued by the processor to enable control of the
preactuators via the decoupling and amplification circuits.
Description
BMX DpI/DpO/DRA discrete I/O modules are standard format (1 slot). They have a
case that helps to ensure IP 20 protection of the electronics, and are locked into
position with a captive screw.
1
I/O modules connected via 20-way removable terminal block

1 Rigid body providing support and protection for the electronic card
2 Module reference marking (a label is also visible on the right-hand side of the
module)
3 Channel status display block
4 Connector taking the 20-way removable terminal block for connecting sensors or
preactuators
2
8
To be ordered separately:
5 A BMX FTB 20p0 20-way removable terminal block (label supplied with each I/O
module) or a preformed cordset with a 20-way removable terminal block at one
end and flying leads at the other (see page 2/7).
Module and 20-way removable terminal block

1
2
I/O modules connected via 40-way connector

5
8
4
module)
4 One or two 40-way connectors (32 or 64 channels) (1) for connecting sensors or
preactuators
5 With the 64-channel module, successive actuations of a pushbutton cause the
display of the states of channels 0 ... 31 or 32 ... 64 on the block 3 (see page 2/9)
To be ordered separately, depending on the type of module:

One or two preformed cordset(s) with a 40-way connector (see page 2/7).
9
32- and 64-channel modules with for connection via
40-way connector(s)
(1) Fujistu FCN 40-way connector
Specifications:
pages 2/10
Connections:
pages 2/18
10
2/6
References:
pages 2/16
Introduction (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Connecting modules with removable terminal blocks

There are three types of 20-way removable terminal block:
v Screw clamp terminal block
v Cage clamp terminal block
v Spring-type terminal block
Each removable terminal block can take:

v Bare wires
v Wires equipped with DZ5-CE cable ends
a One version of the removable terminal block is equipped with BMX FTWpp1
cordsets with color-coded flying leads (3, 5 or 10 m long).
Cage clamp terminal blocks
a Preformed cordset with removable terminal block at one end

and flying leads at the other
The capacity of each terminal is:

v Minimum: One 0.34 mm2 wire (AWG 22)
v Maximum: One 1 mm2 wire (AWG 18)
BMX FTB 2000 cage clamp connectors are equipped with captive screws (maximum
tightening torque 0.5 N.m).
Screw clamp terminal blocks

The capacity of each terminal is:
v Minimum: One or two 0.34 mm2 wires (AWG 22)
v Maximum: Two 1.5 mm2 wires (AWG 15)
BMX FTB 2010 screw clamp connectors are equipped with captive screws
(maximum tightening torque 0.5 N.m).
3
B
Spring-type terminal blocks
A
B
The capacity of each terminal in the BMX FTB 2020 spring-type terminal blocks is:
v Minimum: One 0.34 mm2 wire (AWG 22)
v Maximum: One 1 mm2 wire (AWG 18)
b Preformed cordset with 40-way connector at one end
and 2 flying leads at the others
Connecting modules with 40-way connectors

Preformed cordsets with 40-way connector at one end and flying leads at the
other
1
2
5
3
c Preformed cordset with 40-way connector and HE 10
b Preformed cordsets can be used for easy direct wire-to-wire connection between
the I/O of modules with connectors 1 and the sensors, preactuators or intermediate
terminals.
These preformed cordsets are comprised of:
v At one end, a 40-way connector 2 with either of the following:
- One sheath containing 20 wires with a cross-section of 0.34 mm2 (AWG 22)
(BMX FCW pp1)
- Two sheaths 3 , each containing 20 wires with a cross-section of 0.34 mm2
(AWG 22) (BMX FCW pp3)
v At the other end 4, color-coded flying leads conforming to standard DIN 47100
(see page 2/21)
connector for Modicon Telefast ABE 7 system
Preformed cordsets with 40-way connector and HE 10 connector(s)
c Two types of cordset can be used for connecting the I/O of modules with 40-way
1
7
6
connectors 1 to rapid wiring connection and adaptation interfaces called Modicon

Telefast ABE 7 2 (see page 5/6).
These preformed cordsets are comprised of:
v At one end, a 40-way connector 2 with either of the following:
- One sheath 4 containing 20 wires (BMX FCC pp1)
- Two sheaths 5 each containing 20 wires (BMX FCC pp3)
v At the other end, one or two HE 10 connectors 5
Connection to TeSys Quickfit system

d BMX DDI 3202K/6402K input modules, BMX DDO 3202K/6402K output
modules or BMX DDM 3202K mixed input/output module 1 are designed for use
with TeSys Quickfit installation help systems via LU9 G02 splitter module 6 (for
8 motors starters).
The modules are easily connected using BMX FCC pp1/pp3 preformed cordsets 7.
d Example of connection to the TeSys Quickfit installation

help system
Specifications:
pages 2/10
References:
pages 2/16
Connections:
pages 2/18
2/7
10
Modicon M340
automation platform
Functions
Functions
Hot swapping
Due to their integrated devices, I/O modules (including application-specific modules)

can be removed and connected while powered up.
Note: When the PLC is powered up and running, the I/O modules can be removed without any
material risk by performing the following sequence before removing the module:
- Disconnect the power voltage on the outputs
- Disconnect the sensor and preactuator power supply
- Remove the terminal block or connector
I/O module assignment

Discrete I/O modules have different parameters for each channel. The channels are
grouped into blocks of 4, 8 or 16 consecutive channels depending on the type of
module. Each group of channels can be assigned to a specific application task
(master or fast).
Protection of DC inputs
The 24 and 48 V c inputs are constant-current type. This characteristic makes it
possible to:
v Help ensure minimum current in active state in compliance with the IEC standard
v Limit the current consumption when the input voltage increases to avoid unwanted
temperature rise in the module
v Reduce the current consumption on the sensor power supply provided by the PLC
power supply or by a process power supply
Protection of DC outputs
Protected solid state outputs have a protective device. When an output is active, the
protective device can detect the occurrence of the following:
v An overload or short-circuit: This deactivates the output (tripping) and indicates a
detected fault on the display on the module front panel (the LED for the affected
channel flashes, the I/O module detected fault LED lights up).
v Reverse polarity: This will short-circuit the power supply without damaging the
module. For this protection to work in optimum conditions, it is essential to place a
fast-blow fuse on the power supply upstream of the preactuators.
v Inductive overvoltage: Each output is protected individually against inductive
overvoltages and has a fast zener diode demagnetization circuit for electromagnets
that can reduce the output response time for some fast machines.
Reactivation of DC outputs
If a detected fault has caused an output to trip, the output can be reactivated using
this parameter if no other terminal detected fault is present.
Reactivation is defined for each group of 8 channels. It has no effect on an inactive
channel or one that is OK.
The reactivation command can be:
v Programmed: Reactivation is carried out by a command from the PLC application
or via the debug screen. To avoid repeated reactivations too close together, the
module automatically allows a time delay of 10 s between two reactivations.
v Automatic: Reactivation takes place automatically every 10 s until the detected
fault disappears.
RUN/STOP command
An input can be configured to control the RUN/STOP mode for the PLC.
This is taken into account on a rising edge. A STOP command from an input has
priority over a RUN command from a programming terminal or via the network.
10
Specifications:
pages 2/10
2/8
References:
pages 2/16
Connections:
pages 2/18
Modicon M340
automation platform
Output fallback
This parameter defines the fallback mode used by the DC solid state outputs when
the PLC stops following a:
v Processor detected fault
v Detected rack fault
v Detected fault on the cable connecting the racks
The outputs must be set to a state that is not harmful to the application. This state,
known as the fallback position, is defined for each module when the DC solid state
outputs are configured. This configuration offers a choice between:
v Fallback: The channels are set to 0 or 1 according to the fallback value defined for
the group of 8 corresponding channels.
v Maintain: The outputs maintain the state they were in before the stop occurred.
I/O module diagnostics

2
Each discrete I/O module is equipped with a display block on the front panel
centralizing all the information necessary for module control, diagnostics and
maintenance. The display block comprises:
1 A set of 8, 16 or 32 green LEDs depending on the module modularity. Each LED
is associated with one channel:
- On: channel in state 1; Off: channel in state 0
- Flashing: channel inoperative, overloaded or short-circuited
2 Three LEDs indicating the module status:
- RUN (green): On: Normal operation
-ERR (red): On: Detected internal module fault; Flashing: Detected
communication fault between the module and the processor
-I/O (red): On: External detected fault (sensor/preactuator voltage, overload,
short-circuit, etc.); Flashing: Detected terminal block fault
3 A +32 LED (green) indicating, in the case of 64-channel modules, whether the set
of 32 LEDs 1 displays the state of channels 0...31 (off) or the state of channels
32...63 (on). This +32 LED is activated or deactivated by a pushbutton located on
top of the module.
Diagnostics via Unity Pro
Using the integrated diagnostics in Unity Pro, this local diagnostics on the modules
front panel is complemented by system diagnostics based on predefined screens at
global hardware configuration level, module level and channel level (see pages 4/23
and 4/24).
Remote diagnostics using a web browser on a Thin Client PC
In addition, the diagnostics described above can be performed remotely using a
simple web browser thanks to the standard web server integrated in the Modicon
M340 platform (processor with integrated Ethernet port or Ethernet module), using
the ready-to-use Rack Viewer function (see page 3/4).
Compatibility with 2-wire and 3-wire sensors

Input type
24 V c
Non-IEC
positive log.
(sink)
48 V c
type 1
positive log.
(sink)
Any 3-wire c sensor, PNP type

Any 3-wire c sensor, NPN type
Schneider Electric 2-wire c sensor
or other brand, with the following specifications:
- Residual voltage in closed state 7 V
- Minimum switched current 2.5 mA
- Residual current in open state 1.5 mA
Schneider Electric 2-wire c sensor
or other brand with the following specifications:
- Residual voltage in closed state 4 V
- Minimum switched current 1 mA
- Residual current in open state 0.5 mA
2-wire c/a sensor (1)
2-wire a sensor
24 V c
type 3
positive log.
(sink)
24 V a
type 1
48 V a
type 3
100...120 V a
type 3
(1)
9
Compatible
Compatible
with restriction
Not compatible
10
For combinations with Osiprox inductive proximity sensors, see pages 6/10 and 6/11.
For combinations with Osiris photo-electric sensors, see page 6/12.
(1) 24 V a sensors can be used as negative logic (source) 24 V c inputs compatible with 3-wire c sensor NPN type, but in this case, are not IEC-compliant.
2/9
Modicon M340
automation platform
Specifications
Common specifications
Environment
Temperature derating
The specifications at 60C are validated for 60% of inputs and 60% of outputs at state 1.
Specifications of DC input modules
Module
Number of inputs
Commons
Connection
Nominal input values
Input limit
values
At state 1
At state 0
Voltage
Current
Logic
V
mA
Voltage
Current
V
mA
Voltage
Current
V
mA
BMX DDI 3202K

32
2
One 40-way
connector
BMX DDI 6402K

64
4
Two 40-way
connectors
BMX DAI 1602

16
1
Spring
or screw-type
20-way
removable
terminal block
24 c
3.5
Positive (sink)
48 c
2.5
24 c
2.5
3
Negative (source)
u 11
u 34
>2
(for U u 11 V)
<5
y 1.5
>2
(for U u 34 V)
< 10
y 0.5
u 11
>2
(for U u 11 V)
<5
y 1.5
u 15
>1
(for U u 15 V)
u 14
>2
Input impedance at nominal voltage
1930 (possible 38...60

up to 34 V, limited
to 1 hour in every
24 hours)
6.8
19.2
Response time (filtering)
ms
ms
4
7
Sensor power supply

(ripple included)
Number
BMX DDI 1602

BMX DDI 1603
16
1
Spring or screw-type 20-way
removable terminal block
Typical
Maximum
1930 (possible up to 34 V, limited to 1 hour in every

24 hours)
9.6
M
V rms
V
Protected
Type 3
Type 1
Type 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-2
Yes
No
Use one 0.5 A fast-blow fuse per group of channels
> 10 at 500 V c
1,500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute (up to 4,000 m)
500 c
V
V
Current sink
> 18 c
< 14 c
Consumption
mA
See Power consumption table on page 6/13
Maximum dissipated power

10
References:
pages 2/16
2/10
Connections:
pages 2/18
24
6.4
10
20
Reverse polarity
Compatibility with 2-wire/3-wire sensors
Paralleling of inputs (1)
Protection of inputs
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength
Primary/Secondary
Between groups of
channels
Type of input
Sensor voltage control
OK
threshold
Out of range
Typical
y 0.5
No
Non-IEC
Resistive
> 36 c
< 24 c
> 18 c
< 14 c
2.5
3.6
3.9
4.3
3
None
(1) This characteristic allows several inputs to be wired in parallel on the same module or on
different modules for input redundancy.
Modicon M340
automation platform
Specifications (continued)
Specifications of AC input modules

Module
Number of inputs
Commons
Connection
Nominal input values
Input limit
values
At state 1
At state 0
Voltage
Current
Frequency
V
mA
Hz
BMX DAI 1602

BMX DAI 1603
16
1
Spring or screw-type 20-way removable terminal block
24 a
48 a
3
5
50/60
Voltage
Current
Voltage
Current
V
mA
V
mA
Hz
V
u 15
u2
y5
y1
47...63
20...26
y 10
u 74
u 2.5
y 20
40...52
85132
mA
95
240
k
ms
ms
6
15
20
9
10
13
M
V rms
V
V
Type 1
Type 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-2
Use one 0.5 A fast-blow fuse per group of channels
>10 at 500 V c
1,500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute (up to 4,000 m)
Resistive
Capacitive
> 18
> 36
< 14
< 24
mA
1,504,958
Number
Frequency
Sensor power supply
(ripple included)
Current peak
At nominal voltage
on activation
Input impedance at nominal voltage and F = 55 Hz
Response time (filtering)
Activation
Deactivation
Protection of inputs
Dielectric strength
Type of input
Sensor voltage control threshold OK
Out of range
Reliability
Consumption
MTBF in hours
At Tambient = 30C
Typical

3
None
u 34
BMX DAI 1604
100...120 a
4
> 82
< 40
3.8
Specifications of triac output module

Module
Number of outputs
Commons
Connection
Operating voltages
Currents
Maximum inrush current

Leakage current
Residual voltage
Response time
Nominal resistive load
Type of command
Built-in protection
Protection fuses
Dielectric strength
Consumption
Number
Nominal
Limit
Maximum
Minimum
V
V
A
At state 0
At state 1
Activation
Deactivation
A
mA
V
ms
ms
Typical
V rms
M
mA
BMX DAO 1605

16
4
100...240 a
85...288 a
0.6 per channel, 2.4 per common, 4.8 total for 4 commons
25 mA at 100 V a, 25 mA at 240 V a
y 20/cycle
y 1.5 for 120 V a, 60 Hz, 3 for 240 V a, 60 Hz
y 1.5
y 1 +/- 0.5 Hz
y 1 +/- 0.5 Hz
Passage through zero
Varistor
None (use an external fast-blow fuse)
2,830 a/3 cycles (up to 2,000 m)
> 10 at 500 V c
10
References:
pages 2/16
Connections:
pages 2/18
2/11
Modicon M340
automation platform
Specifications of DC solid state output modules
Module
Number of inputs
Commons
Connection
Output nominal values
Output limit values
Tungsten filament lamp power

Leakage current
Residual voltage
V
A
Voltage
(ripple included)
Current per
channel
Current per
module
1930 (possible up to 34 V, limited to 1 hour in every 24 hours)
0.625
0.125
10
3.2
W
mA
V
6 maximum
< 0.5
< 1.2
1.2 maximum
0.1 (for U = 30 V)
At state 0
At state 1
ms
ms
Paralleling of outputs
Switching frequency on inductive load
Hz
Built-in protection
Against
overvoltages
Against inversions
Against
short-circuit and
overloads
Preactuator voltage control
At state 0
V
threshold
Out of range
V
Dielectric strength
M
Output/ground or V rms
output/internal
logic
Between groups of V
channels
Typical
mA

10
References:
pages 2/16
2/12
BMX DDO 3202K

32
2
One 40-way connector
Voltage
Current
Logic
Minimum load impedance

Response time (1)
Maximum overload time
Compatibility with IEC/EN 61131-2 DC inputs
Consumption
Number
BMX DDO 1602

BMX DDO 1612
16
1
Spring or screw-type 20-way removable
terminal block
24 c
0.5
Positive (source)
Negative (sink)
Connections:
pages 2/18
48
1.2
Yes
Yes (2 max.)
0.5/LI2
Yes, by Transil diode
BMX DDO 6402K

64
4
Two 40-way
connectors
0.1
Positive (source)
6.4 if 40C
5.1 if 50C
3.8 if 60C
< 1.5 (for I = 0.1 A)

220
15
Yes
Yes (3 max.)
Yes, by reverse-mounted diode. Use a 2 A fuse on the + 24 V of the preactuators.

Yes, with current limiter and electronic
Yes, with current limiter and electronic
circuit-breaker 1.5 In < Id < 2 In
circuit-breaker 0.125 A < Id < 0.185 A
> 18
< 14
> 10 at 500 V c
1,500 a - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute
500 c

4
None
2.26
3.6
6.85
See Current per
module above
(1) Outputs are equipped with a fast demagnetization circuit for the electromagnets. Discharge
time for the electromagnets < L/R.
Modicon M340
automation platform
Specifications of relay output modules

Module
Number of inputs
Commons
Connection
Limit operating voltages
DC
AC
V
V
BMX DRA 0805

BMX DRA 1605
8
16
Without common point
2
10...34 c
24...125 c (resistive load)
19...264 a
200...264 a (Cos = 1)
A
mA
3
1 at 5 V c
Minimum
VA
24 V
VA
24 (1),
7.2 (2)
24 V
Number
Thermal current
Switching load
Electrical life
AC load
Power
cos = 0.7
Power
cos = 0.35
Power
DC load
Voltage
AC load
DC load
Resistive loads
AC-12
Inductive loads
AC-15
(cos = 0.3)
Inductive loads
AC-14
(cos = 0.7)
Resistive loads
DC-12
Inductive loads
DC-13 (14)
Response time
Built-in
protection
48 V
50 (4),
110 (5)
10 (6),
24 (7)
Power
VA
50 (3)
Power
VA
24 (5)
Power
VA
Power
Power
Activation
Deactivation
ms
ms
24 (4),
40 (13)
10 (7),
24 (4)
< 10
<8
Against overloads and short-circuits

Against AC inductive overvoltages
Typical
Dissipated power
110...
120 V
110 (4),
220 (5)
10 (8),
50 (9),
110 (10)
200...
240 V
220 (4)
10 (8),
50 (11),
110 (4),
220 (12)
2
100 V
10 (1),
3 (2)
100 V
200 V
300 (1),
80 (2)
200 (1),
60 (2)
240 V
240 (1),
72 (2)
120 (1),
36 (2)
200 V
240 V
200 (1),
60 (2)
120 (1),
36 (2)
300 (1),
80 (2)
240 (1),
72 (2)
24 (1),
7.2 (2)
10 (1),
3 (2)
< 12
None. Use a fast-blow fuse per channel or group of channels

None. Use an RC circuit or ZNO surge limiter appropriate to the voltage in parallel on each
output
None. Use a discharge diode on each output
Against DC inductive overvoltages

Dielectric strength
Consumption
24 V
M
V rms
mA
> 10 at 500 V c
2,000 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute
2.7 max.
None
(1) For 1 x 105 operating cycles

(3) For 0.7 x 106 operating cycles
(10)For 0.15 x 106 operating cycles
(11)For 3 x 106 operating cycles
(14)Where L/R = 60 ms for BMX DRA 0805 module, L/R = 7 ms for BMX DRA 1605 module
10
References:
pages 2/16
Connections:
pages 2/18
2/13
Modicon M340
automation platform
Specifications of mixed I/O relay module
Module
Number of inputs/outputs
Commons
Connection
Nominal values Inputs
Outputs
2
Input limit
values
Voltage
Current
DC voltage
Direct current
AC voltage
Alternating current
At state 1
Voltage
Current
At state 0
Voltage
Current
Sensor power supply
(ripple included)
Input response time
Typical
Maximum
V
mA
V
A
V
A
u 11
u 2 (for U u 11 V)
5
y 1.5
1930 (possible up to 30 V, limited to 1 hour in
every 24 hours)
6.8
4
7
Protected
Yes, type 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-2
No
Current sink
y 12
y 10
5 V c/1 mA
264 a/125 c
u 20 million
Use one 0.5 A fast-blow fuse per group of

channels
No (use one fast-blow fuse per channel or

group of channels)
V
V
> 18
< 14
VA
24 V
VA
M
V rms
V
V rms
mA
> 10 at 500 V c
1,500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute
500 c
24 (1),
7.2 (2)
3,600 cycles/hour
V
mA
V
mA
V
k
ms
ms
Reverse polarity on inputs

Paralleling of inputs
Input type
Output response time
Number
Switching load
Mechanical durability
Activation
Deactivation
Minimum
Maximum
No. of switching
operations
ms
ms
V
Fuse protection
Sensor voltage control thresholds OK

Out of range
Relay output
Voltage
AC load
Inductive loads
Power
AC-14
(cos = 0.7)
Inductive loads
Power
AC-15
(cos = 0.35)
DC load
Inductive loads
Power
DC-13
Maximum switching frequency
Dielectric
Primary/secondary
strength
Between groups of I/O
Max. voltage
Consumption
Typical
Dissipated power
10
References:
pages 2/16
2/14
Connections:
pages 2/18
BMX DDM 16025

24 V c inputs
24 V c or 24...240 V a relay outputs
8
8
1
1
24 c (positive logic)
3.5
24 c
2 (resistive load)
220 a, Cos = 1
3.1 maximum
None
(1) For 1 x 10 5 operating cycles
2,830 a/cycle
200 V
300 (1),
80 (2)
240 V
240 (1),
72 (2)
200 (1),
60 (2)
120 (1),
36 (2)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Specifications of 24 V c mixed I/O modules

Module
BMX DDM 3202K

Inputs
Solid state outputs
16
16
1
1
W
V
mA
V
mA
V
BMX DDM 16022

Inputs
Solid state outputs
8
8
1
1
Spring or screw-type 20-way removable
terminal block
24 c
3.5
500
Positive (sink)
Positive (source)
6 maximum
u 11
> 3 (for U u 11 V)
5
y 1.5
1930
2.5
Positive (sink)
u 11
u 2 (for U u 11 V)
5
y 1.5
1930
100
Positive (source)
1.2 maximum
1930
1930
A
A
0,625
5
0,125
3.2

Input response time
Typical
Maximum
Reverse polarity on inputs
Input type
k
ms
ms
6.8
4
7
Protected
Yes, type 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-2
Current sink
9.6
4
7
Protected
Yes, type 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-2
Current sink
Leakage current
At state 0
Residual voltage
At state 1
Minimum load impedance
Output response time (1)
Max. overload time before detected fault state
Compatibility with IEC 61131-2 DC inputs
Paralleling of outputs
Switching frequency on inductive load
Built-in protection
Against
overvoltages
Against inversions
mA
V
ms
ms
< 0.5
< 1.2
48
1.2
15
Yes
Yes (2 maximum)
0.5/LI2
0.1
< 1.5 (for I=0.1 A)
220
1.2
15
Yes
Yes (3 maximum)
0.5/LI2
Yes, by
reverse-mounted
diode. Use a 2 A fuse
on the preactuator
+ 24 V
Yes, by current limiter
and electronic
circuit-breaker
1.5 ln < Id < 2 ln
Yes, by
reverse-mounted
diode. Use a 2 A fuse
on the preactuator
+ 24 V
Yes, by current limiter
and electronic
circuit-breaker
0.125 A < Id < 0.185 A
Number of inputs/outputs
Commons
Connection
Number
Nominal values
Voltage
Current
Logic
Tungsten filament lamp power

Input limit
At state 1
values
Voltage
Current
Voltage
Current
Possible up to
30 V, limited to
1 hour in every 24
hours
Possible up to
30 V, limited to
1 hour in every 24
hours
Per channel
Per module
At state 0
Sensor power
supply (ripple
included)
Output limit
values
Voltage (ripple
included)
Currents
V
mA
Hz
Against
short-circuits and
overloads
Sensor and preactuator voltage
control thresholds
OK
Out of range
Dielectric
Primary/secondary
strength
Between groups of inputs and outputs
Outputs/ground or outputs/internal
logic
Consumption
3.3 V c
Typical
Maximum
24 V c
Typical
preactuators (2)
Maximum
References:
pages 2/16
Use one 0.5 A

fast-blow fuse per
group of channels
V
M
V rms
V
mA
mA
mA
mA
W
Use one 0.5 A

fast-blow fuse per
group of channels
> 18
< 14
> 10 at 500 V c
1,500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute
500 c
1,500 - 50/60 Hz for
1,500 - 50/60 Hz for

1 minute
1 minute
79
125
111
166
59
69
67
104
3.7
4
None
(1) Outputs are equipped with a fast demagnetization circuit for the electromagnets. Discharge
time for the electromagnets < L/R.
(2) Excluding load current.
Connections:
pages 2/18
2/15
10
Modicon M340
automation platform
References
References
Discrete input modules
Type of
current
c
Input voltage
Connection by
(1)
24 V (positive
logic)
Screw or spring-type 20-way

Two 40-way connectors
BMX DpI 160p
Weight
BMX DDI 1602
kg
0.115
BMX DDI 3202K
0.112
BMX DDI 6402K
0.145

Non-IEC
16 isolated inputs
(1 x 16)
BMX DAI 1602
0.115
48 V (positive
logic)

Type 1
16 isolated inputs
(1 x 16)
BMX DDI 1603
0.115
24 V

Type 1
16 isolated inputs
(1 x 16)
16 isolated inputs
(1 x 16)
16 isolated inputs
(1 x 16)
BMX DAI 1602
0.115
BMX DAI 1603
0.115
BMX DAI 1604
0.115
100...120 V
BMX DDI 3202K
Reference
24 V (negative
logic)
48 V
IEC/EN
No. of channels
61131-2
(common)
conformity
Type 3
16 isolated inputs
(1 x 16)
Type 3
32 isolated inputs
(2 x 16)
Non-IEC
64 isolated inputs
(4 x 16)
Type 3
Type 3
BMX DDI 6402K
Discrete output modules

Type of
current
Output voltage Connection by

(1)
c
24 V/0.5 A
solid state (positive logic)

24 V/0.5 A
(negative logic) removable terminal block
24 V/0.1 A
(positive logic)
BMX
DDO 16p2
BMX DRA
0805/1605
Two 40-way connectors
IEC/EN
No. of channels
61131-2
(common)
conformity
Yes
16 protected
outputs
(1 x 16)
Non-IEC
16 protected
outputs
(1 x 16)
Yes
32 protected
outputs
(2 x 16)
Yes
64 protected
outputs
(4 x 16)
16 outputs
(4 x 4)
a triac
100...240
c or a
relay
12...24 V c/3 A, Screw or spring-type 20-way

24...240 Va/3 A removable terminal block
Yes
24 V c/2 A,
240 V a/2 A
Yes


8 non-protected
outputs
(without common)
16 non-protected
outputs
(2 x 8)
8
BMX
DDO 3202K
BMX
DDO 6402K
(1) By connector module supplied with cover(s).
10
Specifications:
pages 2/10
2/16
Connections:
pages 2/18
Reference
Weight
BMX DDO 1602
kg
0.120
BMX DDO 1612
0.120
BMX DDO 3202K
0.110
BMX DDO 6402K
0.150
BMX DAO 1605
0.140
BMX DRA 0805
0.145
BMX DRA 1605
0.150
Modicon M340
automation platform
Discrete mixed I/O modules
Number
of I/O
16
BMX
DDM 160p2
BMX
DDM 3202K
32
Connection
via (1)
Screw
or spring-type
20-way
removable
terminal block
No. of inputs
(common)
8 (positive logic)
(1 x 8)
One 40-way
connector
16 (positive logic)
(1 x 16)
No. of outputs
(common)
8, solid state
24 V c / 0,5 A
(1 x 8)
8, relay 24 V c or
24...240 V a
(1 x 8)
16, solid state
24 V c / 0,1 A
(1 x 16)
IEC/EN 61131-2 Reference

conformity
Inputs, type 3 BMX DDM 16022
Weight
kg
0.115
Inputs, type 3
BMX DDM 16025
0.135
Inputs, type 3
BMX DDM 3202K
0.110
Type
Reference
Cage clamp
Screw clamp
Spring-type
BMX FTB 2000

BMX FTB 2010
BMX FTB 2020
Removable connection blocks

Description
Use
20-way removable terminal For module with 20-way removable terminal

blocks
block
BMX FTB 20p0
Weight
kg
0.093
0.075
0.060
Preformed cordsets for I/O modules with removable terminal block

Description
Preformed cordsets with
one end with flying leads
Composition
Length
Reference
One 20-way removable terminal block

(BMX FTB 2020)
One end with color-coded flying leads
3m
5m
10 m
BMX FTW 301

BMX FTW 501
BMX FTW 1001
Weight
kg
0.850
1.400
2.780
BMX FTW p01
Preformed cordsets for I/O modules with 40-way connectors

Description
Preformed cordsets with
one end with flying leads
No. of
sheaths
1 x 20
wires (16
channels)
Composition
BMX FCW 301

BMX FCW 501
BMX FCW 1001
Weight
kg
0.820
1.370
2.770
2 x 20
One 40-way connector 0.324 mm2 3 m
wires (32 Two ends with
5m
channels) color-coded flying leads
10 m
BMX FCW 303

BMX FCW 503
BMX FCW 1003
0.900
1.490
2.960
0.324 mm2 0.5 m

1m
2m
3m
5m
10 m
BMX FCC 051

BMX FCC 101
BMX FCC 201
BMX FCC 301
BMX FCC 501
BMX FCC 1001
0.140
0.195
0.560
0.840
1.390
2.780
0.324 mm2 0.5 m

1m
2m
3m
5m
10 m
BMX FCC 053

BMX FCC 103
BMX FCC 203
BMX FCC 303
BMX FCC 503
BMX FCC 1003
0.210
0.350
0.630
0.940
1.530
3.000

One end with colorcoded flying leads
BMX FCW p01
BMX FCW p03
Preformed cordsets for

sub-bases
BMX FCC p01
1 x 20
wires (16 One HE 10 connector
channels)

2 x 20
wires (32 Two HE 10 connectors
channels)
CrossLength
section
0.324 mm2 3 m
5m
10 m
Reference
10
Specifications:
pages 2/10
Connections:
pages 2/18
2/17
Connections
Modicon M340
automation platform
Input modules
BMX DDI 1602

Chnl
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+
+
c 24 V
17
Fu
19
1
2
3
4
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Fu
20
20
19
19
18
18
17
17
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
11
c 24 V
10
10
Sensors
+ -
c 24 V
20
Sensors
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
Fu
c 24 V
+ -
c 24 V
Chnl
Fu
Sensors
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
20
20
19
19
18
18
17
17
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
12
11
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
10
13
12
+ -
11
10
2
1
+ -
2
1
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
BMX DDI 3202K: Connector A (inputs I0...I31)

BMX DDI 6402K: Connector A (inputs I0...I31) and connector B (inputs I32...I63)
For correspondence of the 40-way connector pins with the wire colors of BMX FCW p01/p03
prewired cordsets, in accordance with DIN 47100, see table on page 2/21.
12
13
14
15
16
+
Fu
18
17
19
20
BMX DAI 1602/1603/1604

Sensors
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
BMX DAI 1602, use in 24 V c, negative logic

Chnl
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Sensors
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
17
L1
a
N
10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Chnl
Fu
18
BMX DDI 1603
+
c 48 V
Chnl
Chnl
Sensors
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
BMX DDI 3202K/6402K
Fu
18
18
19
20
L1-N voltage: 24 V a, BMX DAI 1602

48 V a, BMX DAI 1603
100/120 V a, BMX DAI 1604
Fu: 0.5 A fast-blow fuse
2/18
c 24 V
+
Fu
20
19
Modicon M340
automation platform
Output modules
BMX DDO 1602
BMX DDO 3202K/6402K

B
Chnl Preactuators
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Chnl Preactuators
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
+
c 24 V
-
16
17
Fu
+
-
c 24 V
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
18
19
20
BMX DDO 1612

Chnl
Preactuators
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Fu
20
20
19
19
18
18
17
17
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
11
10
10
Fu
+
c 24 V
-
1
2
Chnl Preactuators
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
+
c 24 V
-
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
+
c 24 V
-
Fu
Fu
20
20
19
19
18
18
17
17
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
11
10
10
2
-
4
-
4
5
6
BMX DDO 3202K: Connector A (outputs I0...I31)

BMX DDO 6402K: Connector A (outputs I0...I31) and connector B (inputs I32...I63)
7
8
9
For correspondence of the 40-way connector pins with the wire colors of BMX FCW p01/p03
prewired cordsets, in accordance with DIN 47100, see table on page 2/21.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Fu
c 24 V
19
20
BMX DAO 1605

Chnl
a 120/240 V
a 120/240 V
a 120/240 V
a 120/240 V
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
BMX DRA 0805

Preactuators
Chnl
1
Fu
4
6
7
11
13
Fu
10
12
Fu
14
15
16
17
Preactuators
Chnl
1
Uc/a
2
3
Uc/a
4
5
Uc/a
6
7
Uc/a
8
9
Uc/a
10
11
Uc/a
12
13
Uc/a
14
15
Uc/a
Fu
18
Fu
BMX DRA 1605
16
17
18
19
19
20
20
U c 1224 V
U a 24240 V
Preactuators
0
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
Uc/a
5
6
7
9
10
11
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Uc/a
Fu
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Fu
19
20
U c 1224 V
U a 24240 V
10
Description:
pages 2/6
Specifications:
pages 2/10
References:
pages 2/16
2/19
Modicon M340
automation platform
Mixed I/O modules

BMX DDM 16025
BMX DDM 16022
Chnl
Sensors
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Fu
11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
16
17
Fu
20
Fu
Sensors
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
7
+
Fu
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
c 24 V
Preactuators
Fu: 0.5 A fast-blow fuse
10
2/20
Specifications:
pages 2/10
20
20
19
19
18
18
17
17
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
11
10
10
References:
pages 2/16
Description:
pages 2/6
c 24 V
c 24 V
BMX DDM 3202K
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fu
15
Preactuators
14
19
1
2
c 24 V
13
c 24 V / a 24240 V
Chnl
12
18
Sensors
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
c 24 V
Chnl
1
10
11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Preactuators
Fu
19
20
Modicon M340
automation platform
Cordset color codes in accordance with DIN 47100
Connection cables with 40-way connector and end(s) with flying leads BMX FCW p01/p03
Correspondence of connector pins with the wire colors at the
sheath end
20 wires
Cordset with one sheathed end with flying leads
BMX FCW p01
20 wires
20 wires
Cordset with two sheathed ends with flying lead
BMX FCW p03
Note: Each input not used must be connected to 0 V in c or

neutral in a (Immunity to electromagnetic fields EMC).
Connector
pin no.
B20
A20
B19
A19
B18
A18
B17
A17
B16
A16
B15
A15
B14
A14
B13
A13
B12
A12
B11
A11
B10
A10
B9
A9
B8
A8
B7
A7
B6
A6
B5
A5
B4
A4
B3
A3
B2
A2
B1
A1
Color at sheath
end
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
Pink
Blue
Red
Black
Purple
Gray/pink
Red/blue
White/green
Brown/green
White/yellow
Yellow/brown
White/gray
Gray/brown
White/pink
Pink/brown
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
Pink
Blue
Red
Black
Purple
Gray/pink
Red/blue
White/green
Brown/green
White/yellow
Yellow/brown
White/gray
Gray/brown
White/pink
Pink/brown
32/64-channel
inputs
Input 0/32
Input 1/33
Input 2/34
Input 3/35
Input 4/36
Input 5/37
Input 6/38
Input 7/39
Input 8/40
Input 9/41
Input 10/42
Input 11/43
Input 12/44
Input 13/45
Input 14/46
Input 15/47
+ 24 V
- 24 V
+ 24 V
- 24 V
Input 16/48
Input 17/49
Input 18/50
Input 19/51
Input 20/52
Input 21/53
Input 22/54
Input 23/55
Input 24/56
Input 25/57
Input 26/58
Input 27/59
Input 28/60
Input 29/61
Input 30/62
Input 31/63
+ 24 V
- 24 V
+ 24 V
- 24 V
32/64-channel
outputs
Output 0/32
Output 1/33
Output 2/34
Output 3/35
Output 4/36
Output 5/37
Output 6/38
Output 7/39
Output 8/40
Output 9/41
Output 10/42
Output 11/43
Output 12/44
Output 13/45
Output 14/46
Output 15/47
+ 24 V
- 24 V
+ 24 V
- 24 V
Output 16/48
Output 17/49
Output 18/50
Output 19/51
Output 20/52
Output 21/53
Output 22/54
Output 23/55
Output 24/56
Output 25/57
Output 26/58
Output 27/59
Output 28/60
Output 29/61
Output 30/62
Output 31/63
+ 24 V
- 24 V
+ 24 V
- 24 V
32-channel
I/O
Input 0
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Input 12
Input 13
Input 14
Input 15
+ 24 V
- 24 V
+ 24 V
- 24 V
Output 0
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7
Output 8
Output 9
Output 10
Output 11
Output 12
Output 13
Output 14
Output 15
+ 24 V
- 24 V
+ 24 V
- 24 V
Connection cables with 20-way terminal block at one end and flying leads at the other BMX FTW p01
Correspondence of 20-way removable terminal block pins with the wire colors (at sheath end)
Correspondence of terminal block pins with the wire colors at the Terminal
Color at sheath
sheath end
block pin no. end
1
White
2
Brown
3
Green
4
Yellow
5
Gray
6
Pink
7
Blue
8
Red
9
Black
20 wires
Cordset with 1 sheathed end with flying lead
BMX FTW p01
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Purple
Gray/pink
Red/blue
White/green
Brown/green
White/yellow
Yellow/brown
White/gray
Gray/brown
White/pink
Pink/brown
16-channel
inputs
Input 0
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7/
Input 8
8- or 16-channel
outputs
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Input 12
Input 13
Input 14
Input 15
Power supply
+ common pwr sup.
Power supply
Power supply
See page 2/19

See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
16-channel
I/O
Input 0
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Sensor + common
power supply
Sensor pwr supply
Output 0
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7
Preactuator pwr sup.
Preactuator pwr sup.
2/21
10
Selection guide
Modicon M340
automation platform
Analog I/O modules
Applications
Analog inputs
Type of I/O
Isolated low-level voltage inputs, resistors, thermocouples and temperature probes
Type
Multi-range
Range
Voltage
40 mV, 80 mV, 160 mV, 320 mV, 640 mV and 1.28 V
Current
Thermocouple,
Temperature probe,
Resistor
Thermocouples type B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U
Temperature probes type Pt 100, Pt 1000, Ni 100, Ni 1000 and Cu 10, 2-,3- or 4-wire
Resistors 2-, 3- or 4-wire, 400 or 4,000
Modularity
4 channels
8 channels
Acquisition period
400 ms for 4 channels
400 ms for 8 channels
Conversion time
Resolution
16 bits
Isolation
Between channels: 750 V c

Between channels and bus: 1,400 V c
Between channels and ground: 750 V c
6
Connection
Directly to the module
Via 40-way connector
Via preformed cordsets
BMX FCW p01S cordsets with one end with color-coded flying leads (3 or 5 m long)
Module
BMX ART 0414
Page
2/31
Compatibility with Modicon Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired

system
Sub-base with 4 channels for direct connection of 4 thermocouples plus connection and
provision of cold-junction compensation
Type of module
Connection sub-base
ABE 7CPA412
Preformed cordsets
(length 1.5, 3 or 5 m)
BMX FCApp2
BMX ART 0814
10
Pages
2/22
5/11 and 2/31
Analog inputs
Analog outputs
Mixed analog I/O
Isolated high-level inputs
Isolated high-level outputs
Non-isolated high-level
inputs
Voltage/current
outputs
Voltage/current
Voltage/current
10 V, 0...10 V, 0...5 V, 1...5 V, 5 V
10 V
10 V
0...20 mA, 4...20 mA
10 V, 0...10 V, 0...5 V,
1...5 V
0...20 mA, 4...20 mA
0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, 20 mA
4 channels
2 channels
4 channels
2 channels
Fast: 1 + (1 x no. of declared channels) ms

By default, 5 ms for 4 channels
y 1 ms
Fast: 1 + (1 x no. of
declared channels) ms
By default, 5 ms for 4
channels
16 bits
16 bits

Between channels and ground: 1,400 V c

0...20 mA, 4...20 mA
5
y 1 ms
1412 bits in U range

12 bits in U range
12 bits in I range
11 bits in I range
Between group of input channels and group of
output channels: 750 V c
Via 20-way removable terminals (screw or spring-type)

BMX FTW p01S cordsets with one end with color-coded flying leads (3 or 5 m long)
BMX AMI 0410
BMX AMO 0210
BMX AMM 0600
2/31
8
4-channel sub-base for direct connection of
4 inputs, delivers and distributes 4 protected
isolated power supplies
4-channel sub-base (only 2-channel used) for

direct connection of 2 outputs
ABE 7CPA410
ABE 7CPA21
BMX FCApp0
BMX FCApp0
5/11 and 2/31
10
2/23
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction,
description
Analog I/O modules
Introduction
The analog I/O module offer consists of:
b Three isolated analog input modules:
v 4 analog high-speed channels (16 bits), voltage or current, BMX AMI 0410
v 4 and 8 analog channels (15 bits + sign) for thermocouples, Pt, Ni or Cu
temperature probes, BMX ART 0414/0814
b One analog output module with 2 voltage/current channels, BMX AMO 0210
b One mixed module (12 bits) with 4 analog input channels and 2 analog output
channels, non-isolated, voltage or current, BMX AMM 0600
Analog I/O modules are equipped with a connector for a 20-way removable terminal
block, except for BMX ART 0414/0814 analog input modules with
thermocouples/temperature probes that are equipped with a 40-way connector.
All analog modules occupy a single slot in the BMX XBP ppp racks. These modules
can be installed in any slot in the rack, except for the first two (PS and 00) which are
reserved for the power supply module in the BMX CPS pp0 rack and the BMX P34
pp0 processor module respectively.
The power supply for the analog functions is supplied by the backplane bus (3.3 V
and 24 V). Analog I/O modules are hot-swappable (see page 2/8).
In a Modicon M340 single-rack configuration, the maximum number of analog

channels is limited by the number of slots available in the rack (11 slots maximum).
Description
BMX AMp/ART analog I/O modules are standard format (1 slot). They have a case
that helps to ensure IP 20 protection of the electronics, and are locked into position
by a captive screw.
1
1
I/O modules connected via 20-way removable terminal block

module)
4 Connector taking the 20-way removable terminal block for connecting sensors or
preactuators
2
2
3
8
4
4
5 A BMX FTB 20p0 20-way removable terminal block (label supplied with each I/O
module) or a preformed cordset with a 20-way removable terminal block at one
end and flying leads at the other (see page 2/30).
5
5
Module and 20-way removable terminal block

1
I/O modules connected via 40-way connector
2
3
8
4
module)
4 One or two 40-way connectors (32 or 64 channels) (1) for connecting sensors or
preactuators
5 With the 64-channel module, successive actuations of a pushbutton cause the
display of the states of channels 0 ... 31 or 32 ... 64 on the block 3 (see page 2/31)
To be ordered separately, depending on the type of module:

One or two preformed cordset(s) with a 40-way connector (see page 2/30).
10
2/24
Modicon M340
automation platform
Connections
Analog I/O modules
Connecting modules with removable terminal blocks

BMX AMI 0410/AMO 0210/AMM 0600 modules with 20-way terminal block
These 20-way removable terminal blocks are the same as those used for discrete
I/O modules (screw clamp, cage clamp or spring-type). See page 2/7.
One version of the removable terminal block is equipped with a 3 or 5 m long cordset
with color-coded flying leads (BMX FTWppS). These preformed cordsets, with
reinforced shielding have, at the other end 1, color-coded flying leads.
2
Connecting modules with 40-way connectors
BMX ART 0p14 modules with 40-way connectors
1
BMX FTW p01S cordset
(with 20-way removable terminal block at one end and flying
leads at the other)
Two types of cordset are available:

b Preformed cordsets with reinforced shielding (BMX FCW p01S) have color-coded
flying leads 2. They are available in 3 or 5 m lengths, and provide easy direct
wire-to-wire connection of the analog sensors via terminal blocks.
b Preformed cordsets with reinforced shielding (BMX FCA p02) that also have a
25-way SUB-D connector 3. They are available in 1.5, 3 or 5 m lengths, and provide
direct connection to the Modicon Telefast ABE 7CPA412 sub-base (see below).
Use with Modicon Telefast ABE 7 sub-bases

Using the Modicon Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired system makes it easier to install the
modules since the inputs (or outputs) can be accessed using screw terminals. Two
special sub-bases are available:
Modicon Telefast ABE 7CPA410 sub-base
2
BMX FCW p01S cordset
(with 40-way connector at one end and flying leads at the other)
The Modicon Telefast ABE 7CPA410 sub-base is mainly used in conjunction with
the BMX AMI 0410 voltage/current analog 4-input module. It is used to:
b Connect the four sensors directly
b Remotely locate the input terminals in voltage mode
b Power the 4...20 mA conditioners one channel at a time with a 24 V voltage,
protected and limited to 25 mA, while maintaining isolation between channels
b Protect the current impedance matching resistors integrated in the sub-base
against overvoltages
Connection is via the BMX FCA pp0 cordset (1.5, 3 or 5 m long).

BMX FCA pp2 cordsets
BMX ART 0414

4-channel module
The Modicon Telefast ABE 7CPA412 sub-base is specially designed as a wiring

interface for the BMX ART 0414 and BMX ART 0814 thermocouple modules. It is
used to:
b Connect the four thermocouple probes
b Provide external cold-junction compensation with a temperature probe integrated
in the sub-base
b Help ensure continuity of the shielding
The BMX ART 0814 module requires two Modicon Telefast ABE 7CPA412
sub-bases. The connection with each sub-base is made via a BMX FCA pp2
cordset 3 (1.5, 3 or 5 m long).

ABE 7CPA412 sub-base
The Modicon Telefast ABE 7CPA21 sub-base is compatible with the BMX AMO and
BMX ART 0210 voltage/current analog 2-output module. It is used to:
b Connect the two channels
b Help ensure continuity of the shielding
Connection is via the BMX FCA pp0 cordset (1.5, 3 or 5 m long).
10
Functions:
pages 2/26
Specifications:
pages 2/28
References:
page 2/31
Connections:
page 2/32
2/25
Functions
Modicon M340
automation platform
Analog I/O modules
BMX AMI 0410 analog input modules

The BMX AMI 0410 module is a high-level analog input module with 4 isolated inputs
(16 bits).
Used with sensors or transmitters, it performs monitoring, measurement and process
control functions for continuous processes.
For each input, the BMX AMI 0410 module offers the following ranges:
v Voltage 10 V, 5 V, 010 V, 05 V and 15 V
v Current 0...20 mA, 420 mA and 20 mA, depending on the choice made during
configuration
The module operates with voltage inputs. It includes four reading resistors connected
to the terminal block to form the current inputs.
Functions
The BMX AMI 0410 module includes the following functions:

b Adaptation and multiplexing:
v Physical connection to the process
v Protection of the module against overvoltages
v Protection of the current reading resistors
v Adaptation of input signals by analog filtering
v Scanning of input channels by solid state multiplexing, by optical commutator
switches
b Adaptation to input signals: Gain selection, drift compensation
b Conversion: 24-bit analog/digital converter
b Conversion of input measurements to a unit that is suitable for the user:
v Taking account of the alignment coefficients to be applied to measurements, as
well as the module autocalibration coefficients
v Measurement filtering, depending on the configuration parameters
v Measurement scaling, depending on the configuration parameters
b Interface and communication with the application:
v Receipt of the configuration parameters for the module and its channels
v Transmission of measured values to the application, as well as module status
b Module power supply
b Module monitoring and indication of any detected faults to the application:
v Conversion circuit test
v Channel range overshoot test and watchdog test.
BMX ART 0414/0814 analog input modules
BMX ART 0414/0814 modules are multirange input modules with 4 or 8 low-level
isolated inputs (15 bits + sign) respectively.
Depending on the choice made during configuration, the modules offer for each of
the inputs the following range:
b Temperature probe: Pt100, Pt1000, Cu10, Ni100 or Ni1000, with open-circuit
detection
b Thermocouple: B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T or U, with broken wire detection
b Resistor: 0...400 or 0...4000 , 2-, 3- or 4-wire
b Voltage: 40 mV, 80 mV, 160 mV, 320 mV, 640 mV, 1.28 V.
Functions
BMX ART 0414/0814 modules offer the following functions

b Adaptation and current source per channel:
v Accepting an overload of 7.5 V
v Autocalibration of the analog module offset as close as possible to the input
terminal
v Selection of the cold-junction compensation sensor included in the Modicon
Telefast ABE 7CPA412 sub-base or externally by the Pt 100 probe
b Adaptation to input signals: Based on a low offset amplifier internal to the A/D
converter
b Conversion: 16-bit converter
b Conversion of input measurements to a unit that is suitable for the user:
v Taking account of the alignment coefficients to be applied to measurements, as
well as the module autocalibration coefficients
v Measurement filtering, depending on the configuration parameters
v Measurement scaling, depending on the configuration parameters
v Transmission of measured values to the application, as well as module status
v Conversion circuit test
v Channel range overshoot test and watchdog test.
10
2/26
Modicon M340
automation platform
Analog I/O modules
BMX AMO 0210 analog output module

The BMX AMO 0210 module is a module with 2 high-level isolated outputs
(15 bits + sign). It offers, for each of them, the ranges:
v Voltage: 10 V
v Current: 0...20 mA and 4...20 mA
The range is selected during configuration.
Functions
The BMX AMO 210 module includes the following functions:

b Physical connection to the process
b Protection of the module against overvoltages
b Adaptation of the output signals:
v Voltage or current adaptation by software configuration
v Protection of the outputs against short-circuits and overloads
b Conversion to 15 bits with sign with redefinition of data
b Conversion of application values into data that can be used by the digital/analog
converter:
v Use of factory calibration parameters
v Managing exchanges with the processor
v Geographical addressing
v Transmission of module status to the application
v Output power supply test
v Channel range overshoot test
v Detected output fault test
v Watchdog test.
BMX AMM 0600 mixed analog I/O module

The BMX AMM 0600 mixed module is a module with 4 inputs 14/12 bits and
2 outputs 12 bits non-isolated between one another. It offers, for each of them, the
ranges:
v Voltage: 10 V, 0...10 V, 0...5 V and 1...5 V
v Current: 0...20 mA and 4...20 mA.
Functions
The BMX AMM 0600 module has the following functions:

b Protection of the module against overvoltages
b Adaptation to the different actuators: voltage or current output
b Conversion of digital signals (11 bits or 12 bits depending on the range) to analog
signals
b Conversion of application data into data that can be used by the digital/analog
converter
b Module monitoring and detected fault indication to the application: Converter test,
range overshoot test, watchdog test.
10
Description:
page 2/24
Specifications:
pages 2/28
References:
page 2/31
Connections:
page 2/32
2/27
Specifications
Modicon M340
automation platform
Analog I/O modules
Specifications of BMX AMI 0410 analog input modules
Input module
Input type
Number of channels
Nature of inputs
BMX AMI 0410

Isolated high-level inputs
4
10 V, 010 V, 05 V, 15 V, 5 V
0...20 mA, 420 mA, 20 mA (via protected internal 250 resistors)
Voltage
Current
Analog/digital conversion
Voltage/current range
Maximum conversion value
Resolution
Input impedance
Typical
Permitted overload on Voltage range
the inputs
Current range
Voltage/current internal conversion resistor
Precision of internal conversion resistor
Filtering
Read cycle time
Measurement
tolerance (1)
M
V
mA
24 bits
10 V
5V
05 V
010 V
11.4 V
0.35 mV
10 (regardless of the input level)
30 c
90 ot short-circuit to + 24 V c
15 V
020 mA 420 mA 20 mA
30 mA
0.92 A
250
0.1% - 15 ppm/C
Fast
Default
ms
ms
1st order digital filtering

1 + 1 x no. of channels used (periodic reading of no. of declared channels)
5 for 4 channels (periodic reading of each channel)
At 25C
Maximum at 060C
%FS
%FS
0.075%
0.1%
0.15% (2)
0.3% (2)
30 ppm/C
Temperature drift
Recalibration
Common mode between channels
Digital value format
Isolation
Between channels
Between channels and bus
Between channels and ground
V
V
V
15 ppm/C
Internal
120
10,000 by default, 32,000 in user scale
300 c
1,400 c
1,400 c
Consumption
mA
Typical
dB
Specifications of BMX ART 0414/0814 analog input modules
Input module
Input type
Number of channels
Nature of inputs
Analog/digital conversion
Resolution
Filtering
Read cycle time
ms
Permitted overload on the inputs

50/60 Hz rejection
Differential mode Typical
Common mode
Typical
V
dB
dB
Cold junction
compensation
Recalibration
Isolation
Consumption
mV
- the dedicated Modicon Telefast ABE 7CPA412 sub-base including the probe
- a Pt 100 temperature probe 2-wire on channel 0 and/or 4 (thermocouple channel
maintened)
- a Pt 100 temperature probe 3-wired on channel 0 and/or 4 (thermocouple channel
non maintened)
External compensation by Pt100 probe

using
Between channels
Typical
BMX ART 0414

BMX ART 0814
Isolated inputs, low-level voltage, resistors, temperature probes, thermocouples
4
8
40 mV; 80 mV; 160 mV; 320 mV; 640 mV; 1.28 V
16 bits
15 + sign
1st order digital filtering
400 with temperature probes (1...4)
400 with temperature probes (1...8)
200 with thermocouples (1...4)
200 with thermocouples (1...8)
7.5 c
60
120
V
V
V
mA
Internal
750 c
1,400 c
750 c
(1) %FS: Tolerance as a% of full scale
10
2/28
Modicon M340
automation platform
Analog I/O modules
Specifications of BMX ART 0414/0814 analog input modules

Input ranges for BMX ART 0414/0814 modules
Voltage range
Typical input impedance
Maximum resolution
Measurement
At 25C
tolerance (1)
Maximum at 060C
M
mV
%FS
%FS
Resistor range
Type
Maximum resolution
Measurement
At 25C
tolerance (1)
Maximum at 060C
160 mV
320 mV
640 mV
1.28 V
80/214
160/214
320/214
640/214
1280/214
mV
%FS
%FS
400
2-, 3- or 4-wire
100%
400/214
0.12
0.2
4,000
4,000/214
ppm/C 25
Temperature drift
Temperature probe ranges
Measurement range
Resolution
Detection type
Measurement
tolerance (1)
At 25C (2)
Maximum at 060C
C
C
Max. wiring
resistance
4-wire
2/3-wire
Temperature drift
C
C
At 25C
Maximum at 060C
Temperature drift
Thermocouple ranges (continued)
Measurement range
Resolution
Detection type
Measurement
At 25C
tolerance (1)
Maximum at 060C
Temperature drift
80 mV
ppm/C 30
Temperature drift
Thermocouple ranges
Measurement range
Resolution
Detection type
Measurement
tolerance (1)
40 mV
10
102.5%
40/214
0.05
0.15
C
C
Pt100
Pt1000
Cu10
According to IEC: -200...+850
-100...+260
According to US/JIS: -100...+450
0.1
Open circuit (detection on each channel)
2.1
4
2
4
50
20
30 ppm/C
500
200
Ni100
-60...+180
Ni1000
2.1
3.0
0.7
1.3
50
20
B
E
J
+130...+1820
-270...+1000
-200...+760
0.1
3.5
3.7
2.8
5
5
4.5
500
200
5
K
-270...+1370
L
-200...+900
3.7
5
3.0
4.5
T
-270...+400
U
-200...+600
3.7
5
2.7
4.5
ppm/C 25
C
C
C
C
N
R
S
+270...+1300
-50...+1769
-50...+1769
0.1
3.7
3.2
3.2
5
4.5
4.5
ppm/C 25
(1) %FS: Tolerance as a% of full scale. 1C with Pt100 temperature probe range, - 100...+ 200C
10
2/29
Modicon M340
automation platform
Analog I/O modules
Specifications of the BMX AMO 0210 analog output module
Module
Output type
Number of channels
Ranges
Resolution
Conversion time
Output power supply
Output ranges
Adjustment range
Voltage
Current
bits
ms
Measurement
tolerance (1)
Temperature drift
Recalibration
Fallback mode (2)
Isolation
Consumption
Current
0...20 mA, 4...20 mA
24 mA
y 600
Open circuit
Nominal
Maximum
V
V
At 25C
Maximum at 060C
%FS
%FS
0.10
0.25
V
V
V
mA
40 ppm/C
None, factory-calibrated
Default or configurable
750 c
1,400 c
1,400 c
Load impedance
Detection type
BMX AMO 0210

Isolated high-level outputs
2
10 V
0...20 mA and 4...20 mA
15 + sign
y1
Internal power supply via rack
Voltage
10 V
11.25 V
1,000
Short-circuit
Between channels
Typical
Specifications of BMX AMM 0600 mixed analog I/O module
Module
Channel type
BMX AMM 0600

Non-isolated high-level inputs
Number of channels
Ranges
4
10 V
Maximum conversion
value
010 V 15 V
020
mA
0...30
420
mA
V
mA
11.25
Resolution
Filtering
Precision of internal conversion resistor
Read cycle time
Fast
bits
12
Default
Conversion time
Permitted overload on Voltage
the input channels
Current
Measurement
At 25C
tolerance (1)
Maximum at 060C
ms
ms
V
mA
%FS
%FS
14
12
13
12
12
1st order digital filtering by firmware
250 , 0.2% - 25 ppm/C
1 + 1 x no. of channels used
(periodic reading of no. of declared channels)
5 for 4 channels
y1
30
30
0.25
0.35
0.35
0.50
Temperature drift
30 ppm/C
100 ppm/C
Recalibration
Fallback mode (2)
Isolation
Consumption
Voltage
Current
05 V
outputs
2
10 V 020
420
mA
mA
11.25
0...24 mA
ms
50 ppm/C
Between group of input channels and

group of output channels
Internal
750 c
V
V
1,400 c
1,400 c
Typical
mA
11
y2
11.25
0.25
0.60
0...24
None, factory-calibrated
Default or configurable
(1) %FS: Error as a% of full scale

(2) Default: Output at 0 (V or mA). Configurable: Hold last value or set at predefined value for
each channel.
10
Description:
page 2/24
2/30
Functions:
pages 2/26
Connections:
page 2/32
Modicon M340
automation platform
References
Analog I/O modules
References
Analog input modules
Input type
Input signal range Resolution Connection
Isolated high-level
inputs
10 V, 0...10 V,
16 bits
0...5 V, 1...5 V, 5 V
0...20 mA,
4...20 mA, 20 mA
Isolated low-level
inputs
Temperature probe, 15 bits

thermocouple
+ sign
40 mV, 80 mV,
160 mV, 320 mV,
640 mV, 1.28 V
0...400 , 0...4000
BMX AMp 0pp0
No. of
Reference
channels
4 fast
BMX AMI 0410
channels
Via cage clamp,

screw clamp or
spring-type
removable terminal
block
40-way connector 4 channels BMX ART 0414
8 channels BMX ART 0814
Weight
kg
0.143
0.135
0.165
Weight
kg
0.144
Analog output module

Output type
Isolated high-level
outputs
BMX ART 0414
Output signal
Resolution Connection
No. of
Reference
range
channels
10 V,
16 bits
Via cage clamp,
2 channels BMX AMO 0210
0...20 mA, 4...20 mA
screw clamp or
spring-type
removable terminal
block
Mixed analog I/O module

Channel type
Signal range
Resolution Connection
No. of
Reference
channels
Via cage clamp,
Mixed I/O, non-isolated 10 V, 0...10 V,
14 bits or
I: 4
BMX AMM 0600
screw clamp or
0...5 V, 1...5 V,
12 bits
channels
0...20 mA, 4...20 mA depending spring-type
Q: 2
on the range removable terminal channels
block
Weight
kg
0.155
Connection accessories for analog modules (1)

Description
BMX FTB 20p0
20-way removable
terminal blocks
Preformed cordsets
BMX FTW p01S
For use with

modules
BMX AMI 0410
BMX AMO 0210
BMX AMM 0600
BMX AMI 0410
BMX AMO 0210
BMX AMM 0600
BMX ART 0414
BMX ART 0814 (2)
Type, composition
Length
Reference
Weight
kg
0.093
0.075
0.060
Cage clamp
Screw clamp
Spring-type
BMX FTB 2000

BMX FTB 2010
BMX FTB 2020
One 20-way removable terminal

block (BMX FTB 2020)
One end with color-coded flying
leads
One end with color-coded flying
leads
3m
5m
BMX FTW 301S

BMX FTW 501S
0.470
0.700
3m
5m
BMX FCW 301S

BMX FCW 501S
0.480
0.710
ABE 7CPA410
0.180
BMX ART 0414

BMX ART 0814
ABE 7CPA412/ ABE 7CPA21
ABE 7CPA412
0.180
BMX AMO 0210
ABE 7CPA21
0.210
BMX FCA pp1
Preformed cordsets for BMX AMI 0410

ABE 7CPAppp
BMX AMO 0210
sub-bases
BMX FCA150
BMX FCA300
BMX FCA500
0.320
0.500
0.730
BMX ART 0414

BMX ART 0814
BMX FCA152
BMX FCA302
BMX FCA502
0.330
0.510
0.740
BMX FCA pp2
Description:
page 2/24
Distribution of isolated power
supplies
Delivers 4 protected isolated
power supplies for 4...20 mA
inputs
Direct connection of 4 inputs
Connection and provision of cold
junction compensation for
thermocouples
Direct connection of 4 inputs
Direct connection of 2 outputs
(2-channels of sub-bases are not

used)
One 20-way removable terminal 1.5 m
block and one 25-way SUB-D
3m
connector for ABE 7CPA410/21
5m
sub-base
One 40-way connector and
1.5 m
one 25-way SUB-D connector for 3 m
ABE 7CPA412 sub-base
5m
(1) The shielding on the cordsets carrying the analog signals must always be connected to the
BMX XSPpp00 shielding connection kit mounted under the rack holding the analog modules.
See page 1/15.
(2) The BMX ART 0814 8-channel module requires two ABE 7CPA412 sub-bases and two
BMX FCApp2 cordsets.
Functions:
pages 2/26
Specifications:
pages 2/28
Modicon Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired system

Modicon Telefast ABE 7 BMX AMI 0410
sub-bases
Connections:
page 2/32
2/31
10
Modicon M340
automation platform
Connections
Analog I/O modules
Analog input/output modules
BMX AMI 0410/AMO 0210/AMM 0600
BMX ART 0414 (A) and BMX ART 0814 (A and B)

B
Connecting with
20-way removable terminal block
20
20
20
20
19
19
19
19
18
18
18
18
17
17
17
17
16
16
16
16
15
15
15
15
14
14
14
14
13
13
13
13
13
15
12
12
12
12
17
11
11
11
11
10
10
10
10
2
3
4
5
6
8
10
11
12
14
16
18
19
20
Correspondence of terminal block with the wire colors at the

sheath end BMX FTW 301S/501S preformed cordsets. See
table on page 2/33.
Connecting via one or two 40-way connector(s)
Correspondence of connector(s) 40-pin with the wire colors at the sheath end of
BMX FCW 301S/501S preformed cordsets. See table on page 2/33.
Connecting example of 2, 3 or 4-wire temperature probes with cold-junction compensation

A (B)
CJ+
3-wire cold-junction
compensation probe
DtC
CJ-
Thermocouple
CJ0
MSMS+
2-wire RTD probe
MSEX-
MSEX-
3-wire RTD probe
EX+
MS-
EX-
4-wire RTD probe
20
20
19
19
18
18
17
17
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
11
10
10
ch. 0 with BMX ART 0414/0814 (connector A)

ch. 4 with BMX ART 0814 (connector B)
MS+

EX+

MS+
EX+

MS+: Input + RTD probe or thermocouple

MS-: Input - RTD probe or thermocouple
EX+: Output + RTD probe current generator
EX-: Output - RTD probe current generator
10
2/32
Modicon M340
automation platform
Analog I/O modules
Cordset color codes
BMX FCW 301S/501S preformed cordsets with 40-way connector and flying leads
20 wires
BMX FCW p01S cordset with one sheathed end
with flying leads
Connector
pin No.
B20
N/C
A20
N/C
B19
A19
B18
A18
B17
A17
B16
A16
B15
N/C
A15
N/C
B14
N/C
A14
N/C
B13
N/C
A13
N/C
B12
A12
B11
A11
B10
N/C
A10
N/C
B9
N/C
A9
N/C
B8
N/C
A8
N/C
B7
A7
B6
A6
B5
N/C
A5
N/C
B4
N/C
A4
N/C
B3
N/C
A3
N/C
B2
A2
B1
A1
Color at
sheath end
White/blue
White/amber
Blue/white
Amber/white
White/brown
Brown/white
White/green
Green/white
Red/blue
Blue/red
White/gray
Gray/white
Red/green
Green/red
Red/amber
Amber/red
Red/gray
Gray/red
Red/brown
Brown/red
BMX ART
0414/0814 (A)
Cold-junction
compensation
BMX ART 0814

(B)
Cold-junction
compensation
Input - ch. 0
Input + ch. 0
I - generator ch. 0
I + generator ch. 0
Input - ch. 1
Input + ch. 1
I - generator ch. 1
I + generator ch. 1
Input - ch. 2
Input + ch. 2
I - generator ch. 2
I + generator ch. 2
Input - ch. 3
Input + ch. 3
I - generator ch. 3
I + generator ch. 3
Input - ch. 4
Input + ch. 4
I - generator ch. 4
I + generator ch. 4
Input - ch. 5
Input + ch. 5
I - generator ch. 5
I + generator ch. 5
Input - ch. 6
Input+ ch. 6
I - generator ch. 6
I + generator ch. 6
Input - ch. 7
Input + ch. 7
I - generator ch. 7
I + generator ch. 7
Label
DtC
CJ+
CJ0
CJMSMS+
EXEX+
MSMS+
EXEX+
MSMS+
EXEX+
MSMS+
EXEX+
BMX FTW 301S/501S preformed cordsets with 20-way terminal block at one and flying leads at the over
Correspondence between terminal block way and colored of
wire
BMX FTW p01S cordset with one sheathed end

with flying leads
Terminal block
way No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Color at
sheath end
Blue/white
White/blue
Amber/white
White/amber
Green/white
White/green
Brown/white
White/brown
Gray/white
White/gray
Blue/red
Red/blue
Amber/red
Red/amber
Green/red
Red/green
Red/brown
Brown/red
Gray/red
Red/gray
BMX AMI 0410
BMX AMO 0210
BMX AMM 0600
V input ch. 0
Common ch. 0
I input ch. 0
V input ch. 1
Common ch. 1
I input ch. 1
V input ch. 2
Common ch. 2
I input ch. 2
V input ch. 3
Common ch. 3
I input ch. 3
Output ch. 0
Common ch. 0
Output ch. 1
Common ch. 1
V input ch. 0
I input ch. 0
Common ch. 0
V input ch. 1
I input ch. 1
Common ch. 1
V input ch. 2
I input ch. 2
Common ch. 2
V input ch. 3
I input ch. 3
Common ch. 3
Output ch. 0
Common ch. 0
Output ch. 1
Common ch. 1
2/33
10
10
Advantys, Altistart, Altivar, Concept, ConneXium, FactoryCast, Fipio, Fipway, Lexium, Magelis, M340, Modbus, Modbus Plus,
Modicon, Momentum, OSItrack, Phaseo, PowerSuite, Premium, Preventa, ProWORX 32, Quantum, Schneider Electric, Telefast,
TeSys, Transparent Ready, TSX Micro, Twido, TwidoSoft, TwidoSuite, Unity, Unity Pro, Vijeo Designer, Vijeo Look X-Way are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Schneider Electric. Other trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners.
1/0
2
Contents chapter 1
Modicon M340 processors, racks,

power supply modules and packs
1.1 - Modicon M340 processors, racks,

power supply modules and packs
Processors selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2
b Processor modules
v Introduction, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4
v Memory structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/6
v Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/8
v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/9
b Power supply modules

v Introduction, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/10
v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/11
v Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/12
v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/13
b Single-rack configuration
v
v
v
v
Introduction, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions, mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1/14
1/14
1/15
1/15
b Multi-rack configuration
v Introduction, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/16
v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/17
b Modicon M340 pre-assembled packs

v Introduction, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/18
v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/19
10
1/1
Selection guide
Modicon M340
automation platform
Modicon M340 processors
Modicon M340 platform for Unity Pro software offer
BMX 34 10 Standard processor
BMX 34 20 Performance processors
Racks
2 (4, 6, 8 or 12 slots)
24
4 (4, 6, 8 or 12 slots)
48
Inputs/Outputs
Number of racks
Max. number of slots
(excluding power supply module)
In-rack discrete I/O (1)
In-rack analog I/O (1)
Distributed I/O
4
In-rack
application-specific
channels
Max. number of channels (counter,

motion control and serial link)
Counter (1)
Motion control (1)
512 channels
1024 channels
(modules with 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels)
128 channels
256 channels
Limited depending on the type of medium: Over Ethernet Modbus/TCP network via network
module (63 devices with I/O Scanning function), over Modbus link (32 devices)
20
36
BMX EHC 0200, 60 kHz 2 channels or BMX EHC 0800, 10 kHz 8 channels modules
BMX MSP 0200, 200 kHz 2 channels with PTO outputs Pulse Train Output module
for servo drives
5
Process control, programmable
loops
Integrated
communication ports
CANopen Master machine and
installation bus
Serial link
USB port
Process control EFB library
1 in RTU/ASCII Modbus master/slave mode or in character mode (non-isolated RS232/RS485,

0.3...38.2 Kbit/s)
1 programming port (PC terminal)
Communication
modules
Max. number of networks (1)

1 (BMX NOE 0110/0110 network module)

1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Modbus/TCP, BOOTP/DHCP, FDR client/server, Global Data,
I/O Scanning, web server (standard, class B30 or configurable, class C30) (2)
Internal memory
capacity
Internal user RAM

Program, constants and symbols
Located/unlocated data
2,048 Kb
1,792 Kb
128 Kb
Memory card capacity Backup of program, constants and

(on processor)
symbols
Hosting and display of user web
pages
File storage
Application structure Master task

Fast task
Event tasks
1
1
32
64
No. of K instructions
executed per ms
5.4 K instructions/ms
10
100% Boolean
65% Boolean + 35% fixed arithmetic
4,096 Kb
3,584 Kb
256 Kb
8 Mb as standard
(2)
8 or 128 Mo (depending optional card
BMX RMS pp8MPF)
Rack power supply
24 V c isolated, 2448 V c isolated or 100240 V a power supply module
Modicon M340 processor
BMX P34 1000 (3)
BMX P34 2000
Page
1/9
(1) The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O and counter channels and the number of networks are not cumulative (they are limited by the
max. number of slots in the configuration, 2 racks: 23, 3 racks: 35 and 4 racks: 47.
(2) User web pages with FactoryCast module BMX NOE 0110 (12 Mb) available.
(3) 5 Modicon M340 Packs references (pre-assembled configuration) with BMP P34 1000 66-processor are also available. See page 1/19.
1/2
BMX 34 20 Performance processors (continued)
1 (4, 6, 8 or 12 slots)
48
1,024 channels (modules with 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels)

256/66 channels (modules with 2, 4, 6 or 8 channels)
Limited depending on the type of medium: CANopen bus (63 devices), Ethernet Modbus/TCP network via network module (63 devices with I/O Scanning function),
Modbus link (32 devices)
36
BMX EHC 0200, 60 kHz 2 channels or BMX EHC 0800, 10 kHz 8 channels modules
BMX MSP 0200, 200 kHz 2 channels with PTO outputs Pulse Train Output module for servo drives
MFB (Motion Function Blocks) library (control of
drives or servo drives on the CANopen bus)
Process control EFB library
1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
(Modbus/TCP, BOOTP/DHCP, FDR client, E-mail notification, class B10 standard web server)
1 (63 slaves, 501,000 Kbit/s, class M20)
1 (63 slaves, 501,000 Kbit/s, class M20)
1 in RTU/ASCII Modbus master/slave mode or in character mode (non-isolated RS232/RS485,

0.3...38.2 Kbit/s)
1 programming port (PC terminal)
MFB (Motion Function Blocks) library (control of

drives or servo drives on the CANopen bus)

1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
(Modbus/TCP, BOOTP/DHCP, FDR client/server, Global Data, I/O Scanning, web server (standard, class B30 or configurable, class C30) (2)
4,096 Kb
3,584 Kb
256 Kb
8 Mb as standard
(2)
8 or 128 Mb (depending optional card BMX RMS pp8MPF)

1
1
64
24 V c isolated, 2448 V c isolated or 100240 V a power supply module
BMX P34 2010
BMX P34 2020
BMX P34 2030
10
1/9
1/3
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction
Processor modules
Introduction
Modicon M340 automation platform
Standard and Performance processors from the Modicon M340 automation

platform manage an entire PLC single-rack or multi-rack station on which slots can
be equipped with:
v Discrete I/O modules
v Analog I/O modules
v Application-specific modules (counter, motion control, Ethernet Modbus/TCP
communication)
The five processors offered have different memory capacities, processing speeds,
number of I/O, and type of communication ports.
I/O and application-specific

modules
BMX P34 processor
c or a power supply
In addition, depending on the model, they offer a maximum (non-cumulative) of:

v 512 to 1024 discrete I/O
v 128 to 256 analog I/O
v 20 to 36 application-specific channels (counter, motion control and serial link)
v 0 to 3 Ethernet Modbus/TCP networks (with or without integrated port and
2 network modules maximum)
Depending on the model, Modicon M340 processors include:
v A 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet Modbus/TCP port
v A CANopen machine and installation bus
v A Modbus serial link
v A USB type TER port (for a programming terminal or a Human/Machine interface
Magelis XBT GT/GK/GTW)
Each processor is supplied with a memory card used for:
v Backing up the application (program, symbols and constants)
v Activating a standard web server for the Transparent Ready B10 class integrated
Ethernet port (depending on the model)
This memory card can be replaced with an optional memory card (ordered
separately), that supports:
v Backing up the application and activating the standard web server
v An 8 or 128 Mb storage area for additional data organized in a file system
(directories and sub-directories)
Programming Modicon M340 applications

To set up processors from the Modicon M340 automation platform, you will need either:
b Unity Pro Small programming software
b Unity Pro Medium, Large, Extra Large or XLS programming software identical to
that used to set up Modicon Premium and Modicon Quantum automation
platforms
v Unity EFB toolkit software for developing EF and EFB libraries in C language
v Unity SFC View software for viewing and diagnostics of applications written in
Sequential Function Chart language (SFC) or Grafcet
The function block software libraries provide Modicon M340 processors with the
processing capability required to meet the needs of special applications in the
following areas:
b Process control via programmable control loops (EF and EFB libraries)
b Motion control with multiple independent axis functions (MFB) library. The axes
are controlled by Altivar 31/71 variable speed drives or Lexium 05/15 servo drives
connected over the CANopen machine and installation bus.
10
Description:
page 1/5
1/4
Specifications:
page 1/8
References:
page 1/9
Dimensions:
page 1/15
Modicon M340
automation platform
Description
Processor modules
1
2
3
4
5
BMX P34 1000
1
2
Description of BMX P34 1000/2000/2010 processors

BMX P34 1000/2000/2010 Standard and Performance single-format processors
have the following on the front panel:
1 Safety screw for locking the module in its slot (marked 0) in the rack
2 A display block comprised of 5 or 7 LEDs, depending on the model:
v RUN LED (green): Processor running (program executing)
v ERR LED (red): Processor or system detected fault
v I/O LED (red): I/O module detected fault
v SER COM LED (yellow): Activity on the Modbus serial link
v CARD ERR LED (red): Memory card missing or inoperative
v CAN RUN LED (green): Integrated CANopen bus operational (BMX P34 2010 only)
v CAN ERR LED (red): Integrated CANopen bus detected fault (BMX P34 2010 only)
3 A mini B USB connector for a programming terminal
(or Magelis XBT GT/GK/GTW operator interface (1))
4 A slot equipped with Flash memory card for backing up the application (an LED,
located above this slot, indicates recognition of or access to the memory card)
5 An RJ45 connector for the Modbus serial link or character mode link
(RS 232C/RS 485, 2-wire, non-isolated)
6 A 9-way SUB-D connector for the integrated CANopen master bus
(BMX P34 2010 only)
3
4
5
BMX P34 2010
1
2
3
4
5
6
BMX P34 2020
1
2
3
4
5
Description of BMX P34 2020/2030 processors with integrated

Ethernet Modbus/TCP port
BMX P34 2020/2030 Performance single-format processors have the following on
the front panel:
1 Safety screw for locking the module in its slot (marked 0) in the rack
2 A display block comprised of 8 or 10 LEDs, depending on the model:
v RUN LED (green): Processor running (program executing)
v ERR LED (red): Processor or system detected fault
v I/O LED (red): I/O module detected fault
v SER COM LED (yellow): Activity on the Modbus serial link
v CARD ERR LED (red): Memory card missing or inoperative
v ETH ACT LED (green): Activity on the Ethernet Modbus/TCP network
v ETH STS LED (green): Ethernet Modbus/TCP network status
v ETH 100 LED (red): Data rate on the Ethernet Modbus/TCP network (10 or
100 Mbit/s)
v CAN RUN LED (green): Integrated CANopen bus operational (BMX P34 2010 only)
v CAN ERR LED (red): Integrated CANopen bus detected fault (BMX P34 2010 only)
3 A mini B USB connector for a programming terminal or Magelis XBT GT/GK/GTW
operator interface (1)
4 A slot equipped with Flash memory card for backing up the application (an LED
located above this slot indicates recognition of or access to the memory card)
5 An RJ45 connector for connection to the Ethernet Modbus/TCP
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX network
6 BMX P34 2020 processor: An RJ45 connector for the Modbus serial link or
character mode link (RS 232C/RS 485, 2-wire, non-isolated)
7 BMX P34 2030 processor: A 9-way SUB-D connector for the integrated
CANopen master bus
On the back panel there are two rotary switches for assigning the IP address. There
are three ways to define this assignment:
v Address set by the position of the two switches
v Address set by the application parameters
v Address set by the Ethernet Modbus/TCP BOOTP server
USB terminal port
BMX P34 2030
(1) Magelis graphic terminals XBT GT/GK/GTW with USB port

and Vijeo Designer configuration software version u 4.5.
Please consult the Human/Machine Interfaces catalog.
The USB terminal port 3 with a data rate of 12 Mbit/s is compatible with the
Unity Pro programming software and the OPC Factory Server (OFS).
BMX P34 p0p0 processors can be connected to a USB bus comprised of several
peripheral devices, however:
b Only one processor must be connected to the USB bus.
b No device on the USB bus can be controlled by the PLC (modem, printer).
1/5
10
Memory structure
Modicon M340
automation platform
Processor modules
Memory structure
BMX P34 1000/20p0 processor with memory card supplied as standard
Application internal RAM (1)
Application
internal RAM
User
internal RAM
Located data
Unlocated data
Program, symbols,
and comments
Constants
BMX RMS 008MP

memory card
(supplied as standard)
Program, symbols,
and comments
Constants
22
33
System data
Area for online program

modification
4
Web services
Application internal RAM

The application memory is divided into memory areas, physically distributed in the
Modicon M340 processors internal RAM:
1 Application data area may be one of two 2 possible types:

v Located data: corresponding to the data defined by an address (for
example%MW237) with which a symbol can be associated (for example, Counter_
reject).
v Unlocated data: corresponding to data defined only by a symbol. The use of
unlocated data eliminates the restrictions of managing the memory location since the
addresses are assigned automatically. It also allows data to be structured and
re-used.
This data area is backed up automatically when the PLC is turned off by duplicating
its contents in a 256 Kbyte non-volatile internal memory integrated in the processor.
It is also possible to back up this memory at any time with a user program.
2 Program, symbols and comments area: For program, this area contains the
executable binary code and IEC source code.
3 Constants area: This area supports the constant located data (%KWi).
4 Area for online program modification, see page 1/7.
The user can choose to transfer the source data to the executable program in the
PLC. The fact of having the program source in the PLC means that, when an empty
programming terminal is connected to the PLC, the elements needed to debug or
upgrade this application can be restored to the terminal. Comments and animation
tables can be excluded from the data embedded in the PLC.
Memory card
Modicon M340 processors are supplied as standard with an SD (Secure Digital) type
Flash memory card. This memory card is intended for backing up the program,
symbols, and comments area 2 and the constants area 3.
22, 33 Duplication areas: Duplication and retrieval (on return of power) operations
are managed automatically by the system and are therefore transparent to the
user.
6 Area for standard Web services: For BMX P34 2020/2030 processors with
integrated Ethernet Modbus/TCP port, this area of 2 Mb is dedicated to standard
Web services (Transparent Ready Class B10). See page 3/4.
Formatted by Schneider Electric and supplied with each processor, this card is
referenced as a replacement part BMX RMS 008MP.
10
(1) For different memory area sizes, see Specifications, on page 1/8.
Description:
page 1/5
1/6
Specifications:
page 1/8
References:
page 1/9
Dimensions:
page 1/15
Memory structure (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Processor modules
Memory structure (continued)

BMX P34 20p0 processor with BMX RMS 008MPF memory card
Application internal RAM (1)
User
Application
internal RAM internal RAM
Located data
Unlocated data
BMX RMS 008/128MPF

memory card
(optional)
Program, symbols
and comments
Program, symbols
and comments
22
Constants
Constants
33
System data
Area for online program
modification
4
Web services
File storage
(1) For different memory area sizes,

see Specifications, on page 1/8.
4
BMX RMS 008/128MPF optional memory card
Instead of the BMX RMS 008MP memory card, the BMX RMS 008/128MPF memory
card can be slotted in BMX P34 2000/2010/2020/2030 processors.
With the four above mentioned processors, this card also offers (in addition to the
features of the BMX RMS 008MP card supplied as standard described on page 1/6):
5 File storage area: This area of max. 8 Mb max. (with BMX RMS 008MPF card) or
128 Mb max. (with BMX RMS 128MPF card) allows:
- Via FTP, hosting any user-defined Word, Excel, PowerPoint or Acrobat
Reader document (for example, maintenance manuals, wiring diagrams, etc)
- Via EFBs user function blocks storage of the additionnal data (for example,
production data, manufacturing recipes, etc)
The Unity Pro programming software assists the application designer with
managing the structure and memory space occupation of the Modicon M340
automation platform.
Protecting the application

It is possible to prohibit access to the application (in terms of reading or modifying the
program) by only loading the executable code to the PLC.
Additionally, a memory protection bit set in configuration mode is also available to
prevent any program modification via the programming terminal or downloads.
Modifying the program in online mode
As with Modicon Premium and Quantum platforms with Unity Pro software, the
online program modification function is available on the Modicon M340 automation
platform. The option of adding or modifying the program code and data in different
places in the application in a single modification session helps to ensure that the
modification is homogenous and consistent with the controlled process.
The applications internal RAM area 4 authorizes these program modification or
addition sessions while observing the recommendation to structure the application
program in several, reasonably-sized sections.
10
Description:
page 1/5
Specifications:
page 1/8
References:
page 1/9
Dimensions:
page 1/15
1/7
Modicon M340
automation platform
Specifications
Processor modules
The Modicon M340 Micro-PLC is designed to conform with the main national and international standards relating to electronic devices for
industrial control systems. See Standards, certifications and environmental conditions on pages 6/2 to 6/5.
Specifications and performance

Processor
Maximum
configuration
Functions
Standard
BMX P34 1000
2
24
No. of racks
4, 6, 8 or 12 slots
Max. number of slots for processor and
modules (excluding power supply module)
Max. no. (1)
Discrete I/O
Analog I/O
Control channels
Application- Number
specific
Type
channels
Motion control
Integrated
connections
Ethernet Modbus/
TCP
CANopen master bus
Serial link
USB port
Communication Ethernet Modbus/TCP
module
10/100 Mbit/s
Real-time clock RTC
Internal user
RAM
Total capacity
Program, constants and symbols
Data
Memory card
Supplied as standard
(reference BMX RMS 008MP)
Maximum size Located internal Maximum

of object areas bits
Dedetected fault
Located internal Maximum
data
Dedetected fault
Application
structure
Max. unlocated internal data

Master task
Fast task
Auxiliary tasks
Event tasks
No. of
Instructions
executed per
ms
System
overhead
10
On
floating points
100% Boolean
% MF
65% Boolean and 35% fixed arithmetic

Master task
Fast task
BMX P34 2010
BMX P34 2030
512
1,024
128
256
Programmable loops (via CONT-CTL process control EFB library)
20
36
Counter modules 2 channels (60 kHz) or 8 channels (10 kHz)
Motion control module 2 channels with PTO outputs Pulse Train Output for servo drives
Serial link integrated in processor (except BMX P34 2030 model)
Module 2 channels with PTO outputs Pulse Train Output for servo drives
Independent axes on CANopen bus

Independent axes
(via MFB library)
on CANopen bus
(via MFB library)
1 RJ45 port, 10/100 Mbit/s, with Transparent

Ready class B10 standard web server
1 (9-way SUB-D)
1 (9-way SUB-D)
1 RJ45 port, Modbus master/slave RTU/ASCII or character mode
(non-isolated RS 232C/RS 485), 0.3...38.2 Kbit/s

1 slave port, 12 Mbit/s
1 RJ45 port, with: 2 RJ45 port, with
- Transparent Ready class B30 standard web server with BMX NOE 0100 module
- Transparent Ready class C30 configurable web server with BMX NOE 0110 module
Yes. Backed up: Typical 6 weeks during 5 years and 4 weeks during 10 years, at 40C
(operating temperature), 30C (storage temperature)
2,048
4,096
1,792
3,584
128
256
bits
bits
Bytes
Bytes
Kb
s
s
s
s
Kinst/
ms
Kinst/
ms
ms
ms
Activation of standard web server,

class B10
Standard web server area 2 Mb
Backup of program, constants, symbol and data
File storage, min. 8 Mb or 128 Mb depending model card(3)
Activation of standard web server, class

B10 Standard web server area 2 Mb
16,250%Mi
32,464%Mi
256%Mi
512%Mi
32,464%MWi internal words, 32,760%KWi constant words
1,024%MWi internal words, 256%KWi constant words
512%MWi
internal words,
128%KWi
constant words
128 (2)
256 (2)
1 cyclic or periodic
1 periodic
32 (including 2
64 (including 2 with priority)
with priority)
0.18
0.12
0.38
0.25
0.26
0.17
1.74
1.16
5.4
8.1
4.2
6.4
1.05
0.20
0.70
0.13
Power
With 24 V c voltage
mA
72
72
90
consumption
(1) Only affects in-rack modules. The remote I/O on the CANopen bus is not included in these maximum numbers.
(2) Deduct the size of the located data (internal bits and data) and the configuration data from this value.
(3) BMX RMS 008MFP has the ability to use up to 14 Mb if the operating system update via OS-Loader software is not used.
1/8
BMX P34 2020
Backup of program, constants, symbol and data
To be ordered separately
(BMX RMS 008MPF or
BMX RMS 008MPF reference)
Execution time Boolean

for one
On words or fixed % MS single-length
instruction
point arithmetic % MD double-length
Kb
Kb
Kb
Performance
BMX P34 2000
4
48
95
135
Modicon M340
automation platform
References
Processor modules
BMX P34 Modicon M340 processors

Modicon M340 processor modules are supplied with the BMX RMS 008MP flash memory card. This card
performs the following actions transparently:
v Backing up the application (program, symbols and constants) supported in the processor internal RAM that
were not backed up
v Activating the Transparent Ready class B10 standard web server with BMX P34 2020/2030 performance
processors.
This card can be replaced by a BMX RMS 008MPF or BMX RMS 128MPF card featuring a file storage option.
I/O capacity
BMX P34 1000
Memory
capacity
Max. no. of network Integrated

modules
communication ports
Reference
(3)
1 Ethernet Modbus/ Modbus serial link

TCP network
BMX P34 1000
Weight
kg
Standard BMX P34 10, 2 racks

512 discrete I/O
128 analog I/O
20 application-specific
channels
2,048 Kb
integrated
0.200
Performance BMX P34 20, 4 racks

1,024 discrete I/O
256 analog I/O
36 application-specific
channels
4,096 Kb
integrated
2 Ethernet Modbus/
TCP networks
Modbus serial link
BMX P34 2000
0.200
Modbus serial link

CANopen bus
Modbus serial link
Ethernet network
Ethernet network
CANopen bus
BMX P34 2010
0.210
BMX P34 2020
0.205
BMX P34 2030
0.215
Processor compatibility
Capacity
Reference
BMX P34 2000

BMX P34 2010
BMX P34 2020
BMX P34 2030
8 Mb / 8 Mb files
8 Mb / 128 Mb files
BMX RMS 008MPF

BMX RMS 128MPF
BMX P34 2000
Memory cards
Description
Flash memory cards (1)
Weight
kg
0.002
0.002
BMX P34 2010/2030
Separate parts
Description
Terminal port/USB
cordsets
Use
From
Mini B USB port
on the Modicon
M340 processor
Length
To USB port type A
PC terminal
1.8 m
Magelis XBT GT/GK 4.5 m
and XBT GTW
graphic terminal
Reference
BMX XCA USB H018
BMX XCA USB H045
Weight
kg
0.065
0.110
Replacement parts
Description
BMX P34 2020
Flash memory card 8 Mb
Use
Supplied as standard with each
processor that is used for:
- Backing up program, constants,
symbol and data
- Activating class B10 web server
Processor
compatibility
BMX P34 1000 / 20p0
Reference
BMX RMS 008MP
Weight
kg
0.002
(1) As replacement for the memory card supplied as standard with each processor that is used for:
- Backing up program, constants, symbol and data
- File storage
- Activating class B10 web server
BMX RMS 008/128MPF
10
BMX XCA USB H0pp
Description:
page 1/5
Specifications:
page 1/8
References:
page 1/9
Dimensions:
page 1/15
1/9
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction,
description
Power supply modules
Introduction
BMX CPS ppp0 power supply modules provide the power supply for each
BMX XBP pp00 rack and the modules installed on it.
There are two types of power supply modules:

b Power supply modules for AC supplies
b Power supply modules for DC supplies
Description
The power supply module is selected according to:
v The electrical line supply: 24 V c, 48 V c or 100...240 V a
v The required power (see the power consumption table on page 6/13) (1)
3
1
4
2
3
BMX CPS ppp0 power supply modules have the following on the front panel :
1 A display block comprised of:
- OK LED (green), lit if rack voltages are present and correct
- 24 V LED (green), lit when the sensor voltage is present (for
BMX CPS 2000/3500 AC power supply modules only)
2 A pencil-point RESET pushbutton for a cold restart of the application
3 A 2-way connector that can take a removable terminal block (screw or spring-type)
for connecting the alarm relay
4 A 5-way connector that can take a removable terminal block (screw or spring-type)
for connecting the following:
- c or a line supply
- protective earth ground
- dedicated 24 V c power supply for the input sensors (for BMX CPS 2000/3500
AC power supply modules only)
Included in the power supply modules: Set of two cage clamp removable terminal
blocks (5-way and 2-way) BMX XTS CPS10.
To be ordered separately (if necessary): Set of two spring-type removable terminal
blocks (5-way and 2-way) BMX XTS CPS20
6
___________________________________________________________________________
(1) This power consumption calculation for the rack can also be performed by the Unity Pro
programming software.
10
1/10
Modicon M340
automation platform
Functions
Functions
Alarm relay
The alarm relay located in each power supply module has a volt-free contact
accessible from the front of the 2-way connector.
The operating principle is as follows:
In normal operation, with the PLC in RUN, the alarm relay is activated and its contact
is closed (state 1).
The relay de-energizes and its associated contact opens (state 0) whenever the
application stops, even partially, due to any of the following:
b Occurrence of a detected blocking fault
b Incorrect rack output voltages
b Loss of supply voltage
RESET push-button
The power supply module in each rack has a RESET button on the front panel;
when activated, this triggers an initialization sequence for the processor and the rack
modules it supplies.
Pressing this pushbutton triggers a sequence of service signals that is the same as:
b A power break when the pushbutton is pressed
b A power-up when the pushbutton is released
In terms of the application, these operations represent a cold start (forcing the I/O
modules to state 0 and initializing the processor).
Sensor power supply

The BMX CPS 2000/3500 AC power supply modules have an integrated 24 V c
voltage supply for powering the input sensors. Connection to this sensor power supply
is via the 5-way connector on the front panel.
The power available on this 24 V c voltage depends on the power supply model
(0.45 or 0.9 A) (see Specifications on page 1/12).
10
Introduction:
page 1/10
Description:
page 1/10
Specifications:
page 1/12
References:
page 1/13
1/11
Modicon M340
automation platform
Specifications
Specifications
c Power supply module

Primary
Voltage
Nominal
Limit (ripple included)
Input nominal I rms
Current
Initial power-up
at 25C
(1)
Micro-break duration
Integrated protection
Secondary
I inrush
I2t on activation
It on activation
Line (accepted)
Useful power
3.3 V c voltage
(2)
Max.
Nominal voltage
Nominal current
Typical power
24 V rack c voltage
Nominal voltage
(3)
Nominal current
Typical power
Integrated protection on the voltages (4)
Max. dissipated power
Max. length of Copper wires with 1.5 mm2 cross-section
power supply Copper wires with 2.5 mm2 cross-section
cable
Insulation
Dielectric strength
Primary/secondary
and primary/ground
Insulation resistance Primary/secondary
and primary/ground
a Power supply module
Primary
Voltages
Nominal
Limit (ripple included)
Frequencies
Nominal/limit
Power
Apparent
Current
Input nominal I rms
Initial power-up
at 25C
I inrush
(1)
I2t on activation
It on activation
Micro-break duration
Line (accepted)
Integrated protection
Secondary
Useful power
Max. overall
Max. on 3.3 V c and
24 V c rack output
voltages
3.3 V c voltage
Nominal voltage
(2)
Nominal current
Power (typical)
24 V rack c voltage
Nominal voltage
(3)
Nominal current
Typical power
24 V c sensor voltage Nominal voltage
(4)
Nominal current
Typical power
Integrated protection on the voltages (5)
Insulation
Dielectric strength
Primary/secondary
(24 V/3.3 V)
Primary/secondary
(sensor 24 V)
Primary/ground
24 V sensor
output/ground
Insulation resistance Primary/secondary and
primary/ground
V
V
A
V
A
A 2s
As
ms
W
V
A
W
V
A
W
BMX CPS 2010

24 c isolated
18...31.2 c
1 at 24 V c
24 c
30
0.6
0.15
1
With internal fuse (not accessible)
BMX CPS 3020

24...48 c isolated
18...62..4 c
1.65 at 24 V c; 0.83 at 48 V c
24 c
48 c
30
60
1
3
0.2
0.3
W
m
m
16.8
31.2
3.3
2.5
4.5
8.3
15
24 c
0.7
1.3
16.8
31.2
Yes, against overloads, short-circuits and overvoltages
8.5
20
10
30
15
V rms
1,500 - 50 Hz for 1 min at an altitude of 0...4,000 m
10
V
V
Hz
VA
A rms
V
A
A 2s
As
ms
W
W
V
A
W
V
A
W
V
A
W
BMX CPS 2000

100...240 a
85...264 a
50-60/47-63
70
0.61 at 115 V a; 0.31 at 240 V a
120 a
240 a
30
60
0.5
2
0.03
0.06
10
With internal fuse (not accessible)
20
16.8
BMX CPS 3500
120
1.04 at 115 V a; 0.52 at 240 V a
120 a
240 a
30
60
1
3
0.05
0.07
36
31.2
W
V rms
3.3
2.5
4.5
8.3
15
24 c
0.7
1.3
16.8
31.2
24 c
0.45
0.9
10.8
21.6
Yes, against overloads, short-circuits and overvoltages
8.5
1500
V rms
2300
V rms
V rms
1500
500
100
(1) These values should be taken into account when starting several devices simultaneously and
when sizing protection devices.
(2) 3.3 V c voltage for the I/O module logic power supply
(3) 24 V c rack voltage for the I/O module power supply and the processor
(4) 24 V c sensors output for the sensor power supply
(5) Protected by fuse
10
Introduction:
page 1/10
1/12
Description:
page 1/10
Functions:
page 1/11
References:
page 1/13
Modicon M340
automation platform
References
References
Each BMX XBP pp00 rack must be equipped with a power supply module. These
modules are inserted in the first two slots of each rack (marked CPS).
The power required to supply each rack depends on the type and number of modules
installed in the rack. It is therefore necessary to draw up a power consumption table
rack by rack to determine the BMX CPS ppp0 power supply module most suitable
for each rack (see page 6/13).
Power supply modules (1)
Line supply
24 V c
isolated
24...48 V c
isolated
100...240 V a
Available power (2)

3.3 V c
24 V
(3)
rack c
(3)
8.3 W
16.8 W
24 V
Total
sensor c
(4)
16.8 W
Reference
Weight
kg
BMX CPS 2010
0,290
15 W
31.2 W
31.2 W
BMX CPS 3020
0,340
8.3 W
15 W
16.8 W
31.2 W
10.8 W
21.6 W
20 W
36 W
BMX CPS 2000

BMX CPS 3500
0.300
0.360
BMX CPS 2010 / 3020
Separate parts
Description
Set of 2
removable
connectors
Composition
Type
Reference
One 5-way terminal

block and one 2-way
terminal block
Spring-type
BMX XTS CPS20
Weight
kg
0.015
5
Replacement parts
Description
Set of 2
removable
connectors
Composition
Type
Reference
One 5-way terminal

block and one 2-way
terminal block
Cage clamp
BMX XTS CPS10
Weight
kg
0.020
BMX CPS 2000 / 3500
(1) Includes the set of 2 cage clamp removable connectors BMX XTS CPS10.
(2) The sum of the absorbed power on each voltage (3.3 V c and 24 V c) should not exceed
the total power of the module. See the Power consumption table on page 6/13.
(3) 3.3 V c and 24 V rack c voltages for powering Modicon M340 PLC modules
(4) 24 V sensor c voltage for powering the input sensors (voltage available via the 2-way
removable connector on the front panel)
10
Introduction:
page 1/10
Description:
page 1/10
Functions:
page 1/11
Specifications:
page 1/12
1/13
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction,
description,
function
Single-rack configuration
Introduction
BMX XBP pp00 racks are the basic element of the Modicon M340 automation
platform in a single-rack and muli-rack configurations.
These racks perform the following functions:
b Mechanical function: They are used to install all the modules in a PLC station
(power supply, processor, discrete I/O, analog and application-specific I/O). These
racks can be mounted on a panel, plate or DIN rail:
v Inside enclosures
v On machine frames, etc.
b Electrical function: The racks incorporate a Bus X (owner bus). They are used to:
v Distribute the power supplies required for each module in the same rack
v Distribute data and service signals for the entire PLC station
v Hot swap modules during operation
Description
3
2
Rack 6 slots BMX XBP 0600
BMX XBP pp00 racks are available in 4, 6, 8 or 12-slot versions, and comprise:
1 A metal frame that performs the following functions:
v Holds the Bus X electronic card and protects it against EMI and ESD type
interference
v Holds the modules
v Gives the rack mechanical rigidity
2 A ground terminal for grounding the rack
3 4 holes for mounting the rack on a frame. These holes are big enough for M6
screws.
4 2 mounting points for the shielding connection bar
5 Tapped holes to take each module locking screw
6 A connector for an expansion module, marked XBE.
7 40-way female DIN connectors forming the electrical connection between the
rack and each module, marked CPS, 0011 (when the rack is delivered, each
connectors are protected by covers that should be removed before inserting the
modules).
8 Slots for anchoring the module pins.
BMX XSP pp00 cable shielding connection kit, used to protect against electrostatic
discharge when connecting the shielding of cordsets for connecting:
v Analog, counter and motion control modules,
v A Magelis XBT operator interface to the processor (via BMX XCA USBH0pp
shielded USB cable)
10
The cable shielding connection kit BMX XSP pp00 is comprised of:
9 A metal bar that takes the clamping rings
10 Two sub-bases to be mounted on the rack
11 Not included on the shielding connection kit spring clamping rings STB XSP 30p0
(sold in packs of 10, 1.56 mm2 or 511 mm2).
11
Shielding connection kits
Function
Addressing modules in a single-rack configuration (1)
Each rack must contain a power supply module and a processor module.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
XBE
CPS
Example of installation with 8-slot rack
Inserting different modules in the rack:

v The power supply module always occupies the CPS slot.
v The processor module must always be installed in slot 00.
v Its I/O modules and application-specific modules are installed in slot 01 to slot:
- 03 with a 4-slot rack
- 07 with an 8-slot rack
___________________________________________________________________________
(1) Multi-rack configuration with extension rack module BMX XBE 1000 (slot XBE).
See page 1/16.
10
1/14
Modicon M340
automation platform
References,
dimensions,
mounting
Single-rack configuration
Racks
Description
Racks
BMX XBP 0400
Type of module
No. of slots
to be inserted
(1)
BMX CPS power supply, 4
BMX P34 processor, I/O 6
modules and
8
application-specific
modules (counter, motion 12
control and
communication)
Reference
Weight
kg
0.630
0.790
0.950
1.270
BMX XBP 0400

BMX XBP 0600
BMX XBP 0800
BMX XBP 1200
For use with
Unit reference
BMX XBP 0400 rack

BMX XBP 0600 rack
BMX XBP 0800 rack
BMX XBP 1200 rack
BMX XSP 0400

BMX XSP 0600
BMX XSP 0800
BMX XSP1200
Weight
kg
0.280
0.310
0.340
0.400
STB XSP 3010

STB XSP 3020
BMX XEM 010
0.050
0.070
0.005
Accessories
BMX XBP 0800
Description
Shielding connection
kits comprised of:
- a metal bar
- two sub-bases
BMX XBP 1200

Spring clamping rings Cables with 1.56 mm2 cross-section
Sold in lots of 5
Cables with 511 mm2 cross-section
Unoccupied slots on BMX XBP pp00
Protective covers
rack
(replacement parts)
Sold in lots of 5
(1) Number of slots taking the processor module, I/O modules and application-specific modules
(excluding power supply module).
BMX XSP pp00
STB XSP 30p0
Dimensions, mounting
BMX XBP
Common side view
150 (2)
140 (1)
Front view
BMX XBP 0600
307.6
BMX XBP 0800
372.8
BMX XBP 1200
503.2
100
Rail (1)
BMX XBP 0400
a
242.4
(1) With removable terminal block (cage, screw or spring).

(2) With FCN connector.
150 (1)
160 (2)
Mounting the racks

On AM1 PA and AM3 PA pre-slotted plate
AF1-EA6
Installation rules
16
4 holes (2)
60
100
u 80
(2)
e
23,4
(1)
u 60
b
a
11,2
24
19
(2)
(2)
b
207.8
273
338.2
468.6
(1) On AM1 ED rail: 35 mm wide, 15 mm deep Only possible

with BMX XBP 0400/0600/0800 rack.
(2) For panel-mounting: The diameter of the mounting holes must
be sufficient to accept M4, M5, M6 screws ( 4.32 to 6.35 mm).
eu
u 60
a
242.4
307.6
372.8
503.2
u 60
BMX XBP 0400

BMX XBP 0600
BMX XBP 0800
BMX XBP 1200
u 80
(2)
(2)
10
3 mm
(1) Equipment or enclosure.

(2) Cable ducting or clip.
1/15
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction,
description
Multi-rack configuration
Constitution of a multi-rack configuration

4
Using BMX XBP pp00 racks, a multi-rack configuration is comprised of up to:

b 2 racks for a station with BMX P34 1000 processor
b 4 racks for a station with BMX P34 2pp0 processor
Each rack is equipped with:
1 A BMX CPS ppp0 power supply.
2 A BMX XBE 1000 extension rack module. This module inserted on the right of the
rack (slot marked XBE, see page 43402-EN/2) does not occupy 0011 slots of the
rack (4, 6, 8 or 12 slots are available).
3 The BMX XBE 1000 extension rack modules are connected to each over by bus X
extension cordsets.
Bus X
The racks distributed on bus X are connected to each other via 3 bus X extension
cordsets whose total length is 30 m maximum.
The racks are connected to each other using BMX XBC pp0K (1) bus X extension
cordsets that are connected to one of the 7 and 8 two 9-way SUB-D connectors on
each 2 BMX XBE 1000 extension rack module.
3
1
Line terminators 4
The two BMX XBE 1000 extension rack modules located at the ends of the line must
have a TSX TLY EX line terminator 4 fitted on the unused 9-way SUB-D type
connector.
Note: The processor module is always positioned in the rack address 0. However on a bus X
chaining, the order of racks does not affect the operation. For example, the chaining order can be
0-1-2-3, 2-0-3-1, 3-1-2-0, and so on.
Description
5
5
6
6
8
The BMX XBE 1000 extension rack module has the following on the front panel:
5 Safety screw for locking the module in its slot XBE.
6 A display block comprised of 5 LEDs:
b RUN LED (green): module in operation,
b COL LED (red): each rack has the same address or the rack address 0 is not
equipped of BMX P34 ppp0 processor module,
b 0, 1, 2 and 3 LEDs (green): 0, 1, 2 or 3 rack address.
7 A 9-way female SUB-D connector, marked bus X for to connect a 3 bus X cordset
from the previous rack or, if the first rack, for line ternination A/ included in the 4
TSX TLY EX lot.
8 A 9-way female SUB-D connector, marked bus X for to connect a 3 bus X cordset
to next rack or, if the last rack, for line ternination /B included in the 4 TSX TLY EX
lot.
On the right side
Access to 3 micro-switches for defining the rack address: 03.
Installation rules of BMX XBP ppp0 racks

Installation rules in cabinet, see page 1/15.
8
__________________________________________________________________
(1) BMX XBC pp0K daisy chaining cordsets length 0.8 m, 1.5 m, 3 m, 5 m or 12 m with angled
connectors or TSX CBY p08K length 1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 12 m, 18 m or 28 m with straight
connectors
10
1/16
Modicon M340
automation platform
References
Multi-rack configuration
Extension rack
Description
Use
Reference
Extension rack
module for
Modicon M340
Standard module for each rack (XBE slot), allows the connection
of extension racks:
- 2 max. with BMX P34 1000 processor module
- 4 max. with BMX P34 20p0 processor module
BMX XBE 1000
Weight
kg
0.178
Extension rack kit
Kit for configuration with 2 racks including:

- 2 BMX XBE 1000 extension rack modules
- 1 BMX XBC 008K daisy chaining cordset length 0.8 m
- 1 TSX TLY EX line terminators (lot of 2)
BMX XBE 2005
0.700
BMX XBE 1000
Cordsets and connecting accessories

Description
Daisy chaining
cordsets
bus X (total length
30 m max.)
Use
Composition
2 x 9-way SUB-D 9
Between
BMX XBE 1000 connectors
extension rack
modules
Bent connector equipping the

BMX XBS pppK cordsets
Type of
Length
connector
Bent
0,8 m
1,5 m
3m
5m
12 m
Reference
BMX XBC 008K
BMX XBC 015K
BMX XBC 030K
BMX XBC 050K
BMX XBC 120K
Weight
kg
0.165
0.250
0.420
0.650
1.440
Straight
1m
3m
5m
12 m
18 m
28 m
TSX CBY 010K

TSX CBY 030K
TSX CBY 050K
TSX CBY 120K
TSX CBY 180K
TSX CBY 280K
0.160
0.260
0.360
1.260
1.860
2.860
100 m
TSX CBY 1000
12.320
Sold in
lots of
2
Reference
5
Cable on reel
Description
TSX TLY EX
Length to be
fitted with
TSX CBY K9
connectors
Cable with free ends,

2 line testers
Use
Composition
Line terminators
Compulsory
2 x 9-way SUB-D connectors
on the
labelled A/ and /B
BMX XBP ppp0
end daisy
chaining
Bus X straight
connectors
For
2 x 9-way straight SUB-D connectors 2
TSX CBY 1000
cable ends
Installation of
connectors
Mounting for
TSX CBY K9
connectors
2 crimping pliers,
1 pen
(1)
TSX TLY EX
Weight
kg
0.050
TSX CBY K9
0.080
7
TSX CBY ACC 10
8
(1) Installation of connectors on the cable also required .
10
Introduction:
page 1/16
Description:
page 1/16
1/17
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction,
description
Modicon M340 packs
Introduction
The Modicon M340 packs offer is designed to provide compact solutions with
optimized cost.
These 5 pre-assembled packs, built around the BMX P34 1000 Standard processor,
include one non-extendable rack (4 or 6 slots) with an AC or DC power supply
module and discrete I/O modules.
Note: The BMX FTB 2000 20-way removable terminals blocks of discrete I/O modules are
included but delivered in separate packaging.
Description
Modicon M340 packs with a 100240 V power supply (terminal blocks)
BMX PAM 48000
The BMX PAM 48000/48200 pre-assembled packs comprise:

1 One non-extendable rack 4 or 6 slots, depending on model.
2 One BMX CPS 2000 a 100240 V, 20 W power supply module with a set of
2 cage clamp connectors.
3 One BMX P34 1000 Standard processor module (with Modbus serial link).
4 2 BMX DDI 1602 modules of 16 isolated inputs c 24 V, positive logic and,
delivered non-mounted, 2 BMX FTB 2000 20-way removable terminal blocks
(cage clamp).
5 One BMX DRA 1605 module of 16 relay outputs and, delivered non-mounted, one
BMX FTB 2000 20-way removable terminal block (cage clamp).
6 2 free slots (with rack 6 slots).
4
1
6
BMX PDM 48200
6
1
Modicon M340 packs with c 24 V power supply (terminal blocks)

The BMX PDM 48000/48200 pre-assembled packs comprise:
1 One non-extendable rack 4 or 6 slots, depending on model..
2 One BMX CPS 2010 c 24 V, 16.8 W power supply module with a set of 2 cage
clamp connectors.
4 2 BMX DDI 1602 modules of 16 isolated inputs c 24 V, positive logic and,
delivered non-mounted, 2 BMX FTB 2000 20-way removable terminal blocks
(cage clamp).
5 One BMX DDO 1602 module of 16 solid state outputs c 24 V and, delivered
non-mounted, one BMX FTB 2000 20-way removable terminal block (cage
clamp)..
6 2 free slots (with rack 6 slots).
Modicon M340 packs withc 24 V power supply (version with connectors)

The BMX PDM 64100 pre-assembled pack comprises:
1 One non-extendable rack 4 slots,
2 One BMX CPS 2010 c 24 V, 16.8 W power supply module with a set of 2 cage
clamp connectors.
4 One BMX DDI 3202K module of 32 isolated inputs c 24 V, positive logic,
connection by one 40-way connector.
5 One BMX DDO 3202K module of 32 solid state outputs c 24 V 0.1 A with 40-way
connector.
6 One free slot.
2 BMX FCW/FCC pp3 preformed cordsets with one connector 40-way.
10
References:
page 1/19
1/18
Modicon M340
automation platform
References
Modicon M340 packs
References
These pre-assembled packs are comprised of:
b One non-extendable rack 4 or 6 slots (except power supply module).
b One BMX CPS 2000 AC power supply or BMX CPS 2010 DC power supply with a set of 2 cage
clamp connectors.
b One BMX P34 1000 processor module with Modbus serial link and USB port for a programming
terminal (or Magelis XBT GT/GK/GTW advanced panel).
Depending on model:
b The discrete I/O modules with cage clamp 20-way terminal blocks or 40-way connectors.
b 0, 1 or 2 free slot(s).
Packs with a 110240 V power supply

No. of
slots
4

Inputs
Outputs
2 x BMX DDI 1602
1 x BMX DRA 1605
16 channels c 24 V 16 relays
No. free
slots
Connection
3 x BMX FTB 2000 0
cage clamp terminal
blocks
2 x BMX DDI 1602

1 x BMX DRA 1605
16 channels c 24 V 16 relays
3 x BMX FTB 2000 2

cage clamp terminal
blocks
Reference
Weight
kg
BMX PAM 48000
2.600
BMX PAM 48200
2.900
BMX PAM 48000
Packs with c 24 V power supply

No. of
slots
4

Inputs
Outputs
2 x BMX DDI 1602
1 x BMX DDO 1602
16 channels c 24 V 16 channels
c 24 V/0,5 A
No. free
slots
Connection
3 x BMX FTB 2000 0
cage clamp terminal
blocks
Reference
2 x BMX DDI 1602

1 x BMX DDO 1602
c 24 V/0,5 A
3 x BMX FTB 2000 2

cage clamp terminal
blocks
BMX PDM 48200
2.900
1 x BMX DDI 3202K 1 x BMX DDO 3202K 2 x 40-way

connectors
c 24 V/0,1 A
(1)
BMX PDM 64100
2.200
BMX PDM 48200
BMX PDM 48000
Weight
kg
2,600
(1) Preformed cordsets with 40-way connectors (and flying leads or HE10 connectors) BMX FCW/FCC pp3 preformed
cordsets with one connector 40-way.
10
Introduction:
page 1/18
Description:
page 1/18
1/19
MOS Series Pump Protection / Monitoring Modules

Base Part Numbers: MOS-1P, MOS-1PE, MOS-1PR, MSS-2P, MSS-2PE, MSS-2PR, MTT-2P, MRS-1P, MRS-1PE, MRR-2P, MRT-1P
_____________________Model Variations (Channel Usage)

The MOS channels (A and B) may be used independently in any
combination, as shown in the following table.
Model
__________________________________________Overview
The MOS Series pump protection and monitoring modules are

designed to provide a low-cost, flexible solution for protecting most
brands of submersible sewage pumps against thermal and sealfailure conditions.
Separate LED indication and relay contact
outputs for each function are included. Flexible model options
enable protection of any submersible sewage pump with heat
sensor and/or seal-failure sensing devices installed. The MOS Series
may be powered by 24 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz with no modifications.
Standard models are available for monitoring via resistance probes,
seal-failure float switches, Klixon thermal switches, RTDs and
thermistors. Custom modules may also be factory configured.
________________________________Operation Description
Channel A
Channel B
MOS-1P
100K resistance probe

(seal-fail)
NC Klixon (thermal)
MOS-1PE
NC seal chamber float switch

(seal-fail)
NC Klixon (thermal)
MOS-1PR
33k parallel resistor with

100k resistance probe
(seal-fail)
NC Klixon (thermal)
MSS-2P

(seal-fail)

(seal-fail)
MSS-2PE

(seal-fail)

(seal-fail)
MSS-2PR

(seal-fail)

(seal-fail)
MTT-2P
Thermistor
DIN44082/01D463
(thermal)
Thermistor
DIN44082/01D463
(thermal)
MRS-1P

(seal-fail)
Pt100 RTC (thermal)
The MOS Series combines detection circuits for both motor and MRS-1PE NC seal chamber float switch Pt100 RTC (thermal)
(seal-fail)
bearing over-temperature and seal-failure in a single plug-in unit.
In an alert condition, the appropriate LED is illuminated and relay MRR-2P
Pt100 RTC (thermal)
Pt100 RTC (thermal)
contacts associated with the condition toggle. Thus a load, such as
Thermistor
the motor contactor, may be turned off, or a warning light might be MRT-1P
DIN44082/01D463
Pt100 RTC (thermal)
turned on. Upon occurrence of the first alarm condition, the
(thermal)
proper LED will illuminate a steady alarm indication. If the alarm is
cleared automatically, the LED will then begin to flash, so that the
operator will know that one or more alarm occurrences has been ________________________Common Features (All Models)
detected, and automatically cleared.
Auto/Manual Reset: Channels that monitor temperature can
A low voltage supply provides power to the over-temperature and
be set for Manual or Auto reset after experiencing an alarm
seal-failure monitoring circuits which control relay outputs based
condition. (Seal failures automatically reset when the alarm
on instructions contained in a microprocessor. The microprocessor
condition is removed although the LED continues to flash until
circuitry includes power-on-reset and oscillator start-up timers as
reset.)
well as an independent watchdog timer to ensure reliable
Reset Push-button: The reset button is used to reset all alarm
operation. Both hardware and software filtering is implemented on
conditions and clear flashing LED states.
the sensor inputs for reliable signal integrity in noisy environments.
Test Push-button: The test button simulates an alarm condition
A Test push button simulates faults on both sensor channels, and a
in both channels until released. NOTE: In many cases this will
Reset push button clears the alert indicators after (1) The Test push
cause the pump to stop because of the simulated high
button has been depressed, or (2) an actual alert has been
temperature condition.
corrected.
The Reset push button performs a "hard"
microprocessor reset.
To prevent dislodgement of the module it is designed to be
mounted in an industrial type 12-pin socket with hold down clip.
Multi-Tech Solutions, Inc.
274 Highway 65 North
Conway
Arkansas 72032
Tel 501-336-8500
Fax 501-336-9225
______________________________Technical Specifications ________________________________________Mechanical

Current sensing.
-40 to 55 C ( -40 to 131 F )
24 to 240 VAC, 50-60 Hz. / 24-48 VDC
24 VAC - 50/60 Hz 1.7 VA
120 VAC 50/60 Hz 1.9 VA
240 VAC 50/60 Hz 2.4 VA
24 VDC
1.4 Watts
NEMA B300 Pilot Duty, 1/6th HP, 3A @240VAC; Form C
2.42"
2.11"
0.98"
1.77"
Relay Contact
Rating
Sensor Voltage Varies with resistance. Not to exceed 10 VDC2%
LED States
GREEN:
no fault
(Both Channels) RED:
thermal fault
AMBER:
seal-fail fault
FLASHING: fault automatically cleared
Contact States N.O. contact closes on fault condition or on loss of supply
power.
MTT-2P
MRS-1P
MRS-1PE
MRR-2P
MRT-1P
R < 120k
(seal-fail)
45 sec. or
3 15-sec. events
in 24 hours
Float switch
opens
(seal-fail)
45 sec. or
3 15-sec. events
in 24 hours
R < 26k or
R > 40k
(seal-fail)
45 sec. or
3 15-sec. events
in 24 hours
R > 4k
130C nom.
(thermal)
R > 150
130 C nom.
(thermal)
7 sec. event
R > 150
130 C nom.
(thermal)
7 sec. event
R > 150
130 C nom.
(thermal)
R > 150
130 C nom.
(thermal)
7 sec. event
10
2.20"
0.18"
1
2.66"
____________________________________Electrical Wiring
CHANNEL A CHANNEL B
INPUTS
12-PIN SOCKET
7
7 sec. event
CHANNEL B
OUTPUTS
10
11
12
N.O.
MSS-2PR
7 sec. event
11
COM
MSS-2PE
Klixon open
(thermal)
12
N.C.
MSS-2P
7 sec. event
MOS-1PR
0.90"
1.68"
Klixon open
(thermal)
COM
MOS-1PE
Channel B
Fault
Timing
Klixon open
7 sec. event
(thermal)
24-240
VAC
MOS-1P
Channel A
Fault
Timing
R < 120k
45 sec. or
(seal-fail)
3 15-sec.
events in 24
hours
Float switch
45 sec. or
opens
3 15-sec.
(seal-fail)
events in 24
hours
R < 26k or
45 sec. or
R > 40k
3 15-sec.
(seal-fail)
events in 24
hours
R < 120k
45 sec. or
(seal-fail)
3 15-sec.
events in 24
hours
Float switch
45 sec. or
opens
3 15-sec.
(seal-fail)
events in 24
hours
R < 26k or
45 sec. or
R > 40k
3 15-sec.
(seal-fail)
events in 24
hours
R > 4k
7 second event
130C nom.
(thermal)
R < 120k
45 sec. or
(seal-fail)
3 15-sec.
events in 24
hours
Float switch
45 sec. or
opens
3 15-sec.
(seal-fail)
events in 24
hours
R > 150
7 sec. event
130 C nom.
(thermal)
R > 4k
7 second event
130C nom.
(thermal)
2.86"
N.C.
Model
0.12"
N.O.
Measurement
Principle
Environment
Supply Voltage
Power
Consumption
CHANNEL A
* On 1-wire seal-fail circuits attach Pin 4

to COMMON GROUND point with
PUMP SAFETY GROUND WIRE.
NOTE: N.O. contact closes on fault or loss of supply power.
7 sec. event
NOTE: Timing values are nominal. Hardware and digital filtering will affect
absolute response times by as much as 3 seconds total.
Conway
Arkansas 72032
Tel 501-336-8500
Fax 501-336-9225
MOS Series Pump Protection / Monitoring Modules

RS-485 Broadcasting Communication Option
Base Part Numbers: MOS-1P, MOS-1PE, MOS-1PR, MSS-2P, MSS-2PE, MSS-2PR, MTT-2P, MRS-1P, MRS-1PE, MRR-2P, MRT-1P
Suffixes: -B (RS-485 Broadcasting Option)
______________________________________________Overview If the RS-485 bus is transmitted over long distances, then the engineer
The MOS Series pump protection and monitoring modules may be
optionally purchased with an RS-485 Broadcasting Communication
option. Modules with this option periodically transmit an ASCII encoded
data record over the RS-485 communication bus for reception by a host /
monitor.
This datasheet describes the configuration and use of that option.
must ensure that either the remote device is guaranteed to stay within
the allowed ground potential range or an isolated RS-485 repeater must
be installed. Devices are commercially available. In all cases, proper
care should be taken to avoid grounding conflicts and ground loops.
__________________________________Broadcasting Operation
Each second the MOS sends a single ASCII string out the RS-485 bus.
During transmission the Green Power On LED on the MOS will
__________________________________________Revision Level momentarily blink OFF. This is a visual indication the unit is
This document applies to MOS firmware revisions 1.14 and higher.
broadcasting.
________________________Broadcasting Hardware Connection ________________________________________Message Format

The MOS uses an RS-485 communication bus. The standard bus protocol The broadcast message ASCII encoded and readable on any terminal
emulation program. Microsoft Windows HyperTerminal is an example.
is 19,200 baud, 8 data bits, NO parity, and one stop bit (19.2k,8,N,1).
RS-485 requires three wires -- RS485+, RS485-, and Ground. The MOS
uses an RJ-11, six-wire connection to bring these signals out.
Illustration 1 shows the connections from the cable perspective.
RS-485 (+)
RS-485 Common
Not Connected
Not Connected
RS-485 Common
RS-485 (-)
A message packet consists of nine fields each consisting of a two-letter

identifier and a value separated by a delimiter character (':'). The fields
are also separated by the delimiter character (':').
All values are transmitted as ASCII encoded decimal values and are 16-bit
unsigned integers in the range (0..65,535).
1
2
3
4
5
6
RS-485 RJ-11 Connection
Illustration 1: Broadcasting Cable Wiring
RS-485 specifies line termination requirements, but in practice at 19,200

baud, termination is generally not required for distances less than 300 m
(1500 ft.). The MOS does not incorporate internal termination.
Field
Summary Description
FR
Firmware Revision Level
CF
Factory Configuration Type
A0
Analog Signal -- Channel B
A1
Analog Signal -- Channel A
SF
Status Flags Register
F0
Channel B Fault Counter
F1
Channel A Fault Counter
RL
Reset Counter (Lower 16-bits)
RH
Reset Counter (Upper 16-bits)
Table 1: Broadcast Message Fields
_______________________________RS-485 Electrical Grounding
The MOS references its internal ground signal to pins #2 and #4 on the
relay base. It is recommended that either pin #2 or pin #4 be referenced
to chassis or panel ground. NOTE: In the case of a one-wire moisture
probe, pin #4 is typically connected to panel ground. In isolated twowire sensor configurations, either pin #2 or pin #4 should be connected
to panel ground. Devices on the RS-485 bus must reference this same
panel ground or be guaranteed to stay within a maximum of 7 volts of
panel ground for proper operation. Ground voltages outside of this
range will produce unpredictable results and may result in hardware
damage.
In practice, all devices on the RS-485 bus should connect their zero volt
potential to the panel ground. In this case only pins #1 and #6 on the
RJ-11 connector are required. If a device is floating on the bus, then pins
#2 and #5 may be used to pull that device to the panel ground. These
pins are common with the MOS internal ground signal.
Conway
______________________________Firmware Revision Level (FR)

The MOS firmware revision level is encoded in a decimal format. For
example 109 corresponds to revision level 1.09. The most recent
revision level is 1.14 (value=114).
____________________________Factory Configuration Type (CF)

Each MOS model is assigned a unique factory configuration type. This
value is broadcast for field reference.
____________________________Analog Signal -- Channel B (A0)

The raw analog voltage signal on Channel B may be read. Interpreting
this signal requires some underlying knowledge of the MOS internal
circuitry. In general, this information is not needed, but may be useful in
specific troubleshooting circumstances. Consult the factory for details.
Arkansas 72032
Tel 501-336-8500
Fax 501-336-9225
____________________________Analog Signal -- Channel A (A1)

The raw analog voltage signal on Channel A may be read. Interpreting
this signal requires some underlying knowledge of the MOS internal
circuitry. In general, this information is not needed, but may be useful in
specific troubleshooting circumstances. Consult the factory for details.
_________________________________Status Flags Register (SF)

The Status Flags Register uses bit encoding to track various states
internally within the MOS. These bits may be used to interpret the
present operating state of the MOS.
Since the information in this register is encoded in individual bits, the

master must either use bit specific commands to interpret the data or
use bit-wise AND operations to mask off the unused bits. Bits are
labeled 0 to 15 from least significant to most significant order. That is bit
#0 corresponds to 1 while bit #15 corresponds to 32,768 (decimal).
Bit
Description
Channel B fault condition (1 = FAULT)
Channel A fault condition (1 = FAULT)
Channel B fault condition latched (1 = FAULT has occurred)
Channel A fault condition latched (1 = FAULT has occurred)
12
Test switch state (1 = Test switch pressed)
13
AUTO / MAN switch state (1 = AUTO)
Latches allow an automatically cleared fault state to be recognized.

Other bits have internal usage within the MOS and should be ignored.
Example: Using C language operators:
if the Status Register Flags & (1<<4) == 1, then the MOS is in a Channel B
fault condition.
_____________________________Channel B Fault Counters (F0)

Every time the MOS senses a fault on Channel B, the fault counter is
incremented by one. This counter is non-volatile and persists for the life
of the product. This may be used to track an excessive number of faults
in a specific installation.
_____________________________Channel A Fault Counters (F1)

Every time the MOS senses a fault on Channel A, the fault counter is
incremented by one. This counter is non-volatile and persists for the life
of the product. This may be used to track an excessive number of faults
in a specific installation.
___________________________________Reset Counters (RH:RL)

Every time the MOS experiences a power-up from a cold start or a
Manual Reset using the reset switch on the device, an internal counter
tracks this reset condition. Internally this is a 32-bit counter. The lower
16-bits of this counter are presented in the field RL. The upper 16-bits
are presented in the field RH. This value may be used to detect an
excessive number of power failures. Total resets are given by the
following formula.
Resets= RH65536 RL
Conway
Arkansas 72032
Tel 501-336-8500
Fax 501-336-9225
Publication Number: 1075-120

Rev. G - 7/98
ROCHESTER INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS
MICROLARM AN-3196B
LED ANNUNCIATOR
OPERATING & SERVICE
MANUAL
ROCHESTER
Digitally signed by Engineering Services

Date: 2001.10.09 08:57:14 -05'00'
Reason: Document is released
APPROVED
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOC-3
SECTION 1 - RECEIPT & INSTALLATION .

1.1
RECEIPT . . . . . . . . .
1.2
MOUNTING . . . . . . . .
1.2.1 PANEL MOUNTING . .
1.2.2 WALL MOUNT . . . .
1.3
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS .
1.3.1 TERMINAL BLOCK TB1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1-1
. 1-1
. 1-3
. 1-3
. 1-6
. 1-8
. 1-8
1-11
SECTION 2 - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . .

2.1
GENERAL . . . . . . . .
2.2
SEQUENCE CONTROL MODULE
2.3
COMMON SERVICES MODULE
2.4
SYSTEM BUS . . . . . .
2.4.1 SERIAL DATA BUS .
2.4.2 FEEDBACK DATA BUS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-1
2-1
2-3
2-4
2-6
2-7
2-8
SECTION 3 - CONTROLS & OPERATION . . . . . . .

3.1
PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES . . . . . . .
3.2
STANDARD OPERATIONS . . . . . . . .
3.3
OPTIONAL VARIATIONS . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 PUSH-BUTTON SWITCH INTERLOCK
3.3.2 AUTO SILENCE . . . . . . . .
3.3.3 NON-FIRST-OUT OPTIONS . . . .
3.4
TEST PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-1
3-1
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-5
SECTION 4 - SEQUENCE CONTROL MODULE .

4.1
DIP SWITCHES . . . . . .
4.2
TECHNICAL DATA . . . . .
4.3
SPECIAL APPLICATIONS . .
4.3.1 CONTACT SHARING . .
4.3.2 ALARM RESPONSE TIME
4.3.3 HOST SYSTEM INPUTS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-1
4-2
4-5
4-8
4-8
4-8
4-9
SECTION 5 - COMMON SERVICES MODULE . . . . . . . . .

5.1
OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1 FLASH RATE . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2 AUDIBLE AND RINGBACK ALARM CONTROL
5.1.3 PUSH-BUTTON SWITCH INTERLOCK . . .
5.1.4 OPTIONAL RELAY CONTACT USE . . . .
5.2
POWER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . .
5.3
TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4
OUTPUT RELAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5
CONFIGURATION CHANGES . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
SECTION 6 - MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1
TROUBLE SHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
TOC-1
Rochester Instrument Systems
LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
A
B
C
D
E
F
ISA SEQUENCE CHARTS

ORDER CODE DEFINITION AND SPECIFICATIONS
SPARE PARTS
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
REPAIRS AND WARRANTY
ENGINEERING DRAWINGS
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
2-1
3-1
4-1
7-1
7-2
7-4
ANNUNCIATOR FRONT AND REAR VIEWS . . . .

PANEL MOUNT DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . .
WALL MOUNT DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . .
TB1 CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTIONS FOR TERMINAL BLOCK TB2 . . .
CONNECTIONS FOR REFLASH OUTPUTS . . . .
AUDIBLE DEVICE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . .
REMOTE PUSH-BUTTON SWITCH CONNECTIONS .
SERIAL DATA AND FEEDBACK BIT ASSIGNMENTS
ANNUNCIATOR KEYPAD . . . . . . . . . . .
DIP SWITCH FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . .
AN-3196B-MOD BACKPLANE . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIAL CABLE . .
SWITCH S5 SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1-4
. 1-5
. 1-6
. 1-9
1-11
1-12
1-12
1-14
. 2-7
. 3-1
. 4-2
. 7-3
. 7-4
. 7-6
LIST OF TABLES
Table 2-1
Table 5-1
SYSTEM BUS WIRE ASSIGNMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

COMMON SERVICES MODULE OPTIONS DIP SWITCH 1 . . . . 5-2
TOC-2
AN-3196B Annunciator
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
The Rochester Instrument Systems, Model AN-3196B MicroLarm
Annunciator is a self-contained, LED annunciating system for monitoring and
indicating the conditions of up to twelve inputs. The unit is multimicrocomputer based and is designed to provide long term, efficient
operation.
This manual gives detailed information on installation, operation, and
maintenance of the system. We recommend that everyone involved with
installation or maintenance of this equipment read and be familiar with the
entire manual. Operating personnel should read and be familiar with at least
"Section 3 - Controls & Operation".
The sections of this manual which deal with modifications and
maintenance assume a basic knowledge of servicing electronic equipment.
The installation section also assumes a basic knowledge of mechanical and
electrical maintenance skills.
Each Annunciator can be custom configured for a specific application.
"Appendix F" contains the Engineering Drawings for this specific
Annunciator. "Appendix A" shows the ISA Sequence Charts which are
pertinent to this equipment. "Appendix B" shows the MicroLarm Order
Code Specifications and "Appendix C" gives Spare Parts Information.
"Appendix E" gives information of parts returns and warranties. "Appendix
D" gives specific information pertinent to working with equipment which can
be damaged by Electrostatic Discharge.
Rochester Instrument Systems fully supports its systems with in-house
customer service and field service staffs. In addition, for a fee, Rochester
Instrument Systems can provide training programs for your personnel, startup assistance, and additional instruction manuals. Contact the factory for
further information.
TOC-3
TOC-4
RECEIPT & INSTALLATION
SECTION 1 - RECEIPT & INSTALLATION

The Rochester Instrument Systems, Model AN-3196B MicroLarm,
Self-contained, LED, Annunciator is a high-reliability, multi-microcomputer
based, 12-point, monitoring and signaling system. It utilizes microcomputer
technology to monitor field contact conditions. Alarm conditions indicated by
the monitored contacts are displayed by Light Emitting Diodes (LED's). In
addition, the Annunciator can activate audible alarms and auxiliary output
contacts.
C A U T I O N
ELECTRONIC DEVICES CAN BE DAMAGED IF DROPPED
OR IMPACTED. HANDLE WITH CARE.
1.1
RECEIPT
Inspect the shipment when the unit is first received. Check for any
opened or damaged containers. Check the shipment against the Packing
List or Bill of Lading and verify that the shipment includes all containers listed.
NOTE
REPORT ANY SHIPPING DAMAGES OR SHORTAGES
TO THE CARRIER AT THE TIME OF RECEIPT
.
Open each container and check the contents against its respective Packing
List. Inspect each of the components. Look for scratches or dents, loose or
dangling parts, or other obvious damage.
Each annunciator comes assembled as a unit. There are two modules
inside each unit, attached to the front faceplate. Make sure the faceplate
assembly is securely seated in the annunciator enclosure and the knurled
screw toward the bottom of the faceplate is tight. Check the Lamacoid
legend plates, used to label each LED, to make sure they are as specified by
1-1
your order. (Refer to "Appendix B - Order Code Definition" for model

definition.)
Report any damaged, missing, or incorrect items to:
CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPARTMENT
ROCHESTER INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS, INC.
255 North Union Street
Rochester, New York 14605 USA
Telephone: (716)263-7700
Fax: (716)262-4777
ROCHESTER INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS, LTD.
Schooner Court Crossways Business Park
Dartford, Kent
DA2 6QQ, United Kingdom
Telephone: (441) 322 287500
Fax: (441)322 282000
If you anticipate the need to return any or all of the components, save all
packing materials for re-shipment. Refer to the "Procedures for Factory Repair
and Return" in "Appendix E - Repairs and Warranty" for proper procedures
and addresses for returning goods.
1-2
1.2
MOUNTING
The AN-3196B Annunciator is fully self-contained, including an optional

integral power supply. It is designed to be either panel mounted or surface
mounted with the optional surface mounting kit. The unit may also be mounted
in a NEMA Class 4 or Class 12 enclosure where severe environmental
conditions exist.
W A R N I N G
THE BACK OF THE ANNUNCIATOR ASSEMBLY HAS
MANY EXPOSED ELECTRICAL CONTACTS. WHEN
CHOOSING A MOUNTING LOCATION FOR THIS UNIT,
MAKE SURE THESE CONTACTS WILL NOT TOUCH
OTHER ITEMS AND THAT NO ONE WILL BE ABLE TO
ACCIDENTALLY TOUCH THESE CONTACTS WHEN THE
UNIT IS IN SERVICE.
1.2.1 PANEL MOUNTING

When choosing a location for mounting the AN-3196B Annunciator,
consider the physical size and weight of the unit and the environment of the
location as well as the visibility of the LED display. The chassis of the
annunciator measures 3.73" wide by 12.95" high by 5.87" deep (94.74 mm x 329
mm x 149.2 mm).
The unit weighs 9 lbs. (4.08 kg). It is designed to rest on the sill of the
panel cutout. Therefore, the material left, after the cutout is made, must be
strong enough to support the unit's weight without failing. The unit mounts with
panel clamps from the rear of the unit and all connections are made to the
terminal blocks at the rear of the unit. Therefore, the mounting location must
allow full access to the rear of the assembly.
1-3
Figure 1-1 Annunciator Front and Rear Views
1-4
To mount the unit, first mark the cutout dimensions on the panel where
the annunciator is to be mounted. (Refer to Figure 1.2 for specific dimensions.)
Be sure to allow enough room around the cutout for the front mounting bezel to
miss any other components on the panel. Cut out the panel material.
The annunciator is shipped with the panel clamps mounted to the unit.
Remove these panel clamps from the annunciator and position the unit in the
cutout. From the rear of the unit, place the panel clamps into the notches at the
top and bottom of the annunciator. Finger tighten both clamps until the unit is
secured in the panel. Use a screwdriver to finish securing the unit.
Figure 1-2 Panel Mount Dimensions

1-5
1.2.2 WALL MOUNT

When the AN-3196B is to be wall mounted, a separate metal enclosure is
supplied for mounting. Mounting dimensions are 4.00" wide by 15.88" high by
8.90" deep (101.6 mm x 403.4 mm x 226.2 mm). With this enclosure, the
assembly weighs 15 lbs. (6.80 kg).
Determine where the annunciator is to be mounted and mark the location
for the four mounting holes for the enclosure brackets. (Refer to Figure 1.3 for
mounting dimensions for these holes.) The brackets are designed to accept four
#10 screws. If wall anchors are being used, each anchor should be suitable for
at least a 7-1/2 pound load. This will give a mounting-weight Factor of Safety of
2.
Figure 1-3 WALL MOUNT DIMENSIONS

1-6
Insert the screws through the holes in the mounting brackets and fasten
securely to the wall. Remove the panel clamps from the annunciator and
position the unit in the opening in the enclosure. From the rear of the unit, place
the panel clamps into the notches at the top and bottom of the annunciator.
Finger tighten both clamps until the unit is secured in the enclosure. Use a
screwdriver to finish securing the unit.
W A R N I N G
ALL ELECTRICAL WIRING FOR THE ANNUNCIATOR
CONNECTS TO THE EXPOSED CONTACTS ON THE BACK
OF THE UNIT.
PROVISION MUST BE MADE FOR
ACCESS TO THESE TERMINALS TO MAKE THE WIRING
CONNECTIONS. HOWEVER, CARE MUST ALSO BE
TAKEN TO ASSURE THAT NO ONE WILL BE ABLE TO
ACCIDENTALLY TOUCH THE CONTACTS WHEN THE
UNIT IS IN SERVICE.
1-7
1.3
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
All electrical wiring to the annunciator connects to the two terminal blocks
on the back of the unit. Field contact connections are made to Terminal Block
TB1 as shown in Figure 1.4. All other connections are made to Terminal Block
TB2 as shown in Figure 1.5. Refer to "Appendix F - Engineering Drawings"
for the specific wiring connection patterns for this annunciator. Also, refer to
"Section 4 - Sequence Control Module" and "Section 5 - Common Services
Module" for additional information on options and settings which can affect the
wiring connections.
This unit requires a proper ground. A factory installed jumper is provided
from the bottom terminal of Terminal Block TB2 to the chassis ground stud
between TB1 and TB2. Check to make sure this jumper is in place and secured.
Connect electrical ground to the chassis ground stud before applying power to
the annunciator.
W A R N I N G
THIS UNIT MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED.
FAILURE TO PROVIDE AND USE A PROPER GROUND
CONNECTION CAN RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE
ANNUNCIATOR.

Terminal Block TB1 has 18 terminals. 12 of these terminals are labeled 1
through 12 and are the connection points for the return side from each of the 12
possible input points. Each of these input points must be a normally open or
normally closed contact which is activated when the monitored point goes into
alarm.
1-8
Figure 1-4 TB1 Connections
1-9
The Field Contact Voltage (FCV) is supplied by the six terminals labeled
"VA" through "VF" on Terminal Block TB1. This supply may be 24, 48, or 125
VDC. Refer to Figure 1.5 for identification of the proper supply and return
terminals for each of the field contact points.
Note optional Isolated/AC Input configuration, in which an AC or DC
voltage originating in the field is applied to the input terminals, with the
return side connected to "VF (RET)". As a variation of this, six mutually
isolated groups may be set up, having two inputs and one return terminal
each. Standard voltage levels which may be accepted are 120 VAC or
24, 48, or 125 VDC. See "Section 4 - Sequence Control Module" for
details on input circuit set up and operation.
Connect each of the field contacts to the appropriate terminals on
Terminal Block TB1. Refer to "Appendix F - Engineering Drawings" to
determine which device is designed to be monitored by each input point. Verify
that the Legend Plate for each input matches the field contact being connected
to that terminal.
W A R N I N G
IMPROPER LABELING OR CONNECTIONS COULD
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE DEVICES BEING
MONITORED DUE TO INCORRECT RESPONSE.
1-10
Terminal Block TB2 is used for all other external connections to the
annunciator. These outputs include Critical and Non-Critical Reflash, Critical
and Non-Critical Alarm Audible, and Ringback Audible. Devices or device inputs
controlled by these outputs connect to Terminals 6 through 15. Terminals 1
through 5 connect to remote push-button switches when these are utilized.
Terminals 16 and 17 connect to the prime supply voltage. Terminal 18 is a
factory ground connection.
Voltage to power external devices or device inputs may be supplied from
an external power source, or from the internal annunciator 24 VDC source. The
internal 24 VDC source is capable of providing 0.15 Amps. and is brought out to
TB2-4 (+24V) and TB2-14 (24V RET) for customer connections. TB2-4 is used
to power external push-button switches. The relay contacts are rated for 5A at
24 VDC/120 VAC, 3A, 240 VAC, or 0.1A at 125 VDC maximum.
Figure 1-5 CONNECTIONS FOR TERMINAL BLOCK TB2

The Critical and Non-Critical Reflash outputs can each be connected as
normally open or normally closed (see Figure 1.6).
1-11
Figure 1-6 CONNECTIONS FOR REFLASH OUTPUTS

The Critical/Non-Critical Alarm Audible and the Non-Critical/ Ringback Audible
are factory set as normally open or normally closed if specified by the Customer
Order Specifications. If not specified, these contacts are shipped as normally
open. The contacts can be changed as required (see Figure 1.7).
Figure 1-7 AUDIBLE DEVICE CONNECTIONS

1-12
Connect each of the outputs to their proper terminals. Refer to "Appendix F Engineering Drawings" for the correct terminal connections for this
annunciator. Also, see "Section 5 - Common Services Module" for a
complete description of the output options and how they can be altered.
The annunciator is supplied with an integral, membrane switch pad for
push-button switch control. However, there are occasions when it is desirable to
have the push-button switches at a location which is remote from the
annunciator unit. When this is necessary, the remote push-button switches are
connected to the terminals on Terminal Block TB2 as shown in Figure 1.8.
There are five possible supply voltages to the AN-3196B annunciator:
120 VAC, 240 VAC, 24 VDC, 48 VDC, and 125 VDC. Each annunciator is
designed for a specific prime supply voltage and different internal modifications
must be made for each prime supply voltage. When 24 VDC supply voltage is
used, this supply voltage is used directly within the unit.
When 125 VDC or 48 VDC supply voltage is used, an invertor power
supply produces the proper internal voltage. When 120 VAC or 240 VAC supply
voltage is used, two transformers, connected in parallel or series, provide the
proper internal voltage.
Using a different prime supply voltage will cause damage to the unit. If a
change in prime supply voltages is desired, the annunciator should be returned
to the factory for alterations. Refer to the Customer Order Specifications and
"Appendix F - Engineering Drawings" for the design voltage of this unit.
Connect the proper prime supply voltage to Terminals 16 and 17. If the
prime supply voltage is 24, 48, or 125 VDC, make sure the positive side is
connected to Terminal 16. It is also important to note that, when the prime
supply voltage is 24 VDC, only non-isolated 24 VDC is available for the Field
Contact Voltage. For power sources other than 24 VDC, the Field Contact
Voltage is isolated from the prime power and may be either 24 VDC or 125 VDC.
1-13
Figure 1-8 REMOTE PUSH-BUTTON SWITCH CONNECTIONS
1-14
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION 2 - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The Rochester Instrument Systems, Model AN-3196B Annunciator is a
multi-microcomputer based system used to centrally monitor up to twelve field
conditions. The operations are based on proprietary microcomputers which are
incorporated into two modules. These modules provide the interface for the
inputs, determine the sequence of operations, and generate various output
signals.
The AN-3196B Annunciator will monitor conditions from any device which
can actuate a contact or produce a voltage (24/48/120/125: DC or AC). A few
typical applications would include monitoring pressure sensing devices, flow,
temperature, door contacts, vibration sensors, relay contact closure, levels, limit
switches, speed, and process sequences. The full list of possible uses is
unlimited.
2.1
GENERAL
The following is an abbreviated general description of the AN-3196B

Annunciator. For complete details on this specific unit, refer to the Customer
Order Specifications and to "Appendix B - Order Code Definition and
Specifications".
INPUTS:
May be in any one of the following configurations:
a)
1 to 12 sets of dry contacts; each may be normally open or

normally closed. One Field Contact Voltage terminal is provided
for every two input terminals.
b)
1 to 12 voltage inputs (individual inputs may have voltage normally

present or absent). One terminal provided for common voltage
return.
c)
Same as (b), but inputs may be distributed across six mutually

isolated groups of two inputs each, having one voltage return each.
Note: The current required for each input is approximately 1.5 mA.
2-1
OUTPUTS:
a)
1 LED indicator per input point.
b)
Relay contacts for Critical/Non-Critical Audible Outputs,

Critical/Non-Critical Reflash Outputs, and Ringback Output.
c)
Optional remote mounted audible devices.
CONTROLS:
a)
Integral Membrane Switch Pad with "T" (Test), "A" (Acknowledge),

"S" (Silence), and "R" (Reset) push-button switches.
b)
Internal switches and solder-in jumpers.
2-2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.2
Inputs are provided to the Sequence Control Module (SCM) in the form of
voltages which are switched on or off in the field, according to the status of the
devices switching them. The SCM monitors and detects changes in the status of
each input by sensing presence or loss of the corresponding voltage. The
microcomputer in the module responds by storing status information in its
memory, sending certain alarm status information to the Common Services
Module by way of the Feedback Bus, and activating the proper LED (Light
Emitting Diode) according to the specified sequence.
Each Annunciator can monitor up to twelve inputs. Switches on the
module allow the user to select each input as having normally open or normally
closed contacts (voltage normally present or absent). Switches also allow the
user to define each input as Critical or Non-Critical.
Each individual input may also be configured to respond as a First-Out
Alarm. If a process has several monitored points, it may be important to know
which point in the process caused the problem, even though several other points
may have subsequently gone into alarm. Configuring each of these points as
First-Out Alarms allows you to know which point went into alarm first. This
First-Out Alarm will have a different display than the other alarmed points.
2-3
2.3
The microcomputer of the Common Services Module (CSM) can be

considered the Central Processing Unit (CPU) for the Annunciator. Information
is received from the Sequence Control Module and the system push-button
switches. In response, signals are sent back to the Sequence Control Module
and to various output devices.
The push-button switches are the operator's means of controlling the
Annunciator System. Four push-button switches are used as operator inputs to
the system. The push-button switches are the "T" (Test), "S" (Silence), "A"
(Acknowledge), and "R" (Reset) push-button switches. If remote push-button
switches are used, they are connected to the Common Services Module using
Terminals 1 through 5 on Terminal Block TB2.
The Test push-button switch simultaneously simulates alarm inputs on all
input points. All points should display on alarm when this push-button switch is
pushed. In addition, all points configured for First-Out Alarm should be displayed
as First Alarms. After the Test push-button switch has been pressed, the other
annunciator push-button switches are used to test the balance of the system
operation.
The Silence push-button switch is used to turn off all audible alarms. It
does not affect the status of the visual display. It does not reset the alarm status
memory.
The Acknowledge push-button switch signals the operator's recognition
of a new alarm. It causes a transition in the visual display from the Alarmed to
the Acknowledged state and will silence any active audible alarm.
The Reset push-button switch causes the display to return to the Normal
state from an Acknowledged state in manual reset sequences. If the unit has a
Ringback Sequence, the push-button switch is used to acknowledge the
automatic Return-to-Normal state. (A Ringback sequence is one in which
another audible alarm sounds, accompanied by another visual display, when the
system returns to normal.)
The Common Services Module also controls various output relays. There
are four relays available and six possible output types. The Annunciator System
can have up to two audible alarms from the three types available: Critical
Audible, Non-Critical Audible, and Ringback Audible. The two audible alarms
can have different devices so the type of alarm can be determined by the sound.
The system also has two Reflash Relays for driving remote Annunciators.
One of these is used for Critical-designated points and one for Non-Critical
points. In place of either of the Reflash outputs, the system could be set up with
a Power Monitor. This circuit would indicate if there is a loss of logic power.
2-4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Options are factory set based on the order specifications. Refer to
"Section 5 - Common Services Module" for detailed information on these
options. Refer to the Customer Order Specifications and "Appendix F Engineering Drawings" for details on your system.
The Common Services Module also supplies information to the Sequence
Control Module by way of the Serial Data Bus. This consists of the flash rates,
push-button switch status and the First-Out Blocking Bit. (First-Out Blocking
prevents Subsequent Alarms from displaying in the same manner as the First
Alarm.)
DIP switch assemblies on the Common Services Module select various
options for the Annunciator. These options include Optional Flash Rate,
Automatic Silence, Push-button Switch Interlock, and Pulsed Audible Alarm
options. The selections affect all twelve inputs.
2-5
2.4
SYSTEM BUS
The System Bus is carried between the Common Services Module and
the Sequence Control Module by means of a flat ribbon cable. The bus provides
a unified means of interconnecting the two modules so that synchronization of
related functions may be accomplished. The wire assignments of the bus are
listed in Table 2.1 below:
Table 2-1 SYSTEM BUS WIRE ASSIGNMENTS

PIN NO.
DESCRIPTION
5
SERIAL DATA OUT
4
1,15
6
3,7,14
2,10-13,14
8
9
RESET
+5V
FEEDBACK DATA
SPARE (UNUSED)
LOGIC COMMON
FIELD CONTACT VOLTAGE SUPPLY
FIELD CONTACT VOLTAGE RETURN
The two data buses -- Serial Data and Feedback Data -- provide
continuous control and status information throughout the system. They are
logic-level buses. They switch back and forth from a logic low level (near 0V) to
a logic high level (near +5V). Each bus provides a repetitive sequence of data
bits, each of which is essentially a high or low level on the bus, for a specific
period of time. Therefore, an oscilloscope is required to monitor these buses.
2-6
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.4.1 SERIAL DATA BUS
The Serial Data (SERD) output from the Common Services Module is a bit
stream consisting of information to control flash rates, push-button switch status,
First-Out blocking bus, and synchronization of all microcomputers in the
AN-3196B Annunciator. Figure 2.1 gives a schematic representation of the
Serial Data bit stream and its relation to the Feedback line.
Figure 2-1 SERIAL DATA AND FEEDBACK BIT ASSIGNMENTS
The Serial Data Bus is positive logic. A high electrical level (+5V) is a
logic "On" or "1". A low electrical level (0V) is a logic "Off" or "0". Each bit lasts
for 1.6 milliseconds (ms). The entire series repeats every 26 ms.
The first bit is "Frame Sync" and is always "On" (1). The second bit is a
space which is always "Off" (0). Next are the push-button switch bits: Test,
Acknowledge, Silence, Reset, and First-Out Reset. If a push-button switch is
activated, its corresponding bit will be "On" (1). If the push-button switch is not
activated, its corresponding bit will be "Off" (0).
The next bit, after First-Out Reset, is First-Out Blocking. This is a retransmission to the Sequence Control Module's microcomputers of the First-Out
Blocking bit on the Feedback Data bus. This bit is turned on by one of the
microcomputers when an input which is designated as a First-Out input goes into
alarm. It will force all other points set for First-Out sequence into Subsequent
Alarm mode instead of First Alarm mode.
The last two bits are the two Flash Sync bits (Flash 1 and Flash 2). They
are each set by the DIP switch positions on the Common Services Module to be
either a fast or slow flash rate. After a point has gone into alarm, the sequence
selected for that point will put the corresponding LED under control of one of
2-7
these two flash rates. When the corresponding bit is "On", the LED will be on.
When the bit is "Off", the LED will be off.
2.4.2 FEEDBACK DATA BUS

The Feedback data bus is controlled by the Sequence Control Module. It
is "read" by the Common Services Module. The Feedback Data Bus is negative
logic. A low electrical level (0V) is a logic "On" or "1". A high electrical level
(+5V) is a logic "Off" or "0".
Any of the Sequence Control Module's microcomputers may force a bit
"On" (0V), but only "On". They may not force a bit "Off". This prevents a conflict
from some microcomputers trying to force a bit "Off" while others are trying to
force the bit "On". If the bit is not being forced "On", it will be held "Off" by a
biasing resistor.
The Feedback Data is synchronized with the Serial Data so that the timing
relationship will always be the same between the two. As with the Serial Data,
each bit lasts for 1.6 milliseconds (ms). The entire series repeats every 26 ms.
The first Feedback bit begins midway through the Test bit time frame of
the Serial Data. This is the Critical Audible bit. It goes "On" whenever a point
which has been designated as Critical goes into alarm. A Silence or
Acknowledge command will reset this bit.
The Alarm Audible bit operates the same way for inputs designated as
Non-Critical. The Ringback Audible bit is driven "On" upon a return-to-normal
conditions for Ringback sequences. This is reset by the Silence or Reset pushbutton switches. The audible bits control the audible devices through the
Common Services Module. The Common Services Module exercises some
intermediate control such as defeating the Alarm Audible while a Critical Audible
is in progress.
The audible bits are followed by the point-on-alarm bits for Non-Critical
and Critical points. These bits control the Reflash Relays on the Common
Services Module. Next is the First-Out blocking bit which is activated whenever
the first point of a First-Out group goes into alarm. This is retransmitted back to
the Sequence Control Modules on the Serial Data Bus.
The First-Out blocking bit is followed by a marker bit which is always "On".
Another pulse occurs toward the end of the cycle. This is a very short duration
timing reference pulse.
2-8
CONTROLS & OPERATION
SECTION 3 - CONTROLS & OPERATION

The AN-3196B Annunciator is microcomputer based. As such,
sequencing is controlled by the microcomputers in the various modules. Options
may be selected at the time of purchase or set up during installation or servicing.
This makes the Visual Annunciator extremely easy to apply to various operating
requirements.
3.1
PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES
The controls for the Visual Annunciator

consist of four push-button switches. These
are integrally mounted in the annunciator on
the annunciator faceplate, but may be
connected in parallel with additional remotelylocated push-button switches. The pads on
the annunciator are labeled with the first letter
of the switch label as indicated in Figure 3.1.
The push-button switches serve the following
functions (note possible exceptions under
"Optional Variations"):
Figure 3-1 ANNUNCIATOR

KEYPAD
T (TEST):
Press this push-button switch to momentarily simulate

abnormal process conditions on all alarm points. All
LED's will illuminate. All inputs configured as
First-Out alarms will illuminate with the First-Out
display. If some points have been designated
Critical, the Critical Audible will come on and remain
on following release of the Test push-button switch.
The Non-Critical Audible will be on only while the Test
push-button switch is depressed. If no Critical points
have been designated, the Non-Critical Audible will
come on and remain on after the Test push-button
switch is released.
S (SILENCE):
Pressing this push-button switch causes a sequence

transition which turns off all audible alarms. This
push-button switch does not affect the visual
indication or acknowledge the alarm.
A (ACKNOWLEDGE):
Press this push-button switch to acknowledge an

alarm. The displays will change indicating that the
operator is aware of the alarm condition.
3-1
R (RESET):
Press this push-button switch to return the display to

its normal state after the alarm conditions have been
corrected. Where Ringback sequences are present,
this push-button switch silences the Ringback Alarm.
It also resets First-Out status so that a point which
came on alarm in the First Alarm mode will change to
Subsequent Alarm mode. This allows a new alarm to
again be displayed in First Alarm mode.
3-2
3.2
STANDARD OPERATIONS
When the Visual Annunciator detects a change in an input signal, it will

indicate an alarm on the display. There are four possible forms of visual display
illumination: steady, slow flash, fast flash and intermittent flash. Each of these
will have a particular significance which is user definable according to the
sequence selection. The operator should become familiar with each form of
illumination and what it means.
In addition to the visual display, an audible alarm may sound. This
audible alarm could have one of two sounds depending on whether the input has
been designated as a Critical or Non-Critical Alarm. The operator should
become familiar with the difference in sound between the two types of alarms.
After the audible alarm has been silenced, the actuation of another input
will cause the audible alarm to sound again. In this way, the Annunciator can
continue to monitor the other inputs and warn of changing conditions, even if the
first condition is not yet corrected.
Upon hearing an audible alarm, check the Visual Annunciator to
determine the cause of the alarm. Silence the audible alarm and take whatever
steps necessary to begin corrective action. If a First-Out signal is indicated, note
which display is so indicated and which additional points, if any, are in
Subsequent Alarm mode. Press the Reset push-button switch to change the
First Alarm display to a Subsequent Alarm display. If additional inputs are
actuated, the first of these will again show the First Alarm display.
After corrective action has begun, press the Acknowledge push-button
switch to change the alarm to the Acknowledged mode. The display will change
but will still be illuminated until the condition returns to normal.
When the inputs have returned to normal, press the Reset push-button
switch (required for manual reset sequences). The Visual Display illumination
will go out. If any input is still in an alarm state when the Reset push-button
switch is pressed, its display illumination will not go out.
The annunciator can have a Critical Reflash and a Non-Critical Reflash
output. The Reflash output will be open if there are no points on alarm in the
system. The first point on alarm will cause the Reflash Relay to close.
After silencing or acknowledging the alarm, any subsequent alarm will
cause the Reflash Relay contact to open for approximately 0.5 seconds and then
close again. The system must be silenced or acknowledged after each alarm.
After all points have returned to normal, the relay contact will open and remain
open until another alarm occurs.
3-3
3.3
OPTIONAL VARIATIONS
There are several options which can be selected which will affect the
operating procedures for the Visual Annunciator. These options are part of the
ISA sequences which can be chosen from DIP switch assembly S4 on the
Sequence Control Module. (Refer to "Section 4 - Sequence Control Module"
and "Appendix F - Engineering Drawings" for further details on the specific
switches involved.) The following discussion indicates the changes to the
standard operations caused by these options:

This option prevents the Annunciator from recognizing the Acknowledge
push-button switch input unless it is preceded by actuation of the Silence
push-button switch. When this option is chosen, the only allowable sequence of
push-button switches is Silence, Acknowledge, and Reset (if used). A new alarm
will re-initialize the push-button switch sequence.
3.3.2 AUTO SILENCE

This option allows for the automatic silencing of any audible alarm. After
approximately 30 seconds, the audible alarms will cease. The LED Display is
not affected. A new input actuation will cause the audible alarms to sound again.
3.3.3 NON-FIRST-OUT OPTIONS

For those ISA Sequences which do not utilize a First-Out response,
Switch positions 9 through 11 of S1 through S3 on the Sequence Control Module
provide additional options. These options include defeating the audible
response for alarm and ringback, steady display instead of flashing, and
disabling the Acknowledge function. These options can be individually selected
for each group of four inputs. Refer to Section 4.1 for details on selecting these
options.
3-4
3.4
TEST PROCEDURES
Start the system test procedure by pressing the Test push-button switch.
An abnormal process condition is simultaneously simulated on all inputs. All
points will be displayed on alarm. In addition, all points having a First-Out
configuration will be displayed as First Alarms.
Press each of the other push-button switches to complete the test
sequence. Observe the visual displays and audible alarms to determine if there
are any LED or circuit failures.
Hold the Test push-button switch down to cause all audible alarms,
except Ringback, to sound. Only the highest priority alarm will continue to sound
when the Test push-button switch is released. The Ringback audible alarm, if
used, is activated by depression of the Acknowledge push-button switch
following the release of the Test push-button switch.
W A R N I N G
THE TEST SEQUENCE MUST BE MANUALLY COMPLETED
TO ALLOW VISUAL DISPLAY AND AUDIBLE ALARMS
FOR ACTUAL ALARMS. DEPENDING ON THE SEQUENCE
CONFIGURATION SELECTED, THE OPERATOR MUST
ACTUATE THE ACKNOWLEDGE AND/OR RESET
PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES.
During test sequence operations, Reflash Relay outputs will reflect only
actual alarm conditions. If an actual alarm occurs during the test sequence, the
display, audible alarm and First-Out order information is stored. As soon as the
test sequence is completed, the alarm condition will be initiated, even if the input
has returned to normal in the mean time. However, the Reflash signal for the
actual alarm will respond immediately, since it is not affected by the test
sequence operations.
3-5
SECTION 4 - SEQUENCE CONTROL MODULE
W A R N I N G
STATIC ELECTRICITY IS ALWAYS PRESENT ON YOUR
BODY AND CLOTHING. THEREFORE, YOU MUST
EXERCISE CARE WHEN HANDLING STATIC SENSITIVE
ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLIES AND DEVICES. IMPROPER
HANDLING CAN CAUSE AN EXCESSIVE
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) WHICH CAN
DAMAGE OR DESTROY INTEGRATED CIRCUITS,
SEMICONDUCTORS, OR OTHER STATIC SENSITIVE
DEVICES. FOR FURTHER DETAILS AND DISCUSSION
ON ESD AND APPROPRIATE HANDLING TECHNIQUES,
SEE THE APPENDIX ON ESD.
The inputs are provided to the Annunciator as the presence or absence of
a voltage at each input terminal. The Sequence Control Module acts as the
interface between the inputs and the balance of the Annunciator. It monitors the
inputs and causes a response corresponding to a specified sequence.
When the condition of a field contact changes from normal to alarm for
more than 30 milliseconds, the corresponding microcomputer recognizes it as a
valid contact status change. The microcomputer stores this information in
Sequence Control Memory. It then processes the data in accordance with the
selected ISA Sequence settings and other information supplied by the Common
Services Module.
The corresponding Annunciator LED (Light Emitting Diode) is activated.
Other related outputs may also be activated, depending on the options selected.
4-1
4.1
DIP SWITCHES
Figure 4-1 DIP SWITCH FUNCTIONS

4-2
The voltage provided to each input terminal may be normally present
(Contact Normally Closed), or normally absent (Contact Normally Open). In
addition, the signal being monitored by each input may be considered as Critical
or Non-Critical. (There can be one audible alarm for Non-Critical inputs and a
second, different sounding, audible alarm for Critical inputs.) The input may also
be designated as part of a First-Out grouping.
There is an 8-position DIP (Dual In-line Package) switch assembly (S4)
and three 12-position DIP switch assemblies (S1, S2, and S3) on the Sequence
Control Module. Switch assembly S4 controls the ISA Sequence for the all
twelve inputs of the annunciator. Switch positions 1 through 6 on S4 are used to
select any of the possible ISA Sequences as shown in the chart in Figure 4.1.
The attributes of each of these sequences is shown in "Appendix A - ISA
Sequence Charts".
Input type selections are controlled by switch assemblies S1 (inputs 1
through 4), S2 (inputs 5 through 8), and S3 (inputs 9 through 12). Each switch
assembly controls the choice of normally open or normally closed, Critical or
Non-Critical, and First-Out or Non-First-Out for the four related inputs. Refer to
"APPENDIX F - SCM SCHEMATIC & ASSEMBLY DRAWING" for switch
assembly locations. Refer to SECTION 6 - MAINTENANCE for removal of
modules from the chassis and switch access.
Switch positions 1 through 4 on S1 control the choice of normally open
(NO) or normally closed (NC) for inputs 1 through 4 respectively. Switch
positions 5 through 8 on S1 control the choice of Critical or Non-Critical for inputs
1 through 4 respectively. Switch positions 9 through 12 on S1 control the choice
of First-Out or Non-First-Out for inputs 1 through 4 respectively.
5 through 8 respectively. Switch positions 9 through 12 on S2 control the choice
of First-Out or Non-First-Out for inputs 5 through 8 respectively.
9 through 12 respectively. Switch positions 9 through 12 on S3 control the
choice of First-Out or Non-First-Out for inputs 9 through 12 respectively.
Determine the conditions required for each input and set the DIP switch
positions accordingly. For example, if the input contact for Point #1 will be
normally open (voltage absent), set DIP switch position 1 on S1 to "OFF". If it is
a Critical alarm, set DIP switch position 5 on S1 to "ON". If it is part of a FirstOut grouping, set DIP switch position 9 on S1 to "ON".
4-3
For those ISA Sequences which do not utilize a First-Out response (A, A4,
M, R, and R12), switch positions 9 through 11 on S1, S2, and S3 serve
secondary functions.
1.
Turn switch position 9 on S1, S2, or S3 to "ON" to

defeat the Audible Alarms and Ringback Alarms for
the four inputs controlled by that switch during both
alarm and test conditions. The Critical audible alarm
still functions normally.
2.

cause the LED's for the inputs controlled by that
switch to come on steady instead of flashing.
3.

disable the Acknowledge function for the inputs
controlled by that switch. The Acknowledge pushbutton switch will neither silence the audible alarm
nor affect the visual output until after the input returns
to normal. The Silence push-button switch will
silence the audible alarm.
Study "Appendix A - ISA Sequence Charts" to determine what output

and control functions will best suit your needs. Set switch positions 1 through 6
on S4 to obtain the desired ISA Sequence. Set switch positions 9 through 11 on
S1, S2, and S3 to configure each set of four inputs for any optional features
desired (Non-First-Out sequences only). Remember that the choices made on
the Common Services Module will also affect the outputs.
4-4
4.2
TECHNICAL DATA
The Sequence Control Module is built around three Motorola

microprocessors (Z1, Z2, and Z3). (Refer to "Appendix F - Engineering
Drawings".) These are Motorola Part Number MC68HC05C4P. Each
microprocessor serves an identical function for each of three groups of four
inputs to the annunciator. The balance of this discussion uses the first group
(with Z1) as an example. However, the other two groups are essentially identical.
Refer to the schematic diagrams for the corresponding component numbers in
these other groups.
Z1 is an 8-bit CMOS device with 31 bi-directional Input/Output (I/O) ports
in four groups (PA0 through PA7, PB0 through PB7, PC0 through PC7, and PD0
through PD5 and PD7), as well as several special-purpose ports. Z1 contains an
embedded program which assigns specific functions to each port and governs
the responses at the outputs to the combination of signals present at the inputs.
Z1 operates on +5 VDC and requires an average current of 2
milliamperes (2 mA) for internal processes. The +5 VDC is derived from 24V
system power. (Refer to Common Services Module Schematic and Assembly
Drawing in "Appendix F - Engineering Drawings" and to Section 5.2.)
Capacitor C1 absorbs electrical transients and is, by design, located close
to Z1. +5V is applied to pin Z1-40. The common connection (5V return) is pin
Z1-20.
Z1 has an internal clock oscillator. The frequency of the oscillator is
determined by the value of resistor R1. This value is selected to generate a
clock frequency of 1.2 MHZ. This wave form, when viewed on an oscilloscope at
pin Z1-38, has a period of 0.833 microseconds.
4-5
Z1 has an internal reset function which enables it to automatically clear all

registers and begin processing in an orderly fashion when power is applied. The
reset signal at pin Z1-1 enables an external reset to be applied. The line over
"RESET" on the schematic means that this signal is low (0V) in the active state
and high (+5V) in the passive state. A common reset signal is directed to the
Sequence Control Module from the Common Services Module.
The Serial Data signal from the Common Services Module is connected to
the Interrupt Request (IRQ) input port Z1-2. Feedback Data is provided at port
PB0 (Z1-12), used here as an output port. It is inverted by Z4 and "OR" gated
with Feedback Data from Z2 and Z3.
The input wiring is connected to rear terminals which are part of the TB1
connector. This (like TB2) is a terminal block on the outside of the unit, and a
printed circuit board edge connector on the inside. Thus it provides direct
connection from rear terminals TB1- 1-18 to SCM pins J4- 1-18 (refer to SCM
Schematic & Assembly Drawing in Appendix F).
TB1- 1-12 (J4- 1,2,4,5,7,8,10,11,13,14,16,17) are field contact inputs.
TB1- VA-VF (J4- 3,6,9,12,15,18) are either voltage supply or voltage return
terminals, or are unused. In the standard configuration of Field Contact Voltage
(FCV) supplied to dry field contacts, these terminals provide the FCV
connections (one FCV terminal for every two field contact pairs). In the
Isolated/AC input version (input voltage sourced from field) for one group, TB1VF (J4-18) is used as the common return connection, and TB1- VA-VE (J43,6,9,12,15) are unused. In the Isolated/AC input version for six groups, TB1VA-VF (J4-3,6,9,12,15,18) provide one return connection each for the six groups
of two inputs each.
The SCM is set up for any one of the above three configurations,
according to the installation or omission of four solder-in jumpers in each of six
jumper arrays (one for every two inputs). These are JPA1, JPB1, JPC1, and
JPD1 for the first two inputs, through JPA6, JPB6, JPC6, and JPD6 for the last
two inputs.
In the following discussion of input processing circuitry, the components
associated with Input 1 are used as an example. For standard input
configuration (dry contacts), JPB1 and JPC1 are installed; JPA1 and JPD1 are
omitted. FCV is brought onto the SCM through ribbon cable connection J1-8.
Capacitor C6, connected to chassis ground, provides suppression of electrical
transients which may be brought in from the field wiring. FCV, from the SCM, is
connected to FCV supply terminal TB1- VA (J4-3) via JPC1. FCV Return is
brought onto the SCM through J1-9, and routed to the input circuitry through
JPB1, providing the return path.
For Isolated/AC input configuration (one group), JPA1 is installed, while
the other jumpers are omitted. This provides a return path to common return
terminal TB1- VF (J4-18), which is connected to the field voltage return side.
4-6
For Isolated/AC input configuration (six groups), JPD1 is installed, while
the other jumpers are omitted. This provides a return path to return terminal
TB1- VA (J4-3), which is connected to the field voltage return side for the first
two inputs.
The input voltage applied to TB1-1 (J4-1) produces a current through
Resistors R1A and R1B, Diode Bridge BR1, and Resistors R1C and R1D.
Resistor R1E acts as a shunt to prevent any spurious potential voltage from
building up and triggering an alarm while the true input voltage is absent. With
Resistors R1A, R1B, R1C, and R1D in place, the correct level of current will be
generated from an input voltage of 24V. Removing R1D sets up the circuit for
48V, while removing both R1D and R1A sets up the circuit for 125V.
Diode Bridge BR1 rectifies the current, so that the circuit may be activated
by AC, as well as DC of either polarity. The current then passes through
Resistor R1F, and through the Light Emitting Diode (LED) input of Optical
Coupler OC1. OC1 provides electrical isolation between the input circuitry and
the logic circuitry. It also facilitates isolation between inputs in the six group
configuration.
Current passing through this LED causes light to be emitted from it, which
activates the photo transistor output. This in turn switches +5V through R1H,
producing a high, or logic `1' level at input port PC0 of Z1. R1H in conjunction
with Capacitor C1A also provides an RC time constant of approximately 30
milliseconds. This serves as a filter, suppressing transients which may be
entering from the field wiring. R1G serves as a pull-down resistor, to maintain a
low, or logic `0' level at PC0 while OC1 is turned off. Ports PC1-PC3 similarly
monitor the status of the other three inputs.
Ports PB2 through PB7, PC6, PC7, PD0 through PD5, and PD7 are used
as inputs to monitor DIP switch status. The DIP switches select program
sequences and operating modes (refer to notes and tables on
Schematic/Assembly drawing). When a switch is open, the input is held high by
a 100K pull-up resistor. When the switch is closed, the input is forced low, to
Common. Strobe signals STRB1 AND STRB2 from PC4 and PC5, in conjunction
with diodes CR1C-CR4C and CR1D-CR4D, multiplex Data from eight DIP
switches (S1-1 through S1-8) onto four input ports (PD0 through PD3).
Ports PA0 through PA3, used as outputs, control FET's Q1A through
Q4A, which drive LED's LED1A through LED 4A respectively. Series resistors
R1J through R4J limit the +5V derived LED current to approximately 2
milliamperes.
4-7
4.3
SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
There are several special applications possible with the Sequence Control
Module. These require modification to the module itself. Such modifications
should only be performed by knowledgeable personnel following proper
procedures for static protection.
4.3.1 CONTACT SHARING

At times it is necessary to share an input contact for the annunciator with
another device such as an event recorder. Due to internal connections in the
Sequence Control Module, it is possible to have voltages from the module feed
back to the other device. To prevent such an occurrence, it is necessary to
replace the bridge rectifiers with blocking diodes.
After removing bridge rectifiers BR1-12, install blocking diodes CR1A
through CR12A and return jumpers JR1-12 as shown on SCHEMATIC &
ASSEMBLY DRAWING IN APPENDIX F. The diodes are type 1N4004.
4.3.2 ALARM RESPONSE TIME

The Sequence Control Modules are factory set with an alarm response
time (pulse capture) of 30 milliseconds. This response time will prevent false
alarms due to transient electrical signals. This time can be decreased for a
faster alarm response time. Before doing this, however, you should consider the
possible consequences of false alarms.
In addition, it is possible to select optional response times of up to 30
seconds. Either type of change (faster or slower) to the response time requires
a modification to the Sequence Control Module. Refer to the tables on the
Schematic & Assembly Drawing in "Appendix F - Engineering Drawings" for
specific part numbers and part values and for diode polarities for each of the
possible options.
For a response time of from 70 milliseconds to 700 milliseconds, change
capacitors C1A through C12A to the appropriate valued capacitor. For a
response time greater than 1 second, change capacitors C1A through C12A to
the appropriate valued capacitor, change resistors R1H through R12H to 200K
ohm resistors, and install diodes CR1B through CR12B on the Sequence Control
Module. (See SCHEMATIC & ASSEMBLY DRAWING IN APPENDIX F for
location, type, and orientation of each component.)
4-8
4.3.3 HOST SYSTEM INPUTS
The inputs to the AN-3196B Annunciator can be driven from a host
system instead of from field contacts. To drive the inputs from open-collector
transistor outputs on the host system, remove JPB1-6 and JPC1-6, and install
JPA1-6. Connect +24V from TB2 to VF(RET) on TB1. Refer to SCHEMATIC &
ASSEMBLY DRAWING in "Appendix F - Engineering Drawings" for specific
part locations.
To drive the inputs from 5V logic level outputs (CMOS or TTL) on the host
system, remove R(1-12)A, R(1-12)B, and
C(1-12)A. Add a wire jumper from the J4(1-12) side feedthru pad of R(1-12)A to
the unused feed thru pad connected to OC(1-12)-4. Refer to SCHEMATIC &
ASSEMBLY DRAWING in "Appendix F - Engineering Drawings" for specific
part locations.
4-9
4-10
SECTION 5 - COMMON SERVICES MODULE

W A R N I N G
HANDLING CAN CAUSE AN EXCESSIVE ELECTROSTATIC
DISCHARGE (ESD) WHICH CAN DAMAGE OR DESTROY
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS, SEMICONDUCTORS, OR OTHER
STATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES. FOR FURTHER DETAILS
AND DISCUSSION ON ESD AND APPROPRIATE HANDLING
TECHNIQUES, SEE THE APPENDIX ON ESD.
The Common Services Module (CSM) receives information from the

Sequence Control Module and the system push-button switches. In response,
signals are sent back to the Sequence Control Module and to various output
devices.
When one of the inputs goes into alarm, the Sequence Control Module
sends information to the Common Services Module along the Feedback wire of
the System Bus. The microcomputer on the Common Services Module receives
this data and generates the appropriate control signals to activate the selected
options. The LED will flash in synchronization with the selected flash rate (1 or
2) on the Serial Data Bus. If the point on alarm is the first point in a First-Out
group, the Common Services Module will send a First-Out blocking bit back to
the Sequence Control Module along the Serial Data wire of the System Bus.
At the same time, the Common Services Module sends information to the
appropriate output relay. The type of alarm (or possibly no audible alarm) is
determined by the options chosen on the Common Services Module as well as
by the sequence information received from the Sequence Control Module.
5-1
5.1
OPTIONS
There are seven switch-selectable options for the Common Services

Module. An 8-switch, Dual In-line Package (DIP) switch assembly (S1) on the
Common Services Module controls the options. Refer to SCHEMATIC &
ASSEMBLY DRAWING in "Appendix X" for the location of switch assembly S1.
The model number of the Common Services Module is AN-3187. This
model number can have various suffixes which indicate selected options. The
option selections and the corresponding suffixes are shown in the table below.
The standard configuration -- no suffixes --is switch positions 1 to 7 "OFF".
Switch position 8 is not used. The suffix is used when a switch is chosen to be in
the non-standard ("ON") setting.
Table 5-1
SWITCH
1
2
3
COMMON SERVICES MODULE OPTIONS DIP SWITCH 1
ON
FLASH 1 SLOW
FLASH 2 FAST
AUDIBLE ALARM SILENCED
AUTOMATICALLY AFTER 30 SEC.
PUSH BUTTON INTERLOCK
AUDIBLE ALARM PULSED
RINGBACK AUDIBLE ALARM PULSED
RINGBACK AUDIBLE OUTPUT USED AS

COMMON CONTACT OUT
SPARE
OFF
FLASH 1 FAST
FLASH 2 SLOW
NO AUTOMATIC SILENCE
SUFFIX
F1
F2
AS
NO PUSH BUTTON
INTERLOCK
AUDIBLE ALARM
CONTINUOUS
RINGBACK AUDIBLE
ALARM CONTINUOUS
RINGBACK AUDIBLE
ALARM NORMAL
INT
We recommend that you keep a record of changes to the selections on

the Common Services Module. This will assist you if it becomes necessary to
replace the module.
The options available from the switch positions on S1 provide flexibility to
allow the user to customize and change the system to meet changing needs.
Any changes to these switch positions affect all of the inputs. You must also
consider the ISA Sequences chosen for the Annunciator when making changes
to these switches.
5.1.1 FLASH RATE

5-2
PA
PR
CC
When an input goes into an alarm state, the LED associated with that
input comes on as a flashing indicator. The rate of flash is determined by the
selected ISA Sequence and the setting of switch positions 1 and 2 on S1 on the
Common Services Module. Most ISA Sequences look at the position of switch
position 1 when the sequence refers to fast flash and at the position of switch
position 2 when the sequence refers to slow flash. (The exception to this is
Sequence F3A which does just the opposite.)
By changing the positions of switch positions 1 and 2 on S1, you can
reverse the normal flash rates as shown in the ISA Sequence Charts or you can
have both flash rates the same. (For Non-First-Out Sequences, the lamps can
be made to come on steady instead of flashing. Refer to "Section 4 Sequence Control Module".)
5.1.2 AUDIBLE AND RINGBACK ALARM CONTROL

Switch position 3 on S1 controls the Automatic Alarm Silencing option.
The Annunciator can be set to automatically silence the audible alarms after
approximately 30 seconds or it can be set to remain sounding until the Reset or
Acknowledge push-button switch is pressed. This switch affects both the
Audible Alarm and the Ringback Alarm.
Either the Audible Alarm or the Ringback Alarm can be pulsed instead of
being a steady signal. This is especially useful when the same audible device is
being used for both alarms and you wish to be able to differentiate the two types
of alarms. In that case, one of the two can be pulsed and the other left steady.
Switch positions 5 and 6 on S1 determine whether the alarms will be pulsed or
steady. (For Non-First-Out Sequences, the alarms can be caused to not sound
at all. Refer to "Section 4 - Sequence Control Module".)

Switch position 4 on S1 allows the option of preventing the Annunciator
from recognizing the Acknowledge push-button switch input unless it is preceded
by actuation of the Silence push-button switch. When switch position 4 is "ON",
the only allowable sequence of push-button switches is Silence, Acknowledge,
and Reset (if used). A new alarm will re-initialize the push-button switch
sequence.
5-3
5.1.4 OPTIONAL RELAY CONTACT USE

Switch position 7 on S1 allows you to use the Non-critical/ Ringback
Audible output as a Common Contact Follower instead. In this mode, the relay
(K2) will be activated whenever any point is in the alarm mode, regardless of
sequence status. Jumper JPC is removed and jumper JPD is installed. Since
the Ringback port is used for this function, the Ringback function is not
simultaneously available.
5-4
5.2
POWER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS
The Common Services Module has turret-type solder terminals, E1

through E11, which are used to make power connections. (Refer to
SCHEMATIC & ASSEMBLY DRAWING in "Appendix F -Engineering Drawings".
Earth ground is connected to the ground stud on the rear of the
enclosure. From there it is factory jumpered to Terminal Block TB2, and
connected internally to E9. From E9, it may be wired to transformer shield
connections on AC power options.
Prime supply power is connected to TB2-16 (L for AC, + for DC) and
TB2-17 (N for AC, - for DC). TB2-16 is connected internally to E3 through fuse
F2. TB2-17 is connected internally to E4. If prime supply power is 24 V, E3 and
E4 may be wired directly to E6 and E5 for operating power, and to E1 and E2 for
Field Contact Voltage.
The 24 V operating power is rectified by diode bridge CR7 through CR10
and protected by fuse F1. This supply then branches off through CR5 and CR6.
After CR5, it is filtered by C19. It then provides internal 24 VDC power to the
relays and to the 5V regulator Z2. Z2 supplies +5V logic power which is filtered
by C23. After CR6, the supply is filtered by C21 and C22 and provides 24 VDC
output to power the push-button switches and audible devices.
The Field Contact Voltage input from E1 and E2 is rectified by diode
bridge CR11 through CR14 and protected by fuse F3. This supply is then
filtered by C24 and provides excitation voltage to the field contacts being
monitored. R16 bleeds the charge off of C24 when power is removed. It also
prevents C24 from charging up to too high a value from voltage spikes.
If prime power is other than 24 V, an interposing power supply or
transformer device is required to generate 24 V for system power and optional
24 VDC Field Contact Voltage, and to generate 125 VDC for optional 125 VDC
Field Contact Voltage. Device input is connected to E3 and E4. Typical
connections are shown in "SCHEMATIC & ASSEMBLY DRAWING IN
APPENDIX F )
For AC prime supply power, two transformers are wired together. The
individual primaries are wired in parallel for 120 VAC and in series for 240 VAC.
With 240 VAC prime power, the primary series connections are made to E7 and
E8. For 48 or 125 VDC prime power, a model AN-3195B invertor-type power
supply is used.
Output connections from the optional transformers or power supplies are
made to E6 and E5 (24 V) and to E10 and E11 (48/125 V). For 24 VDC Field
Contact Voltage, E1 and E2 are wired to E6 and E5. For 48/125 VDC Field
Contact Voltage, E1 and E2 are wired to E10 and E11.
5-5
5.3
TECHNICAL DATA
The heart of the Common Services Module is a Motorola microprocessor,

Z1. This is Motorola part number MC68HC05C4P. It is an 8-bit CMOS device
with 31 bi-directional Input/Output (I/O) ports in four groups (PA0 through PA7,
PB0 through PB7, PC0 through PC7, and PD0 through PD5, and PD7) plus
several special purpose ports. Z1 contains an embedded program which
assigns specific functions to each port. It governs each output response to the
combination of signals present at all of the inputs.
Z1 runs on +5V and requires an average current of 2 milliamperes (Ma).
The +5V is regulated by Z2 from system 24V. Capacitor C23 acts as a filter. It
absorbs surges, noise spikes and other types of interference which would
otherwise cause voltage transients on the 5V supply. Capacitor C10 provides
additional noise suppression in the vicinity of the microcomputer. +5V (VDD) is
applied to Z1-40. The Common (5V return) connection is to Z1-20.
Z1 uses a crystal-controlled clock circuit. Its frequency is determined by
the value of crystal Y1. This value is selected to generate a clock frequency of
1.000 Megahertz (MHz). This wave form, monitored at Z1-38 and viewed on an
oscilloscope, would have a period of 1.000 microseconds.
Z1 has an internal Reset function which enables it to automatically clear
all registers and begin processing in an orderly fashion when power is applied.
The Reset signal at Z1-1 enables a manual external reset to be applied. The
line over "RESET" on the schematic means that this signal is low (0V) in the
active state and high (+5V) in the inactive state. The circuitry connected to this
pin is designed to force a Reset condition if the 24V supply falls below an
acceptable level.
Feedback Data signal (from the Sequence Control Module) is connected
to the Interrupt Request (IRQ) input port at Z1-2. A Pull-up resistor holds this
line high (+5V) when it is not being forced low externally. The push-button
switch wiring is connected to J1-1 through J1-3, and J1-5.
Functional outputs of the Common Services Module include the relay
control outputs provided at Ports PC1 through PC5 and the Serial Data output
(PC0). The relay control outputs are, respectively, Critical Audible, Non-Critical
(Alarm) Audible, Ringback Audible, Alarm Reflash, and Critical Reflash.
5-6
5.4
OUTPUT RELAYS
The Common Services Module controls various output relays. The

Annunciator System can have one or two audible alarms of three available
types: Critical, Non-Critical, and Ringback. Each of the audible alarms can have
a different device so that the type of alarm can be determined by the sound.
The standard module uses relay K1 for the Critical Audible Alarm and
relay K2 for the Non-Critical Audible Alarm. To use the first relay for the NonCritical Audible Alarm, remove jumper JPA and install jumper JPB. To use the
second relay for the Ringback Alarm, remove jumper JPC and install jumper
JPD. NOTE: IF JUMPER JPB IS INSTALLED, JUMPER JPC MUST BE
REMOVED. The second relay can also be used as a Common Contact Follower
(refer to Section 5.1.4).
The system can also have up to two Reflash Relays for driving remote
Annunciators. Relay K3 is used for Non-Critical Reflash and relay K4 is used for
Critical Reflash.
In place of either of the Reflash circuits, the system could be set up with a
Power Monitor output. This circuit would indicate if there is a loss of logic power.
Remove both jumpers JPI and JPJ to use relay K3 as the power monitor.
Remove both jumpers JPK and JPL to use relay K4 as the power monitor.
(Refer to Appendix F, D-1074-337, sheet 4 of 4, for the location of these jumpers
and resistors.)
5-7
5.5
CONFIGURATION CHANGES
The standard module configuration is to have the contacts for all relays
normally open. To change the configuration of relay outputs K1 and K2 from
normally open to normally closed, it is necessary to change some of the jumpers
on the Common Services Module. These changes are also affected by whether
the module has normally energized or normally de-energized relays. (Refer to
"SCHEMATIC & ASSEMBLY DRAWING IN APPENDIX F" for the location of
these jumpers.)
The standard factory configuration is to have all relays normally deenergized. To have normally energized relays, it is necessary to install
transistors Q9 through Q12 for relays K1 through K4 respectively, and to change
jumpers on the Common Services Module. Refer to the SCHEMATIC &
ASSEMBLY DRAWING in "Appendix F - Engineering Drawings" for part
locations. TABLE 5.2 shows which jumpers should be in place (IN) on the
module and which jumpers should be removed (OUT) for each of the possible
choices.
TABLE 5.2 COMMON SERVICES MODULE RELAY JUMPERS

Contact Condition
Relay
DeEnergized
energized
K1
K2
K3
K4
Input Jumper and

Transistor
Configuration
Output Jumper
Configuration
In
Jumper
Out
Jumper In
Jumper
Out
NO
NC
JPF & Q9
JPE
JPN
JPM
NC
NO
JPF & Q9
JPE
JPM
JPN
NO
NC
JPH &Q10
JPG
JPP
JPO
NC
NO
JPH &Q10
JPG
JPO
JPP
NO
NC
JPJ & Q11
JPI
Selected on TB2
NC
NO
JPJ &Q11
JPI
Selected on TB2
NO
NC
JPL &Q12
JPK
Selected on TB2
NC
NO
JPL &Q12
JPK
Selected on TB2
5-8
MAINTENANCE
SECTION 6 - MAINTENANCE
W A R N I N G
HANDLING CAN CAUSE AN EXCESSIVE ELECTROSTATIC
DISCHARGE (ESD) WHICH CAN DAMAGE OR DESTROY
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS, SEMICONDUCTORS, OR OTHER
STATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES. FOR FURTHER DETAILS
AND DISCUSSION ON ESD AND APPROPRIATE HANDLING
TECHNIQUES, SEE THE APPENDIX ON ESD.
The Annunciator should be tested at least once a month following the

Test Procedures in the "Section 3 - Controls & Operation". Identify any
problems which occur. Many problems can be associated with one of the
modules and can usually be resolved by replacing the module.
It is common to begin suspecting component failures or problems with a
module whenever there is a problem with an annunciator. However, annunciator
problems are frequently the result of other, simpler conditions.
Check all screw terminals on Terminal Blocks TB1 and TB2 to make sure
that all wires are in place and that all connections are tight. Make sure that the
prime power source is working correctly and that the supply voltage is reaching
the terminal blocks. Make sure that all wires to the field contacts have continuity
(are not broken or short circuited).
Check all terminal connections every six months. If there is any amount
of vibration in the vicinity of the annunciator, they should be checked more
frequently.
To remove both the Sequence Control Module and the Common Services
Module, release the captive thumbscrew at the bottom of the front panel. If your
unit has the Modbus Serial Data Option, disconnect the 9-pin data cable on the
rear of the annunciator. Alternately pull at the top and bottom of the bezel to
loosen the assembly from the rear edge-grip connectors and slide the entire
assembly forward. To replace the modules, make sure the Sequence Control
6-1
Module (left side as viewed facing the enclosure) is aligned with the slides in the
enclosure. Slide the unit straight into the enclosure. Both cards must line up
with their respective edge connectors. Press the modules firmly into the edge
connectors and tighten the screw. Replace the Modbus connector on the rear, if
equipped.
CAUTION
The AN-3196B plug-in assembly is NOT
interchangeable with the earlier model AN-3196
plug-in module assemblies. Therefore, do not
attempt to service or repair any AN-3196 type
installation by exchanging plug in module
assemblies unless the model number suffixes
match each other and match the suffix on the
housing serial number tag. Even if the suffixes
match extra caution must be used to verify that
the assemblies are identical in the areas of
prime power, FCV and dip-switch settings.
6-2
MAINTENANCE
6.1
TROUBLE SHOOTING
The following chart lists some specific problems which may be

encountered along with the probable solution.
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE SOLUTION
LED's turn on when input is on alarm, but

no flash and no audible alarm.
There is no serial data to the Sequence

Control Module. The Common Services
Module may not be properly seated in the
cell or may be malfunctioning or the
ribbon cable may not be properly
connected.
LED's flash properly, but no audible

alarm or Reflash output on Test or Alarm.
The Common Services Module is not

responding to Feedback Data. Replace
the Common Services Module.
Audible alarm works on test, but not on

real alarm. Critical audible alarm and
Reflash outputs may be continuously
activated.
The Sequence Control Module is holding

the Feedback Bus in abnormal state.
Replace the Sequence Control Module.
One or more push-button switches do not

operate properly.
Verify that the push-button switches are

normally open by measuring +24 VDC
across the push-button switch input
terminals. If the push-button switch is
open, use a clip lead to simulate a pushbutton switch at the annunciator pushbutton switch terminal to determine if the
problem is in the Common Services
Module or in the push-button switch or
push-button switch wiring.
NOTE: MANY START-UP PROBLEMS
CAN BE TRACED TO IMPROPER
WIRING OF FIELD MOUNTED PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES. DOUBLE CHECK
ALL CONNECTIONS.
Test operates properly, but no field inputs

operate.
Field Contact Voltage is not getting to the

field contacts.
Check Field Contact
Voltage power and distribution wiring.
6-3
Nothing works.
Check all power supply voltages. Check

power distribution wiring.
6-4
ORDER CODE
Labeling:
Black lamacoid legend plates with white lettering for
each point, plus one for unit identification (see
engraving information)
AN-3196B Specifications
Input Signals:
NO or NC contacts, switch selectable
Output:
A. LED indicator per point
B. Audible and Reflash Output Relay
Contacts rated at:
5A @ 24 VDC/120 VAC, 3 A @ 240 VAC, or
0.1 A @125 VDC
C. Optional remote mounted audible devices
D. 24 VDC @ 0.15 A available for driving audible
device
Isolation: 1700 VDC

Surge Withstand Capability (SWC):
Test conforms to ANSI C37.90.1-1989 (Oscillatory)
and IEC 801-4 Level 2.
Weight: 9lbs. (4.09 kg) Panel Mount 53 lbs.
(24 kg) in NEMA Enclosure
Ambient Temperature Range:

32EF to 140EF (0EC to 60EC)
Legend Plate
Engraving Sizes
Relative Humidity:
0% to 95% (non-condensing)
Letter Size
Power Source and Requirements:

A. 120 VAC: 120 VAC 10%, 50-60Hz at
100 mA maximum
B. 240 VAC: 240 VAC 10%, 50-60Hz at 50 mA
maximum
C. 125 VDC: 105 VDC to 140 VDC at 100 mA
maximum
D. 24 VDC: 20 VDC to 28 VDC at 400 mA
maximum
E. 48 VDC: 44 VDC to 52 VDC at 250 mA
maximum
Terminals:
Screw Barrier type
12 AWG wire maximum
Controls:
Internal Test, Acknowledge, Silence and Reset
pushbuttons
Field Contact Voltage:
A. Isolated, internally supplied 125 VDC or 24
VDC for 48 VDC, 125 VDC, 120/240 VAC
Prime Power
B. Non-isolated, internally supplied 24 VDC for
24 VDC prime power or 48 VDC prime power
C. Isolated externally supplied 125 VDC, 48 VDC,
24 VDC, 120 VAC
Enclosures:
General purpose standard panel or surface mount
enclosures. Optional NEMA 4/12 wall mount
enclosures.
B-1
1/8"(3.2mm)
5/32"
3/16
1/4
Other sizes available upon
request
Maximum #
of Lines
Maximum # of
Characters
Per Line
3
3
2
1
22
18
14
11
AN-3196B Ordering
The AN-3196B is supplied in the following versions, stocked and immediately available from the RiS
factory. Individual model numbers are defined by the following fill-in items:
AN-3196B -
1
Sequence
2
3
4
Prime
Field Contact
Audible
Power
Voltage
Options
1. Sequence
A
F2M-1
Optional:
Auto Reset
Manual Reset First-Out with no
subsequent alarm flashing and
silence push-button.
A4, R, M, R12, FFAM2, F3A, F1A,
F2A
2. Prime Power
F
24 VDC
E
48 VDC
C
125 VDC
B
120 VAC
A
240 VAC
5
Reflash
6
Enclosure
7
Engraving
4. Audible Options
*SNS Sonalert Steady Tone
Remote Mount
*SNP Sonalert Pulsing
Remote Mount
HAC 120 VAC Remote Horn
HDC
24 VDC Remote Horn
HDH 125 VDC Remote Horn
NR
Not Required
*Not integrally mounted in NEMA 4/12
5. Reflash Option
AR
MR
Automatic Reflash
Manual Reflash (Standard)
3. Field Contact Voltage

6. Enclosure
Internally Supplied:
D
125 VDC
X
24 VDC
T
48 VDC
PM
SM
4WM
12WM
Customer Supplied:
D/C
125 VDC Isolated
X/C
24 VDC Isolated
T/C
48 VDC Isolated
Y/C
120 VAC Isolated
Panel Mount
Surface Mount
Wall mount, NEMA 4
Wall mount, NEMA 12
7. Engraving Point Legends

Y
N
B-2
Engraving provided by Rochester

(Legends supplied by user)
Engraving not required with order
(Blank tags provided)
SPARE PARTS
SPARE PARTS
The MicroLarm AN-3196B Visual Annunciator is frequently used to monitor critical
operations. We strongly recommend that you stock sufficient spare parts to prevent
interruption to this monitoring function. The following lists give minimum
recommended quantities.
N O T I C E
ALWAYS PROVIDE THE ANNUNCIATOR SERIAL NUMBER
WHEN ORDERING SPARE PARTS TO MAKE SURE THAT
YOU RECEIVE THE CORRECT PARTS.
DESCRIPTION
RIS PART #
QUAN
FOR PRIME
POWER
1/10 Amp Fuse (slo-blo)
0620-310
All
1/4 Amp Fuse (slo-blo)
0620-451
All
Amp Fuse (slo-blo)
0620-450
24VDC, 48VDC
Amp Fuse
0620-451
125VDC, 120VAC
Lamacoid Tags
1036-106
As Req'd.
All
Microcomputer IC (SCM)
1070-412
All
Microcomputer IC (CSM)
1070-416
All
NOTE:
If the Annunciating System is being used in critical Applications, it

is strongly recommended that you maintain one complete unit as a
spare.
C-1
APPENDIX A
ISA SEQUENCE CHARTS
ISA SEQUENCE CHARTS

The Annunciator Sequence Designations and associated diagrams in this appendix
are published in ISA Standard S18:1 Annunciator Sequence and Specification. They
are presented here to aid in defining the operational characteristics of particular
annunciator sequences.
Each of these charts presents a particular sequence as designated by the associated
sequence letter. The charts show the conditions of four process elements: Process,
State, Visual and Audible.
PROCESS: The Process (P), or status of field contacts, may be either Abnormal or
Normal.
STATE:
The State (S) of annunciation may be Normal Alarm, First Alarm or a

group Subsequent Alarm of the group First Silenced, Silenced,
Acknowledged or Ringback.
VISUAL:
The Visual (V) aspects of the annunciation may be On, Off, Flashing,
Slow Flashing, Fast Flashing, or Intermittent Fast Flashing.
AUDIBLE:
The status of the Audible (A) condition may be Audible (on) or Silent
(off). There are also additional Audible conditions defined for Alarm
Audible (AA) and Ringback Audible (RA).
In the Annunciator Sequence Charts, there is a block for each possible annunciator
state. The annunciator may change from one State to another if the Event indicated
by the arrow occurs. The events are either a Process change or operator action on a
push button such as Silence, Acknowledge or Reset.
P
S
V
A
P ro c e ss
S e q u e n ce
V isu a l
A u d ib le
LEG EN D
LAM P OFF
LA M P
F L A S H IN G
LAMP ON
HORN OFF
HORN ON
Option
Function
Description
Silence Pushbutton
A separate pushbutton to allow silencing the

audible device without affecting visual
displays.
Interlock Pushbutton
An interlock requiring operation of the

pushbuttons in sequence of SILENCE,
ACKNOWLEDGE, RESET.
No Lock-In
The lock-in feature is deleted. Momentary

alarms return to the normal sequence state
without operation of the ACKNOWLEDGE
pushbutton.
No Audible
The audible device is deleted.
Automatic Silence
A time delay device to silence the alarm

audible device after a set time of 30 seconds,
without affecting the visual displays.
Common Ringback
A common audible device to call attention to

both the alarm and ringback sequence
states.
10
No Ringback Audible
The ringback audible device is deleted.
11
Common Ringback
Visual
The same type flashing indication is used to

indicate both the alarm and ringback
sequence states.
12
Automatic Momentary
Ringback
Ringback sequence momentary alarms go to

the ringback state without operation of the
ACKNOWLEDGE pushbutton.
APPENDIX B
ORDER CODE DEFINITION
and SPECIFICATIONS
APPENDIX C
SPARE PARTS
APPENDIX D
D.1 INTRODUCTION
We are all familiar with static electricity. It is the charge we build up when we walk
across a rug. It is possible to build up as much as a 25,000 volt charge on your body
or clothing. When this static electricity discharges from your body to a conductive
object or surface, such as may occur when touching a computer keyboard, the
discharge is referred to as an Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).
If this discharge occurs over a very short period of time, as it typically does,
exceptionally high currents, and therefore power (wafts) can be produced. For
example, if there is a 200 millijoule charge on your body and it discharges in 100
microseconds, a 2000 watt surge is produced. A 2000 waft surge is more than
sufficient to destroy most semiconductor junctions in transistors, diodes, or integrated
circuits.
In many cases, a device subjected to an Electrostatic Discharge is only damaged
initially. It does not actually fail until sometime later. That is, it is a time delayed failure.
As a result, it is not unusual for there to be repeated failure of the same device. That
is, the device can be mishandled during installation, leading to a time delayed failure.
A few weeks or months later the device again fails and is replaced, and potentially
again mishandled. This process can then repeat.
The time delay until failure can be a few days or several months, depending on how
severely the part was damaged by the Electrostatic Discharge. Studies have been
made on the failure mechanism of electronic devices. These studies have shown that
Electrostatic Discharge was the root cause of device failures in as many as 50% of the
cases.
Because you do not see or feel an Electrostatic Discharge, does not mean that one
has not occurred. For most people, a discharge has to be in the range of 2000 to 3000
volts before they even become aware of it. Voltage levels much lower than this can
destroy most electronic devices.
D.2 PREVENTION TECHNIQUES

There are two basic approaches to preventing electronic devices and assemblies from
being damaged by Electrostatic Discharge. The first is to prevent any buildup of static
electricity. This eliminates the source of Electrostatic Discharge.
The second approach is to prevent an Electrostatic Discharge from occurring. Any
static charge present is bled off in a safe, controlled manner.
There are a number of steps that can be taken to prevent the buildup of static
electricity. They all involve the basic principle that a grounded, conductive surface will
not build up a static charge. Any charge present will bleed off to ground.
Since static charges are normally limited to very small amounts of energy, typically
less than a joule, a surface does not have to be highly conductive to effectively bleed
off any charge. For instance, in electronic factories, service centers, and other
facilities which regularly handle electronic devices and assemblies, static build up is
prevented by such techniques as using conductive paint on floors, benches and
cabinets. Conductive carpeting, bins made of conductive plastic, conductive mats, and
grounded metal work benches are also used.
In semiconductor factories and similar areas where the potential for Electrostatic
Discharge damage to devices is extremely high, employees are issued conductive
clothing. When personnel actually handle assemblies and devices, they wear
conductive ground straps on their wrist and/or heel to ground themselves. The key
factor is to prevent any static electricity from building up. If there is no static, there will
be no Electrostatic Discharge.
In a field situation, electronic assemblies and electronic devices ideally should be
handled only at appropriate repair stations, such as a grounded metal bench, with a
grounded conductive floor mat. Therefore, if a printed circuit board or some other
electronic assembly needs to be repaired, it should ideally be removed from a
machine or instrument and taken to a repair station to be worked on.
The device should be transported in a conductive bag or bin and; when making
repairs or handling parts or assemblies, service personnel should wear a wrist and/or
heel ground strap. Spare parts and assemblies should be stored in conductive bags or
conductive bins and should only be handled when at an appropriate repair station.
Even taking care to prevent the buildup of static electricity does not assure that there
never will be a dangerous static charge present. If a static charge is present, the goal
is to prevent a large, rapid discharge from occurring or, if it does occur, to make it
occur where it will do no damage. The ideal way to prevent a destructive discharge
from occurring is to discharge any static present through a large impedance.
Repair personnel should ground themselves through a wrist and/or heel strap. Their
tools should be grounded through a conductive mat before touching any potentially
static sensitive assemblies or devices. Conductive mats and heel and wrist straps
have megohms of impedance, and therefore any charge present is bled off in a
controlled manner through this large impedance.
When this is not possible or practical, personnel can minimize the probability of doing
damage to electronic parts by first touching a water pipe, the chassis or enclosure of
an electronic assembly, or some other ground point. However, this approach will likely
result in the charge being rapidly discharged. This can produce a high energy
magnetic pulse which, in turn, could produce potentially damaging eddy currents in
printed circuit board traces.
It is always best to discharge any charge present through a large impedance. When
handling printed circuit boards or other electronic assemblies, personnel should try to
avoid touching circuit traces or devices with their bare hands or fingers. That is, hold
the board by its edges. If at all possible, a board should be removed for repair and be
put into a conductive bag or bin and then taken to an appropriate repair station to be
worked on.
Do not forget that tools can also carry a static charge. Use only grounded soldering
irons. Touch tools to ground before touching an electronic assembly or device. Store
tools in a conductive tool carrier (metal or conductive plastic), and then ground the
carrier before using any tools.
D.3
SUMMARY OF ESD GUIDELINES
1. Prevent static buildup by using conductive paints, carpeting, mats and metal
surfaces. Use appropriate grounding techniques, including wrist and heel straps for
personnel.
2. Store or transport electronic devices, parts or assemblies in conductive bags or
bins.
3. Only perform repairs at an appropriate repair station.
4. When handling electronic assemblies or printed circuit boards, try to avoid
touching traces on the printed circuit board or static sensitive devices.
5. Remember that tools are a source of static electricity. Only use grounded soldering
irons. Ground tools before using them to bleed off any charge buildup.
6. Discharge yourself before touching or handling any electronic assembly or device.
This can be done by touching a good ground point before touching any electronic
devices or assemblies. Preferably, discharge any static charge through a high
impedance such as a wrist or heel strap.
APPENDIX E
REPAIRS AND WARRANTY
APPENDIX F - ENGINEERING DRAWINGS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DRAWING
DESCRIPTION
A-1052-675
EQUIVALENT COMPONENT REFERENCE GUIDE
C-1072-210
AN-3196B POWER SUPPLY SCHEMATIC / ASSEMBLY
D-1074-342
AN-3188B SEQUENCE MODULE SCHEMATIC
D-1074-337
AN-3187B CSM SCHEMATIC / ASSEMBLY
D-1072-029
AN-3196B ASSEMBLY DRAWING
D-1072-030
AN-3196B CUSTOMER ACCESORIES DRAWING
D-1072-216
AN-3196B PANEL-MOUNT MOUNTING AND OUTLINE
D-1047-623
AN-3196B SURFACE-MOUNT MOUNTING AND OUTLINE
-ODEL
%LECTROMECHANICAL
$ESCRIPTION
4HESE lGURE !# OR $# HOUR METERS WITH RUNNING INDICATORS OFFER CRISP DISTINCTIVE STYLING FOR MANY PANEL APPLICATIONS !VAILABLE IN SQUARE AND ROUND
BEZEL mUSH MOUNT OR THREE HOLE ROUND PANEL MOUNT %ACH IS LIGHT WEIGHT LOW POWER AND CARRY 5, #3! AND #% APPROVALS
&EATURES
/PTIONS
s
s
s
s
s
s
lGURE
6ARIOUS VOLTAGE INPUTS
$ISTINCTIVE STYLING
4ERMINATIONS
$IN RAIL
6OLTAGES
3PECIlCATIONS
&IGURES
2ESET
6OLTAGES
0OWER
4ERMINATIONS
lGURES HIGH ;MM= HOURS

.ON RESET
OR 6!# OR (Z 6$#
WATTS !# WATT MAXIMUM $#
;MM= SPADE TERMINALS WITH REMOVABLE SCREWS
OR ;MM= WIRE LEADS
-ODELS
$ESCRIPTION

6!#(Z $IA &LUSH MOUNT

6!#(Z $IA &LUSH MOUNT
6!#(Z $IA HOLE ROUND
6!#(Z 3Q &LUSH MOUNT
SCREW TERMINATION
SCREW TERMINATION
SCREW TERMINATION
SCREW TERMINATION
SCREW TERMINATION
SCREW TERMINATION
WIRE LEADS
SCREW TERMINATION
-OUNTING
&RONT 0ANEL
4EMP 2ANGE
!PPROVALS
0ANEL MOUNTING HARDWARE INCLUDED

)0
& TO & ; # TO #=
5, 2ECOGNIZED AND #3! #ERTIlED !# ONLY
#% #OMPLIANT
OZ ;G=
7EIGHT
-ODELS
$ESCRIPTION

6!#(Z 3Q

6!#(Z 3Q
6!#(Z 3Q
6!#(Z 3Q
6!#(Z 3Q

6$#
&LUSH MOUNT
&LUSH MOUNT
&LUSH MOUNT
&LUSH MOUNT
&LUSH MOUNT
SCREW TERMINATION
SCREW TERMINATION
SCREW TERMINATION
SCREW TERMINATION
SCREW TERMINATION
$IA HOLE ROUND SCREW TERMINATION
)TEMS IN BOLD ARE NORMALLY IN FACTORY STOCK
$IMENSIONS
$IA &LUSH
(OLE 2OUND
OR 3QUARE

0ANEL CUTOUT ;= $IA OR ;=
!PPLICATIONS
-EDICAL EQUIPMENT
0ANEL CUTOUT ;= $IA OR ;= 3Q

3CREWS PROVIDED X ;=
"OLT HOLE CIRCLE ;=
4EST EQUIPMENT
WWWREDINGTONCOUNTERSCOM
0ANEL CUTOUT ;= $IA OR ;= 3Q

FOR 3Q USE ;= 3Q CUTOUT ONLY
/FlCE EQUIPMENT
Accessories
Current Transformers with Terminals
Reduces High AC Current Signal to 5 Amp AC Signal

Six AC Current Input Ranges Available
Accuracy 1.0% (2.0% for 100 Amp)
Screw Terminals for Easy Connection
Simpsons terminal-type current transformers can be used
to monitor AC Current when the current level is too high for
the panel meter to be connected directly in series, usually
above 75 Amperes. The current transformer reduces the
primary input current to a secondary current of 5 Amperes,
which can be monitored by the panel meter.
Typical Application Wiring

AC AMMETER
5 AMP INPUT
The current transformer is equipped with terminals to permit easy connection to either an analog or a digital panel
meter. These terminals are # 8-32 brass studs and come
with flat washer, lockwasher, and regular nut (Leads are not
provided).
SIMPSON
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
#37023 300:5
XI
HI
A typical wiring setup is shown at right, depicting a terminal-type current transformer installed with a panel meter to
monitor current.
VAC POWER
SOURCE
@300AMPS
300AMPS
TO LOAD
Dimensions, Specifications and Ordering Information

Specifications
Dimension Drawing
3.53"
(89.7mm)
3.00"
(76.2mm)
ACCURACY:
2.0% (100 Amp)
1.0% (100-1000 Amp)
INSULATION CLASS:
0.6kV BIL
10kV full wave
FREQUENCY:
50-400Hz
WEIGHT:
1.0lb (453.59g)
4 OPEN SLOTS
0.21" X 0.31"(5.3mm X 7.9mm)
0.44" (11.2mm)
XI
HI
3.78"
(96.0mm)
1.09"
(27.7mm)
1.77"
(45.0mm)
1.83"
(46.5mm)
2.75"
(69.9mm)
1.56" DIA
(39.6mm)
2.15"
(54.6mm)
Ordering Information
Range
100:5
150:5
200:5
300:5
500:5
1000:5
Burden
VA@60Hz
2.0
5.0
5.0
12.5
20.0
25.0
Catalog Number
37020
37021
37022
37023
37024
37025
Uninterruptible Power Systems
SDU Series, DIN Rail AC UPS

The SDU DIN Rail UPS combines an industry leading
compact design with a wide operation temperature range
and unique installation options. The SDU series provides
economical protection from damaging impulses and power
interruptions. These units include easy to wire screw
terminations for critical devices needing battery back up
such as computer based control systems.
Applications
Programmable Logic Controllers
Factory Automation
Robotics
Conveying Equipment
Computer-based Control Systems
Certifications and Compliances

120V Models
UL Recognized Component, UPS Equipment

UL 60950
E137632
- UL
60950-1/CSA
C22.2 No. 60950-1
CUL/CSA-C22.2
No. 234-M90
- Suitable for UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 107.1 Ind. Control
Equipment Applications with no derating
- Overvoltage Cat III, Pollution Degree III
Features
Lightweight, compact industrial design
Wide operation temperature range (00C to 500C)
Cold start capability
Phone/dataline surge protection
Software and cable included for easy installation
Simulated sinewave output
RS232 communication port
USB communication port (optional)
Form C dry contact relay (optional)
Panel/wall mounting brackets (optional)
Remote turn-on and shut-off capabilities
Two year limited warranty
230V Models

- EN62040-1-1
Related Products
Portable MCR Power Conditioners
STV Surge Protective Devices
SDN DIN Rail Power Supplies
STFV Plus Active Tracking Filters
Selection Table
Capacity
(VA/W)
Catalog
Number
500/300
SDU 500
850/510
SDU 850
500/300
SDU 500-5
850/510
SDU 850-5
Volts, Frequency In/Out

120 Vac, 50/60 Hz
230 Vac, 50/60 Hz
E179213
Typical Back-up Time

(minutes) *
Input/Output
Connections
4
2
4
Approx. Ship
Weight - lbs (kg)
10.7 (4.70)
IP20 touch proof, screw terminals.

Wire range: 10 ~ 24 AWG.
11.4 (5.00)
11.5 (5.20)
11.9 (5.40)
* At full load.
SDU Accessories
Catalog
Number
64
Description
Approx. Ship
Weight - lbs (kg)
RELAYCARD-SDU
Dry contact I/O relay box, IP20 touch proof screw terminals, wire size range 12~22 AWG (IEC 2.5mm);
N.O./N.C. form "C" contact. Relay contact signal for "On Battery", "Low Battery" and "UPS Shutdown".
1.0 (0.45)
UPSMON-USB
RS232 to USB adapter cable
1.0 (0.45)
SDU-PMBRK
Mounting brackets to secure UPS to wall, back of panel or enclosure.
1.0 (0.45)
Contact Technical Services at (800) 377-4384 with any questions.

Visit our website at www.solahd.com.
Uninterruptible Power Systems

Specifications
Catalog Number
Capacity (VA/Watts)
SDU 500
SDU 850
SDU 500-5
SDU 850-5
500/300
850/510
500/300
850/510
0.6
Load Power Factor

Dimensions - inches (mm)
4.88 x 11.1 x 4.55 (124.0 x 281.0 x 116.0)
Unit (H x W x D) - in. (mm)

Weight - lbs (kg)
10.7 (4.70)
11.4 (5.00)
11.5 (5.20)
11.9 (5.40)
Input Parameters
120 V (+10%, -20%)
Voltage
230 V (+/- 20%)
50 +/- 5 Hz or 60 Hz +/- 6 Hz (auto sensing)
Frequency
Output AC Parameters
Step sinewave
Voltage (Battery Mode)
+/- 5%
50 or 60 Hz
Frequency (On Battery)

Overload Protection
+/- 0.3 Hz
UPS automatic shutdown if overload exceeds 105% of nominal at 20 seconds, 120% at 10 seconds, 130% at 3 seconds
UPS output cut off immediately
Short Circuit
Battery Parameters
Battery Type
Sealed, non-spillable, maintenance-free lead acid batteries
Transfer Time
4 - 6 ms typical
Back-up Time * (minutes)

Recharge Time
4.5/18
2.5/10
4.5/18
2.5/10
8 hours to 90% capacity after full discharge

Environmental
0C to 50C
-15C to 60C
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
1% to 95%, non-condensing
Ambient Operation
1-95% humidity non-condensing, 0-50C up to 5,000 ft. (1500m)
Audible Noise
< 40dBA (1 meter from surface)

Standards
EMC
Elevation
Shock & Vibration
Mounting
FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class A; EMC: EN50091-2, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3,

IEC60801-2, IEC60801-3, IEC60801-4, IEC61000-2-2
5000 ft. without derating
According to the International Safe Transit Association standard ISTA 2A.
To be mounted on DIN TS35/7.5 or TS35/15 rail system. Chassis mounting permissible via optional brackets.
Unit handles normal shock and vibration of industrial use and transportation without coming off rail.
* At full load/half load.
Contact Technical Services at (800) 377-4384 with any questions.

Visit our website at www.solahd.com.
65
Power Supplies
SDN-P DIN Rail Series

The SDN DIN Rail power supplies provide industry leading
performance. Sag Immunity, transient suppression and noise
tolerant, the SDN series ensures compatibility in demanding applications. Power factor correction to meet European
directives, hazardous location approvals and optional
redundant accessories allow the SDN series to be used in
a wide variety of applications. Wide operation temperature
range, high tolerance to shock and vibration and reliable
design make the SDN series the preferred choice of
users everywhere.
Features
UL 508 Listed
IND. CONT. EQ.
E61379
Power Factor Correction (per EN61000-3-2)

Auto Select 115/230 Vac, 50/60 Hz Input
UL 60950
E137632
CUL/CSA-C22.2
No. 234-M90
Single Phase models meet SEMI F47 Sag Immunity

Class 1, Zone 2 Hazardous Locations
ATEX approval on 2.5 through 10A, 24 Vdc
Single Phase Models
ATEX approval pending on 12 Vdc and 48 Vdc
single phase models
Improved metal mounting clip
DC OK Signal
Adjustable Voltage
SDN10-24-100P New Compact width (3.26)
Parallel Capability standard on all units
Industrial grade design
-10C to 60C operation without derating.
Indefinite short circuit, overvoltage and
overtemperature protection.
Powers high inrush loads without shutdown
or foldback
Rugged metal case and DIN connector
Related Products
SDP Series
SFL Series
SCP Series
SCL Series
SDU UPS
Applications
Industrial/Machine Control
Process Control
Conveying Equipment
Material Handling
Vending Machines
Packaging Equipment
DeviceNetTM
SDN2.5-24-100P and SDN4-24-100LP meet

NEC Class 2
Amusement Park Equipment
Narrow width on rail for space critical applications
Semiconductor Fabrication Equipment
User-friendly front panel

Large, rugged, accessible, multiple connection
screw terminations
Easy installation
Broad range of product to fit almost any
application 2.5 A through 40 A, 24 Vdc
Single and three phase inputs available
12 Vdc and 48 Vdc single phase models available
Highly efficient >90% switching technology
High MTBF and reliability
RoHS compliant
106
Accessories
Chassis Mount Bracket (SDN-PMBRK2)
EMC and
Low Volt.
Directive
Power Supplies

SDNTM Specifications (Single Phase), 24 Vdc Output

Description
DEMK0 06
ATEX 05 21715U
Catalog Number
SDN 2.5-24-100P
SDN 4-24-100LP
SDN 5-24-100P
SDN 10-24-100P
SDN 20-24-100P
Input
115/230 Vac auto select
Nominal Voltage
85-132/176-264 Vac
-AC Range
-DC Range1
90-375 Vdc
210-375 Vdc
47 - 63 Hz
-Frequency
Nominal Current2
-Inrush current max.
Efficiency (Losses3)
N/A
1.3 A. / 0.7 A
2.1 A / 1.0 A
typ. < 25 A
> 87.5% typ. (8.6 W)
2.2 A / 1.0 A
5 A / 2 A typ.
typ. < 20 A
> 88% typ. (13.1 W)
9 A/ 3.9 A
typ. < 40 A
> 88% typ. (16.4 W)
> 88% typ. (32.7 W)
> 90% typ. (48 W)
Units Fulfill EN61000-3-2
Power Factor Correction
Output
Nominal Voltage
24 Vdc
(22.5 - 28.5 Vdc adj.)
-Tolerance
24 Vdc
24 Vdc
(22.5 - 25.5 Vdc adj.)
(22.5 - 28.5 Vdc adj.)
< 2% overall (combination Line, load, time and temperature related changes)
< 50 mVpp
-Ripple4
> 30 Vdc, but < 33 Vdc, auto recovery
Overvoltage Protection
Nominal Current
-Current Limit
Holdup Time5
Parallel Operation
2.5 A (60 W)
3.8 A (92 W)
5 A (120 W)
10 A (240 W)
20 A (480 W)
Fold Forward (Current rises, voltage drops to maintain constant power during overload up to max peak current)
> 50 ms
> 100 ms
> 100 ms
> 100 ms
Single or Parallel use is selectable via Front Panel Switch (SDN 2.5, 4 should not be used in parallel as Class 2 rating would be violated.)
General
EMC:
-Emissions
-Immunity
Approvals
Temperature
EN61000-6-3, -4; Class B EN55011, EN55022 Radiated and Conducted including Annex A.
EN61000-6-1, -2; EN61000-4-2 Level 4, EN61000-4-3 Level 3; EN61000-4-6 Level 3; EN61000-4-4 Level 4 input and Level 3 output; EN61000-4-5
Isolation Class 4, EN61000-4-11;
EN60950; UL508 Listed, cULus; UL60950, cRUus, CE (LVD 73/23 & 93/68/EEC). EN61000-3-2, IEC60079-15 (Class 1, Zone 2, Hazardous
Location, Groups A, B, C, D w/ T3A temp class up to 60C Ambient.) SEMI F47 Sag Immunity. SDN 2.5 & SDN 4 - UL60950 testing to
include approval as Class 2 power supply in accordance with UL1310.
Storage: -25oC...+85oC Operation. -10-60oC full power with operation to 70C possible with a linear derating to half power from 60oC to 70oC
(Convection cooling, no forced air required). Operation up to 50% load permissible with sideways or front side up mounting orientation. The relative
humidity is < 90% RH, noncondensing; IEC 68-2-2, 68-2-3.
Humidity
MTBF:
> 820,000 hours
- Standard
> 640,000 hours

Bellcore Issue 6 Method 1 Case 3 @ 40oC
> 600,000 hours
> 510,000 hours

MIL STD 217F @ 30oC
5 years
Warranty
General Protection/
Safety
Protected against continuous short-circuit, overload, open-circuit. Protection Class 1 (IEC536),

degree of protection IP20 (IEC 529) Safe low voltage: SELV (acc. EN60950)
Status Indicators
Green LED and DC OK signal (N.O. Solid State Contact rated 200 mA / 60 Vdc)
Fusing
-Input
Internally fused. External 10 A slow acting fusing for the input is recommended to protect input wiring.
Installation
-Output
Mounting
Connections
Case
-Free Space
HxWxD
(inches/mm)
Weight (lbs/kg)
Outputs are capable of providing high currents for short periods of time for inductive load startup or switching. Fusing may be required for
wire/loads if 2x Nominal O/P current rating cannot be tolerated. Continuous current overload allows for reliable fuse tripping.
Simple snap-on system for DIN Rail TS35/7.5 or TS35/15 or chassis-mounted (optional screw mounting set SDN-PMBRK2 required).
Input: IP20-rated screw terminals, connector size range: 16-10 AWG (1.5-6 mm2) for solid conductors. 16-12 AWG (0.5-4 mm2) for
flexible conductors. Output: Two connectors per output, connector size range: 16-10 AWG (1.5 - 6 mm2) for solid conductors.
Fully enclosed metal housing with fine ventilation grid to keep out small parts.
25 mm above and below,
25 mm left and right, 10 mm in front
25 mm above and below,

25 mm left and right,
15 mm in front
70 mm above and below, 25 mm left and right,

15 mm in front
4.88. x 1.97 x 4.55

(124 x 50 x 116)
4.88 x 2.56 x 4.55 (124 x 65 x 116)
4.88 x 3.26 x 4.55

(124 x 83 x 116)
4.88 x 6.88 x 4.55

(124 x 175 x 116)
1 lbs (.45 kg)
1.5 lbs (.68 kg)
2.2 lbs (0.1 kg)
3 lbs (1.36 kg)
1. Not UL listed for DC input.

2. Input current ratings are conservatively specified with low input, worst case
efficiency and power factor.
3. Losses are heat dissipation in watts at full load, nominal input line.
4. Ripple/noise is stated as typical values when measured with a 20 MHz,

bandwidth scope and 50 Ohm resistor.
5. Full load, 100 Vac Input @ Tamb = +25C
107
Power Supplies
SDN Series Dimensions
+ +
Catalog
Number
OK
NEC Class 2
Power Supply
24-28 V
Parallel
S O LA
).$ #/.4 %1
(!
US LISTED
115/230 VAC 1.3-0.7 A 50/60 HZ
4.88 (124)
2.56 (65)
4.55 (116)
SDN 16-12-100P
4.88 (124)
3.26 (83)
4.55 (116)
24 Vdc
Power Supply
SDN 2.5-24-100P
U
L
SDN 9-12-100P
Single
H
12 Vdc
OK
24 VDC / 2.5 A
SDN 2.5-24-100P
4.88 (124)
1.97 (50)
4.55 (116)
SDN 4-24-100LP
4.88 (124)
2.56 (65)
4.55 (116)
SDN 5-24-100P
4.88 (124)
2.56 (65)
4.55 (116)
SDN 5-24-480
4.88 (124)
2.91 (73)
4.55 (116)
SDN 10-24-100P
4.88 (124)
3.26 (83)
4.55 (116)
SDN 20-24-100P
4.88 (124)
6.88 (175)
4.55 (116)
SDN 5-48-100P
4.88 (124)
3.26 (83)
4.55 (116)
48 Vdc
S O LA
H
Power Supply
SDN 20-24-480C
).$ #/.4 %1
(!
Catalog
Number
110
Overload
Output:
24 VDC / 20 A
Electronically protected
2428V
+ + - -
OK
Single Use
L1 L2 L3
Parallel Use
Input:
3PH 380/500 VAC
1.7/1.5A/Phase 50/60 Hz
Reset fuse mode
US LISTED
Continuous Mode
U
L
Fuse Mode

H
SDN 10-24-480
4.88 (124)
5.90 (150)
4.55 (116)
SDN 30-24-480
4.88 (124)
9.72 (247)
4.55 (116)
SDN 40-24-480
4.88 (124)
11.10 (282)
4.55 (116)
Product data sheet

Characteristics
9001SKT38LGG31
green illuminated pushbutton 30 - projecting

spring return - 120 V - 1 OC
Product availability: Stock - Normally stocked in distribution facility
Price*: 197.00 USD
Commercial Status
Commercialised
Range of product
Harmony 9001SK
Product or component
type
Illuminated push to test pushbutton
Device short name
9001SK
Type of operator
Spring return
Operator profile
Green projecting unmarked
The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein.
This documentation is not intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user applications.
It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use thereof.
Neither Schneider Electric Industries SAS nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein. *Prices are indicative
Main
Complementary
Bezel material
Plastic
Mounting diameter
1.18 in (30 mm)
Shape of signaling unit head
Octagonal
Light source
High luminosity LED
Bulb base
BA 9s
Light block supply
Direct
[Us] rated supply voltage
120 V AC/DC
Connections - terminals
Screw clamp terminals (1 x 0.22...2 x 1.5 mm) conforming to EN/IEC 60947-1
Tightening torque
7.08 lbf.in (0.8 N.m) conforming to EN/IEC 60947-1
Shape of screw head
Cross slotted
5000000 cycles
Operating position
Any position
[Ie] rated operational current
0.55 A 125 V DC-13 A600-Q600 NEMA
[Ui] rated insulation voltage
250 V (degree of pollution: 3) conforming to EN/IEC 60947-1
[Uimp] rated impulse withstand voltage
2.5 kV conforming to EN/IEC 60947-1
Contacts material
Silver alloy contacts
Positive opening
Without
Short circuit protection
10 A cartridge fuse conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1
[Ith] conventional free air thermal current
10 A
[Icm] rated short-circuit making capacity
<= 60 kA at 120 V (AC-15) 7200 VA

<= 30 kA at 240 V (AC-15) 7200 VA
<= 15 kA at 480 V (AC-15) 7200 VA
<= 12 kA at 600 V (AC-15) 7200 VA
Rated breaking capacity
<= 6 kA at 120 V (AC-15) 720 VA

<= 3 kA at 240 V (AC-15) 720 VA
<= 1.5 kA at 480 V (AC-15) 720 VA
<= 1.2 kA at 600 V (AC-15) 720 VA
<= 0.55 kA at 125 V (DC-13)
<= 0.27 kA at 250 V (DC-13)
<= 0.1 kA at 600 V (DC-13)
Product weight
0.43 lb(US) (0.195 kg)
Dec 18, 2014
Environment
Standards
EN/IEC 60947-1
EN/IEC 60947-5-1
EN/IEC 60947-5-4
JIS C 4520
JIS C 852
UL 508
CSA C22.2 No 14
Product certifications
NEMA
UL 508
Protective treatment
TC
Ambient air temperature for storage
-40...158 F (-40...70 C)
Ambient air temperature for operation
-13...158 F (-25...70 C)
Vibration resistance
7 gn (f = 2...500 Hz) conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
Shock resistance
50 gn conforming to IEC 60068-2-27
Class of protection against electric shock
Class II
IP degree of protection
IP66 conforming to IEC 60529
NEMA degree of protection
NEMA 4X
NEMA 4
NEMA 3R
NEMA 3
NEMA 2
NEMA 13
NEMA 12
NEMA 1
Ordering and shipping details

Category
21429 - 9001 SK,SKY
Discount Schedule
CS1
GTIN
00785901044482
Nbr. of units in pkg.
Package weight(Lbs)
0.27
Product availability
Stock - Normally stocked in distribution facility
Returnability
Country of origin
MX
Offer Sustainability
Sustainable offer status
RoHS
REACh
Not Green Premium product

Compliant - since 0921 -
Reference not containing SVHC above the threshold
Contractual warranty
Period
Schneider Electric declaration of conformity
18 months
136-2014_QuarkCatalogTempNew 8/12/14 10:42 AM Page 136
30 mm Pushbutton Switches
SWITCHES
30 mm Corrosion Resistant Non-Illuminated Operators

30 mm Screw-On Mushroom Head
ENCLOSURES
30 mm Flush Head
9001SKR24RH13
9001SKR1BH13
9001SKR1GH13
9001SKR1RH13
9001SKR1UH13
Mfr.s
Type
Contact
Configuration
Color
EACH
70060421
70060422
70060423
70060424
70060425
70060426
70060428
70060429
70060430
9001SKR1BH13
9001SKR1BH5
9001SKR1GH13
9001SKR1GH5
9001SKR1RH13
9001SKR1RH6
9001SKR1UH13
9001SKR1UH5
9001SKR1UH6
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NC
Black
Black
Green
Green
Red
Red
7 Color (BK, R, G, Y, O, BL, W)
68.92
56.16
68.92
56.16
75.70
56.16
75.70
56.16
56.16
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NC
Black
Black
Red
Red
75.70
56.16
75.70
56.16
75.70
56.16
56.16
30 mm Guarded Head
30 mm Extended Head
PASSIVE & ACTIVE
INTERCONNECT
Stock
No.
TEST & MEASUREMENTS
POWER
Stock
No.
OPTOELECTRONICS
RoHS
Contact Block Terminals Are at 20 Angle to Eliminate Interference with

Other Contact Blocks Mounted in Tandem
Finger-Safe Terminals on Contact Blocks
UL Listed, CSA Certified and CE Marked
30 mm Diameter Mounting Hole with Positioning Notch
Fully Assembled Units

Heavy-Duty Pushbuttons, Selector Switches and Pilot Lights for Industrial Applications
Corrosion Resistant Construction
Rated for NEMA Types 4/4X/13 Environments without Boots
Oil Tight, Water Tight and Dust Tight
70060443
70060444
70060445
70060446
70060447
70060448
70060449
70060431
70060432
70060433
70060434
70060435
70060436
70060437
70060438
70060439
70060440
70060441
70060442
Mfr.s
Type
Head Size
9001SKR24BH13
9001SKR24BH5
9001SKR24GH13
9001SKR24GH5
9001SKR24RH13
9001SKR24RH6
9001SKR25BH13
9001SKR25BH5
9001SKR25GH13
9001SKR25GH5
9001SKR25RH13
9001SKR25RH6
13/8"
13/8"
13/8"
13/8"
13/8"
13/8"
21/4"
21/4"
21/4"
21/4"
21/4"
21/4"
Contact
Configuration
EACH
Black
Black
Green
Green
Red
Red
Black
Black
Green
Green
Red
Red
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NC
117.38
95.29
117.38
95.29
117.38
95.29
117.38
95.29
117.38
95.29
117.38
95.29
Black
Black
Green
Green
Red (Emergency)
Red (Emergency)
Red
Red
Black
Black
Green
Green
Red
Red
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NC
117.38
95.29
117.38
95.29
120.81
101.22
117.38
95.29
117.38
93.41
112.33
95.29
117.38
95.29
Color
30 mm Snap-On Mushroom Head
9001SKR2BH13
9001SKR2BH5
9001SKR2RH13
9001SKR2RH6
9001SKR2UH13
9001SKR2UH5
9001SKR2UH6
70060457
70060458
70060459
70060460
70060461
70060462
70060463
70060464
70060465
70060466
70060467
70060468
70060469
70060470
13/8"
13/8"
13/8"
13/8"
13/8"
13/8"
13/8"
13/8"
21/4"
21/4"
21/4"
21/4"
21/4"
21/4"
9001SKR4BH13
9001SKR4BH5
9001SKR4GH13
9001SKR4GH5
9001SKR4R05H13
9001SKR4R05H6
9001SKR4RH13
9001SKR4RH6
9001SKR5BH13
9001SKR5BH5
9001SKR5GH13
9001SKR5GH5
9001SKR5RH13
9001SKR5RH6
30 mm Mushroom Head Push-Pull

9001SKR3RH6
70060450
70060451
70060452
70060453
70060454
70060455
70060456
9001SKR3BH13
9001SKR3BH5
9001SKR3RH13
9001SKR3RH6
9001SKR3UH13
9001SKR3UH5
9001SKR3UH6
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NC
Black
Black
Red
Red
75.70
56.16
75.70
56.16
75.70
56.16
56.16
Stock
No.
Mfr.s
Type
Contact
Configuration
Color
EACH
70060471
70060472
70060473
70060474
70060475
70060476
9001SKR8P1RH25
9001SKR8RH25
9001SKR9GH13
9001SKR9P1GH13
9001SKR9P1RH13
9001SKR9RH13
2 NC
2 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
Red (Illuminated)
Red
Green
Green (Illuminated)
Red (Illuminated)
Red
227.15
120.81
159.94
268.82
268.82
159.94
30 mm Corrosion Resistant Illuminated Operators

RoHS
Features
Universal Color Caps Reduce Inventory and Provide More Flexibility
Single Screw Mounting of Contact Blocks for Quick Installation
Color Coded Contact Blocks for Ease-of-Use and Troubleshooting
Wide Variety of Operating Heads
Oil Tight, Water Tight and Dust Tight (Indoor/Outdoor)
Complete with 1 NO/1 NC Contact Block
Use 6 VAC Lamp, ANSI 755
Approvals UL Listed File Number E42259 CCN NKCR CSA Certified
File Number LR25490 Class 3211 03 CE Marked
Stock
No.
Mfr.s
Type
Cap
Color
Description
EACH
70060412
70060413
70060414
70060415
70060416
70060417
70060418
9001SK1L1GH13
9001SK1L1RH13
9001SK2L1G21H13
9001SK2L1GH13
9001SK2L1R20H13
9001SK2L1R21H13
9001SK2L1RH13
Green
Red
Green
Green
Red
Red
Red
Flush Head, Clear Plastic Guard

Flush Head, Clear Plastic Guard
21/4" Mushroom Head, No Guard
Extended Head, No Guard
Extended Head, No Guard
196.53
196.53
184.58
184.58
184.58
184.58
184.58
ASSEMBLY
30 mm Corrosion Resistant Selector Switches

RoHS
2-Position Selector Switch

Selector Position
Stock
No.
Mfr.s
Type
CAM
Code
Contact
Configuration
Contact Left
Contact Right
70060477
70060478
70060479
9001SKS11BH1
9001SKS11BH13
9001SKS11BH2
E
B
E
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
2 NO/2 NC
Closed/Open
Closed/Open
Closed/Open/Closed/Open
Open/Closed
Open/Closed
Open/Closed/Open/Closed
EACH
90.18
90.18
129.31
INDEX
3-Position Selector Switch
Selector Position
Stock
No.
Mfr.s
Type
CAM
Code
Contact
Configuration
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
70060480
70060481
70060482
70060483
70060484
70060485
9001SKS42BH1
9001SKS42BH13
9001SKS42BH2
9001SKS43BH1
9001SKS43BH13
9001SKS43BH2
E
B
B
C
C
C
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
2 NO/2 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
2 NO/2 NC
Open/Closed
Closed/Open
Closed/Open/Open/Closed
Closed/Open
Closed/Open
Closed/Open/Closed/Open
Open/Closed
Open/Closed
Open/Open
Open/Open
Open/Open/Open/Open
Closed/Open
Open/Closed
Open/Closed/Closed/Open
Open/Closed
Open/Closed
136 SWITCHES
EACH
90.18
90.18
129.31
90.18
90.18
129.31


Standard Black Knobs
Heavy-Duty Selector Switches for Industrial Applications
Corrosion Resistant Construction
Rated for NEMA Types 4/4X/13 Environments without Boots
Oil Tight, Water Tight and Dust Tight
Contact Block Terminals Are at 20 Angle to Eliminate Interference with Other
Contact Blocks Mounted in Tandem
Finger-Safe Terminals on Contact Blocks
UL Listed, CSA Certified and CE Marked
Maintained Action
4404InFocusInventorySheet2
12/16/04
9:33 AM
Page 1
Most Common Accessories

Stocking the following accessories can save you valuable time and money.
Over 15% of circuit breaker orders require a special accessory or unique
configuration. With the following kits you will be equipped to use standard
product to meet your customers unique specification that same day.
Many of the accessories will be stocked as standard inventory items,
further reducing lead times and better serving your customers.
S37444 H-Frame Terminal Nut Insert Kit (qty 3)
S37445 J-Frame Terminal Nut Insert Kit (qty 3)
S29450 1A/1B Auxiliary Switch/Alarm Contact
(same switch for all PowerPact 15A to 2500A circuit breakers!)

S29386 120 Vac Shunt Trip
S29382 12 Vdc Shunt Trip
Auxiliary Switch or
Alarm Contact
Shunt Trip
Schneider Electric - North American Operating Division

1415 S. Roselle Road
Palatine, IL 60067
Tel: 847-397-2600
Fax: 847-925-7500
0611SP0501
2004 Schneider Electric All rights reserved
Terminal Nuts or Lugs

Snap into place
November 2004
Product Data Sheet
S29450
Circuit Breaker Alarm/Overcurrent Trip Switch,
600VAC, 6A
Technical Characteristics
Circuit Breaker Type
Standard
General Application
Provides a Remote Signal Indicating the Circuit Breaker Contacts are Open or Closed,
Auxiliary Switch 1A/1B, Trip indication, Overcurrent indication
Ampere Rating
6A
For Use With
Molded Case Breakers
Marketing Trade Name
Powerpact
Voltage Rating
600VAC
Shipping and Ordering

Category
01250 - Circuit Breakers, Accessories for M, P & R Frame Breakers, UL/IEC
Discount Schedule
DE2
Article Number
785901506416
Package Quantity
Weight
0.07 lbs.
Availability Code
Non-Stock Item: This item is not normally stocked in our distribution facility.
Returnability
As standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation of the information given in this document.
Generated: 06/19/2009 13:18:35
2009 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
PowerPact H- and J-Frame

Circuit Breakers
Catalog
0611CT0401R05/09
09
Class 0611
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 5
Mounting and Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 26
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 34
Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 45
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47
Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 59
MCP Instantaneous Trip Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 70
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
PowerPact H- and J-Frame Circuit Breakers

Table of Contents
SECTION 1: GENERAL INFORMATION ...................................................................................5
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................5
Features and Benefits ......................................................................................................................5
Common Design Envelope ........................................................................................................5
High Ampere Interrupting Ratings (AIR) ....................................................................................5
Dual-Break Rotating Contacts ....................................................................................................6
Reduced Let-Through Currents .................................................................................................6
Internal Operating Mechanism .........................................................................................................6
Handle Position Indication ..........................................................................................................6
Flexible Configurations ....................................................................................................................7
Field Installable Accessories and Trip Units ..............................................................................7
Catalog Numbering ....................................................................................................................8
Trip System (Trip Units) .............................................................................................................9
H-Frame Trip Units .....................................................................................................................9
J-Frame Trip Units ...................................................................................................................10
Codes and Standards ....................................................................................................................10
Special Ratings ........................................................................................................................10
Suitable for Isolation (Positive Contact Indication) ........................................................................11
Molded Case Circuit Breakers .......................................................................................................11
Circuit Breaker Ratings ............................................................................................................11
Marine Ratings .........................................................................................................................12
UL Marine Listed Circuit Breakers (UL489SA) ................................................................... 12
UL Naval Listed Circuit Breakers (UL 489 SB)................................................................... 12
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) .................................................................................. 12
400 Hz Derating .......................................................................................................................12
Reverse Feeding of Circuit Breakers .......................................................................................12
Operating Conditions ...............................................................................................................13
Temperature ....................................................................................................................... 13
Altitude ............................................................................................................................... 13
Atmospheric Conditions...................................................................................................... 13
Vibration ............................................................................................................................. 13
Circuit Breaker Endurance ................................................................................................. 13
Corner Grounded Delta Ratings ......................................................................................... 13
Unit-Mount Circuit Breaker Catalog Numbers ..........................................................................15
I-Line Circuit Breaker Catalog Numbers ..................................................................................17
UL 489 SC Listed 500 Vdc Circuit Breakers ............................................................................20
Electronic Motor Circuit Protectors ................................................................................................20
Full Load Amp Settings ............................................................................................................21
Automatic Protection Settings ..................................................................................................21
Manual Protection Settings ......................................................................................................21
Automatic Molded Case Switches .................................................................................................24
SECTION 2: MOUNTING AND CONNECTIONS ....................................................................26

Unit-Mount Circuit Breakers ...........................................................................................................26
Mounting ..................................................................................................................................26
Mechanical Lugs ......................................................................................................................27
Bus-Bar Connections ...............................................................................................................28
Voltage Takeoff (Control Wire Terminals) for Mechanical Lugs and Terminal Nuts ................28
Power Distribution Connectors .................................................................................................29
Compression Lugs ...................................................................................................................30
Terminal Shields ......................................................................................................................30
Rear Connections ....................................................................................................................31
I-Line Circuit breakers ..................................................................................................................31
Plug-In and Drawout Circuit Breakers ...........................................................................................32
Plug-In Circuit Breaker Mounting .............................................................................................32
20042009 Schneider Electric

All Rights Reserved
3
05/2009

Table of Contents
Parts of a Plug-In Configuration ............................................................................................... 32
Drawout Circuit Breaker Mounting ........................................................................................... 33
Chassis Functions .................................................................................................................... 33
SECTION 3: ACCESSORIES ..................................................................................................... 34

Internal Accessories ...................................................................................................................... 34
Accessory Connections ................................................................................................................. 34
Auxiliary and Alarm Switches ........................................................................................................ 35
Shunt Trip (MX) and Undervoltage Trip (MN) Switches ................................................................ 36
Add-On Ground-Fault Module (GFM) ............................................................................................ 37
Earth Leakage Module (ELM) for PowerPact H- and J-Frame MCCBs ........................................ 38
Motor Operator .............................................................................................................................. 39
Rotary Operating Handles ............................................................................................................. 40
Directly-Mounted Rotary Operating Handles ........................................................................... 40
Class 9421 NEMA Door Mounted Rotary Operating Handles ................................................. 41
Class 9422 Cable Operating Handle ............................................................................................. 41
Variable Depth Mechanisms .................................................................................................... 42
Circuit Breaker Enclosures and Enclosure Accessories ................................................................ 42
Locking Systems ........................................................................................................................... 43
Interlocking Systems ..................................................................................................................... 44
Interlocking of Circuit Breakers With Toggle Control ............................................................... 44
Interlocking Two Circuit Breakers with Rotary Handles ........................................................... 44
SECTION 4: WIRING DIAGRAMS ............................................................................................ 45

Standard Motor Operator Wiring (Factory Wiring Configuration) ............................................. 46
Remote Reset Wiring Without Overcurrent Trip Switch Protection .......................................... 46
SECTION 5: DIMENSIONS ......................................................................................................... 47

H-Frame Dimensional Drawings .................................................................................................... 47
J-Frame Dimensional Drawings .................................................................................................... 51
Plug-In H- and J-Frame Dimensional Drawings ............................................................................ 53
Drawout H- and J-Frame Dimensional Drawings .......................................................................... 54
Mounting Dimensional Drawings ................................................................................................... 55
H- and J-Frame Door Cutout Dimensional Drawings .................................................................... 56
SECTION 6: TRIP CURVES ....................................................................................................... 59

SECTION 7: MCP INSTANTANEOUS TRIP POINTS ........................................................... 70
4
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Section 1General Information

Introduction
H-frame and J-frame molded case circuit breakers are designed to protect electrical systems from
damage caused by overloads and short circuits. All circuit breakers are designed to open and close a
circuit by nonautomatic means and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined overcurrent.
Features and Benefits

The H- and J-frame modular platform provides many options for accessories, configurations, and
actuation. H- and J-frame circuit breakers (15250 A) and motor-circuit protectors (30250 A) are
designed to use common accessories. Some of the key features are defined below:
Common Design Envelope

Both the H-frame and J-frame circuit breakers feature common mounting holes, handle locations and
trim dimensions.
Figure 1:
Common Design for H- and J-Frame Circuit Breakers
6.40
[163]
7.52
[191]
06113261
1.38
[35]
4.12
[105]
1.38
[35]
4.12
[105]
2.87
[73]
3.44
[87]
2.87
[73]
3.44
[87]
Dimensions in.
[mm]
High Ampere Interrupting Ratings (AIR)

Circuit breakers are available with interrupting ratings up to:

All Rights Reserved
125 kA at 240 Vac delta

100 kA at 480 Vac delta
50 kA at 600 Vac delta.
5
05/2009

Dual-Break Rotating Contacts
06113234
All PowerPact H-frame and J-frame circuit breakers are equipped with dual-break rotating contacts
that reduce the amount of peak current during a short circuit fault. This reduces the let-through
currents and enhances equipment protection.
The moving contact has the shape of an elongated S and rotates around an
floating axis. The shape of the fixed and moving contacts are such that the
repelling forces appear as soon as the circuit reaches approximately 15 times In.
06113262
Reduced Let-Through Currents
Due to the rotating movement, repulsion is rapid and the device greatly limits
short-circuit currents, whatever the interrupting level of the unit (D, G, J or L). The
fault current is extinguished before it can fully develop. Lower let-through currents
provide less peak energy, reducing the required bus bar bracing, lowering
enclosure pressure, and delivering improved series or combination ratings.
Special constructions are designed for continuous operation at 100% of their current rating.
The 100% rated circuit breakers require a larger enclosure than the standard enclosures described on
page 42.
Internal Operating Mechanism

06113266
H-frame and J-frame circuit breakers have an over-center toggle

mechanism providing quick-make, quick-break operation. The operating
mechanism is also trip-free, which allows tripping even when the circuit
breaker handle is held in the ON position.
Internal cross-bars provide common opening and closing of all poles with a
single operating handle.
All H-frame and J-frame circuit breakers have an integral push-to-trip
button in the cover to manually trip the circuit breaker. This should be used
as part of a regular preventive maintenance program.
Handle Position Indication
Push-to-Trip
The H-frame and J-frame circuit breaker handle can assume any of three positions, ON, tripped or
OFF as shown. The center tripped position provides positive visual indication that the circuit breaker
has tripped.
The circuit breaker can be reset by first pushing the handle to the extreme OFF position. Power can
then be restored to the load by pushing the handle to the ON position.
ON
Tripped
OFF
6
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Flexible Configurations
The PowerPact H- and J-frame circuit breakers may be configured with lugs, bus bar connections, rear
connections, I-Line, drawout cradle, or plug-in base.
Field Installable Accessories and Trip Units

Field Installable Accessories and Trip Units
06113259
Figure 2:

All Rights Reserved
7
05/2009

Catalog Numbering
250
Poles
Amperage
H H-Frame
J J-Frame
2 2P
3 3P
150 1515- A
250 150250 A
000 Switch
L
M
P
F
A
S
N
D
K
ABC (3P)
Trip Unit
Standard Fixed Trip Unit (Suitable for reverse connection) 6 CBA (3P)
1 AB (2P)
F06 60 A H-Frame Only (No trip unit)
2 AC (2P)
F15 150 A H-Frame Only (No trip unit)
3 BA (2P)
F25 250 A J-Frame Only (No trip unit)
4 BC (2P)
T
Complete Circuit Breaker (Frame + removable trip unit)
5 CA (2P)
S15 150 A Molded Case Switch (H-Frame automatic switch)
6 CB (2P)
S17 175 A Molded Case Switch (J-Frame automatic switch)
S25 250 A Molded Case Switch (J-Frame automatic switch)
C
100% Continuous Current Rating (See page 42 for minimum enclosure size)
M71 30 A H-Frame Motor Circuit Protector (MCP)
M75 250 A J-Frame Motor Circuit Protector (MCP)
D81 500 Vdc 150175 A J-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breaker
D82 500 Vdc 200250 A J-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breaker
Voltage
Lugs Line/Load Side

Lugs Line Side
Lugs Load Side
Bus Bar
I-Line
Rear Connected
Plug-in
Drawout
Reverse I-Line
6 600 Vac
Interruption Rating (kA) (See Table 1)
Table 1:
Accessory Suffix Code (See Table 2)

I-Line Phasing
Frame
Terminations
Interrupting Rating
UL/CSA/NOM
IEC 647-2 Icu/Ics
240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
250 Vdc
500 Vdc1
500/525 Vac
250 Vdc
500 Vdc
25 kA
18 kA
14 kA
20 kA
25/25 kA
18/18 kA
14/14 kA
20 kA
20 kA
65 kA
35 kA
18 kA
20 kA
20 kA
65/65 kA
35/35 kA
18/18 kA
20 kA
20 kA
100 kA
65 kA
25 kA
20 kA
100/100 kA
65/65 kA
25/25 kA
20 kA
20 kA
125 kA
100 kA
50 kA
20 kA
125/125 kA
100/100 kA
50/50 kA
20 kA
20 kA
220/240 Vac 380/440/415 Vac
Special DC J-frame circuit breakers only.
Table 2:
Accessory Suffix Codes (Building Sequence as Listed)
(1) Auxiliary Switch
(3) Shunt Trip
(4) Undervoltage
Release UVR
Voltage
(5) Motor Operator

Suffix
Voltage
H-Frame
J-Frame
ML
48/60 Vac
S29440
S31548
Suffix
Contacts
Kit Number
Suffix
Kit Number Suffix
Kit Number
AA
1A/1B Standard
S29450
SK
S29384
UK
S29404
24 Vac
AB
2A/2B Standard
S29450 (2)
SL
S29385
UL
S29405
48 Vac
MA
120 Vac
S29433
S31540
AE
1A/1B Gold
S29482
SA
S29386
UA
S29406
120 Vac
MD
277 Vac
S29434
S31541
AF
2A/2B Gold
S29482 (2)
SD
S29387
UD
S29407
208277 Vac
MH
380/480 Vac
S29435
S31542
SH
S29388
UH
S29408
380480 Vac
MO
24/30 Vdc
S29436
S31543
SJ
S29389
UJ
S29409
525600 Vac
MP
48/60 Vdc
S29437
S31544
SN
S29382
UN
S29402
12 Vdc
MR
110/130 Vdc
S29438
S31545
MS
250 Vdc
S29439
S31546
(2) Alarm/Overcurrent Trip Switch

Suffix
Switch
Kit Number
BC
Alarm Switch (SD) S29450
SO
S29390
UO
S29410
24 Vdc
BH
Alarm Switch (SD)

S29452
Low-level
SU
S29391
UU
S29411
30 Vdc
(6) IEC Style Rotary Handle
BD
SDE Standard
S29450 +
S29451
SP
S29392
UP
S29412
48 Vdc
BJ
SDE Low-level
S29452 +
S29451
SV
S29383
UV
S29403
60 Vdc
BE
SD and SDE
Standard
S29450 (2) +
S29451
SR
S29393
UR
S29413
125 Vdc
BK
SD and SDE
Low-level
S29452 (2) +
S29451
SS
S29394
US
S29414
250 Vdc
Suffix
Handle Type (color)
Kit
Number
RD10
Direct Mount (black)
S29337
RE10
Extended Door Mount (black) S29338
RT10
Telescoping (black)
RD20
Direct Mount (red)
S29339
RE20
Extended Door Mount (red)
S29340
S29343
8
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Trip System (Trip Units)
The H-frame and J-frame circuit breakers are equipped with a thermal-magnetic trip system designed
to open automatically under overload or short circuit. H-frame and J-frame circuit breakers contain
individual thermal (overload) and magnetic (short circuit) sensing elements in each pole.
The amperage ratings of the thermal trip elements are calibrated at 104F (40C) free air ambient
temperature. Per the National Electric Code (NEC), circuit breakers may only be applied
continuously at up to 80% of their rating.
Some models of the H- and J-frame circuit breakers are UL Listed to be applied at up to 100% of their
current rating. Because of the additional heat generated, the use of specially-designed enclosures and
90C rated wire is required when applying circuit breakers at 100% of continuous current rating.
Markings on the circuit breaker indicate the minimum enclosure size and ventilation required. The
90C wire must be sized according to the ampacities of the 75C wire column in the NEC. Circuit
breakers with 100% rating can also be used in applications requiring only 80% continuous loading.
06113271
Table 3:
H-Frame and J-Frame 3P Field-Installable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
1560 A H-Frame
1125A
60A
(li)
(ln)
06113272
150250 A J-Frame
Cat. No.
Amperage
Cat. No.
Amperage
Cat. No.
15 A
20 A
25 A
30 A
35 A
40 A
45 A
50 A
60 A
HT3015
HT3020
HT3025
HT3030
HT3035
HT3040
HT3045
HT3050
HT3060
70 A
80 A
90 A
100 A
110 A
125 A
150 A
HT3070
HT3080
HT3090
HT3100
HT3110
HT3125
HT3150
150 A
175 A
200 A
225 A
250 A
JT3150
JT3175
JT3200
JT3225
JT3250
H-Frame Trip Unit
2500
1250
250A
70150 A H-Frame
Amperage
(lm)
(ln)
J-Frame Trip Unit
H-Frame Trip Units

Table 4:
06113269
Temperature Rerating (H-Frame Trip Unit Thermal ProtectionLong-Time)
Temperature1
Rating (A) In
-10
14
23
30
38
46
53
60
68
76
88
103
112
123
137
160
180
221
32
21
28
36
43
49
56
63
71
83
97
107
117
131
151
171
207
10
50
20
26
33
40
46
52
59
66
77
90
101
111
126
141
161
194
20
68
18
24
31
37
42
48
54
62
72
84
96
105
120
132
152
180
H-Frame Trip Curve
30
86
17
22
28
34
39
44
50
56
66
77
88
98
110
121
139
165
(ln) Fixed threshold thermal

protection against
overload
(li) Fixed threshold
magnetic protection
against short circuits
40
104
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
125
150
50
122
12
17
21
25
30
34
38
43
53
62
72
80
86
95
109
131
60
140
14
17
20
24
28
31
35
46
53
63
70
72
80
93
111
ln
li
Shaded areas indicate temperature rerated values, non-shaded areas are standard circuit breaker ampere ratings at 40 C (104 F).
Table 5:
H-Frame Trip Unit Short Circuit Protection (Fixed) Ii
Ampere Rating
1530 A
3550 A
6090 A
100150 A
Hold (A)
350
400
800
900
Trip (A)
750
850
1450
1700

All Rights Reserved
9
05/2009

J-Frame Trip Units
Table 6:
Temperature Rerating (J-Frame Trip Unit Thermal ProtectionLong-Time)
t
06113270
Temperature1
Rating (A) In
-10
14
221
264
289
330
377
32
207
247
273
310
354
10
50
194
230
256
290
330
20
68
180
213
240
270
307
J-Frame Trip Unit
30
86
165
194
220
248
279
(ln) Fixed threshold thermal

protection against
overload
(lm) Adjustable magnetic
protection against short
circuits
40
104
150
175
200
225
250
50
122
131
150
176
193
214
60
140
111
124
151
160
177
ln
lm
Shaded areas indicate temperature rerated values, non-shaded areas are standard circuit breaker ampere ratings at 40 C (104 F).
Table 7:
J-Frame Trip Unit Short Circuit Protection (Adjustable) Im
Ampere Rating1
150 A
175 A
200 A
225 A
250 A
Low (A)
750
875
1000
1125
1250
High (A)
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
UL magnetic trip setting tolerances are -20% +30% from nominal values shown.
Codes and Standards

H- and J-frame circuit breakers, automatic switches and electronic motor circuit protectors are
manufactured and tested in accordance with the following standards:
Table 8:
Codes and Standards (Domestic)
NOTE: Apply circuit breakers according to guidelines detailed in the National Electric Code (NEC) and other local wiring codes.
PowerPact H- and J-Frame Circuit

H- and J-Frame Switches
Breakers
UL 4891
UL 4893
IEC Standard 60947-2
CSA 22.2 No. 5-022
CSA 22.2 No. 5-024
Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN
Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN
NEMA AB1
NEMA AB1
NMX J-266
NMX J-266
NMX J-515
NMX J-515
UTE, VDE, BS, CEI, UNE
UTE, VDE, BS, CEI, UNE
CCC
CCC
CE Mark
CE Mark
PowerPact H- and J-Frame Motor

Circuit Protectors
UL 4891
CSA 22.2 No. 5-022
NEMA AB1
NMX J-515
CCC
CE Mark
PowerPact H- and J-frame circuit breakers and motor circuit protectors are in UL File E10027
PowerPact H- and J-frame circuit breakers and motor circuit protectors are in CSA File LR40970
PowerPact H- and J-frame switches are in UL File E87159
PowerPact H- and J-frame switches are in CSA File LR32390
Special Ratings
The H-frame and J-frame circuit breakers also comply with the following special ratings:
HACR rating
SWD switch duty rating (applies only to 15 and 20 A / 277 Vac or less, 2P and 3P)
HID high intensity discharge lighting rating (1550 A)
10
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Suitable for Isolation (Positive Contact Indication)

All PowerPact H-frame and J-frame circuit breakers and switches are suitable for isolation as defined
in the IEC 60947-2 standard.
The isolation position corresponds to the O (OFF position)

The operating handle cannot indicate the OFF position unless the contacts are open
Padlocks may not be installed unless the contacts are open
NOTE: Installation of a rotary handle or a motor mechanism does not alter the functionality of the
position indication system.
The isolation function is certified by tests guaranteeing the mechanical reliability of the position
indication system, the absence of leakage currents and the overvoltage withstand capacity between
upstream and downstream connections.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker Ratings
The interrupting rating is the highest current at rated voltage the circuit breaker is designed to safely
interrupt under standard test conditions. Circuit breakers must be selected with interrupting ratings
equal to or greater than the available short-circuit current at the point where the circuit breaker is
applied to the system (unless it is a branch device in a series rated combination).
Interrupting ratings are shown on the front of the circuit breaker.
Table 9:
UL 489 Circuit Breaker Ratings

150 A H-Frame
250 A J-Frame
HD
HG
HJ
HL
JD
JG
JJ
Number of Poles
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
Amperage Range (A)
15150
15150
15150
15150
150250
150250
150250
150250
240 Vac
25
65
100
125
25
65
100
125
480 Vac
18
35
65
100
18
35
65
100
600 Vac
14
18
25
50
14
18
25
50
250 Vdc
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
500 Vdc1
20
20
20
20
UL/CSA/NOM
(kA)
JL
500 Vdc rating applies only to catalog numbers with suffix D81 or D82, meeting UL489SC (Supplement C).
Table 10:
IEC 60947-2 Circuit Breaker Ratings

150 A H-Frame
250 A J-Frame
HD
HG
HJ
HL
JD
JG
JJ
Number of Poles
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
Amperage Range (A)
15150
15150
15150
15150
150250
150250
150250
150250
220/240 Vac
25/25
65/65
100/100
125/125
25/25
65/65
100/100
125/125
380/440/415 Vac
18/18
35/35
65/65
100/100
18/18
35/35
65/65
100/100
500/525 Vac
14/14
18/18
25/25
50/50
14/14
18/18
25/25
50/50
250 Vdc
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
500 Vdc1, 2
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
IEC 60947-2
Icu/Ics (kA)
Insulation Voltage
Ui
750 Vac
750 Vac
Impulse Withstand Voltage
Uimp
8 kVac
8 kVac
Operational Voltage
Ue
525 Vac
525 Vac
Rated Current
In
150 A
250 A
Utilization Category
2P in series
500 Vdc rating applies only to catalog numbers with suffix D81 or D82, meeting UL489SC (Supplement C).

All Rights Reserved
JL
11
05/2009

Marine Ratings
UL Marine Listed Circuit Breakers (UL489SA)
A standard for molded case circuit breakers which are intended to be installed and used aboard a boat
or vessel is included in Supplement SA SB to UL 489, Standard for Molded Case Circuit Breakers and
Circuit Breaker Enclosures (also referred to as UL product category DKTY). This UL Standard was
established in accordance with U.S. Coast Guard regulations, applicable American Boat and Yacht
Council Inc. publications, and NFPA 302 Standard for Motor Craft (Pleasure and Commercial). In
order to be UL Listed for marine use, circuit breakers must not use aluminum or aluminum alloys for
terminal connections and must be calibrated at an ambient temperature of 40C. Standard circuit
breakers should not be specified or used in place of marine circuit breakers.
The PowerPact H and J-frame circuit breakers are UL 489 SA and SB Marine Listed for use on vessels
over 65 ft. (19.8 m) in length and under 65 ft. [19.8 m] in length.) These breakers can be added by
ordering with the suffix YA which includes the required copper lugs.
UL Naval Listed Circuit Breakers (UL 489 SB)
The standard for molded case circuit breakers which are intended or use aboard non-combatant and
auxiliary naval ships is included in Supplement SB to UL 489, Standard for Molded Case Circuit
Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. The PowerPact H and J-frame circuit breakers are UL 489
SB are UL Naval Listed for use on vessels over 65 ft. (19.8 m) in length and under 65 feet (19.8 m) in
length. These breakers can be added by ordering with the suffix YA which includes the required
copper lugs.
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS)
The PowerPact H- and J-Frame circuit breakers are certified to ABSNVR (American Bureau of
Shipping - Naval Vessel Rules), for use on Naval vessels.
400 Hz Derating
Application of thermal-magnetic circuit breakers at frequencies above 60 Hz requires that special
consideration be given to the effects of high frequency on the circuit breaker characteristics. Thermal
and magnetic operations must be treated separately.
At frequencies below 60 Hz, the thermal rerating of thermal-magnetic circuit breakers is negligible.
However, at frequencies above 60 Hz, thermal rerating is required.
One of the most common high frequency applications is at 400 Hz.
Table 11:
400 Hz Derating
Circuit Breaker
400 Hz Derating Multiplier
H-Frame
0.95
J-Frame
0.90
For more information, refer to Data Bulletin 0100DB0101, Determining Current Carrying Capacity in
Special Applications.
Reverse Feeding of Circuit Breakers

The standard unit-mount H- and J-frame circuit breakers have sealed trip units and may be reverse
fed. See Tables 1518 for catalog numbers.
Circuit breakers with field-interchangeable trip units (designated by the suffix T and labeled LINE and
LOAD) cannot be reverse fed. Neither can circuit breaker frames without terminations or trip units.
See Tables 1921.
12
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Operating Conditions
Temperature
To meet the requirements of the UL489 Standard, molded case circuit breakers are designed, built and
calibrated for use on 50/60 Hz ac systems in a 40C (104F) ambient environment. The thermal-magnetic
system is affected by changes in ambient temperature and the circuit breaker may require re-rating to suit
the environment it operates within. The circuit breaker may be operated at temperatures between -25C
(-13F) and +70C (158 F). For temperature rerating tables, see Table 4 and Table 6.
NOTE: A special 50C (122 F) Rating is available for special high ambient conditions (not UL listed).
Order by adding CA suffix to catalog number.
Altitude
Circuit breakers are suitable for use at altitudes up to 13,100 ft. (4000 m). For altitudes higher than
6560 ft. (2000 m), circuit breakers must be rerated as shown.
Table 12:
Altitude Rerating Values per ANSI C37.20.1 (table 10)
Altitude
6,600 ft. ( 2,000 m)
8,500 ft. (2,600 m)
13,000 ft. (3,900 m)
Voltage
1.00
0.95
0.80
Current
1.00
0.99
0.96
Atmospheric Conditions
The materials used in PowerPact circuit breakers will not support the growth of fungus and mold.
Vibration
PowerPact H- and J-frame circuit breakers meet IEC 60068-2-6 Standards for vibration:
2.0 Hz to 25 Hz - amplitude +/- 1.6 mm
25.0 Hz to 100 Hz - acceleration +/- 4.0 g
Circuit Breaker Endurance

Table 13:
Frame
Operations (Open-Close Cycles)

Number of Operations
With Current
Without Current
150 A H-Frame
4000
4000
250 A J-Frame
1000
5000
Corner Grounded Delta Ratings (1-3)

Circuit breakrs suitable for corner-grounded circuits are marked 1-3. For additional information,
refer to data bulletin 2700DB0202R2/09.
Table 14:
Corner Grounded Delta Ratings (1-3)

2P H-Frame
HD

All Rights Reserved
2P J-Frame
1
HL
JD
JG
JJ
3P H-Frame
JL
HD HG HJ
Ampere Rating (A)
15150
150250
15150
Voltage Rating (Vac)
240
240
480
UL Interrupting Rating (kA)

1
HG HJ
42
42
65
100
42
42
65
100
18
35
65
3P J-Frame
HL
JD
JG
JJ
JL
150250
480
100
18
35
65
100
Built using 3P module
13
05/2009

Three-Phase 240 Vac Corner-Grounded Delta System
06113257
Figure 3:
2P
Circuit Breaker
Load
NOTE: Three-pole circuit breakers must be used on three-phase 480 Vac corner-grounded delta
systems. See Figure 2. The outside poles are to be connected to the ungrounded phases and the
grounded conductor connected to the center poles. Connecting the circuit breaker in a manner other
than that described or shown may result in an unsafe application of the circuit breaker.
Three-Phase 480 Vac Corner-Grounded Delta System
06113258
Figure 4:
3P
Circuit Breaker
Load
14
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Unit-Mount Circuit Breaker Catalog Numbers
Table 15:
PowerPact H-Frame 150 A Unit-Mount Thermal-Magnetic Current Limiting Circuit Breakers (600 Vac, 250
Vdc) with Factory Sealed Trip Unit (Suitable for Reverse Connection)
Fixed AC
Current Magnetic Trip
Rating
@ 40 C
Hold
Trip
Interrupting Rating
D
80%
Rated
G
100%
Rated
80%
Rated
J
100%
Rated
80%
Rated
L
100%
Rated
80%
Rated
100%
Rated
Terminal Wire
Range
H-Frame, 150 A, 2P, 600 Vac 50/60Hz, 250 Vdc

15 A
350 A
750 A
HDL26015
HDL26015C HGL26015
HGL26015C HJL26015
HJL26015C HLL26015
HLL26015C
20 A
350 A
750 A
HDL26020
HDL26020C HGL26020
HGL26020C HJL26020
HJL26020C HLL26020
HLL26020C
25 A
350 A
750 A
HDL26025
HDL26025C HGL26025
HGL26025C HJL26025
HJL26025C HLL26025
HLL26025C
30 A
350 A
750 A
HDL26030
HDL26030C HGL26030
HGL26030C HJL26030
HJL26030C HLL26030
HLL26030C
35 A
400 A
850 A
HDL26035
HDL26035C HGL26035
HGL26035C HJL26035
HJL26035C HLL26035
HLL26035C
40 A
400 A
850 A
HDL26040
HDL26040C HGL26040
HGL26040C HJL26040
HJL26040C HLL26040
HLL26040C
45 A
400 A
850 A
HDL26045
HDL26045C HGL26045
HGL26045C HJL26045
HJL26045C HLL26045
HLL26045C
50 A
400 A
850 A
HDL26050
HDL26050C HGL26050
HGL26050C HJL26050
HJL26050C HLL26050
60 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL26060
HDL26060C HGL26060
HGL26060C HJL26060
HJL26060C HLL26060
70 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL26070
HDL26070C HGL26070
HGL26070C HJL26070
HJL26070C HLL26070
HLL26050C AL150HD
143/0 AWG
HLL26060C Al or Cu
HLL26070C
80 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL26080
HDL26080C HGL26080
HGL26080C HJL26080
HJL26080C HLL26080
HLL26080C
90 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL26090
HDL26090C HGL26090
HGL26090C HJL26090
HJL26090C HLL26090
HLL26090C
100 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL26100
HDL26100C HGL26100
HGL26100C HJL26100
HJL26100C HLL26100
HLL26100C
110 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL26110
HDL26110C HGL26110
HGL26110C HJL26110
HJL26110C HLL26110
HLL26110C
125 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL26125
HDL26125C HGL26125
HGL26125C HJL26125
HJL26125C HLL26125
HLL26125C
150 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL26150
HDL26150C HGL26150
HGL26150C HJL26150
HJL26150C HLL26150
HLL26150C

15 A
350 A
750 A
HDL36015
HDL36015C HGL36015
HGL36015C HJL36015
HJL36015C HLL36015
HLL36015C
20 A
350 A
750 A
HDL36020
HDL36020C HGL36020
HGL36020C HJL36020
HJL36020C HLL36020
HLL36020C
25 A
350 A
750 A
HDL36025
HDL36025C HGL36025
HGL36025C HJL36025
HJL36025C HLL36025
HLL36025C
30 A
350 A
750 A
HDL36030
HDL36030C HGL36030
HGL36030C HJL36030
HJL36030C HLL36030
HLL36030C
35 A
400 A
850 A
HDL36035
HDL36035C HGL36035
HGL36035C HJL36035
HJL36035C HLL36035
HLL36035C
40 A
400 A
850 A
HDL36040
HDL36040C HGL36040
HGL36040C HJL36040
HJL36040C HLL36040
HLL36040C
45 A
400 A
850 A
HDL36045
HDL36045C HGL36045
HGL36045C HJL36045
HJL36045C HLL36045
HLL36045C
50 A
400 A
850 A
HDL36050
HDL36050C HGL36050
HGL36050C HJL36050
HJL36050C HLL36050
60 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL36060
HDL36060C HGL36060
HGL36060C HJL36060
HJL36060C HLL36060
70 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL36070
HDL36070C HGL36070
HGL36070C HJL36070
HJL36070C HLL36070
HLL36050C AL150HD
143/0 AWG
HLL36060C Al or Cu
HLL36070C
80 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL36080
HDL36080C HGL36080
HGL36080C HJL36080
HJL36080C HLL36080
HLL36080C
90 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL36090
HDL36090C HGL36090
HGL36090C HJL36090
HJL36090C HLL36090
HLL36090C
100 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL36100
HDL36100C HGL36100
HGL36100C HJL36100
HJL36100C HLL36100
HLL36100C
110 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL36110
HDL36110C HGL36110
HGL36110C HJL36110
HJL36110C HLL36110
HLL36110C
125 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL36125
HDL36125C HGL36125
HGL36125C HJL36125
HJL36125C HLL36125
HLL36125C
150 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL36150
HDL36150C HGL36150
HGL36150C HJL36150
HJL36150C HLL36150
HLL36150C

All Rights Reserved
15
05/2009

Table 16:
PowerPact J-Frame 250 A Unit-Mount Thermal-Magnetic Current Limiting Circuit Breakers with Factory
Sealed Trip Unit (Suitable for Reverse Connection)
Fixed AC
Current Magnetic Trip
Rating
@ 40 C
Hold
Trip
Interrupting Rating
D
80%
Rated
G
100%
Rated
80%
Rated
J
100%
Rated
80%
Rated
L
100%
Rated
80%
Rated
100%
Rated
Terminal Wire
Range
J-Frame, 250 A, 2P, 600 Vac 50/60Hz, 250 Vdc

150 A
750 A
1500 A
JDL36150
JDL36150C JGL36150
JGL36150C JJL36150
JJL36150C
JLL36150
175 A
875 A
1750 A
JDL36175
JDL36175C JGL36175
JGL36175C JJL36175
JJL36175C
JLL36175
JLL36150C AL175JD
44/0 AWG
JLL36175C Al or Cu
200 A
1000 A
2000 A
JDL36200
JDL36200C JGL36200
JGL36200C JJL36200
JJL36200C
JLL36200
JLL36200C
225 A
1125 A
2250 A
JDL36225
JDL36225C JGL36225
JGL36225C JJL36225
JJL36225C
JLL36225
250 A
1250 A
2500 A
JDL36250
JDL36250C JGL36250
JGL36250C JJL36250
JJL36250C
JLL36250
AL250JD
JLL36225C 3/0 AWG350 kcmil
Al or Cu
JLL36250C

150 A
750 A
1500 A
JDL36150
JDL36150C JGL36150
JGL36150C JJL36150
JJL36150C
JLL36150
175 A
875 A
1750 A
JDL36175
JDL36175C JGL36175
JGL36175C JJL36175
JJL36175C
JLL36175
JLL36150C AL175JD
44/0 AWG
JLL36175C Al or Cu
200 A
1000 A
2000 A
JDL36200
JDL36200C JGL36200
JGL36200C JJL36200
JJL36200C
JLL36200
JLL36200C
225 A
1125 A
2250 A
JDL36225
JDL36225C JGL36225
JGL36225C JJL36225
JJL36225C
JLL36225
250 A
1250 A
2500 A
JDL36250
JDL36250C JGL36250
JGL36250C JJL36250
JJL36250C
JLL36250
AL250JD
JLL36225C 3/0 AWG350 kcmil
Al or Cu
JLL36250C
16
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

I-Line Circuit Breaker Catalog Numbers
Table 17:
Current
Rating @
40 C
PowerPact H-Frame 150 A I-Line Thermal-Magnetic Current Limiting Circuit

Breakers with Factory Sealed Trip Unit (Suitable for Reverse Connection)
Fixed AC Magnetic Trip
Hold
Trip
Interrupting Rating1
D
80% Rated
80% Rated
80% Rated
80% Rated
Terminal Wire
Range

15 A
350 A
750 A
HDA26015( )
HGA26015( )
HJA26015( )
HLA26015( )
20 A
350 A
750 A
HDA26020( )
HGA26020( )
HJA26020( )
HLA26020( )
25 A
350 A
750 A
HDA26025( )
HGA26025( )
HJA26025( )
HLA26025( )
30 A
350 A
750 A
HDA26030( )
HGA26030( )
HJA26030( )
HLA26030( )
35 A
400 A
850 A
HDA26035( )
HGA26035( )
HJA26035( )
HLA26035( )
40 A
400 A
850 A
HDA26040( )
HGA26040( )
HJA26040( )
HLA26040( )
45 A
400 A
850 A
HDA26045( )
HGA26045( )
HJA26045( )
HLA26045( )
50 A
400 A
850 A
HDA26050( )
HGA26050( )
HJA26050( )
HLA26050( )
60 A
800 A
1450 A
HDA26060( )
HGA26060( )
HJA26060( )
HLA26060( )
70 A
800 A
1450 A
HDA26070( )
HGA26070( )
HJA26070( )
HLA26070( )
80 A
800 A
1450 A
HDA26080( )
HGA26080( )
HJA26080( )
HLA26080( )
90 A
800 A
1450 A
HDA26090( )
HGA26090( )
HJA26090( )
HLA26090( )
100 A
900 A
1700 A
HDA26100( )
HGA26100( )
HJA26100( )
HLA26100( )
110 A
900 A
1700 A
HDA26110( )
HGA26110( )
HJA26110( )
HLA26110( )
125 A
900 A
1700 A
HDA26125( )
HGA26125( )
HJA26125( )
HLA26125( )
150 A
900 A
1700 A
HDA26150( )
HGA26150( )
HJA26150( )
HLA26150( )
AL150HD
14-3/0 AWG
Al or Cu

15 A
350 A
750 A
HDA36015
HGA36015
HJA36015
HLA36015
20 A
350 A
750 A
HDA36020
HGA36020
HJA36020
HLA36020
25 A
350 A
750 A
HDA36025
HGA36025
HJA36025
HLA36025
30 A
350 A
750 A
HDA36030
HGA36030
HJA36030
HLA36030
35 A
400 A
850 A
HDA36035
HGA36035
HJA36035
HLA36035
40 A
400 A
850 A
HDA36040
HGA36040
HJA36040
HLA36040
45 A
400 A
850 A
HDA36045
HGA36045
HJA36045
HLA36045
50 A
400 A
850 A
HDA36050
HGA36050
HJA36050
HLA36050
60 A
800 A
1450 A
HDA36060
HGA36060
HJA36060
HLA36060
70 A
800 A
1450 A
HDA36070
HGA36070
HJA36070
HLA36070
80 A
800 A
1450 A
HDA36080
HGA36080
HJA36080
HLA36080
90 A
800 A
1450 A
HDA36090
HGA36090
HJA36090
HLA36090
100 A
900 A
1700 A
HDA36100
HGA36100
HJA36100
HLA36100
110 A
900 A
1700 A
HDA36110
HGA36110
HJA36110
HLA36110
125 A
900 A
1700 A
HDA36125
HGA36125
HJA36125
HLA36125
150 A
900 A
1700 A
HDA36150
HGA36150
HJA36150
HLA36150
AL150HD
14-3/0 AWG
Al or Cu
( ) Indicate phasing

All Rights Reserved
17
05/2009

Table 18:
Current
Rating
@ 40 C
PowerPact J-Frame 250A I-Line Thermal-Magnetic Current Limiting Circuit

Breakers with Factory Sealed Trip Unit (Suitable for Reverse Connection)
Interrupting Rating 1
Fixed AC Magnetic Trip

Hold
Trip
80% Rated
80% Rated
80% Rated
80% Rated
Terminal
Wire Range

150 A
750 A
1500 A
JDA36150( )
JGA36150( )
JJA36150( )
JLA36150( )
175 A
875 A
1750 A
JDA36175( )
JGA36175( )
JJA36175( )
JLA36175( )
200 A
1000 A
2000 A
JDA36200( )
JGA36200( )
JJA36200( )
JLA36200( )
225 A
1125 A
2250 A
JDA36225( )
JGA36225( )
JJA36225( )
JLA36225( )
250 A
1250 A
2500 A
JDA36250( )
JGA36250( )
JJA36250( )
JLA36250( )
AL175JD
4-4/0 AWG
Al or Cu
AL250JD
3/0 AWG-350
kcmil
Al or Cu

150 A
750 A
1500 A
JDA36150
JGA36150
JJA36150
JLA36150
175 A
875 A
1750 A
JDA36175
JGA36175
JJA36175
JLA36175
200 A
1000 A
2000 A
JDA36200
JGA36200
JJA36200
JLA36200
225 A
1125 A
2250 A
JDA36225
JGA36225
JJA36225
JLA36225
250 A
1250 A
2500 A
JDA36250
JGA36250
JJA36250
JLA36250
AL175JD
4-4/0 AWG
Al or Cu
AL250JD
3/0 AWG-350
kcmil
Al or Cu
( ) Indicate phasing
Circuit Breakers with Field-Interchangeable Trip Units

Table 19:
Ampere
Rating
H-Frame 150 A Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Frame with Field-Interchangeable

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units1 (3P, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc)
Fixed AC
Magnetic Trip
Interrupting Rating
D
Hold
Trip
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
15 A
350 A
750 A
HDL36015T
HGL36015T
HJL36015T
HLL36015T
20 A
350 A
750 A
HDL36020T
HGL36020T
HJL36020T
HLL36020T
25 A
350 A
750 A
HDL36025T
HGL36025T
HJL36025T
HLL36025T
30 A
350 A
750 A
HDL36030T
HGL36030T
HJL36030T
HLL36030T
35 A
400 A
850 A
HDL36035T
HGL36035T
HJL36035T
HLL36035T
40 A
400 A
850 A
HDL36040T
HGL36040T
HJL36040T
HLL36040T
45 A
400 A
850 A
HDL36045T
HGL36045T
HJL36045T
HLL36045T
50 A
400 A
850 A
HDL36050T
HGL36050T
HJL36050T
HLL36050T
60 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL36060T
HGL36060T
HJL36060T
HLL36060T
70 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL36070T
HGL36070T
HJL36070T
HLL36070T
80 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL36080T
HGL36080T
HJL36080T
HLL36080T
90 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL36090T
HGL36090T
HJL36090T
HLL36090T
100 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL36100T
HGL36100T
HJL36100T
HLL36100T
110 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL36110T
HGL36110T
HJL36110T
HLL36110T
125 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL36125T
HGL36125T
HJL36125T
HLL36125T
150 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL36150T
HGL36150T
HJL36150T
HLL36150T
Terminal
Wire Range
AL150HD
143/0 AWG
Al or Cu
Circuit breakers will be labeled with Line and Load markings and are not suitable for reverse connections.
Only available on standard (80%) rated 3P unit-mount circuit breakers; not available with I-Line or Plug-In constructions.
18
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Table 20:
Ampere
Rating
J-Frame 250 A Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Frame with Field-Interchangeable

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units1 (3P, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc)
Adjustable AC
Magnetic Trip
Interrupting Rating
D
Terminal
Wire Range
Low
High
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
150 A
750 A
1500 A
JDL36150T
JGL36150T
JJL36150T
JLL36150T
AL175JD
175 A
875 A
1750 A
JDL36175T
JGL36175T
JJL36175T
JLL36175T
4--4/0 AWG Al or Cu
200 A
1000 A
2000 A
JDL36200T
JGL36200T
JJL36200T
JLL36200T
225 A
1125 A
2250 A
JDL36225T
JGL36225T
JJL36225T
JLL36225T
250 A
1250 A
2500 A
JDL36250T
JGL36250T
JJL36250T
JLL36250T
AL250JD
3/0 AWG350 kcmil
Al or Cu
Circuit breakers will be labeled with Line and Load markings and are not suitable for reverse connections.
Only available on standard (80%) rated 3P unit-mount circuit breakers; not available with I-Line or Plug-In constructions.
Table 21:
H-Frame 150A and J-Frame 250 A 3P Basic Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Frame
Without Terminations or Trip Unit (600 Vac, 250 Vdc)
Interrupting Rating
Circuit Breaker Ampere

Frame
Rating
H-Frame
J-Frame
Table 22:
Trip Unit
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
1560 A
HDF36000F06
HGF36000F06
HJF36000F06
HLF36000F06
70150 A
HDF36000F15
HGF36000F15
HJF36000F15
HLF36000F15
150250 A
JDF36000F25
JGF36000F25
JJF36000F25
JLF36000F25
H-Frame and J-Frame 3P Field-Installable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
1560 A H-Frame
H-Frame
70150 A H-Frame
150250 A J-Frame
Amperage
Cat. No.
Amperage
Cat. No.
Amperage
Cat. No.
15 A
HT3015
70 A
HT3070
150 A
JT3150
20 A
HT3020
80 A
HT3080
175 A
JT3175
25 A
HT3025
90 A
HT3090
200 A
JT3200
30 A
HT3030
100 A
HT3100
225 A
JT3225
35 A
HT3035
110 A
HT3110
250 A
JT3250
40 A
HT3040
125 A
HT3125
45 A
HT3045
150 A
HT3150
50 A
HT3050
60 A
HT3060

All Rights Reserved
19
05/2009

UL 489 SC Listed 500 Vdc Circuit Breakers
The UL Listed thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers are
specifically designed for use on ungrounded dc systems having a
maximum short-circuit voltage of 500 Vdc or a maximum floating
(unloaded) voltage of 600 Vdc. The circuit breakers are suitable for
use only with UPS (uninterruptable power supplies) and
ungrounded systems. This two-level voltage rating allows these
circuit breakers to be applied to battery sources having a shortcircuit availability of 20,000 amperes at 500 Vdc.
These circuit breakers are UL Listed for the interrupting ratings
shown only if applied with three poles connected in series (series
connection is external to circuit breaker). See diagram below.
CAUTION/PRECAUCION/
ATTENTION
Connect only as shown/Conectar solo asi/
Francher seulement comme suit:
300 V
300 V
600 V MAX.
or
MAX.
MAX.
o
ou
Load/Carga/
Charge
Load/Carga/
Charge
Source = 600 Vdc max. (floating)

500 Vdc max. (loaded)
NOTE: Due to external series connection, I-Line circuit breakers

are not available for this application.
Table 23:
DC Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Adjustable Magnetic Trip
RangeDC Amperes
Ampere
Rating
Circuit Breaker
Cat. No.
Low
High
100 A
JGL37100D81
400
600
125 A
JGL37125D81
400
600
150 A
JGL37150D81
400
600
175 A
JGL37175D81
400
600
200 A
JGL37200D82
500
850
225 A
JGL37225D82
500
850
250 A
JGL37250D82
500
850
Interrupting Rating
@ 500 Vdc
20 k AIR
20 k AIR
Electronic Motor Circuit Protectors

PowerPact H- and J-frame Electronic Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) are instantaneous-trip circuit
breakers. They are designed to offer short circuit protection and are National Electrical Code (NEC)
compliant when installed as part of a combination controller having motor overload protection. MCP
circuit breakers accept the same accessories and terminals as the equivalent thermal-magnetic circuit
breakers. (See Section 6, FIgures 46 and 47 for trip curves. See Section 3 for Accessories.)
The unique design of the PowerPact MCPs include two dials to allow quick setting adjustments based
on the characteristics of the motor.
The first dial allows for Full Load Amperes (FLA) adjustment across the range of the frame size.
The second dial selects the type of motor protection based on Automatic 1 for Standard Efficiency or
Automatic 2 for High Energy Efficient. When using the automatic settings the MCP microprocessor
automatically adjusts the trip settings for both current and time to align with the start-up characteristic
for the motor type, whether it is a standard or energy-efficient motor. This includes a dampening
means to accommodate a transient motor in-rush current without nuisance tripping of the circuit
breaker. Dial 2 also allows for traditional motor protection from 8 to 13 times the selected FLA.
The MCP dials are detented and allow the device to be set to specific trip values within a typical
accuracy range of +/-5%.
20
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

9n
06113533
(A) Full Load Amp Setting (FLA).

(B) Instantaneous Trip Point Settings (Im).
Standard
dard
Stan
ient
gy Effic ace
Energie Efficente
Energia Efici
Ener
Energy Efficient
Energie Efficace
Energia Eficiente
Full Load Amp Settings

1. Determine the motors full-load current by referring to the nameplate on the motor.
2. Set the trip range by turning the FLA dial to the setting closest to the motors full load current.
Automatic Protection Settings

The MCP microprocessor automatically adjusts the trip settings for both current and time to align with
the start-up characteristics for the motor type selected. This includes a dampening means to
accommodate a transient motor in-rush current without nuisance tripping of the circuit breaker.
Figure 5:
Automatic Protection Settings

A
Auto Setting
Motor Type / Tipo de Motor / Type de Moteur
06114001
Standard
t
Dampening for
Motor In-Rush
Energy Efficient
Energie Efficace
Energia Eficiente
I
Manual Protection Settings
The manual settings may be adjusted to multiples of current based on the dial setting for motor Full
Load Amps (FLA).
Instantaneous
= (FLA) x (Im)
Trip Point

All Rights Reserved
21
05/2009

For example, if FLA dial is set to 20 and Im dial is set to 9x, then the instantaneous trip point will be
180 A.
Instantaneous Trip Point
t
Im
180 Amps
See Section 7 Tables 63 thru 67 for more information.

Table 24:
Frame
H-Frame
J-Frame
H- and J-Frame Electronic Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP)
Current
Full Load
Amperes
Range
Adjustable
Instantaneous
Trip Range
Suffix
J Interrupting
(See SCCR Table
Below)
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
30 A
1.525 A
9325 A
M71
HJL36030M71
HLL36030M71
L Interrupting
(See SCCR Table
Below)
50 A
1442 A
84546 A
M72
HJL36050M72
HLL36050M72
100 A
3080 A
1801040 A
M73
HJL36100M73
HLL36100M73
150 A
58130 A
3481690 A
M74
HJL36150M74
HLL36150M74
250 A
114217 A
6842500 A
M75
JJL36250M75
JLL36250M75
High Short Circuit Current Ratings (SCCR)

The PowerPact MCP helps achieve the high UL508A Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) needed
to meet NEC Article 409 requirements for industrial control panels. They deliver up to 100 kA at
480 Vac SCCR when used in combination with approved Square D NEMA or Telemecanique
IEC motor starters.
Table 25:
Short Circuit Current Ratings (SCCR)
Contactor/Starter
J Interrupting
L Interrupting
200240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
200240 Vac
480 Vac
Tesys D-line and F-line
100 kA
65 kA
25 kA
100 kA
100 kA
600 Vac
50 kA
NEMA Type S
100 kA
65 kA
25 kA
100 kA
100 kA
50 kA
22
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Table 26:
MCP Selection by HP Ratings of Induction-Type Squirrel-Cage and Wound-Rotor Motors
Horsepower Rating of Induction-Type Squirrel-Cage and Wound-Rotor Motors 3 60 Hz NEC Full Load
Amperes
Starter Size
200 Vac
230 Vac
480 Vac
575 Vac
1/2
1/2
3/4
1
3/4
1
1/2
1-1/2
1/2
2
1-1/2
00
3/4
2
3/4
3
1
1
3
1-1/2
5
2
1-1/2
5
2
7-1/2
3
3
7-1/2
10
10
5
1
15
5
15
7-1/2
20
7-1/2
20
25
10
30
10
25
30
40
15
15
40
50
20
20
60
50
25
60
75
25
30
30
75
100
40
40
100
125
50
150
50
60
125
60
150
75
75
200
100
Shaded area is not covered by J-frame electronic motor circuit protector.

All Rights Reserved
200
0.9 A
1.1 A
1.3 A
1.7 A
2.1 A
2.2 A
2.4 A
2.5 A
2.7 A
3A
3.2 A
3.4 A
3.7 A
3.9 A
4.2 A
4.8 A
4.8 A
6A
6.1 A
6.8 A
6.9 A
7.6 A
7.8 A
9A
9.6 A
11 A
14 A
15.2 A
17 A
17.5 A
21 A
22 A
25.3 A
27 A
28 A
32 A
32.2 A
34 A
40 A
41 A
42 A
48.3 A
52 A
54 A
62 A
65 A
68 A
77 A
78.2 A
80 A
92 A
96 A
99 A
104 A
120 A
124 A
125 A
130 A
144 A
150 A
154 A
156 A
177.1 A
180 A
192 A
221 A
240 A
248 A
PowerPact H-Frame and

J-Frame Electronic MCP
HJL36030M71
and
HLL36030M71
1/210 hp
HJL36050M72
and
HLL36050M72
1025 hp
HJL36100M73
and
HLL36100M73
1550 hp
HJL36150M74
and
HLL36150M74
30100 hp
JJL36250M75
and
JLL36250M75
50150 hp
23
05/2009

Automatic Molded Case Switches

H-frame and J-frame circuit breakers are also available in automatic molded case switch construction.
Automatic switches are similar in construction to circuit breakers, except that the switches open
instantaneously at a factory-set non-adjustable trip point calibrated to protect only the molded case
switch itself.
Because of their molded case construction, they are more compact than conventional disconnect
switches and accept electrical accessories for added flexibility. Molded case switches are intended for
use as disconnect devices only.
UL 489 requires molded case switches to be protected by a circuit breaker or fuse of equivalent rating.
Molded case switches are labeled with their withstand ratings. The withstand rating of a switch is
defined as the maximum current at rated voltage that the molded case switch will withstand without
damage when protected by a circuit breaker or fuse with an equal or continuous current rating.
Table 27:
Automatic Molded Case Switch Specifications

Frame
H-Frame
Interrupting Performance
Poles
Catalog Number
UL 489
Withstand Ratings
2P
3P
2P1
2P1
3P
3P
2P1
3P
150 A
HGL26000S15 HGL3600S15 HLL26000S15 HLL36000S15
175 A
JGL26000S17 JGL36000S17 JLL26000S17
JLL36000S17
250 A
JGL26000S25 JGL36000S25 JLL26000S25
JLL36000S25
240 Vac 65 kA
65 kA
125 kA
125 kA
65 kA
65 kA
125 kA
125 kA
480 Vac 35 kA
35 kA
100 kA
100 kA
35 kA
35 kA
100 kA
100 kA
600 Vac 18 kA
18 kA
50 kA
50 kA
18 kA
18 kA
50 kA
50 kA
250 Vdc 20 kA
20 kA
20 kA
20 kA
20 kA
20 kA
20 kA
20 kA
AC Trip Point
2250 A
2250 A
2250 A
2250 A
3125 A
3125 A
3125 A
3125 A
Rated Insulation Voltage
750 Vac
750 Vac
750 Vac
750 Vac
750 Vac
750 Vac
750 Vac
750 Vac
8 kV
8 kV
8 kV
8 kV
8 kV
8 kV
8 kV
8 kV
525 Vac
525 Vac
525 Vac
525 Vac
525 Vac
525 Vac
525 Vac
525 Vac
500 Vdc
500 Vdc
500 Vdc
500 Vdc
500 Vdc
500 Vdc
500 Vdc
500 Vdc
Rated Impulse
IEC
Withstand Voltage
60947-3
Rated Operational ac
Voltage
dc
1
J-Frame
2P devices use a 3P switch frame with the center pole inoperative.
Table 28:
Poles
3
1
PowerPact H-Frame and J-Frame 250 A Unit-Mount Automatic Molded Case

Switches, 600 Vac with Factory Sealed Trip Unit (Suitable for Reverse Connection)
L Interrupting
Ampere G Interrupting
Terminal
Rating
Cat. No.
Trip Point Cat. No.
Trip Point
Wire Range
150 A
HGL26000S151
2250 A
HLL26000S15
2250A
AL150HD
14 AWG3/0 AWG Al/Cu
175 A
JGL26000S17
3125 A
JLL26000S17
3125 A
AL175JD
44/0 AWG Al/Cu
250 A
JGL26000S25
3125 A
JLL26000S25
3125 A
AL250JD
3/0 AWG350 kcmil Al/Cu
150 A
HGL36000S15
2250 A
HLL36000S15
2250 A
AL150HD
14 AWG3/0 AWG Al/Cu
175 A
JGL36000S17
3125A
JLL36000S17
3125 A
AL175JD
44/0 AWG Al/Cu
250 A
JGL36000S25
3125A
JLL36000S25
3125 A
AL250JD
3/0 AWG350 kcmil Al/Cu
True 2P device. Others are a 2P in a 3P module.
24
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Table 29:
PowerPact H-Frame and J-Frame I-Line Automatic Molded Case Switches, 600 Vac
with Factory Sealed Trip Unit (Suitable for Reverse Connection)
Ampere 2-pole
Rating Cat. No.
3-pole
Withstand Rating 1
Cat. No.
240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
65
35
18
1300 A
65
35
18
2500 A
125
100
50
1300 A
Trip
Point
Terminal Wire Range
G Interrupting
150 A
HGA26000S15( )2
HGA36000S15
175 A
JGA26000S17( )
JGA36000S17
250 A
JGA26000S25( )
JGA36000S25
AL150HD
#14#3/0 AWG Al or Cu
AL250JD
#3/0350 kcmil Al or Cu
L Interrupting
150 A
HLA26000S15( )
HLA36000S15
175 A
HLA26000S17( )
JLA36000S17
250 A
JLA26000S25( )
JLA36000S25
125
100
50
AL150HD
#14#3/0 AWG Al or Cu
1300 A
AL250JD
2500 A
#3/0350 kcmil Al or Cu
The withstand rating is the fault current, at rated voltage, that the molded case switch will withstand without damage when
protected by a circuit breaker or fuse with an equal continuous current rating.
2-pole device with 3 in. (76 mm) mounting height, all other 2-pole circuit breakers use 3-pole module 4.5 in. (114 mm) mounting
height.

All Rights Reserved
25
05/2009

Section 2Mounting and Connections
Table 30:
Circuit Breaker Mounting and Connections

Unit Mount1
Circuit Breaker Construction

Connections
I-Line
Drawout
Lug-Lug
Rear
Bus Bar
H-Frame
J-Frame
Including rail, backplate, and flush mounting
Unit-Mount Circuit Breakers

The standard lugs can be removed for the installation of compression-type lugs or bus connections. All
lugs are UL Listed for their proper application and marked for use with aluminum and copper (Al/Cu) or
copper only (Cu) conductors. Lugs suitable for copper and aluminum conductors are made of tinplated aluminum.
Mounting
H- and J-frame circuit breakers may be mounted vertically, horizontally or flat on their back without any
derating of characteristics.
Fixed-mounted H- and J-frame individually-mounted circuit breakers are supplied with two mounting
screws. These mounting screws are inserted through mounting holes molded into the circuit breaker
case and threaded into the mounting enclosure, rails or through the panel door for flush mounting.
A DIN rail mounting bracket (catalog no. S29305) is available for the H- and J-frame circuit breakers .
NOTE: DIN rail mounting is not compatible with motor operated applications.
06113275
Unit-Mounting Options
06113273
06113274
Figure 6:
Mounting on Rails
Mounting on Backplate
Flush Mounting
26
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

06113276
Mechanical Lugs
Unit-mount H-frame and J-frame circuit breakers can be ordered with mechanical line and load side
lugs. The standard lugs can be removed for the installation of compression-type lugs or bus
connections. All lugs are UL Listed for their proper application and marked for use with aluminum and
copper (Al/Cu) or copper only (Cu) conductors. Lugs suitable for copper and aluminum conductors are
made of tin-plated aluminum. Lugs suitable for use with copper conductors only are made of copper.
Mechanical Lugs for the H- and J-frame circuit breakers lay on top of the circuit breaker terminals and
can be installed without the use of any tools. The lugs are held in place with snap features built into the
insulative retainer and are secured with the clamp force applied to the wire binding screw.
Mechanical lugs come in both aluminum and copper versions and are sold either factory installed or as
field installable kits.
Table 31:
Mechanical Lugs for H- and J-Frame Circuit Breakers

Catalog
Number
Frame
Ampere
Conductor
Range
Wires Per Lug
06113289
(1) 1410 AWG

(2.56 mm2)
AL150HD
HD/HG/HJ/HL 15150
Al/Cu
(1) 83/0 AWG
06113293
06113292
06113291
06113290
(1095 mm2)
CU150HD HD/HG/HJ/HL 15150
Cu
AL175JD
JD/JG/JJ/JL
150175
Al/Cu
AL250JD1 JD/JG/JJ/JL
200250
Al/Cu
CU250JD
150250
Cu
JD/JG/JJ/JL
(1) 142/0 AWG

(2.570 mm2)
(1)44/0 AWG
(2095 mm2)
(1) #3/0350 kcmil

(120185 mm2)
(1) 1/0 AWG300 kcmil

(50185 mm2)
Wire
Strip Binding
Temp.
Length Screw
Torque
75C
75C
75C
75C
75C
75C
0.65 in.
50 lb-in
(16 mm) (5 Nm)

0.65 in.
120 lb-in
(16 mm) (14 Nm)
0.65 in.
120 lb-in
(16 mm) (14 Nm)
1.0 in.
225 lb-in
(25 mm) (26 Nm)
1.0 in.
225 lb-in
(25 mm) (26 Nm)
1.0 in.
250 lb-in
(25 mm) (28 Nm)
AL250JD lugs are required for 250350 kcmil wire range.

All Rights Reserved
27
05/2009

Bus-Bar Connections
Both H-frame and J-frame circuit breakers may be equipped with captive nuts and screws for direct
connection to bars.
Terminal nut inserts are needed for replacement of lug connections with bus bar connections.
Table 32:
Terminal Nuts for Bus Bar Connection of H-Frame and J-Frame Circuit Breakers
06113279
Description
Frame
Tap
Cat. No.
Qty Per Kit
H-Frame Terminal Nut InsertEnglish
HD/HG/HJ/HL
1/4-20
S37425
H-Frame Terminal Nut InsertEnglish
HD/HG/HJ/HL
1/4-20
S37444
H-Frame Terminal Nut InsertMetric
HD/HG/HJ/HL
M6
S37426
J-Frame Terminal Nut InsertEnglish
JD/JG/JJ/JL
1/4-20
S37427
J-Frame Terminal Nut InsertEnglish
JD/JG/JJ/JL
1/4-20
S37445
J-Frame Terminal Nut InsertMetric
JD/JG/JJ/JL
M8
S37428
Torque
8090 lb-in
(910.2 Nm)
8090 lb-in
(910.2 Nm)
Terminal Nut Insert
Bar Dimensions
Dimension
H-Frame
J-Frame
0.250 in.
(6.4 mm)
0.3125 in.
(7.9 mm)
0.1250.375 in.
(3.29.5 mm)
0.1250.375 in.
(3.2.5 mm)
0.50 in.
(12.7 mm)
0.500.75 in.
(12.71.1 mm)
0.3 in.
(7.6 mm)
0.625 in.
(15.9 mm)
0.3 in.
(7.6 mm)
0.375 in.
(9.5 mm)
B
06113283
Table 33:
D
A
E
= =
Voltage Takeoff (Control Wire Terminals) for Mechanical Lugs and Terminal Nuts
06113294
Mechanical Lug Control

Wire Terminal
Mechanical lugs may be equipped with a separate control wire termination. The kit is available factory
installed or as a field installable kit. The adaptor is secured underneath the lug and has a tab extension
suitable for attachment of a .250 inch slip-on connector.
Fully insulated type connectors must be used to prevent live parts from extending into the wiring gutter
area.
Table 34:
Control Wire Terminals

Description
06114127
Bussbar Control Wire

Terminal
Frame
Cat. No.
Qty Per Kit
Control Wire Terminal for H-Frame Lugs
HD/HG/HJ/HL
S37423
Control Wire Terminal for J-Frame Lugs
JD/JG/JJ/JL
S37424
Control Wire Terminal for H-Frame Terminal Nut
HD/HG/HJ/HL
S37429
Control Wire Terminal for J-Frame Terminal Nut
JD/JG/JJ/JL
S37430
Mechanical Lugs
Bussbar Connection
28
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

06113295
Power Distribution Connectors

The power distribution connectors (PDC) can be used for multiple load wire connections on one circuit
breaker. Use in place of standard distribution blocks to save space and time. Field installable kit
includes tin-plated aluminum lug, connectors, and required mounting hardware.
For use on load end of circuit breaker only
For use in UL 508 Industrial Control applications only

For use in UL 1995/CSA C22.2 No. 236 heating and cooling equipment
For copper wire only
Table 35:
Power Distribution Connectors
H-Frame
H-Frame
J-Frame
Kit Number
PDC6HD6
PDC3HD2
PDC6JD4
06113299
06113298
06113297
06113296
Frame
J-Frame
Number of Wires
Wire Range
Wire Binding Screw Torque
86 AWG
(1016 mm2)
25 lb-in
(2.8 Nm)
1410 AWG
(2.56 mm2)
20 lb-in
(2.3 Nm)
62 AWG
(1635 mm2)
40 lb-in
(4.5 Nm)
148 AWG
(2.510 mm2)
35 lb-in
(4.0 Nm)
64 AWG
(1625 mm2)
35 lb-in
(4.0 Nm)
8 AWG
(10 mm2)
25 lb-in
(2.8 Nm)
1410 AWG
(2.56 mm2)
20 lb-in
(2.3 Nm)
146 AWG Cu
(2.516 mm2)
35 lb-in
(4.0 Nm)
and 1
32/0 AWG Cu
(3570 mm2)
50 lb-in
(5.6 Nm)
41 AWG Cu
(2570 mm2)
40 lb-in
(4.5 Nm)
and 1
32/0 AWG Cu
(3570 mm2)
50 lb-in
(5.6 Nm)
PDC3JD20
See Table 37 for the phase barriers for PDCs.

All Rights Reserved
29
05/2009

Compression Lugs
Both copper and aluminum compression lug kits are available for the H-frame and J-frame circuit
breakers. Each kit contains required insulators and all mounting hardware.
Table 36:
Compression Lug Kits

Frame
06113301
06113300
Lug
Type
62 AWG Cu or Al
YA060HD
(1635 mm2)
H-Frame
1/04/0 AWG Cu or Al
YA150HD
(5095 mm2)
Aluminum
13/0 AWG Cu or Al
06113302
YA150JD
(5095 mm2)
J-Frame
3/0 AWG350 kcmil Cu or Al
06113303
YA250J35
(95185 mm2)
CYA060HD
H-Frame
CYA150HD
Copper
CYA150JD
06113304
Ampere Lugs
Mounting
Rating Per Kit Screw Torque
Kit Number Wire Range
J-Frame
CYA250J3
61/0 AWG Cu
(1650 mm2)
42/0 AWG Cu
(2570 mm2)
42/0 AWG Cu
(2570 mm2)
2/0 AWG300 kcmil Cu
(70185 mm2)
60 A
150 A
200 A
250 A
60 A
150 A
150 A
250 A
8090 lb-in
(9.010.2 Nm)
8090 lb-in
(9.010.2 Nm)
130140 lb-in
(14.715.8 Nm)
130140 lb-in
(14.715.8 Nm)
8090 lb-in
(9.010.2 Nm)
8090 lb-in
(9.010.2 Nm)
130140 lb-in
(14.715.8 Nm)
130140 lb-in
(14.715.8 Nm)
Terminal Shields
Table 37:
Terminal Shields and Phase Barriers
06113493
Used With
Mechanical Lugs
Qty
Cat. No. Per
Kit
Description
Short Lug
Shield1
H-Frame Short Lug Shield
Frame
Max. Wire Size
H-Frame 60 A
3 AWG
S37446
Dimension B (in.)
0.50
H-Frame 150 A
3/0 AWG
S37447
0.50
J-Frame
350 kcmil
S37448
0.24
Phase barrier or
terminal shield
extension past end
of circuit breaker
B See Table
Compatible with:
Compression Lugs
06113494
Power
Distribution
Connectors and
Compression
Lugs
PDC
H-Frame
Long Lug
Shield
J-Frame
Long Lug
Shield
Phase Barriers
Copper
PDC6HD6
YA060HD
CYA060HD
PDC3HD2
YA150HD
CYA150HD
PDC6JD4
YA150JD
CYA150JD
PDC3JD2
CYA250J3
S374492
2.24
S374502
1.68
29329
3.13
Extremity
of
Molded Case
w/Mechanical
Lugs
B See Table
Short lug shields provide IP20 protection for mechanical lugs and are compatible with control wire terminals.
J-frame terminal shield is not compatible with the YA250J35 compression terminal.
06114129
J-Frame Short Lug Shield
Aluminum
J-Frame Long Lug Shield
30
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Rear Connections
Rear connections are easily installed on the circuit breaker terminals.
The same connection may be installed flat, vertical or at a 45 angle with all
combinations possible. The circuit breaker is mounted on a backplate.
Four Positions Possible for Each Connector
Vertical
45 Angle
06113278
Horizontal
06113277
Figure 7:
Table 38:
Rear Connections
H-Frame
Device
Description
Poles
Factory-Installed Field-Installable Factory-Installed Field-Installable

Termination No. Catalog Number Termination No. Catalog Number
S37432
Short Rear Connections (Set of 2)
2 or 3
S374331
Long Rear Connections (Set of 2)
2 or 3
S37434
S37439
Short Terminal Cover (3P)
S37436
S37440
Mixed Rear Connection Kit
Consisting of:
1
J-Frame
2x
S37437
2x
S374381
For use with 3P circuit breakers only.
I-Line Circuit breakers
06113282
H- and J-frame circuit breakers are available in I-Line construction for easy installation and removal in
I-Line panelboards and switchboards.
I-Line circuit breakers use blow-on type line side connectors. In case of a short circuit, increased
magnetic flux causes the plug-on connectors of the circuit breaker to tighten their grasp on the
panelboard or switchboard bus bars. The I-Line connectors and circuit breaker mounting bracket are
integral parts of I-Line circuit breakers and cannot be removed or replaced. I-Line circuit breakers
come with mechanical load side lugs.
Table 39:
Phase OptionsExample HDA36150( )
Phase Option Phase

Number
Connection
2P Example
AB
HDA261501
AC
HDA261502
BA
HDA261503
BC
HDA261504
CA
HDA261505
CB
HDA261506
Standard
ABC
HDA36150
CBA
HDA361506

All Rights Reserved
3P Example
31
05/2009

Plug-In and Drawout Circuit Breakers

H- and J-frame circuit breakers are available in a plug-in and drawout construction.
Plug-In Circuit Breaker Mounting

06113281
The plug-in base is mounted through a front panel. The plug-in configuration makes it possible to:
Extract and/or rapidly replace the circuit breaker without having to touch connections
Allow for addition of future circuits at a later date
When the circuit breaker is in the connected position, the primary voltage is fed through the circuit
breaker by means of multiple finger disconnects. Control voltage of internal accessories is provided
through secondary disconnects.
Parts of a Plug-In Configuration
06113284
06113311
Drawout Mounting
Safety Trip Interlock: The safety trip

causes automatic tripping if the circuit
breaker is ON before engaging or
withdrawing it; the safety trip does not
prevent the circuit breaker operation, even
when the circuit breaker is disconnected.
Primary
Disconnects
Disconnects: Provides both primary and

secondary disconnect to the circuit
breaker.
Plug-In Mounting
6
4
5
8
9
7
8
Secondary
Disconnects
Plug-in Base: The plug-in base provides

mounting through a front panel or mounting
on rails.
06113285
Figure 8:
Table 40:
Safety Trip Interlock

Mounted on Back of
Circuit Breaker
Plug-In Base (Mounting Options)
Mounting Through
a Front Panel
Mounting on Rails
Plug-In Mounting
Description
Suffix
Catalog No.
Kit for Compact NSF Circuit Breaker (Stationary and Moving Part)
29293
Stationary Part
29278
Plug-In Base
Consisting of:
Moving Part
Short Terminal Covers
HJ00
29321
29270
Power Connections
29268 (3)
32
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Drawout Circuit Breaker Mounting
The drawout-mounted chassis is Listed under UL file E113555 and Certified under CSA file LR69561.
The chassis is made up of two side plates installed on the base and two other plates mounted on the
circuit breaker.
Figure 9:
Drawout Mounting Positions

Disconnected
Removed
06113288
Connected
Table 41:
Drawout Mounting
Description
Suffix
Catalog No.
Kit for Compact NSF Circuit Breaker (Stationary and Moving Part)
29293
Stationary Part
29278
HJ00
29321
Plug-In Base
Fixed Part of Chassis
Consisting of:
Moving Part
Moving Part of Chassis
Short Terminal Covers
Toggle Collar
Table 42:
29282
29282
29270
Power Connections
29268 (3)
Plug-In and Drawout Accessories
Description
Secondary
Disconnecting
Blocks
pus
h
to
Shutters
Chassis
Accessories
Catalog No.
Fixed Part
Moving Part
9-Wire Connector
29273
9-Wire Connector
29274
Support for 2 Moving Connectors
Two Shutters for Plug-In Base
29275
29271
Extended Escutcheon for Toggle

(For circuit breakers with toggle through front panel, intended to maintain the
29284
degree of protection whatever the position of the circuit breaker. Supplied with a
toggle extension.)
Locking Device (Key Lock is Not Included)
29286
Two Position Indicating Switches (Connected/Disconnected)

(Circuit breaker position switches may be applied on the fixed part of the
chassis, indicating the connected and disconnected positions.)
29287
Chassis Functions
All functions of the plug-in base, plus:
Disconnected position: the power circuit is disconnected, the circuit breaker is simply withdrawn
and may still be operated (ON (I), OFF (O), push-to-trip)
Circuit breaker may be locked using one to three padlockspadlock diameters 0.190.31 in.
(58 mm)

All Rights Reserved
33
05/2009

Section 3Accessories
Internal Accessories
Field-installable accessories provide flexibility for installation at point of use.
Auxiliary switches and the shunt trip or undervoltage release are easy to install, reliable and common
to many PowerPact circuit breakers.
Figure 10:
Accessory Locations
(OF1) Auxiliary Switch
06113305
(SD) Alarm Switch

(SDE) Overcurrent Trip Switch
(OF2) Auxiliary Switch
SDE Adapter
(MX) Shunt Trip or

(MN) Undervoltage Trip
Table 43:
Maximum Accessory Combinations
Poles
Device
2P (HD + HG)1
Shunt trip or UVR (Undervoltage Release)
1A/1B + Alarm (SD)
3P
Shunt trip or UVR (Undervoltage Release)
2A/2B + Alarm (SD) + Overcurrent Trip (SDE)
Combination
All other 2P devices are 2P in a 3P module
Accessory Connections
Electrical accessories are fitted with numbered terminal blocks for wires with the following maximum size:
16 AWG (1.5 mm2) for auxiliary switches (OF1 or OF2), and shunt trip (MX) or undervoltage trip (MN)
14 AWG (2.5 mm2) for the motor operator
Auxiliary circuit wiring exits fixed mounted devices through a knock-out in the front cover.
Accessory Connections
NOTE: See page 32 for plug-in

and drawout options.
06164128
Figure 11:
C2
T
C1
/SH
MX
0V
200/24
34
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Auxiliary and Alarm Switches

Auxiliary switches provide remote information of the circuit breaker status and can thus be used for
indications, electrical locking, relays, etc.
Open/Closed (OF) Auxiliary Switch
Indicates the position of the circuit breaker contacts
Trip Indication (SD) Switch
Applications
OF/SD Switch
Bell alarm indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to an overload, short circuit or ground fault, the
operation of a shunt trip or undervoltage trip or the push-to-trip button
Resets when the circuit breaker is reset
Overcurrent Trip Switch (SDE)
Indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to an overload, short circuit or ground fault
Resets when the circuit breaker is reset
The above auxiliary switches are also available in low-level versions capable of switching very low loads (e.g.,
for controlling PLCs or electronic circuits).
SDE
Installation &
Connection
The OF, SD and SDE switches snap into cavities behind the front accessory cover of the circuit breaker
One model serves for all indication functions depending on where it is fitted in the circuit breaker
The SDE function of a circuit breaker equipped with a thermal-magnetic trip unit requires the SDE adapter
Standards
The internal accessories comply with requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
UL 489 and Canadian Standard Association C22.2 No. 5-02 Standards
All internal accessories are Listed for fixed installation per UL file E103955 and Certified under CSA file LR 69561
Auxiliary switches comply with UL 489, CSA C22.2 No. 5-02 and IEC 60947-5 Standards
Low-level switches are not UL Recognized
Table 44:
Electrical Characteristics
Standard
(Silver Contacts)
Low-Level
(Gold Contacts)
Supplied as Standard (Form C)
Maximum Number of Contacts
240/380
6A
5A
480
6A
5A
600/690
6A
24/48
2.5 A
2.5 A
240
0.5 A
0.8 A
380
0.3 A
0.3 A
Characteristic
Voltage
Standard (100 mA/24 V minimum load)

Vac
Vdc
Low-level (1 mA/4 V minimum load with a maximum current and voltage of 100 mA 10 V.
Breaking Capacity
at a Power Factor (p.f.) of 0.3
NOTE: NOTE: If the maximum voltage and current is exceeded, the low-level function of the switch will
be lost but the switch will continue to function as a standard switch with the following specifications.
Vac
Vdc
Table 45:
24/48
5A
240
5A
380
5A
24/48
5/2.5 A
125
0.5 A
250
0.3 A
Switch Catalog Numbers
Alarm/Overcurrent Trip Switch

Switch
Auxiliary Switch
Factory-Installed Suffix
Field-Installable Kit No.
Contacts
Field-Installable Kit No.
Alarm Switch (SD)
BC
S29450
1A/1B Standard
AA
S29450
Alarm Switch (SD) Low-level
BH
S29452
2A/2B Standard
AB
S29450 (2)
SDE Standard1
BD
S29450 + S29451
1A/1B Gold
AE
S29482
SDE Low-level1
BJ
S29452 + S29451
2A/2B Gold
AF
S29482 (2)
SD and SDE Standard1
BE
S29450 (2) + S29451
SD and SDE Low-level1
BK
S29452 (2) + S29451
Includes SDE Adapter S29451.

All Rights Reserved
35
05/2009

Shunt Trip (MX) and Undervoltage Trip (MN) Switches

A voltage release can be used to trip the circuit breaker via a control signal.
Shunt trip (MX)
Undervoltage trip (MN)
Applications
Installation and
Connection
Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage drops below a tripping threshold
Drops out between 35% and 70% of the rated voltage
Circuit breaker closing is possible only if the voltage exceeds 85% of the rated voltage
Permanent type
If an undervoltage condition exists, operation of the closing mechanism of the circuit breaker will not
permit the main contacts to touch, even momentarily. This is commonly called Kiss Free
Accessories are common to H- and J-frame circuit breakers and snap into cavities under the front
accessory cover of the circuit breaker
Each terminal may be connected by one #18#14 AWG (1.02.5 mm2) stranded copper wire
Operation
Table 46:
Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage rises above 70% of its rated voltage
Impulse type 20 ms or maintained control signals
AC shunt trips are suitable for ground fault protection when combined with a Class I ground fault
sensing element
The circuit breaker must be reset locally after being tripped by shunt trip or undervoltage trip (MN or MX)
MN or MX tripping has priority over manual (or motor operator) closing; in the presence of a standing trip
order such an action does not result in any closing, even temporarily, of the main contacts
Endurance: 50% of the rated mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker for circuit breakers
Electrical Characteristics
Description
AC
Rated Voltage (V)

Pickup (MX)
Consumption
Seal-in (MN)
Clearing Time (ms)
Table 47:
Voltage
DC
24, 48, 110.130, 208.277, 380.480, 525, 600
12, 24, 30, 48, 60, 125, 250
< 10 VA
<5W
< 5 VA
<5W
< 50
< 50
Shunt Trip and Undervoltage Trip Suffix Codes and Kit Numbers
Shunt Trip
Undervoltage Release UVR
Factory-Installed Suffix Field-Installable Kit No. Factory-Installed Suffix Field-Installable Kit No.
24 Vac
SK
S29384
UK
S29404
48 Vac
SL
S29385
UL
S29405
120 Vac
SA
S29386
UA
S29406
208-277 Vac
SD
S29387
UD
S29407
380-480 Vac
SH
S29388
UH
S29408
525-600 Vac
SJ
S29389
UJ
S29409
12 Vdc
SN
S29382
UN
S29402
24 Vdc
SO
S29390
UO
S29410
30 Vdc
SU
S29391
UU
S29411
48 Vdc
SP
S29392
UP
S29412
60 Vdc
SV
S29383
UV
S29403
125 Vdc
SR
S29393
UR
S29413
250 Vdc
SS
S29394
US
S29414
36
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Add-On Ground-Fault Module (GFM)

09603039
The Micrologic Ground-Fault Moduel (GFM) is a UL Listed circuit breaker accessory which protects
equipment from damage caused by ground faults. It is an add-on module which, when connected to a
PowerPact H- or J-frame circuit breaker, provides ground-fault sensing and ground-fault relay
functions.
HD/JD ground-fault modules feature:
Ground-Fault Module
Modulo de falla a tierra
Module de dfaut de mise la terre
GFM150HD
60A
40A
80A
1
4068715 H238
20A
52H
4
3
100A 600 Vac/V
Adjustable ground-fault pickup levels.
Fault-powered (via the sensing current transformer) for electronics, shunt trip, and integral test
feature. Meets NEC 230-95(c).
A 12 Vdc shunt trip module (Catalog No. S29382) is required in the circuit breaker. This may be
field installed or factory installed when the circuit breaker is ordered with an -SN suffix.
LISTED
Circuit
Breaker
Accessory
100A
ault Indicator
Ground-Fault Indicator
Push-to-test
Delay Band
Pick-up
Push to reset
Requires 120 V
1=min.
Pousser pour rinitialiser
Class I Ground-fault Protection
Indicador de falla a tierra
Proteccin de falla a tierra clase I
Oprima para restablecer
Protection de dfaut de mise la terre classe I
Indicateur de dfaut de
mise la terre
max.
Replace cover after adjusting/Replacer le couvercle avant aprs le rglage/Vuelva a colocar la cubierta despus de ajustar
Terminal strip wiring terminals must not be

be dielectric tested.
No se deben realizar pruebas dielctricasa a
las terminalses de la tabilla de conexiones.
Les bornes de cblage de la barrette de
connexion ne doivent pas tre vrofles
dilectriquement.
DANGER PELIGRO
! DANGER PELIGRO
Replace lug cover after

HAZARD OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR BURN.
wiring.
PELIGRO DE DESCARGA ELECTRICA O Vuelva a colocar despus
QUEMADURAS.
de realizar el cableado .
DANGER DE DCHARGE ELECTRIQUE OU
DE
Replacez
le couvreBRULURE.
cosse aprs le cblage
Adjustable ground-fault time delays.

Integral ground-fault push-to-test feature.
Ground-fault indicator (mechanical for local, contacts for remote).
All GFMs are supplied for I-Line mounting as standard, easily convertible to unit mount by
removing the I-Line bracket.
The GFM system requires the following:

J-Frame Circuit Breaker
with GFM Installed
H-frame (15150 A) or J-frame (150250 A) molded case circuit breaker.

Shunt trip for circuit breaker (may be factory-installed or field-installed).
Bus bar connection (terminal nut inserts) for OFF end of circuit breaker.
Optional neutral current transformer, catalog number GFM25CT (must be ordered for 4-wire
applications).
Table 48:
Ground-Fault Module
Catalog No.
Rating
Sensitivity
GFM150HD
150 A
20, 40, 60, 80, 100 A
Time Delay (Approximate)

0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.6 sec
GFM250JD
250 A
40, 80, 120, 160, 200 A
0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.6 sec
See Section 6, Figure 4849 for GFM trip curves.

All Rights Reserved
37
05/2009

Earth Leakage Module (ELM) for PowerPact H- and J-Frame MCCBs

The Earth Leakage Module (ELM) is an add-on module which, when connected to a PowerPact H- or
J-frame MCCB, provides low-level ground-fault sensing and ground-fault relay functions.
Because these ELMs are highly sensitive (30 mA to 3 A), they provide much greater protection than
GFMs (20 Amps to 200 Amps sensitivity). The ELMs provide greater protection of control circuits and
other sensitive equipment. The associated circuit breaker must have a 48 Vdc shunt trip), which may
be field-installed (kit S29392) or factory-installed (suffix SP) in the H- or J-Frame circuit breaker.
The add-on Earth Leakage Module (ELM) features:
J-Frame Circuit Breaker

with ELM Installed
Adjustable ground-fault pickup levels as low as 30 mA
Integral ground fault push-to-test feature
All ELMs are supplied for I-Line mounting and are easily convertible to unit-mount by removing
the I-Line mounting feet
Three poles; 240 to 600 Vac maximum: 3-phase, 3-wire (no neutral) and 1-phase, 2-wire
applications
Line-power obtained through internal bus to provide power for electronics, shunt trip, and integral
test feature.
A shunt trip is required in the circuit breaker; it may be field-installed or factory-installed in the
PowerPact H and J circuit breakers.
UL 1053 Ground-fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment
Adjustable ground-fault time delays from instantaneous to 500 msec

(time delay can be applied to any setting)
Ground-fault indicator; pop-up button for local status and contacts for remote indication (to be used
only with the tripping option)
Table 49:
ELM Selection Chart 1
Companion Circuit Breaker

Prefix
Size
Enclosure Space
Required I-Line
Switchboard
HD, HG, HJ, HL
15150 A
LA
ELM150HD
JD, JG, JJ, JL
150250 A
LA
ELM250JD
Catalog
Number
Pick-Up
Adjustments
Ground-Fault
Time Delay
Adjustments
30 mA
100 mA
300 mA
1A
3A
Instantaneous
60 ms
100 ms
500 msec
At 250 A, the ELM250JD can be used with 80% rated circuit breakers only.
See Section 6, Figure 50 for ELM Trip Curves.
38
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Motor Operator
The motor operator remotely operates the circuit breaker featuring easy and sure operation:
All circuit breaker indications and information remain visible and accessible, including trip unit
settings and circuit breaker connection
Suitability for isolation is maintained and padlocking remains possible

Double insulation front face
Applications
Local motor-driven operation, centralized operation, automatic distribution control

Normal/standby source changeover or switching to a replacement source to optimize energy costs
Load shedding and reconnection to optimize energy costs
Synchrocouplingless than five cycle closing time
Installation and
Connection
All installation (fixed, plug-in/drawout mounting) and connection capabilities are maintained
Connections of the motor operator module are to a built-in terminal block behind its front cover
Stranded copper wire 14 AWG (2.5 mm2)
The motor operator is connected in series with the overcurrent (SDE) trip switch. (The SDE adapter is
included with the motor operator.) See wiring diagrams on page 44.
Automatic
Operation
Manual
Operation
Table 50:
ON (I) and OFF (O) by two impulse type or continuous control signals
Depending on the wiring, resetting can be done locally, remotely or automatically
Optional manual reset if tripping due to an electrical fault (with SDE)
Anti-pumping feature.
Transfer to manual mode with possibility of remote mode indication

ON (I) and OFF (O) by two push buttons
Recharging of stored-energy system by pumping the lever nine times
Padlocking in off position
Motor Operator Characteristics
Response Time (ms)
Opening
< 500
Closing
< 80
Maximum Cycles Per Minute
4
4860
110130
AC 50/60 Hz
208277
380480
Control Voltage
2430
4860
DC
110130
250
Consumption
AC (VA)
Opening/Closing
500
DC (W)
Opening/Closing
500
Minimum Operating Order (ms)
700
Operating Voltage
85110% rated
Table 51:
Voltage
Motor Operator Accessory Suffix Codes and Catalog Numbers

Field-Installable Catalog No.

H-Frame
J-Frame
48/60 Vac
ML
S29440
S31548
120 Vac
MA
S29433
S31540
277 Vac
MD
S29434
S31541
380/480 Vac
MH
S29435
S31542
24/30 Vdc
MO
S29436
S31543
48/60 Vdc
MP
S29437
S31544
110/130 Vdc
MR
S29438
S31545
250 Vdc
MS
S29439
S31546

All Rights Reserved
Manual Mode
Switch
39
05/2009

Rotary Operating Handles

Directly-Mounted Rotary Operating Handles
Installation
The directly mounted rotary operating handle replaces the circuit breaker front accessory cover (secured by screws).
The direct rotary handle maintains:
Operation
Directly Mounted Rotary

Operating Handle
Models
Suitability for isolation

Indication of three positions: ON (I), Tripped and OFF (O)
Access to the push-to-trip button
Visibility of, and access to, trip unit settings
The circuit breaker may be locked in the OFF position by using one to three
padlocks (not supplied), padlock shackle diameter 0.190.31 in. (58 mm)
Standard with black handle

VDE type with red handle and yellow bezel for machine tool control
I/ON
(Closed)
Tripped
O/OFF
(Open)
Accessories transform the standard direct rotary handle for the following situations:
Motor control centers (MCCs):

Opening of door prevented when circuit breaker is on
Closing of circuit breaker inhibited when door is open
Machine tool control; complies with CNOMO E03.81.501N; degree of protection IP54
Early make or early break contacts may be installed into direct mount rotary handle
Variations
Standards
The directly-mounted rotary operating handle is UL Listed under file E103955 and CSA Certified under file LR 69561
IEC-Style Door-Mounted Rotary Operating Handle

The extended rotary operating handle is made up of:
Installation
A unit that replaces the front accessory cover of the circuit breaker (secured by screws)
An assembly (handle and front plate) on the door that is always secured in the same position, whether the
circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally
An adjustable extension shaft
The handle mechanism can be used in NEMA 3R and 12 enclosure applications
The door mounted operating handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed in enclosure from the
front. The door mounted operating handle maintains:
Operation
Door Mounted Rotary
Operating Handle

Indication of the three positions OFF (O), ON (I) and tripped
Visibility of and access to trip unit settings when the door is open
Degree of protection: IP40 as per IEC 529
Defeatable interlock prevents opening of door when circuit breaker is on

The circuit breaker may be locked in the off position by using one to three padlocks, padlock shackle diameter
0.190.31 in. (58 mm); padlocks are not supplied; locking prevents opening of the switchboard door
The shaft length is the distance between the back of the circuit breaker and the door:
Shaft
Length
Minimum shaft length is 7.4 (185 mm)

Maximum shaft length is 24 in. (600 mm)
Extended shaft length must be adjusted
Models
Standard with black handle

VDE type with red handle and yellow bezel for machine tool control
Variations
For withdrawable configurations, the extended rotary handle is also available with a telescopic shaft containing
two stable positions
Standards
The extended rotary operating handle is UL Listed under file E103955 and CSA Certified under file LR 69561
Table 52:
Rotary Operating Handle Suffix Codes and Kit Numbers
Handle Type (color)
Factory-Installed Suffix Field-Installable Kit No.
Direct Mount (black)
RD10
S29337
Extended Door Mount (black)
RE10
S29338
Telescoping (black)
RT10
S29343
Direct Mount (red)
RD20
S29339
Extended Door Mount (red)
RE20
S29340
40
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Class 9421 NEMA Door Mounted Rotary Operating Handles
The extended rotary operating handle is made up of:
Installation
A mounting plate that provides a rotary actuator for a standard toggle circuit breaker
Handle assemblies available for NEMA 3, 3R, 4, and 4X
Available in standard or short (3 in.) handle assemblies
The door mounted operating handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed in enclosure from the front.
Operation
Provides ON (I) and OFF (O) indication

The circuit breaker may be locked in the off position
The shaft length is the distance between the back of the circuit breaker and the door:
Shaft Length
Table 53:
Minimum mounting depth is 5.5 in. (138 mm)

Maximum mounting depth is 10.75 in. (273 mm) with standard shaft
Maximum mounting depth is 21.3 in. (543 mm) with long shaft
Class 9421 Door-Mounted Operating Mechanism
Description
Catalog Number
Standard Shaft Kit
9421LJ1
Long Shaft Kit
9421LJ4
Table 54:
Component Parts
Description
Catalog Number
Standard Handle Assembly
Type 1, 3R, 12
9421LH6
NEMA Type 3 and 4, Painted
9421LH48
NEMA Type 3 and 4, Chrome Plated
9421LC48
Operating Mechanism
Includes Lockout
9421LJ7
Standard Shaft
Support Bracket Not Required
9421LS8
Long Shaft
Support Bracket Included
9421LS10
Class 9422 Cable Operating Handle

Flange-mounted handle cable operating mechanism is for use with Class 9422 Type A handle
operators especially designed for tall, deep enclosures where placement flexibility is required.
The cable operator maintains:

Indication of three positions: O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped
Access to push-to-test
The circuit breaker may be locked in the off position by one to three padlocks
Door can be locked closed due to interlocking features of the handle operator
Handle is mounted on flange of enclosure using specified mounting dimensions while circuit breaker and
operating mechanism are mounted to inside of enclosure using two screws
Cable lengths available in 3-, 5- or 10-foot lengths to accommodate a variety of mounting locations
Handles are available in painted Nema 1, 3, 3R, 4 (sheet steel) and 12 ratings or chrome (Nema 4, 4x)
Applications
Installation
Table 55:
Class 9422
Cable Mechanisms
06113534
Cable Mechanism
Length
Catalog
Number
36 in.
9422CSF30
60 in.
9422CSF50
84 in.
9422CSF70
120 in.
9422CSF10
1.00
(25)
4.69
9.12
(119)
(232)
Refer to NEC Article 430-10 for minimum

dimension X from circuit breaker top
mounting hole to wall or barrier to ensure
adequate wire bending space.
A
D
1.44
(37)
in.
Dimensions:
4.25
[mm]
(108)
Note: Bend radius in cable must never be less than 6 in. (152 mm). Electrical
clearances must be maintained between cable and live electrical parts.

All Rights Reserved
41
05/2009

Variable Depth Mechanisms
06113535
Designed for installation in custom built control enclosures where main or branch circuit protective
devices are required.
All circuit breaker operating mechanisms are suitable for either right- or left-hand flange mounting,
convertible on the job.
Variable mounting depth range: 5.8817.75 in. (149451 mm).

Operating mechanism 9422RQ1 (does not include handle mechanism).
Circuit Breaker Enclosures and Enclosure Accessories
Table 56:
Square D circuit breaker enclosures are UL Listed, CSA Certified and are suitable for use as
service entrance equipment, except as footnoted.
The short circuit rating of an enclosed circuit breaker is equal to the rating of the circuit breaker
installed, except as footnoted.
Circuit breakers are ordered and shipped separately for field installation.
Enclosure Dimensions
1.00 MIN
[25,4]
48996-053-01
1.00 MIN
[25,4]
00 MIN
4.00 MIN
[101,6]
Circuit
Breaker
Amperage
H-Frame
15150 A
J-Frame
150250 A
Enclosure Dimensions (h x w x d)
80%
100%
18.13 x 8.63 x 4.13 in.

(461 x 219 x 105 mm)
62 x 14 x 22.5 in.
(572 x 356 x 1575 mm)
28.5 x 12.38 x 5.38 in.
62 x 14 x 22.6 in.
(724 x 314 x 137 mm)
(572 x 356 x 1575 mm)
4.00 MIN
[101,6]
d
h
Table 57:
Circuit Breaker Enclosure Catalog Numbers

Circuit Breaker
Cat. No. Prefix
Enclosure Cat. No.
Rating
NEMA 1
Flush
Poles
HDL,HGL,HJL,HLL
15150 A
2, 3
JDL,JGL,JJL,JLL
150250 A
2, 3
J250F
NEMA 1
Surface
NEMA
3R1
NEMA 4, 4X, 5, 3, 3R
Stainless Steel
NEMA 12/3R, 5
(Without Knockouts)2
J250S
J250R
J250DS
J250AWK
HDL
15100 A
HD100S3, 4, 5
JDL
150250 A
JD250S3, 5, 6
Enclosures with NRB or RB suffix have provisions for 3/4 in. through 2-1/2 in. bolt-on hubs in top endwall. Enclosures with R suffix have blank endwalls and require
field cut opening. For details and hub catalog numbers see Digest 174 page 3-9.
Suitable for rainproof NEMA 3R application by removing drain screw from bottom endwall.
Copper wire only
Maximum short circuit rating is 25 kAIR, 240 Vac
Order service ground kit PKOGTA2 if required.
Maximum short circuit rating is 18 kAIR, 480 Vac.
42
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Table 58:
Cat. No.
Dimensions
Approximate Dimension
Series
HD100S
A01
17.00 in.
431.8 mm
7.90 in.
200.7 mm
4.75 in.
120.7 mm
J250F
A01
32.40 in.
823 mm
15.40 in.
391 mm
6.00 in.
152 mm
J250S
A01
31.36 in.
797 mm
14.36 in.
365 mm
6.00 in.
152 mm
J250R
A01
31.05 in.
789 mm
14.47 in.
368 mm
6.28 in.
160 mm
J250DS
A01
32.26 in.
819 mm
9.72 in.
247 mm
7.94 in.
202 mm
J250AWK
A01
32.26 in.
819 mm
9.72 in.
247 mm
7.94 in.
202 mm
Table 59:
W
W
D
WB enclosure
uses 2 circuit breakers
NEMA Type 1
Insulated Groundable Neutral Assembly
Circuit Breaker
Neutral Assembly For Use With
Cat. No. Prefix
NEMA 1 & 3R
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
HDL,HGL,HJL,HLL
15100 A
SN100FA
SN100FA
(4) 141/0 Cu or (4) 121/0 Al
HDL,HGL,HJL,HLL
125150 A
SN400LA
SN400LA
(2) 1600 or
(4) 1250 Al/Cu, plus (2) 4300 Al/Cu
JDL,JGL,JJL,JLL
150250 A
SN400LA
SN400LA
(2) 1600 or
(4) 1250 Al/Cu, plus (2) 4300 Al/Cu
Table 60:
NEMA 4, 4X, 5, 12 & 12K
Terminal Lug DataTotal

Available (Line plus Load)
AWG/kcmil
Ampere
Rating
Service Ground Kits
Circuit Breaker
Cat. No. Prefix
HDL,HGL,HJL,HLL,
JDL,JGL,JJL,JLL
Ground Bar
Cat. No.
Number of
Terminals
Conductors
Per Terminal
Wire Range
PKOGTJ250
6 AWG300 kcmil
Al/Cu
Locking Systems
Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with diameters of 0.190.31 in. (58 mm);
padlocks not supplied.
06113316
Table 61:
Device Locking Options
Control Device
Type
Accessories Required Kit Cat. No.
Lock in OFF (O) Position
Padlock
Removable Device
Lock in OFF (O) or ON (I) Position
Padlock
Fixed Device1
S29371
Padlock
Stationary Device
S37422
Direct Rotary Handle
Padlock
None
Extended Rotary
Operating Handle
Lock in OFF (O) Position,

Door Opening Prevented
Padlock
None
Motor Operator
Lock in OFF (O) Position, Motor
Padlock
None
Toggle
Removable Attachment*
Function
S29370
Not available for 2P HD and HG devices
Fixed Padlock Attachment

All Rights Reserved
43
05/2009

Interlocking Systems
Interlocking of Circuit Breakers With Toggle Control
The toggle interlock system can receive one or two padlocks with diameters of 0.190.31 in. (58 mm).
Both interlocked circuit breakers should be fixed version or plug-in version. Two sliding interlocking
bars can be used to interlock three circuit breakers installed side-by-side, in which case one circuit
breaker is in the ON (I) position and the two others in the OFF (O) position. (Kit S29354. Not available
for 2P HD and HG devices.)
Interlocking Two Circuit Breakers with Rotary Handles

The rotary handles are padlocked with the devices in the OFF (I) position. The interlock mechanism
inhibits the two devices from being closed (ON/I) at the same time, but allows for both devices to be
open (OFF/O) simultaneously. (Kit S29369. Not available for 2P HD and HG devices.)
Interlocking Systems
06113320
06113319
Figure 12:
Interlocking with Toggle Control (S29354)
Interlocking with Rotary Handles (S29369)
44
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Section 4Wiring Diagrams
Table 62:
Connector Descriptions
Function
Description
Connector
Open/Closed circuit breaker or switch position contacts
OF/AX
Bell alarm
SD/AL
Undervoltage trip device
MN/UVR
Shunt trip
MX/SHT
Motor operator
MCH
Auxiliary Contacts
Remote Operation
harg
disc
Remote Operation
ed
O OFF
5...8
auto
u
man
OFF
push
ON
Control Wiring Diagrams
Function
Connector Description
Auxiliary Contacts
OF/AX
SD/AL
Open/Closed circuit breaker or switch position contacts

Bell alarm
MN/UVR
Undervoltage trip device

Shunt trip
Motor operator
22
14
94
84
24
06113097
22
24
D4
06113153
81
MN
MX
MX/SHT
C1
C2
Fault
82
Alarm Contacts
Fault
92
Remote Operation
82
84
12
SDE
92
94
SD/
AL
91
Closed
OF2/
AX
21
OF1/
AX
11
C2
MX/SHT
MCH
06113096
Remote Operation
12
14
Figure 13:
O
push
OF2/ OF1/
AX
AX
SD/
AL
SDE
or
C2
T
C1
/SH
MX
V
200/240

All Rights Reserved
81
91
11
21
D4
C1
D1
D1
or
MN/UVR
45
05/2009

Standard Motor Operator Wiring (Factory Wiring Configuration)
A circuit breaker may be configured for remote operations. Remotely operated circuit breakers are
factory wired for the power supply to the motor being switched by the overcurrent trip switch. This
prevents the circuit breaker from being remotely reset after an overload fault as a precaution against
closing on a fault.
Figure 14:
Standard Motor Operator Control Wiring
AC Input Common, DC Positive (+)

BPO
(open)
SDE
OAL
BPF
(close)
Description
B4
A4
81
06113111
A4
A2
B2
Connector
84
82
H2
Indicator
Motor Mechanism Module

H1
A1
Electrical opening (positive DC)
A2
Electrical closing (positive DC)
B4
Power supply connection (positive DC)
A1
Power supply connection (negative DC)
L1
Automatic position indicator
84
Overcurrent trip indicator
H1
Lamp signal indicating MCH in automatic position
H2
Lamp signal indicating overcurrent trip condition
L1
AC Input Common, DC Negative (-)

OF1 / AX
SD / AL
11 grey
91 black
12 yellow
92 green
14 violet
94 red
SDE / OAL
OF2 / AX
21 grey
22 yellow
84 red
24 violet
MX / SHT
C1 white
C2 orange
B2
OR / O / OU
B4 blue
MN / UVR
D1 white
A2
white
A4 orange
L1 green
A1 black
D4 blue
Color wiring legend
Remote Reset Wiring Without Overcurrent Trip Switch Protection

To configure circuit breaker for remote operation without overcurrent switch protection, follow the
wiring diagram below.
Figure 15:
Motor Operator Without Overcurrent Switch Protection
AC Input Voltage, DC Positive (+)

BPO
(open)
B4
06113476
BPF
(close)
A4
A2
B2
Motor Mechanism Module

H1
A1
L1
AC Input Common, DC Negative (-)
46
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Section 5Dimensions
15150 A Unit Mount H-Frame 2P HD/HG Circuit Breaker
48996-016-01
Figure 17:
6.40
[162,6]
5.66
[143,8]
.74
[18,8]
.20
[5,1]
MOUNTING HOLE
.69
[17,5]
1.38
[35,0]
2.74
[69,7]
.44
[11,3]
1.20
[30,5]
2.06
[52,4]
1.37
[34,8]
5.01
[127,3]
5.20
[132,0]
5.96
[151,3]
17.9
OFF
ISOMETRIC VIEW
SCALE 1:2
19.5
ON
.43
[10,8]
21.5
TRIPPED
3.44
[87,3] 3.24
[82,4]
.08
[2,0]
1.06
[27,0]
2.87
[72,9]
1.91
[48,5]
3.74
[95,1]
4.36
[110,8]
.69
[17,5]
SEE DETAIL A
.62
[15,9]
DETAIL A
SCALE 1:1
3.69
[93,8]
Figure 18:
in.
[mm]
15150 A Bus Bar H-Frame 3P Circuit Breaker

6.40
[162,6]
1.38
[35,0]
Dimensions:
.20
[5,1]
(MOUNTING HOLE)
5.66
[143,8]
.74
[18,8]
1.38
[35,0]
2.06
[52,4]
.26
[6,7]
(1/4-20 TERMINAL NUT)
.29
[7,4]
.29
[7,4]
4.12
[104,7]
1.38
[35,0]
.44
[11,3]
1.20
[30,5]
2.04
[51,9]
.24
[6,0]
1.37
[34,8]
.47
[12,0]
SECTION B-B
SCALE 1:1
4.99
[126,7]
5.20
[132,1]
SCALE 1:2
5.96
[151,3]
17.9
OFF
19.5
ON
.08
[2,0]
.40
[10,3]
1.06
[27,0]
21.5
TRIPPED
.73
[18,6]
SEE DETAIL A
3.44
[87,4]
3.24
[82,4]
3.74
[95,1]
2.87
[72,9]
3.69
[93,8]
1.91
[48,5]
4.36
[110,8]
.62
[15,9]
Dimensions:
in.
[mm]
DETAIL A
SCALE 1:1
48
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Section 5Dimensions
Figure 19:
15150 A Lug-Lug H-Frame 3P Circuit Breaker
48996-012-01
6.40
[162,6]
.20
[5,1]
(MOUNTING HOLE)
5.66
[143,8]
.74
[18,8]
1.38
[35,0]
1.38
[35,0]
2.06
[52,4]
4.12
[104,7]
1.38
[35,0]
.44
[11,3]
1.20
[30,5]
2.04
[51,9]
1.37
[34,8]
4.99
[126,7]
5.20
[132,1]
5.96
[151,3]
17.9
OFF
ISOMETRIC VIEW
SCALE 1:2
.43
[10,8]
19.5
ON
.08
[2,0]
1.06
[27,0]
21.5
TRIPPED
.73
[18,6]
SEE DETAIL A
3.44
[87,4]
3.24
[82,4]
3.74
1.91 [95,1]
[48,5]
2.87
[72,9]
4.36
[110,8]
3.69
[93,8]
Figure 20:
.62
[15,9]
Dimensions:
in.
[mm]
DETAIL A
SCALE 1:1
15150 A Rear Connected H-Frame 3P Circuit Breaker

All Rights Reserved
49
05/2009

Section 5Dimensions
Figure 21:
Motor Operator Detail (H-Frame)
.74
[18,8]
Rotary Handle Detail (H-Frame)
.20
[5,1]
(MOUNTING HOLE)
6.40
[162,6]
5.66
[143,8]
1.38
[35,0]
1.38
[35,0]
6.40
[162,6]
5.66
[143,8]
1.38
[35,0]
.20
[5,1]
(MOUNTING HOLE)
1.38
[35,0]
.74
[18,8]
2.06
[52,4]
2.06
[52,4]
1.38
[35,0]
Figure 22:
4.12
[104,7]
4.12
[104,7]
.44
[11,3]
1.24
[31,5]
1.89
[48,1]
2.16
[55,0]
1.38
[35,0]
1.37
[34,8]
5.04
[128,0]
5.71
[145,0]
5.96
[151,3]
.27
[6,8]
.44
[11,3]
1.20
[30,5]
2.02
[51,2]
1.37
[34,8]
5.00
[126,9]
5.27
[133,9]
.27
[6,7]
5.96
[151,3]
3.58
[91,0]
3.58
[91,0]
6.12
[155,4]
3.44
[87,4]
7.01
[178,1]
4.00
[101,7] 3.44
[87,4] 3.24 2.87
[82,4] [72,9]
5.63
[143,1]
4.82
[122,4]
3.24
[82,4]
2.87
[72,9]
3.54
[90,2]
Dimensions:
in.
[mm]
50
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Section 5Dimensions
Plug-In H- and J-Frame Dimensional Drawings

15250 A H- and J-Frame Plug-In Base 3P Circuit Breaker
48996-045-01
Figure 28:
Dimensions:
15250 A H- and J-Frame Plug-In Circuit Breaker 3P Circuit Breaker
48996-024-01
Figure 29:
in.
[mm]
Dimensions:

All Rights Reserved
in.
[mm]
53
05/2009

Section 5Dimensions
Drawout H- and J-Frame Dimensional Drawings

15250 A H and J-Frame Cradle 3P Circuit Breaker
48996-046-01
Figure 30:
Dimensions:
15250 A H- and J-Frame Drawout Circuit Breaker 3P Circuit Breaker
48996-025-01
Figure 31:
in.
[mm]
Dimensions:
in.
[mm]
54
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Section 5Dimensions
Mounting Dimensional Drawings

Figure 32:
H-Frame 2P (HD and HG) Circuit Breaker
Dimensions:
Figure 33:
in.
[mm]
H and J-Frame 3P Circuit Breaker
Dimensions:

All Rights Reserved
in.
[mm]
55
05/2009

Section 5Dimensions
H- and J-Frame Door Cutout Dimensional Drawings

Figure 34:
H and J-Frame Circuit Breaker Toggle Handle Door Cutout
Dimensions:
Figure 35:
in.
[mm]
H and J-Frame Circuit Breaker Toggle Handle With Escutcheon Door Cutout
Dimensions:
in.
[mm]
56
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Section 5Dimensions
Figure 36:
H and J-Frame Circuit Breaker Fixed Rotary Handle Cutout
Dimensions:
Figure 37:
in.
[mm]
H and J-Frame Circuit Breaker Door Mounted Rotary Handle Cutout
Dimensions:

All Rights Reserved
in.
[mm]
57
05/2009

Section 5Dimensions
Figure 38:
H and J-Frame Circuit Breaker Motor Operator Cutout
Dimensions:
in.
[mm]
58
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Section 6Trip Curves
Figure 39:
15-35 A HD, HG, HJ and HL

80
90
100
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
8
9
10
1.5
.8
.9
1
.7
.6
.5
MULTIPLES OF RATED CURRENT

10000
9000
8000
10000
9000
8000
7000
7000
6000
6000
5000
5000
4000
4000
HD, HG, HJ, HL MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

CHARACTERISTIC TRIP CURVE NO. 50-1
CIRCUIT BREAKER INFORMATION
Circuit Breaker
Prefix
Continuous
Ampere Rating
Maximum
AC Voltage
Number
of Poles
HD, HG, HJ, HL
1535
600
2, 3
3000
8000
9000
10000
7000
6000
150
5000
200
150
4000
200
3000
300
2000
400
300
1500
500
400
800
900
1000
600
500
700
700
600
600
1000
900
800
700
500
1000
900
800
All time/current characteristic curve data is based on 40C ambient cold start.
Terminations are made with conductors of appropriate length and ratings.
400
1500
300
2000
1500
150
2000
This curve is to be used for application and coordination purposes only. The
EZ-AMP overlay feature at the bottom of the page should be used during
coordination studies.
200
3000
100
90
80
100
90
80
70
60
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
15
15
10
9
8
10
9
8
1.5
1.5
1
.9
.8
1
.9
.8
.7
.7
.6
.6
.5
.5
TIME IN SECONDS
TIME IN SECONDS
70
MAXIMUM SINGLE-POLE TRIP TIMES

AT 25C BASED ON NEMA AB-4 2003
60
.4
.4
30 A, 35 A
.3
.3
25 A
.2
.2
20 A
.15
.15
15 A
.1
.09
.08
.1
.09
.08
.07
.07
.06
.06
.05
.05
.04
.04
MAXIMUM CLEARING TIME

(AT 50 Hz)
(AT 60 Hz)
.03
.03
1 CYCLE
(50 Hz)
.02
1 CYCLE
(60 Hz)
.015
.02
.015
1/2
.01
.009
.008
CYCLE
(50 Hz)
1/2
CYCLE
(60 Hz)
.007
.01
.009
.008
.007
.006
.006
.005
35 25
30
20

All Rights Reserved
8000
9000
10000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1500
TM
2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
800
900
1000
700
600
500
400
300
200
150
80
90
100
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
8
9
10
1.5
.8
.9
1
.7
.6
.5
.005
15
Curve No. 0050TC0401
June 2004
Drawing No. 48095-050-01
59
05/2009

Figure 40:
40-60 A HD, HG, HJ and HL

80
90
100
600
500
500
400
400
300
300
200
150
150
150
200
8000
9000
10000
700
600
7000
1000
900
800
700
All time/current characteristic curve data is based on 40C ambient cold start.
Terminations are made with conductors of appropriate length and ratings.
6000
1000
900
800
2, 3
This curve is to be used for application and coordination purposes only. The
EZ-AMP overlay feature at the bottom of the page should be used during
coordination studies.
5000
1500
Number
of Poles
600
4000
2000
1500
Maximum
AC Voltage
4060
3000
2000
Continuous
Ampere Rating
HD, HG, HJ, HL
2000
3000
1500
3000
CIRCUIT BREAKER INFORMATION

Circuit Breaker
Prefix
800
900
1000
4000
700
5000
4000
600
6000
5000
500
6000
HD, HG, HJ, HL MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

CHARACTERISTIC TRIP CURVE NO. 50-2
400
7000
300
10000
9000
8000
7000
200
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
8
9
10
1.5
.8
.9
1
.7
.6
.5

10000
9000
8000
100
90
80
100
90
80
70
70
MAXIMUM SINGLE-POLE TRIP TIMES

AT 25C BASED ON NEMA AB-4 2003
60
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
15
15
10
9
8
10
9
8
1.5
1.5
1
.9
.8
1
.9
.8
.7
.7
.6
.6
.5
.5
TIME IN SECONDS
TIME IN SECONDS
60
.4
.4
50 A
.3
.3
45 A
.2
.2
40 A
.15
.15
60 A
.1
.09
.08
.1
.09
.08
.07
.07
.06
.06
.05
.05
.04
.04
MAXIMUM CLEARING TIME

(AT 50 Hz)
(AT 60 Hz)
.03
.03
1 CYCLE
(50 Hz)
.02
1 CYCLE
(60 Hz)
.015
.02
.015
1/2
.01
.009
.008
CYCLE
(50 Hz)
1/2
CYCLE
(60 Hz)
.007
.01
.009
.008
.007
8000
9000
10000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1500
800
900
1000
700
600
500
400
TM

60
300
200
150
80
90
100
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
8
9
10
1.5
.8
.9
1
.7
.005
.6
.006
.005
.5
.006
45
50 40
Curve No. 0050TC0402

June 2004
Drawing No. 48095-050-02
60
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Section 7MCP Instantaneous Trip Points
Section 7MCP Instantaneous Trip Points
Table 63:
M71 Instantaneous Trip Points

Automatic Setting (A)
Motor Type
FLA
NEMA
A, B, C, D
B, E
IEC
1.5
12
16.5
12
13.5
24
33
18
24
27
48
66
36
48
64
88
48
64
11
88
121
66
88
99
110
121
132
143
14
112
154
84
112
126
140
154
168
182
17
136
187
102
136
153
170
187
204
221
20
160
220
120
160
180
200
220
240
260
25
200
275
150
200
225
250
275
300
325
1300%
1700%
1300%
11x
12x
13x
Dampening for motor in-rush (% FLA)
Table 64:
Manual Adjustment (A)
Im Setting
6x
10x
11x
12x
13x
15
16.5
18
19.5
30
33
36
39
54
60
66
72
78
72
80
88
96
104
M72 Instantaneous Trip Points
Motor Type
Manual Adjustment (A)1
Im Setting
NEMA
A, B, C, D
B, E
IEC
14
112
154
84
112
126
140
154
168
182
17
136
187
102
136
153
170
187
204
221
21
168
231
126
168
189
210
231
252
273
24
192
264
144
192
216
240
264
288
312
27
216
297
162
216
243
270
297
324
351
29
232
319
174
232
261
290
319
348
377
32
256
352
192
256
288
320
352
384
416
36
288
396
216
288
324
360
396
432
468
42
336
462
252
336
378
420
462
504
546
1300%
1700%
1300%
Dampening for motor in-rush (% FLA)

1
9x
(FLA) x (Im)
Automatic Setting (A)1
FLA
8x
6x
8x
9x
10x
(FLA) x (Im)
5% of nominal amperage shown above
70
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Index
INDEX
internal accessories
interrupting rating
accessories
auxiliary switches 35
locations of internal 34
maximum combinations of 34
motor operator
36
accessory connections 34
accessory suffix codes 8, 36, 39
AIR See ampere interrupting rating
altitude.See operating conditions
ampere interrupting rating 5
automatic protection settings 21
35
auxiliary switches
J-frame dimensional drawings 51, 5355
34
11
L
locking systems
43
locks
direct rotary handle 43
extended rotary operating handle 43
43
motor operator
43
toggle
lugs
voltage takeoff for mechanical 28
cable operating handle 41

8
catalog numbering
chassis, drawout circuit breaker 33
codes and standards
H- and J-frame circuit breakers 10
H- and J-frame switches 10
connections. See mounting and connections
connector
45
MN/UVR
MX/SHT
45
45
OF/AX
45
SD/AL
manual protection settings 21

maximum accessory combinations 34
MCP See motor circuit protector
molded case switches 24
motor circuit protector 20
automatic protection settings 21
full load amp settings 21
motor circuit selector
23
selection
36
motor operator
mounting and connections 26
drawout circuit breakers 33
I-Line circuit breakers 31
plug-in circuit breakers 32
unit-mount circuit breakers 26
45
MX shunt trip
dimensional drawings
47
H-frame
J-frame
51, 5355
DIN rail mounting bracket 26
drawout circuit breakers
chassis functions 33
33
mounting
numbering, catalog
bus-bar connections
28
E
endurance operations 13
F
features and benefits 24
common design envelope 5
dual-break rotating contacts 6
high interrupting ratings (AIR) 5
reduced let-through currents 6
field installable accessories 7
full load amp settings 21
H
handle position indication 6
H-frame dimensional drawings 47
I
I-Line circuit breakers 31
installation
plug-in circuit breakers 32
44
interlocking
O
open/closed position switch 45
operating conditions 24
13
altitude
13
temperature
vibration
13
operating handle
cable operating mechanism 41
operating handles
direct mounted rotary 40
door mounted rotary 4041
operating mechanism 6
operations, endurance 13
P
plug-in circuit breakers
mounting
32
parts of configuration 32
safety trip interlock 32
positive contact indication 11
R
ratings
circuit breaker interrupting 11
corner grounded delta 13
11
UL 489
re-rating
73
05/2009

All Rights Reserved

Index
altitude
13
rotary operating handles 39
directly mounted 40
door mounted 4041
S
safety trip interlock
32
shunt trip (MX) 3536, 45
special ratings
10
24
specifications
molded case switches 24
suffix codes
8, 36, 39
switch
35
alarm
auxiliary
35
35
changeover
electrical characteristics
36
MX/MN
OF, SD and SDE 35
MN undervoltage trip switch 36
MX shunt trip
36
switches
OF auxiliary switch 45
switches, automatic molded case 24
T
temperature See operating conditions
59, 70
trip curves
trip units
9
U
UL 489 ratings
11
45
undervoltage trip
undervoltage trip (MN) 36
unit-mount circuit breakers 26
bus-bar connections 28
mounting
26
V
voltage takeoff for mechanical lugs 28
W
wire sizes for accessory connections 34
74
05/2009
All Rights Reserved
Characteristics
RoHS
REACh
Period
May 28, 2014
Commercial Status
Commercialised
Range of product
QO
type
Load Center Grounding Bar Assembly
Ordering and shipping details
Category
00102 - QO LC ACCESSORIES
Discount Schedule
DE3A
GTIN
00785901026426
Nbr. of units in pkg.

10
Package weight(Lbs)
0.18
Product availability
Stock - Normally stocked in distribution facility
Returnability
Y
Country of origin
US
Not Green Premium product
Compliant - since 0934 Schneider Electric declaration of conformity
Reference not containing SVHC above the threshold
Contractual warranty
18 months
Neither Schneider Electric Industries SAS nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein. *Prices are indicative
Product data sheet
PK18GTA
LOAD CENTER EQUIPMENT GROUND BAR
ASSY
Main
HOMELINE Circuit Breaker Load CentersClass 1170

TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Slot/Robertson screw
Grounding Bar Kits

All PK equipment grounding kits are supplied with mounting screws,
necessary installation instructions, and an Equipment Grounding Terminal
self-adhesive label.
.437
11
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Total
Quantity Each Size
Qty. See Wire Range Table below.
I
.3125
8
Cross Section of Size 1 Ground Bar
VI
in.
mm
1.75
44
4.61
117
1.38
35
One hole One hole
1.63
41
One hole One hole
2.25
57
1.25
32
Top
PK7GTA
2.88
73
1.25
32
Top
or
side
PK0GTA2
PK0GTA6
PK3GTA1
PK4GTA
PK5GTA
II
III
IV
Approximate
Distance
Overall
Between
Length
Mounting Holes Mounting
in.
mm
One hole One hole

1.69
43
Top
Top
Top
Top
PK9GTA1
3.25
83
PK9GTA
3.78
96
3.13
80
Top
PK12GTA
12
12
4.70
119
3.13
80
Top
PK15GTA
15
15
5.63
143
3.13
80
Top
PK15GTAL
16
15
8.13
207
3.13
80
Top
PK15GTA6
21
15
5.88
149
Top
PK18GTA
18
18
6.56
167
3.13
80
Top
PK18GTAL
19
18
8.81
224
3.13
80
Top
PK23GTA
23
23
8.11
206
3.13
80
Top
PK23GTAL
24
23
9.44
240
3.13
80
Top
PK27GTA
27
or
26
27
26
9.36
238
3.13
80
Top
1
6
1
1
One hole One hole
Top
PK27GTA includes one main grounding lug that mounts with two terminal screws and requires three terminals for
mounting.
3.13 in. (80 mm) on small terminals; 5.25 in. (133 mm) on large terminals.
Mounting screw 40205-065-01 (one required).
Mounting screw 21594-14220 (two required).
Mounting screws 21594-14241(two required) and 21594-17121(two required).
Wire Range Table

Size
Cu (AWG)
Al (AWG)
(1) #14#4 or (2) #14 or #12
(1) #12#4 or (2) #12 or #10

(1) #14/0
II
(1) #14/0
III
(1) #62/0
(1) #62/0
IV
(1) #63/0
(1) #63/0
(1) #141/0
(1) #141/0
VI
(1) #102/0
(1) #62/0
63
09/00
Square D
General Purpose Relays
Class 8501K universal relays
Catalog
2014
Contents
Square D General Purpose Relays

bb Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
bb References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
bb Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
bb Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Specifications
General Specifications
Ambient air temperature
around the device
Storage
Operation
Vibration resistance
In operation
conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Not operating
Conforming to IEC/EN 60529
Shock resistance
Opening
conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 Closing
Protection category
Mounting position
C (F)
C (F)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Insulation Specifications
IEC/EN 61810-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14

cULus File E3190 CCN NLDX, NLDX7; cURus File E3190 CCN NLDX2, NLDX8;
CSA; CE; RoHS compliant
- 40 to + 85 (-40 to +185)
- 40 to + 55 (-40 to +131)
3gn (35 to 150 Hz) and 1 mm (10 to 35 Hz); 5 cycles
4gn (35 to 150 Hz) and 1 mm (10 to 35 Hz); 5 cycles
IP 40 (housing only)
10 gn (11 ms)
10 gn (11 ms)
RT I
Any
250 (IEC), 300 (UL, CSA)
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)
kV
4 (1.2/50 s)
Dielectric strength
(rms voltage)
Vac
Vac
Vac
2500
2000
1500
Between coil and contact

Between poles
Between contacts
Contact Specifications
Relay type
8501KFR12ppp, 8501KFRD12ppp,
8501KPR12ppp, 8501KPRD12ppp,
8501KUR12ppp, 8501KURD12ppp
8501KFR13ppp, 8501KFRD13ppp,
8501KPR13ppp, 8501KPRD13ppp,
8501KUR13ppp, 8501KURD13ppp
Number and type of contacts
2 C/O
3 C/O
Contact materials
AgNi
Conventional thermal
current (Ith)
For ambient
temperature y 55C
Rated operational current
Conforming to IEC
in utilization
categories
AC-1 and DC-1
Conforming to UL
10
NO
10 at 250 Vac
10 at 28 Vdc
NC
5 at 250 Vac
5 at 28 Vdc
Resistive
10 at 277 Vac (200k cycles)

10 at 30 Vdc (200k cycles)
Motor
HP
1/3 at 120 Vac (6k cycles)

1 at 277 Vac (6k cycles)
Pilot Duty
B300 (6k cycles)
Minimum switching requirement
mA
10 @ 17 Vdc; MCTF 10 million
Maximum switching voltage
250 V (IEC) / 300 V (UL,CSA)
Switching capacity
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum operating rate

In operating cycles/hour
Vac
VA
2500 VA (IEC), 2770 VA (UL)
Vdc
280 W (IEC) / 300 W (UL)
mW
170
No-load
18000
Under load
1200
Utilization coefficient
20%
Cycles
5,000,000
Electrical durability
Operating cycles
Resistive load
Inductive load
100,000 (unless otherwise specified)

See curve below
Reduction coefficient (A)
Electrical durability of contacts Resistive load Vac

Reduction coefficient for inductive load Vac
(depending on power factor cos )
1
0.8
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
1
0.6
0.4
0.2
Durability (inductive load) = durability (resistive load) x reduction coefficient.
Coil Specifications
Average consumption
VA
1.4
Drop-out voltage threshold
u 0.15 Uc (at minimum operating temperature)

u 0.1 Uc (at minimum operating temperature)
Response time
Operate time
ms
20 max (at 100% coil voltage)
Release time
ms
20 max
12
24
48
110
120
240
V51
V53
V56
V60
120
470
1800
7300
Min.
Vac
9.6
19.2
38.4
88
Max.
Vac
13.2
26.4
52.8
121.0
V14
V20
V24
72
1700
6800
Min.
Vac
19.2
96
192
Max.
Vac
26.4
132
264
8501NR52
8501NR62
Control circuit voltage Uc

Relay control voltage codes
DC supply
Average resistance at 20 C 15%

Operating voltage limits
Relay control voltage codes

AC supply
Average resistance at 20 C 15%

Operating voltage limits
Socket Specifications(1)
Socket type
8501NR51
Relay types used
8501KPR12ppp, 8501KPR13ppp, 8501KPR12ppp, 8501KPR13ppp, 8501KUR13ppp,

8501KPDR12ppp 8501KPDR13ppp 8501KPDR12ppp 8501KPDR13ppp 8501KUDR13ppp
8501NR61
Contact terminal arrangement
Mixed
Wire connection method
Screw clamp terminal
cURus File E66924 CNN SWIV2, SWIV8; CSA; CE; RoHS Compliant
IEC 61984, UL 508, CSA 22.2 No. 14
Conventional thermal current (Ith)
Insulation Specifications
8501NR82
Separate
15 at 300 Vac (UL)

5 at 600 Vac (UL)
16 at 300 Vac (UL)

5 at 600 Vac (UL)
15 at 300 Vac (UL)
2000
Between adjacent output contacts
Vrms 2000
2500
Between input and output contacts
Vrms 2000
2500
2000
Between contacts and DIN rail
Vrms 2000
2500
2000
Ambient air temperature Storage

around the device
Operation
C (F) - 40 to + 85 (-40 to +185)
General Specifications
C (F) - 40 to + 55 (-40 to +131)
IP 20
Cabling
Solid cable
without
cable end
1 conductor
0.5 to 2.5 mm2 - AWG 20 to AWG 14
2 conductors
0.5 to 1.5 mm2 - AWG 20 to AWG 16
1 conductor
0.25 to 2.5 mm2 - AWG 22 to AWG 14
2 conductors
0.25 to 1 mm2 - AWG 22 to AWG 17
Flexible
cable with
cable end
Maximum tightening torque / Screw size
Lb-ft 0.7 (1) / M3.5 screw

(Nm)
Mounting
On 35 mm DIN rail / on panel
Mounting on DIN rail
By red plastic clip
Terminal referencing
IEC, NEMA
Bus jumper
None
Compatible hold down clip
None
8501NH52
8501NH82
Compatible restraining strap
8501NH7
8501NH7
8501NH7
Wire connection method Screw clamp terminals
(1) Sockets are rated as high as 600 V.
References
References
Pins
Control
circuit
voltage
Number and type of contacts - Thermal current (Ith)

2 C/O - 10 A
3 C/O - 10 A
Unit reference
Weight
Unit reference
kg/lb
Universal relays with standard clear cover (sold in lots of 1)

Type KP
Cylindrical terminals
Socket mount
Type KU
Flat (Faston type) terminals
Socket mount
8501KPDR12V60
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
110 Vdc
24 Vac
120 Vac
240 Vac
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
110 Vdc
8501KPDR12V51
8501KPDR12V53
8501KPDR12V56
8501KPDR12V60
8501KPR12V14
8501KPR12V20
8501KPR12V24
8501KUDR12V51
8501KUDR12V53
8501KUDR12V56
8501KUDR12V60
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
8501KPDR13V51
8501KPDR13V53
8501KPDR13V56
8501KPDR13V60
8501KPR13V14
8501KPR13V20
8501KPR13V24
8501KUDR13V51
8501KUDR13V53
8501KUDR13V56
8501KUDR13V60
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
24 Vac
120 Vac
240 Vac
8501KUR12V14
8501KUR12V20
8501KUR12V24
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
8501KUR13V14
8501KUR13V20
8501KUR13V24
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
8501KFDR12V51
8501KFDR12V53
8501KFDR12V56
8501KFDR12V60
8501KFR12V14
8501KFR12V20
8501KFR12V24
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
8501KFDR13V51
8501KFDR13V53
8501KFDR13V56
8501KFDR13V60
8501KFR13V14
8501KFR13V20
8501KFR13V24
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
8501KPDR12P14V51
8501KPDR12P14V53
8501KPDR12P14V56
8501KPDR12P14V60
8501KPR12P14V14
8501KPR12P14V20
8501KPR12P14V24
8501KUDR12P14V51
8501KUDR12P14V53
8501KUDR12P14V56
8501KUDR12P14V60
8501KUR12P14V14
8501KUR12P14V20
8501KUR12P14V24
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
8501KPDR13P14V51
8501KPDR13P14V53
8501KPDR13P14V56
8501KPDR13P14V60
8501KPR13P14V14
8501KPR13P14V20
8501KPR13P14V24
8501KUDR13P14V51
8501KUDR13P14V53
8501KUDR13P14V56
8501KUDR13P14V60
8501KUR13P14V14
8501KUR13P14V20
8501KUR13P14V24
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
Universal relays with flange mount cover (sold in lots of 1)

Type KF
Flange mount
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
110 Vdc
24 Vac
120 Vac
240 Vac
Universal relays with standard clear cover and LED (sold in lots of 1)
Type KP
Cylindrical terminals
8501KPR13P14V20
Type KU
Weight
kg/lb
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
110 Vdc
24 Vac
120 Vac
240 Vac
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
110 Vdc
24 Vac
120 Vac
240 Vac
8501KUDR12P14V60

Sockets
Contact terminal
arrangement
Mixed
8501NR62 +
Relay 8501KPR13P14V20
Separate
Connection
Relay type
Unit
reference(1)
Sold in
lots of
Screw connector
8501KPR12ppp
8501KPDR12ppp
8501NR51
0.054/0.119
8501KPR12ppp
8501KPDR12ppp
8501NR51B
10
0.054/0.119
8501KPR13ppp
8501KPDR13ppp
8501NR61
0.054/0.119
8501KPR13ppp
8501KPDR13ppp
8501NR61B
10
0.054/0.119
8501KPR12ppp
8501KPDR12ppp
8501NR52
0.054/0.119
8501KPR12ppp
8501KPDR12ppp
8501NR52B
10
0.054/0.119
8501KPR13ppp
8501KPDR13ppp
8501NR62
0.054/0.119
8501KPR13ppp
8501KPDR13ppp
8501NR62B
10
0.054/0.120
8501KUR12ppp
8501KUDR12ppp
8501NR82
0.054/0.121
8501KUR12ppp
8501KUDR12ppp
8501NR82B
10
0.054/0.122
Screw connector
Weight
kg /lb
(1) Please note that the B suffix only desginates quantities of 10 and is not printed on the socket.
8501NR82 +
Relay 8501KUDR12P14V60
Accessories
Description
8501NH7
For
use with
Unit
reference
Sold in
lots of
Metal restraining strap
8501NR51 sockets
8501NR52 sockets
8501NR62 sockets
8501NR82 sockets
8501NH7
0.001/0.002
Metal hold-down clip
8501NR52 sockets
8501NR62 sockets
8501NH52
10
0.001/0.002
8501NR82 sockets
8501NH82
10
0.001/0.002
8501NH52
8501NH82
Weight
kg/lb
Dimensions
Dimensions: inches (mm)

Universal relays
8501KF12ppp / 8501KF13ppp
1.9
(49.6)
0.032
(0.81)
2.75
(70.0)
0.27
(6.8)
2.38
(60.5)
0.16
(4.0)
0.11
(2.8)
0.062
(1.58)
0.63
(15.88)
8501KP12ppp
1.4
(35.4)
2.1
(50.3)
1.4
(34.9)
8501KP13ppp
1.4
(35.4)
2.1
(50.3)
1.4
(34.9)
8501KU12ppp / 8501KU13ppp
1.4
(35.4)
1.97
(50.0)
1.37
(34.9)
Dimensions (continued)
Dimensions: inches (mm) (continued)

Sockets
8501NR51
8501NR61
1.6
(40)
2.02
(51)
1.29
(33)
0.59
(15)
2.32
(59)
0.97
(24.6)
0.97
(24.6)
1.6 DIA.
(40)
0.16
(4.2)
2.12
(54)
3
2.05
(52)
11
1.02
(25)
8501NR52
10
9
8
2.16
(54.8)
8501NR62
1.45
(37)
1.42
(36)
1.1
(27.9)
3.0
(77.5)
22
11
12
24
21
14
0.15
(3.8
3.02
(76.8)
A2
INPUT
1.69
(43)
1.37
(35)
4
1
1.53
(39)
6
0.15
(3.81)
3.14
(80)
1.5
(38)
9
22
5
21
31
11
12
4
11
1
34
14
1.58
(40)
A1
INPUT
2
1.35
(34.2)
8501NR82
3.0
(76)
24
A2
INPUT
10
A1
INPUT
1.2
(30)
0.4
(10)
32
IEC:
NEMA:
IEC:
NEMA:
1.03
(26)
1.5
(38)
1.1
(27.9)
3.19
(81)
2.86
(72.7) 1.58
(40)
1
3
4
1.01
(25.6)
1.42
(36)
2.06
(52)
0.15
(3.8
Wiring diagrams
Wiring diagrams
Universal relays
DPDT
1
3
22
5
22
14
24
11
31
8501KP12ppp
24
11
21
NEMA
IEC
B
A2
24
22
32
14
24
34
11
11
21
31
10
A1
A2
12
4
21
6
22
5
24
7
A1 2
8 31
10
11
11
11
3PDT
8501KF13ppp / 8501KU13ppp
32
8
14
A2
A1
2
1
A
A1
4
12
8501KP13ppp
22
5
12
4
14
14
A2
A1
8501KF12ppp / 8501KU12ppp
12
4
12
34
A2
31
12
32
22
14
34
24
11
31
21
A1
A2
NEMA
IEC
NEMA
IEC
NEMA
IEC
Sockets
8501NR51
8501NR61
A1
11
21
A2
INPUT
14
INPUT
11
31
11
A1
3
INPUT
8
5
12
14
12
22
24
24
21
NEMA
IEC
8501NR52
8501NR62
8501NR82
22
11
12
32
24
22
12
24
34
24
21
14
31
21
11
22
32
12
11
14
34
5
INPUT
NEMA
IEC
A1
A2
Coil Bus
Jumper
INPUT
NEMA
IEC
2
A1
B
A2
INPUT
N.C.
N.O.
COM
INPUT
1
MODULE
INPUT
10
2
3
6
2
11
MODULE
INPUT
Coil Bus
Jumper
10
14
A2
8
32
22
NEMA
IEC
10
34
INPUT
11
A2
10
A
A1
21
31
11
NEMA
IEC
Schneider Electric USA, Inc.

8001 Knightdale Blvd.
Knightdale, NC 27545
Tel: 888-778-2733
www.schneider-electric.com
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified
personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of
the use of this material.
2014 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.
Schneider Electric and Square D are trademarks owned by Schneider Electric Industries SAS or its
affiliated companies. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
8501CT1406, 09/2014
Replaces 8501CT0301R07/08, 08/2008
PowerLogic PM800 series

Intermediate metering
Technical data sheet
PM800 series
Functions and characteristics
PE86134
The PowerLogic PM800 series meters offers many high-performance capabilities

needed to meter and monitor an electrical installation in a compact 96 x 96 mm unit.
All models include an easy-to-read display that presents measurements for all three
phases and neutral at the same time, an RS-485 Modbus communication port, one
digital input, one KY-type digital output, total harmonic distortion (THD) metering,
and alarming on critical conditions. Four models offer an incremental choice of
custom logging and power quality analysis capabilities. Expand any model with
field-installable option modules that offer a choice of additional digital inputs and
outputs, analogue inputs and outputs, and Ethernet port.
Applications
b Panel instrumentation
b Sub-billing, cost allocation and energy management
b Remote monitoring of an electrical installation
b Power quality analysis
b Utility bill verification, utility contract optimization and load preservation.
Front view of PowerLogic PM800 series meter with
integrated display.
Characteristics
Easy to install
Mounts using two clips, with no tools required. Direct connect the voltage inputs, with
no need for potential transformers (PTs) up to 600 VAC.
PB101823-50
Easy to operate
Intuitive navigation with self-guided, language-selectable menus.
System status at a glance
Large, anti-glare display with back-light provides summary screens with multiple
values. Bar charts graphically represent system loading and I/O.
Custom alarming with time stamping
Over 50 alarm conditions, including over or under conditions, digital input changes,
phase unbalance and more. The models PM850 and PM870 offer boolean logic that
can be used to combine up to four alarms.
Rear view of PowerLogic PM800 series meter.
Power quality analysis

The PM800 series offers an incremental range of features for troubleshooting and
preventing power quality related problems. All models offer THD metering. The
PM810 with PM810LOG option and PM820 offer individual current and voltage
harmonics readings. The PM850 and PM870 offer waveform capture (PM870 is
configurable) and power quality compliance evaluation to the international EN50160
-ITI(CBEMA)/SEMI F-47 standards. The PM870 offers voltage and current
disturbance (sag/swell) detection.
Extensive on-board memory
All models offer billing (energy and demand), maintenance, alarm and customizable
data logs, all stored in non-volatile memory (PM810 requires PM810LOG option).
PE86229
ANSI 12.20 Class 0.2S and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S accuracy for active energy
Accurate energy measurement for sub-billing and cost allocation.
PMD-S IEC61557-12 performance standard
Meets PMD/SD/K70/0.5 and PMD/SS/K70/0.5 requirements for combined
Performance Measuring and monitoring Devices (PMD).
Trend curves and short-term forecasting
The models PM850 and PM870 offer trend logging and forecasting of energy and
demand readings to help compare load characteristics and manage energy costs.
PowerLogic PM800 series meter display

screen showing bar graphs.
Expandable I/O capabilities

Use the on-board or optional digital inputs for pulse counting, status/position
monitoring, demand synchronisation or control (gating) of the conditional energy
metering. Use the on-board or optional digital outputs for equipment control or
interfacing, controllable by internal alarms or externally through digital input status.
Use the optional analogue inputs and outputs for equipment monitoring or
interfacing.
Metering of other utilities (WAGES)
All models offer five channels for demand metering of water, air, gas, electricity or
steam utilities (WAGES) through the pulse counting capabilities of the digital inputs.
Pulses from multiple inputs can be summed through a single channel.
Modular and upgradeable
All models offer easy-to-install option modules (memory, I/O and communications)
and downloadable firmware for enhanced meter capabilities.
Remote display
The optional remote display can be mounted as far as 10 m from the metering unit.
The adapter includes an additional 2- or 4-wire RS-485/RS-232 communication port.
2014
PM800 series
Functions and characteristics (cont.)
PB101814 -36
Part Numbers
Description
Meter without display

Use the base meter unit without display to comply with voltage limitations for local regulations
when door mounting is not possible, or when meter voltage exceeds regulations, or when local
display is not required. When the meter is used without a display, configuration of the
communications port is limited to the default (address 1, 9600 baud, parity even). Requires
software to read data.
PE86134
PowerLogic PM800 series meter without display.
PM810 meter unit only, no display,

basic instrumentation, THD, alarming, 80 kB logging
(with PM810LOG)
basic instrumentation, THD, alarming, 80 kB logging
PM810UMG

basic instrumentation, THD, alarming, 800 kB
logging, waveform capture
PM850UMG

basic instrumentation, THD, alarming, 800 kB
logging, configurable waveform capture and
disturbance detection.
PM870UMG
PM820UMG
Meter with integrated display

Use the meter with integrated display for panel mounting when door space is available and when
voltage usage is within the local regulation limits.
PB101822 -68
PowerLogic PM800 series meter with integrated display.
PM810 meter with integrated display,
PM810MG
PM820 meter with integrated display
PM820MG
PM850MG
PM870MG
Meter with remote display

Conveniently packaged kit consist of a base meter (810, 820, 850 or 870) with a remote display,
remote display adapter, and remote display cable 3 m (9.ft 10 inches).
PM810 meter with remote display
PM810RDMG
PM820RDMG
PM850RDMG
PM870RDMG
PE86135
PowerLogic PM800 series meter with remote display.
Parts and accessories
PB101819 -32
Remote display adapter with display and cable.
Remote display adapter with remote display and PM8RDMG

a 3 m (9 ft 10 inch) cable
Use this combination of remote display, adapter, and
3 m cable to equip a base meter unit for use with a
remote display. In addition, the display can be carried
from meter to meter, enabling you to purchase one
display for multiple meters. Each base unit meter
must be equipped with a remote display adapter
(PM8RDA).
Remote display adapter alone
PM8RDA
When added to the front of the base unit (PM8xxU),
the adapter brings two additional communication
ports: one for the remote display and one 4-wire/2wire RS 485/RS 232.
Part number list continued on next page.
Remote display adaptor alone.
2014
PM800 series
DB119011
Part Numbers - continued
Description
Optional modules
Ethernet communication module provides a 10/100BaseTx UTP port,
an RS-485 Modbus serial master port, Ethernet-to-serial line gateway
functionality, and an embedded web server that is fully compliant with
Transparent Ready - Level 1 (TRe1) systems.
DB119013
DB119012
PowerLogic PM870 with ECC module (bottom view

showing connectors and configuration switches).
ECC module (side view

showing LED indicators).
The PM8ECC supports a private host PM8ECC MIB. Use of this MIB allows
the reading of Basic Metering Data, Configuration and Status of I/Os and
Configuration and Status of Alarms, plus SNMP Trap generation in response
to any PM8 on-board alarms.
2 relay outputs, 2 digital inputs
PM8M22
2 relay outputs, 6 digital inputs
PM8M26
2 relay outputs, 2 digital inputs, 2 analogue outputs,

2 analogue inputs
PM8M2222
PM810 optional logging module for on-board data recording, uses a

non-volatile, battery-backed internal clock
PM810LOG
RJ11 Extender kit to mount RJ11 jack in panel door

(for use with PM800, CM3000, and CM4000 series meters)
RJ11EXT
Cable for remote display adapter 1.25 m (4 ft)
CAB4
Cable for remote display adapter 3 m (9 ft 10 inch)
CAB12
Cable for remote display adapter 9.14 m (30 ft)
CAB30
PB1018216 -34
ECC module (front view)
PB101824 -50
PowerLogic PM8M26 module.
PowerLogic PM800 with PM8M22 and

PM8M26 modules.
PM8ECC
2014
PM800 series
Selection guide
PM810
PM820
PM850
PM870
Performance standard
b
ANSI 12.20 Class 0.2S
b
b
PMD-S IEC 61557-12 PMD/SD/K70/0.5 and PMD/SS/ b

K70/0.5
b
b
b
b
General
Use on LV and HV systems

b
b
b
b
Current and voltage accuracy
0.5 %/0.2% 0.5 %/0.2% 0.5 %/0.2% 0.2 %/0.2%
Active energy accuracy (5% to 200% of load) 0.2 %
0.2 %
0.2%
0.2%
Number of samples per cycle
128
128
128
128
Instantaneous rms values
Current, voltage, frequency

Active, reactive,apparent power Total & per phase
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Power factor
Active, reactive, apparent energy
Configurable accumulation mode
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Predicted active, reactive, apparent power

Synchronisation of the measurement window
Demand calculation modeBlock, sliding, thermal
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Hour counter
Energy values
Demand values
Current
Active, reactive, apparent

power
Total & per phase
Present & max.

Present & max.
Other measurements
Power quality measurements

Harmonic distortion
Current & voltage
Individual harmonics
Current & voltage
63
63
b (2)
b
b
Min/max of instantaneous values

Data logs
Event logs
b
2 (1)
-
b
2
b
b
4
b
b
4
b
Trending / forecasting
GPS synchronisation
Alarms
Time stamping
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b (1)
b
b (1)
Display and I/O
b
White backlit LCD display
b
Multilingual
Digital input (standard/optional)
1/12
Digital output (standard/optional)
1 KY/4 RY
Analogue inputs (standard/optional)
0/4
Analogue outputs (standard/optional)
0/4
Input metering capability (number of channels) 5
Communication
RS 485 port
Modbus protocol
RS 232/RS 485, 2- or 4-wire Modbus RTU/
ASCII (with addition of PM8RDA module)
Ethernet 10/100Base Tx UTP port and RS485
Modbus serial master port with PM8ECC
DB109269
b
31
Waveform capture
EN50160 - ITI(CBEMA)/SEMI F-47
Sag and swell detection
Data recording
PowerLogic PM800 series connectors.

1. Control power.
2. Voltage inputs.
3. Digital input/output.
4. RS 485 port.
5. Option module connector.
6. Current inputs.
7. Mounting clips.
b
31 (1)
2-wire
b
b
b
(4)
1/12
1 KY/4 RY
0/4
0/4
5
1/12
1 KY/4 RY
0/4
0/4
5
1/12
1 KY/4 RY
0/4
0/4
5
2-wire
b
b
2-wire
b
b
2-wire
b
b
Option modules selection guide
The PM800 can be fitted with 2 optional modules, unless otherwise indicated (3)
PM8ECC module
10/100BaseTx UTP port, RS-485 Modbus serial master port, Ethernet to serial line gateway,
embedded web server
Input/Output modules
PowerLogic PM800 series meter with I/O module.
PM8M22 PM8M26* PM8M2222
Relay outputs
2
2
2
Digital inputs
2
6
2
Analogue outputs 4-20 mA
2
Analogue inputs 0-5 Vdc or 4-20 mA
2
* Includes a 24 Vdc Power Supply that can be used to power the digital inputs
(1) With PM810LOG, battery-backed internal clock and 80 kB memory. (2) Configurable. (3) Series 800
Power Meters supports up to two option modules. When PM8M2222 & PM8ECC are mounted together
with control power>370 V AC temperature rating must be reduced to -25C to 50C. Same applies when
using two PM8M2222. (4) PM850 does not include sag or swell detection.
2014
PM800 series
Electrical characteristics
63rd harmonic, 128 samples per cycle

Type of measurement
Measurement accuracy standard PMD-S IEC 61557-12 compliant
Current
Voltage
Power Factor
Active Power
0.5% from 0.5 A to 10 A

0.2% 10 V - 277 V
+/- 0.002 from 0.500 leading to 0.500 lagging
0.2%
Frequency
+/- 0.01 Hz at 45 to 67 Hz
+/- 0.01 Hz at 350 to 450 Hz
IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S and
ANSI C12.20 Class 0.2S
Active Energy
Reactive Energy
IEC 62053-23 Class 2
Data update
rate
Input-voltage
Measured voltage
characteristics
1s
0 to 600 V AC (direct L-L)

0 to 347 V AC (direct L-N)
up to 3.2 MV AC (with external VT)
Metering over-range
1.5 Un
Impedance
5 MW
Frequency measurement range 45 to 67 Hz and 350 to 450 Hz
Input-current
CT ratings
characteristics
Control Power
Primary
Inputs/Outputs (2)
Standard
1 digital KY pulse output
(meter unit)
1 digital input
PM8M22
option
2 relay outputs (1)

2 digital inputs
PM8M26
option
2 relay outputs (1)
PM8M2222
option
Switching
frequency
(digital I/O)
6 digital inputs
24 V internal supply
20 - 34 V DC, 10 mA max. (feeds 6 digital inputs)
6 to 240 V AC, 6 to 30 V DC
2 A rms, 5 A max. for 10 seconds per hour
2 digital inputs
20 to 150 V AC/DC, 2 mA max.
2 analogue outputs
4 to 20 mA dc into 600 ohms maximum
2 analogue inputs
Adjustable from 0 to 5 V DC or 4-20 mA
Standard
Input/output 25 Hz, 50 % duty cycle (20 ms ON/OFF)
PM8M22
Input/output 1 Hz, 50 % duty cycle (500 ms ON/OFF)
PM8M26 and
Input
25 Hz, 50 % duty cycle (20 ms ON/OFF)
PM8M2222
Output
1 Hz, 50 % duty cycle (500 ms ON/OFF)
2 relay outputs (1)
Weight (meter with integrated display)

IP degree of protection (IEC 60529)
Without options
With 1 option
Environmental conditions
Operating
temperature
6 to 220 V AC 10% or 3 to 250 V DC 10%,

100 mA max. at 25 C, 1350 V rms isolation
24 to 125 V AC/DC 10 %, < 5 mA maximum
burden, 1350 Vrms isolation
6 to 240 V AC or 6 to 30 V DC
19 to 30 V DC, 5 mA max. at 24 V DC
6 to 240 V AC, 6 to 30 V DC
20 to 150 V AC/DC, 2 mA max.
Mechanical characteristics
Dimensions
Adjustable from 5 A to 32767 A
Secondary 1 A or 5 A
Measurement input range
5 mA to 10 A AC
15 A continuous
Permissible overload
50 A for 10 seconds per hour
500 A for 1 second per hour
Impedance
< 0.1 W
Load
< 0.15 VA
AC
115 to 415 10 % V AC, 15 VA with options at
45 to 67 Hz or 350 to 450 Hz
DC
125 to 250 20 % V DC, 10 W with options
Ride-through time
45 ms at 120 V AC or 125 V DC
Meter
Display
Meter + display
0.6 kg
IP52 integrated display. Type 12 compliant
remote display (with gasket). IP30 meter body
96 x 96 x 70 mm (mounting surface)
96 x 96 x 90 mm (mounting surface)
-25 C to +70 C (2)
-10 C to +50 C
-40 C to +85 C
5 to 95 % RH at 40 C (non-condensing)
2
III, for distribution systems up to 347 V L-N /
600 V AC L-L
Dielectric withstand
As per EN 61010, UL508
Altitude
3000 m max.
(1) Mechanical endurance: 15 million operations, Electrical endurance:25000 commutations at
2 A / 250 V AC (2) Series 800 Power Meters supports up to two option modules. When
PM82222 & PM8ECC are mounted together with control power >370 V AC temperature rating
must be reduced to -25C to 50C. Same is true when using two PM8M2222.
Storage temp.
Humidity rating
Pollution degree
Installation category
2014
PM800 series
Electromagnetic compatibility
Electrostatic discharge
Level III (IEC 61000-4-2)
Immunity to radiated fields
Immunity to fast transients
Immunity to impulse waves
Conducted immunity
Immunity to magnetic fields
Immunity to voltage dips
Conducted and radiated

emissions
Harmonics emissions
e industrial environment/FCC part 15 class A EN 55011
Flicker emissions
IEC 61000-3-3
Surge immunity
IEC 61000-4-12
IEC 61000-3-2
Surge withstand capability (SWC) ANSI C37.90.1.2002
Safety
Europe
e, as per IEC 61010-1 i (1)
U.S. and Canada
cULus (UL508 and CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95, Industrial

Control Equipment)
Onboard communications
RS 485 port
2-wire, up to 38400 baud, Modbus
Model-dependent characteristics
Data Logs
Min./max.
One event log

Trend curves
(PM850 and PM870 only)
Hour counter
Energy per shift
Forecasting
(PM850 and PM870 only)
PM850 waveform capture
PM870 enhanced waveform
capture
Alarms
Memory available for logging

and waveform capture (2)
Firmware update (all models)
Bar graphs (all models)
PM810 with PM810LOG, PM820, PM850 and PM870:

- 1 billing log
- 1 customisable log
PM850 and PM870 only: 2 additional custom logs
Worst min. and max. with phase indication for Voltages,
Currents, Voltage unbalance, and THD. Min. and max. values
for power factor (True and Displacement), power (P, Q, S) and
frequency
Time stamping to 1 second
Four trend curves: 1 minute, 1 hour, 1 day and 1 month. Min./
max./avg. values recorded for eight parameters:
- every second for one minute for the 1-minute curve
- every minute for one hour for the 1-hour curve
- every hour for one day for the 1-day curve
- every day for one month for the 1-month curve
Load running time in days, hours and minutes
Up to three user-defined intervals per day
Available for all models (the PM810 requires the PM810LOG
module)
Forecasting of the values for the trended parameters for the
next four hours and next four days
Triggered manually or by alarm, 3-cycle, 128 samples/cycle on
6 user configurable channels
From 185 cycles on 1 channel at 16 samples per cycle up to
3 cycles on 6 channels at 128 samples per cycle
Adjustable pickup and dropout setpoints and time delays,
numerous activation levels possible for a given type of alarm
Historical and active alarm screens with time stamping
Response time: 1 second
Boolean combination of four alarms is possible using
the operators NAND, AND, OR, NOR and XOR on PM850 and
PM870
Digital alarms: status change of digital inputs
80 kbytes in PM810 with PM810LOG and PM820
800 kbytes in PM850 and PM870
Update via the communication ports
File download available free from www.powerlogic.com
Graphical representation of system performance
Display characteristics
Languages
English, French, Spanish, German, Russian, Turkish and

Portuguese.
Display screen
Back-lit white LCD (6 lines total, 4 concurrent values)
Dimensions
Display screen viewable area
73 x 69 mm
Integrated display Overall
96 x 96 mm
Depth meter + display 69.4 mm + 17.8 mm

Remote display
Weight
2014
Overall
96 x 96 x 40 mm
Meter with remote display adapter
0.81 kg
Remote display
0.23 kg
Power Meter Series 800
Dimensions and connection
Power meter with integrated display
DB111766
DB111767
DB111765
Dimensions
DB111768
Front-panel mounting (meter with integrated display)
DB111770
DB111769
Spacing between units
2014
Power Meter Series 800
Dimensions and connection (cont.)
Remote display door mounting
DB111792
Flush mounting
DB111793
Surface mount
DB111794
Mounting in a 102 cutout (replace analogue device: ammeter, voltmeter, etc.)
2014
RCS Nanterre 954 503 439

Capital social 896 313 776
www.schneider-electric.com
As standards, specifications and designs develop from time to time, please ask
for confirmation of the information given in this document.
This document has been printed on recycled paper

Design: Schneider Electric
Photos: Schneider Electric
10-31-1247
PLSED303023EN
04-2014
ART / 2014 - Schneider Electric - All rights reserved
Schneider Electric Industries SAS

35, Rue Joseph Monier,
CS 30323
F - 92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex
Product data sheet

Characteristics
PM820MG
power meter PM820 - with display - 80 kB

logging
Range of product
PowerLogic PM800
Device short name
PM820
type
Power meter
Neither Schneider Electric Industries SAS nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein.
Main
Complementary
Power quality analysis
Up to the 31st harmonic
Type of measurement
Power factor (per phase)

Energy
Reactive power (per phase)
Active power (per phase)
Apparent power (per phase)
Reactive power (total)
Active power (total)
Apparent power (total)
Power factor (total)
Frequency
Voltage
Current
Supply voltage
115...415 V AC (350...450 Hz)

115...415 V AC (45...67 Hz)
125...250 V DC
Network frequency
45...67 Hz
350...450 Hz
Power consumption in VA
15 VA
Display type
Backlit LCD
Display resolution
6 lines
Sampling rate
128 samples/cycle
Measurement current
5A
1A
Input type
Current 0.005...10 A (impedance <= 0.1 Ohm)
Measurement voltage
0...347 V AC phase to neutral

0...600 V AC phase to phase
Number of inputs
1 digital 0...5 mA 24...125 V AC/DC
Measurement accuracy
0.2 % power
0.002 power factor
0.01 Hz frequency
0.2 % energy
0.2 % voltage (10...227 V)
0.5 % current (0.5...10 A)
Accuracy class
Class 0.2 (active energy according to ANSI C12.20)

Class 0.5S (active energy according to IEC 62053-22)
Class 2 (reactive energy according to IEC 62053-23)
Number of outputs
1 digital (static)
Communication port protocol
Modbus: 38.4 kbauds,
Communication port support
RS485
Jul 21, 2015
Data recording
Alarms
Event logs
Min/Max of instantaneous values
Time stamping
GPS synchronisation
Basic with 2 data logs
Memory capacity
80 kB
Environment
Electromagnetic compatibility
Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in low-voltage, conforming to IEC 61000-3-3
Immunity to microbreaks and voltage drops class class III, conforming to IEC
61000-4-11
Immunity to impulse waves class class III, conforming to IEC 61000-4-8
Conducted RF disturbances class class III, conforming to IEC 61000-4-6
1.2/50 s shock waves immunity test class class III, conforming to IEC 61000-4-5
Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test class class III, conforming to IEC
61000-4-4
Susceptibility to electromagnetic fields class class III, conforming to IEC
61000-4-3
Electrostatic discharge immunity test class class III, conforming to IEC 61000-4-2
Conducted and radiated emissions, conforming to EN 55011 class A
Limits for harmonic current emissions, conforming to IEC 61000-3-2
Immunity to impulse waves, conforming to IEC 61000-4-12
Mounting mode
Flush-mounted
Mounting support
Panel
Type of installation
Indoor installation
Overvoltage category
III
IP degree of protection
IP52 (front face) conforming to IEC 60529

IP30 (back) conforming to IEC 60529
Relative humidity
90 % 40 C
Pollution degree
Ambient air temperature for operation
-25...70 C
Ambient air temperature for storage
-40...85 C
Operating altitude
0...3000 m
Standards
IEC 61010-1
UL 508
CSA C22.2 No 14
CE
CULus
Width
96 mm
Depth
70 mm (meter)
Height
96 mm
Product weight
0.6 kg
Green Premium product
Product environmental profile
Available
Product end of life instructions
Available
Download End Of Life Manual
General Purpose Plug-In

Timers
Type JCK
Class 9050 / Refer to Catalog 9050CT9601
Class 9050 Type JCK timing relays are designed

to provide low-cost timing in a plug-in housing.
The Types JCK11 thru 59 provide 1% repeat
accuracy. The Types JCK60 and 70 offer 0.1%
repeat accuracy. These timers are directly
interchangeable with many other
8 and 11 pin tube base timers.
9050JCK46V20
Up to 0.1% repeat accuracy

Timing from 0.05 seconds to 999 hours
Available in 5 timing modes
DPDT contacts (2 N.O. and 2 N.C.)
10 A contact rating
Transient protected
Hold down spring available
Variable or fixed time delay
Horsepower rated
www.us.schneider-electric.com
FOR CURRENT INFORMATION
9050JCK32V36
with 8501NH7
Table 23.154: Variable Time Delay

$ Price
Off
Delayb
$ Price
Off Delay
Power Trigger
0.110 seconds
JCK11f
52.00 JCK21f
65.00
JCK21PTf
0.330 seconds
JCK12f
52.00 JCK22f
65.00
JCK22PTf
0.660 seconds
JCK13f
52.00 JCK23f
65.00
JCK23PTf
1.2120 seconds
JCK14f
52.00 JCK24f
65.00
JCK24PTf
1.8180 seconds
JCK15f
52.00 JCK25f
65.00
JCK25PTf
0.110 minutes
JCK16f
58.00 JCK26f
71.00
JCK26PTf
0.330 minutes
JCK17f
58.00 JCK27f
71.00
JCK27PTf
0.660 minutes
JCK18f
58.00 JCK28f
71.00
JCK28PTf
1.2120 minutes
JCK19f
58.00 JCK29f
71.00
JCK29PTf
a
Two dials are provided for independently adjustable repeat cycle timing ranges.
b
Initiating contact can be up to 50 feet from the timer.
$ Price
Interval
65.00
65.00
65.00
65.00
65.00
71.00
71.00
71.00
71.00
JCK31f
JCK32f
JCK33f
JCK34f
JCK35f
JCK36f
JCK37f
JCK38f
JCK39f
AC Amperes
120
240
3
1.5
10
10
10
10
1/3
1/2
10
28
23
Type JCK60
This On Delay timer uses a 5 position rotary switch to select the timing
range. The three pushbutton thumbwheels are used to select the time
value.
Table 23.158: Selection and Pricing
RELAYS AND TIMERS
Timing
Modes
Timing
Ranges
.01s 0.059.99 seconds
0.1s 00.199.9 seconds
S
001999 seconds
On Delay 0.1m 00.199.9 minutes
M
001999 minutes
0.1h 00.199.9 hours
H
001999 hours
Type
$ Price
JCK60f 101.00
Two 5 position rotary switches are used to select the timing mode and
timing range. The three pushbutton thumbwheels are used to select the
time value.
With appropriate 8501NR Socket:

E78351
NLDX
File
Class
214768
3211 07
Table 23.159: Selection and Pricing

Timing
Timing
Type
$ Price
Modes
Range
On Delay
Off Delay
Same as
Interval
JCK70f
115.00
JCK60
One Shot
Repeat Cycleg
g
The repeat cycle mode utilizes the same
on-time and off-time.
Without Socket
RoHS
9050JCK1-5 = 0627
Compliant
9050JCK6070=0648
as of date code
E3190
NLDX2
Table 23.156: Voltage Codes

Code
Table 23.160: Class 8501 Hold Down Spring
V36
V14
V17
V20
V24
For use on Class 9050 Type JCK Timers

Hold down spring holds timer in socket during heavy vibration.
(See 9050JCK with 8501NH7 photo at the top of this page.)
Class
Type
$ Price ea.
8501
NH7
5.50
Table 23.161: How to Order

To Order Specify:
23-32
DC
Volts
hp
Type JCK70
For all 9050JCK timers:
12 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
48 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac/110 Vdc
24050/60
Inductive
B300, R300, AC15 and DC13
For sockets, see page 23-16

For DIN rail, see page 24-16
Voltage
93.00
93.00
93.00
93.00
93.00
98.00
98.00
98.00
98.00
Res. Make Break

and Continuous
30
15
AC
Volts
Class 8501 Sockets
File
CCN
JCK51f
JCK52f
JCK53f
JCK54f
JCK55f
JCK56f
JCK57f
JCK58f
JCK59f
DC Amperes
Inductive 35% P.F.
JCK1F(XXXX)cf
File
CCN
$ Price
Break
$ Price
0.1 to 180
52.00
181 to 3600
58.00
0.1 to 180
65.00
Off Delay e
JCK2F(XXXX)cf
181 to 3600
71.00
0.1 to 180
65.00
Off Delay with
JCK2F(XXXX)PTcf
Power Trigger
181 to 3600
71.00
0.1 to 180
52.00
Interval
JCK3F(XXXX)cf
181 to 3600
58.00
0.1 to 180
65.00
One Shote
JCK4F(XXXX)cf
181 to 3600
71.00
0.1 to 180
65.00
One Shot with
JCK4F(XXXX)PTcf
Power Trigger
181 to 3600
71.00
0.1 to 180
93.00
Repeat Cycle
JCK5F(XXXX)cdf
181 to 3600
98.00
c
(XXXX) denotes the timing period in seconds.
Example: Class 9050 Type JCK1F60 is an On Delay timer fixed at 60 seconds.
d
Fixed repeat cycle timers can be supplied with the same or different On-Time and
Off-Time.
e
Initiating contact can be up to 50 feet from the timer.
f
Voltage code must be specified to order this product. Refer to standard voltage codes
listed below and insert as shown in How To Order.
On Delay
65.00
65.00
65.00
65.00
65.00
71.00
71.00
71.00
71.00
JCK41PTf
JCK42PTf
JCK43PTf
JCK44PTf
JCK45PTf
JCK46PTf
JCK47PTf
JCK48PTf
JCK49PTf
Repeat
Cyclea
Table 23.157: Contact Ratings

Timing Range (seconds)
Res. 75% P.F.

Make Break and
Continuous
Type
65.00
65.00
65.00
65.00
65.00
71.00
71.00
71.00
71.00
JCK41f
JCK42f
JCK43f
JCK44f
JCK45f
JCK46f
JCK47f
JCK48f
JCK49f
Continuous
Timing Mode
52.00
52.00
52.00
52.00
52.00
58.00
58.00
58.00
58.00
One Shot
$ Price Power Trigger $ Price
Make
Table 23.155: Fixed Time Delay
$ Price One Shotb
Break
On
Delay
Make
Knob Adjustable
Timing Range
CP2
Discount
Schedule
Class Number
Type Number
Voltage Code
Modified
4/13/08
Catalog Number
Class
Type
9050
JCK11
Voltage
Code
V20

All Rights Reserved
Product Data Sheet
8502SDO2V02S
Full Voltage Magnetic Contactor , Non-Reversing,
NEMA Size: 2, 45A
List Price
$588.00 USD
Availability Stock Item: This item is normally stocked in our distribution facility.
Technical Characteristics
Control Source
Separate Control Circuit
Catalog Reference Number
8502CT9701
Depth
4.94 Inches
Width
4.94 Inches
Height
5.13 Inches
Ampere Rating
45A
Application
Used to switch heating loads, capacitors, transformer and electric motors where overload
protection is provided separately
Approvals
UL Listed File E78351 CCN NLDX - CSA Certified File LR60905 Class 3211 04
Enclosure Type
Open
Horsepower Rating (3-Phase)
10HP@200VAC - 15HP@230VAC - 25HP@460/575VAC
Maximum Voltage Rating
600VAC
Mounting Type
Surface
NEMA Size
Number of Poles
3-Pole
Operating Voltage
120VAC@60Hz - 110VAC@50Hz
Phase
3-Phase
Action
Non-Reversing
Terminal Type
Screw Clamp
Type
Weight
6.75 Pounds
Shipping and Ordering

Category
21192 - Contactors/Starters, NEMA, Open/Enclosed (NEMA 1), Size 1 & 2
Discount Schedule
CP1
Article Number
785901881612
Package Quantity
Weight
5.75 lbs.
Availability Code
Stock Item: This item is normally stocked in our distribution facility.
Returnability
As standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation of the information given in this document.
Generated: 06/16/2009 02:34:17
2009 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Product Details
Page 1 of 2
Return to search
Print Page
Product
Number:
23014
Order
Abbreviation:
F18T8CW/K24
General
Description:
18W, 24" MOL, T8 preheat fluorescent lamp,

Cool White phosphor, 4200K color
temperature, 60 CRI, appliance and vending
applications
Product Information
Abbrev. With Packaging Info.
F18T8CWK24 24/CS 1/SKU
Actual Length (in)
23.78
Actual Length (mm)
604.0
Average Rated Life (hr)
7500
Base
Medium Bipin
Bulb
T8
Color Rendering Index (CRI)
60
Color Temperature/CCT (K)
4200
Diameter (in)
1.10
Diameter (mm)
27.8
Industry Standards
ANSI C78.81 - 2001
Initial Lumens at 25C
1190
Mean Lumens at 25C
1035
Nominal Length (in)
24
Nominal Wattage (W)
18.00
Additional Product Information

Product Documents, Graphs, and Images
Packaging Information
Footnotes
Approximate initial lumens after 100 hours operation.
The life ratings of fluorescent lamps are based on 3 hr. burning cycles under specified
conditions and with ballast meeting ANSI specifications. If burning cycle is increased,
there will be a corresponding increase in the average hours life.
Print Page
http://ecom.mysylvania.com/sylvaniab2c/catalog/updateItems.do
6/17/2008
Overload Relays
Model 777-P2
Features:

SymComs Model 777-P2 is a fully programmable electronic overload
relay. It is designed to monitor and protect any 3-phase, 200-480VAC
motor drawing 2-800 full load amps (external CTs are required above 90
amps). It provides unsurpassed protection from faulty voltage, underload
and overload conditions.
The 777-P2 incorporates a 3-digit LED display that is used for programming,
providing real-time operational information and displaying diagnostic
codes to aid in troubleshooting a fault condition.
Protects 3-phase motors from:

High voltage
Low voltage
Voltage unbalance
Reverse-phase
Overcurrent
Undercurrent
Current unbalance
Single-phase
Ground fault, Class II
Network programmable
Programmable with 9-volt battery prior to
installation
Automatic reset with three separate restart delay
timers, or manual reset
Tamper guard
RS-485 communications port (communications
module sold separately)
3-digit LED diagnostic display
Last fault memory
UL and ULC listed
CE compliant
CSA approved
Surface or DIN rail mount
5-year warranty
Made in USA
The 777-P2 Series units can be used as a stand-alone product, or it can

be used in a network to communicate with a PC, PLC, SCADA system,
or SymComs Solutions Software with the help of its built in RS-485
communications port. Up to 99 model 777-P2 Series units can be networked
together. The 777-P2, in conjunction with SymComs CIO modules,
supports several communication protocols including Modbus/RTU,
Modbus/TCP, DeviceNet and Profibus. The units can also be connected to
SymComs remote monitors for a simple, cost-effective way to meet new
requirements for arc-flash safety.
The units many features include enhanced trip classes beyond the NEMA
standard trip classes. The settable trip class range is 2-60, with or without
jam protection, and a secondary linear trip delay can be set with a range of
0-60 seconds. If both the trip class and linear trip delay are set, the 777-P2
will follow the faster trip time. Another feature is the automatic dry-well
recovery timer that allows the unit to automatically select a restart delay
based on the last cycles run time. This allows the 777-P2 to optimize restart
delay times.
SS-777-P2_B
The 777-P2 can be pre-programmed with a 9-volt battery prior to actual

installation. This can save a lot of time during initial installations and avoid
subsequent service calls when commissioning new projects.
Common applications for the 777-P2 include conveyor systems, HVAC
equipment, saws and grinders, fan motors and almost any pumping
application.
Auxiliary Products:

Remote Displays (RM-1000/RM-2000)

Communication Modules
Remote Manual Reset Kit
Solutions Software
www.
SSAC.com
...your timer & flasher specialists
Rev. 0810
Specifications
Functional Specifications
Programmable Operating Points
LV-Low Voltage Threshold
HV-High Voltage Threshold
VUB-Voltage Unbalance Threshold
MULT-# of Conductors or CT Ratio (xxx:5)
OC-Overcurrent Threshold
UC-Undercurrent Threshold
CUB-Current Unbalance Threshold
TC-Overcurrent Trip Class and Linear
Overcurrent Trip Delay
RD1-Rapid-cycle Timer
RD2-Restart Delay after all faults except
undercurrent (motor cool-down timer)
RD3-Restart Delay after undercurrent (dry-well
recovery timer)
#RU- Number of restarts after all undercurrent
faults
ADDR-RS485 Address
#RF-Number of restarts after all faults except
undercurrent
UCTD-Undercurrent Trip Delay
GF-Ground Fault Current Threshold
0.200 [5.08]
170-524V
172-528V
2-25% or 999 (disabled)
1-10, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800
(20-100A) MULT of 80-140% of CT Primary
(0, 10-98A) MULT or 40-140% of CT Primary
2-50% or 999 (disabled)
02-60, J02-J60; L00-L60 or oFF
2.650
[67.31]
2.280
[57.91]
3.050
[77.47]
0-999 seconds
2-500 minutes
2-500 minutes, A (automatic)
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, A (automatic)
3.100 [78.74]
A01-A99
0, 1, oc1, 2, oc2, 3, oc3, 4, oc4, A, ocA (automatic)
3.600 [91.44]
3.850 [97.79]
2-999 seconds (standard)

(3-20A) MULT or 12-40% of CT Primary or oFF
Input Characteristics
Supply Voltage
Frequency
Motor Full Load Amp Range
200-480VAC
50/60Hz
2-20A, (looped conductors required); 20-90A (direct); 80-800A
(external CTs required)
OPTIONAL LOOP HOLES

B
MAIN CONDUCTOR PASS HOLES
1.200
[30.48]
Output Characteristics
Output Contact Rating - SPDT (Form C)
Pilot Duty
General Purpose
Expected Life
Mechanical
Electrical
480VA@240VAC, B300
10A@240VAC
D. 0.650 [16.51]
1 x 106 operations
1 x 105 operations at rated load
5.050
[128.27]
General Characteristics
Ambient Operating
Ambient Storage
Accuracy at 25o C (77o F)
Voltage
Current
Timing
Ground Fault
Repeatability
Voltage
Current
Maximum Input Power
Pollution Degree
Class of Protection
Relative Humidity
Terminal Torque
Standards Passed
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Conducted
Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Radiated
Fast Transient Burst
Short Circuit
Surge
IEC
ANSI/IEEE
Hi-potential Test
Vibration
Shock
Safety Marks
UL
CE
Max Conductor Size through 777-P2
Dimensions
Weight
Mounting Method
How to order:

-20o to 70o C (-4o to 158o F)

-40o to 80o C (-40o to 176o F)
1%
3% (<100A direct)
0.5 second
15% (<100A)
3.600 [91.44]
0.5% of nominal voltage

1% (<100A direct)
10 W
3
IP20
10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3
7 in.-lbs.
3.850 [97.79]
inches (millimeters)
IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air

IEC 61000-4-6, Level 3 10V
IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3 10 V/m
IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5 kV input power
100kA
61000-4-5 Level 3, 2kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground
C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV
line-to-line
Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 minute)
IEC 68-2-6, 10-55Hz, 1mm peak-to-peak, 2 hours, 3 axis
IEC 68-2-27, 30g, 3 axis, 11ms duration, half-sine pulse
UL508, UL1053
IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1
0.65 with insulation
3.05 H x 3.85 W x 5.05 D in. (77.47 x 97.79 x 128.27 mm)
1.2 lbs. (544.31 g)
Surface mount (4 - #8 screws) or DIN Rail Mount
Part Number: 777-P2
SymCom
222 Disk Drive
Rapid City, SD 57702
www.SymCom.com
4.700
[119.38]
SSAC
8242 Loop Rd
Baldwinsville, NY 13027
www.SSAC.com
CustomerService@SymCom.com TechnicalSupport@SymCom.com
800.843.8848 605.348.5580 605.348.5685 fax
Communication Module
Model RS485MS-2W
Features:

Compatible with all 777 Series units as well as 77C

and 601 units
Self-powered from 777 type product it connects to
Terminals for a remote reset (N/O push button)
Removable quick disconnect plugs for easier
installation
UL listed
CE compliant
5-year warranty
Made in USA
SymComs RS485MS-2W communications module is a convenient and cost

effective two-wire Modbus/RTU interface capable of providing remote
control and monitoring of a 777 Plus Series overload relay/power monitor
over a Modbus network. The Model RS485MS-2W communications
module serves two very important functions. Its primary function, from a
communications network view, is to electrically isolate the communications
network from the high voltages present in SymComs units and it converts
the communications signals from the microprocessors 5-volt levels into
RS-485 levels. A third function of the RS485MS-2W is to provide power to
the RM-1000 remote monitor (when utilized).
The RS485MS-2W also provides the capability to attach a remote reset. A
N/O push button type reset can be mounted on a panel door to eliminate
the need to open the panel door for a manual reset, thereby avoiding a
potential arc flash.
SS-RS485MS-2W-C
The RS485MS-2W does not support four-wire communications systems.
Rev. 0810
Specifications
Functional Characteristics
Remote Reset
Optional normally open pushbutton switch rated

24VDC, 10mA (min.)
Ambient Operating Temperature
Relative Humidity
Terminal (depluggable terminal block
Torque
Wire AWG
Class of Protection
Standards Passed
Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated
Hi-Potential Test
Surge Immunity
Input Power
Inputs/Data Lines
Safety Marks
UL
CE
Enclosure
Dimensions
Weight
Mounting Method
How to order:

-20o to 50o C (-4o to 122o F)

10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3
3 in.-lbs. (max.)
18-24 AWG
IP20
IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air
150MHz, 10V/m
IEC 61000-4-4; Level 3, 4kV input power
Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 minute)
IEC 61000-4-5, Level 1
IEC 61000-4-5, Level 2
UL508 (File #E68520)
IEC 60947
Polycarbonate
2.08H x 2.90W x 0.77D (52.83 x 73.66 x 19.56mm)
0.26 lbs. (4.16 oz., 117.93 g)
9-pin SUB-D connector on the side of a 777-Series
Part Number: RS485MS-2W
SymCom
222 Disk Drive
Rapid City, SD 57701
www.SymCom.com
SSAC
8242 Loop Rd
Baldwinsville, NY 13027
www.SSAC.com
CustomerService@SymCom.com TechnicalSupport@SymCom.com
800.843.8848 605.348.5580 605.348.5685 fax
Remote Monitor
Model RM-1000
Features:
Liquid crystal display
Satisfies new arc-flash safety requirements
Optional steel enclosure for added protection
from weather elements and vandalism
5-year warranty
Made in the USA
The RM-1000 is a motor monitoring device to be used in conjunction with

SymComs 77C and 777 family of overload relays/power monitors (except the
777-P1) and SymComs model 601 voltage monitor. The RM-1000/777 motor
management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and
critical, user-friendly motor monitoring.
The RM-1000 can monitor and control up to (16) 777 Plus Series units through
an RS-485 network using Modbus RTU protocol. A second communication port
allows monitoring and control from a computer, PLC, DCS or SCADA system. Up
to (99) 777 Plus Series units can be accessed from the host computer or PLC with
the RM-1000 acting as a repeater for any of its motor protectors.
The RM-1000 is environmentally protected and can easily be mounted on the
front of a panel or motor control center. The water resistant enclosure and keypad
assembly is also resistant to damage from ultraviolet light. All variations of the
RM-1000 have a wide operating temperature range of -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F).
The RM-1000 is manufactured in one of three different enclosure ratings. The
standard RM-1000 carries a NEMA-3R and UL type 12 rating. The RM-1000-3R
has small weep holes in the bottom and only carries a NEMA-3R rating. It is ideal
for applications where there is potential for condensing moisture. The RM-1000
NEMA 4 carries a NEMA 4X rating.
The RM-1000 has the following display and control capabilities for up to 16
attached motor or pump protectors:
Displays:
Individual line currents and average current
Current unbalance
Individual line-line voltages and average voltage
Voltage unbalance
Present fault trip reason and restart timer status
Last four faults
777 Plus Series setpoints
Run hours on each motor
Warning of pending (imminent) faults
Controls:
Change setpoints
Reset run-hour meter
Reset the 777 Plus Series relay
Clear last fault in the 777 Plus Series
AUXILIARY PRODUCTS:

Steel enclosure (RM-1000-ENCL)

777 Plus Series overload relays/power
monitors
Communication Modules
(605) 348.5580 / (800) 843.8848 / Fax (605) 348.5685

customerservice@symcom.com / technicalsupport@symcom.com
Rev. 0210
Specifications
Functional Characteristics
Communications
Baud Rate
Protocol
Serial Interface
Range
1200-19200
Modbus RTU
RS-485
50 ft., 4000 ft. with separate isolated power supply
4.544"
Input Characteristics
Nominal Power Supply Voltage Rating
Max Current
12-24VAC or VDC (isolated power source with maximum 4A

overcurrent protection)
100mA
Ambient Operating Temperature
Protection Class
RM-1000
RM-1000-3R
RM-1000 NEMA 4
Relative Humidity
Terminal Torque
Standards Passed
Electromagnetic Field
Surge
Conducted RF
Voltage Dips & Interruptions
Safety Marks
UL listed
CE
Dimensions
Weight
Material
UV Exposure w/o degradation
Keypad Mechanical Lifetime
Keypad Material
Panel Thickness
-20o to 70o C (-4o to 158o F)

NEMA 3R/UL Type 12
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4X
85% non-condensing
Depluggable, 3 in.-lbs.
3.619"
IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air discharge

IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3, 10V/m
IEC 61000-4-4, Level 4+, 4kV on cable clamp
IEC 61000-4-5, 24V supply, Level 1 (+500V), RS-485 & reset lines,
Level 2 (+1kV)
IEC 61000-4-6, Level 3+ (30 Vrms)
SEMI F47
UL508
IEC 60947-1, IEC 1131-2
4.5 H x 3.2 W x 0.9 D
6 oz.
Polycarbonate
2000 hrs.
200,000 cycles
Polyester
0.03 min.
1.425"
0.9"
How to order:
Part Number: RM-1000

RM-1000-3R

RM-1000 NEMA 4
(605) 348.5580 / (800) 843.8848 / Fax (605) 348.5685

customerservice@symcom.com / technicalsupport@symcom.com
Rev. 0210
AC/DC POWERED
Communication Interface Units
KEY FEATURES
2.4, 9.6, 14.4 & 28.8 kps Modems

Fast Poll Digital 9.6kps (MIU9.6FPD only)
48 to 240VAC/DC Power Supply
IEC801-4 Surge Protection
-40C to +85C Operating Temp
For Meters, Relays, SCADA, etc
DESIGNED FOR HARSH ENVIRONMENTS

To service the growing need for efficient, reliable data communications in the harsh environments of utility substations
and industrial facilities, Raymar-Telenetics has developed a family of data communications products that can operate
from various AC/DC power supplies and survive high surge levels and extreme temperatures. All this without
compromising the performance expected from state-of-the-art communications devices.
With the rapid move toward intelligent substations, where meters, relays, RTUs, SCADA systems, etc. are able to
talk to a remote operator, communications devices such as modems are moving off the desktop and into the field,
where the conveniences of 115VAC power outlets and climate control are usually hard to find.
Raymar-Telenetics has addressed this problem by developing a range of Communication Interface Units (CIUs)
Designed specifically for harsh environments.
OPERATION & INTERFACE

The MIU is a highly sophisticated full duplex data modem that is designed to interface with RD232, RS485 (external
device), 5v logic (TTL) or simple send and receive signals. They operate at full or half duplex on dial-up or 2 wire and
4-wire leased line systems.
2ND GENERATION MIU MODEM INTERFACE UNITS
2nd GENERATION MIU

INDUSTRIAL HARDENED MODEM INTERFACE UNITS
All of these devices are powered from a unique power supply that enables them to operate on any AC or DC voltage
ranging from 48V to 240V. A low voltage version (-9 to -36VDC) is also available. The CIUs are designed to work in
temperatures from -40C to +85C, and are surge protected on both the power and analog lines.
All of this is bundled in a 5 x 4-1/4 x 1-1/4 Aluminum enclosure, suitable for desktop or wallmounting.
Multipoint Configuration
For point-to-multipoint (multi-drop)
communications, ask for information
on our Bell 202T modems.
Also see our data sheets on the
MIU/Powerport low voltage modems,
the Myriad Rack Mount Modem
Banks and the MIU202T (Bell 202T)
modems.
MIUx.x
Public
Switched Telephone
Network
(PSTN)
MIUx.x
Dial Line Communications

MIUx.xL
MIUx.xL
RAYMAR INFORMATION
TECHNOLOGY, INC.
Leased Line Communications
7325 Roseville Road

Sacramento, CA 95842
USA
MIU9.6FPD
+1-916-783-1951
Multi-Polling
Industrial Hardened Modem Interface Unit (MIU) upgrade.

The Newly released 2 nd Generation MIU features several improvements based on feedback from a variety of installations. The MIU
first released over a decade ago has been an integral part of thousands of networks. Our engineers took advantage of the experience
and feedback from customers to improve and extend the functionality of this highly respected product line. This upgraded product will
replace the historical models of the MIU modems for all future orders.
The baseboard (Interface card) has been migrated to SMD technology along with several design improvements to circuit isolation
reducing the susceptibility of the product to externally generated damages, i.e. power fluctuations, surges on the power interface.
The new aluminum enclosure features wall mounting flanges and the ability to add a DIN Rail clip to simplify installations.
FAX +1-916-783-1952
sales@raymarinc.com
1-800-695-1951
Tech Support Hotline
1-800-747-1522
www.raymarinc.com
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
STANDARD FEATURES
MIU9.6FPD
MIU28.8
MIU14.4
Model
Modem Line
Speeds:
Asynchronous
DTE Rates: above

modem line speeds
(ie; with data
compression)
Standards:
4800, 9600,
14400bps
4800, 9600,
14400bps
V.27 & V.29
14400, 9600,
4800, 2400,
1200, 300bps
57600, 38400,
19200kbps
V.32bis, V.32
V.22Bis, V.22
Bell 212A,
Bell 103
28800,19200,
14400,9600,
4800, 2400,
1200, 300bps
115200, 57600,
38400,19200kbps
V.34, V.32Bis,
V.32, V.22Bis,
V.22, Bell 212A,
Bell 103
MIU14.4
MIU28.8
RS232
RS232
RS232
48 to 240V
AC or DC
48 to 240V
AC or DC
48 to 240V
AC or DC
Power
Connection
3-pin
connector
3-pin
connector
3-pin
connector
Options Available
(see table below)
1, 2, 3, 5
1, 2, 3, 5
1, 2, 3, 5
Serial Interface
Power
Supply
Raymar-Telenetics now offers Bell202T and V.23 modems

for multi-drop / polling applications. All Telenetics modems
are available in Myriad Rack Mount Modem Banks.
see separate datasheets
AVAILABLE OPTIONS
ITEM
Dial Up
2 & 4-Wire
Leased Line
MIU14.4
1
MIU9.6FPD
1
MIU14.4L
None
Hayes Extended AT Hayes Extended AT

Command Set
Command Set
Error Correction/
Data Compression
None
MNP 2, 4, 5 & 10
V.42, V.42bis
Power Connector
DESCRIPTION
ORDER
SUFFIX
MIU28.8
Compatibility
Power Supply
MIU9.6FPD
MNP 2, 4, 5 & 10
V.42, V.42bis
-9 to -36VDC Power Supply
-LV
4 Foot Power Cable

(Standard)
Included
4 Foot Power Cable

(High Surge)
-HC
RS485 Serial Interface
-485
48VAC/DC to 240VAC/DC (Optional -9 to -36VDC)

4-ft AC Cord with 3-Pin Screw Terminal connector included
ORDER CODE EXAMPLE:

Case Size and Weight
Size: 5 x 4-1/4 x 1-1/4

Weight: 1lb
Digital Port
RS232 with DB9 Connector
MIU2.4-485-LV
2400bps Modem
With Optional RS485 Interface
Analog Port
Surge Protection
(Power Line)
Surge Protection
(Analog Line)
Environment
RJ-11 Modular Jack
With Optional -9 to -36VDC Power Supply
8kV [Exceeds IEC801-4]

(20kV [IE801-5] available if required)
3.75kVAC
3.75kVAC
3.75kVAC
-40C to +85C, 0 to 95% humidity (non-condensing)
WARRANTY
Certifications
1
FCC Part 68, Industry Canada
The standard 9.6FPD and the 14.4L models are 4-wire full or half duplex,
point-to-point only. 2-wire, full duplex, point-to-point available on special order.
Raymar-Telenetics manufactured products are warranted

against defects in hardware material and workmanship under
normal use for one (1) year from date of original retail purchase.
Defective product will be repaired or replaced, determination to
be made by Raymar-Telenetics, at no charge. Repaired or
replaced products are warranted for 90 days or for original
warranty period, whichever is longer. Warranty extends to
original end-user only.
Manufactured in the USA by RAYMAR-TELENETICS

Raymar Information Technology, Inc., 7325 Roseville Road, Sacramento, CA 95842
1-800-695-1951 fax +1-916-783-1952 sales@raymarinc.com www.raymarinc.com
Service Support Hotline 1-800-747-1522
2011 Raymar-Telenetics
0070-0100-000 REV A
04/07/2011
2ND GENERATION MIU MODEM INTERFACE UNITS AC/DC POWERED
2nd GENERATION MIU MODEM INTERFACE UNITS AC/DC POWERED

Harris Ridge Condos Panel Submittal REV A

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Harris Ridge Condos Panel Submittal REV A

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

SUBMITTAL DOCUMENTS

Harris Ridge Condominiums

Larry Wingo / Joseph Scott

---------------- DESCRIPTION -------------------Cover Page

TAB: General Information

TAB: Cut Sheets

TAB: GENERAL INFORMATION

301 M&B Industrial

Waco, Texas 76712

Duplex Control Panel

August 17, 2015

301 M&B Industrial

Waco, Texas 76712

Duplex Control Panel

August 17, 2015

Comments and Clarifications

Original Submittal Comments

HARRIS RIDGE CONDOS

CONTRACTOR C.C. CARLTON

DWG. NO. T:\CAD\CONTROL\SCHEMATIC\6002-334

Control Panel Pricing

Flowserve 3MSX8A October 28, 2014

HARRIS RIDGE CONDOMINUMS

CONTRACTOR: C.C CARLTON

MODEL NO: 6002-334

TAB: CUT SHEETS

IEC Terminal Block Accessories

For Use With

Snap-In Individual Markers

NEMA (1492-HM1, -HM2, -HM3) Terminal Blocks,

NEMA (1492-HM3) Terminal Blocks, 1492-CB Circuit

1492-J, L, 1738 ArmorPoint

700-HN204, -HN205, Relay Sockets

100-C, -D Contactors, 700-CF Relays, 140 Circuit

1492-W,R, 700-HA Relays

Snap-In Linked Markers

1492-W, 700-HA, 800F Contact Block

1492-W, 700-H Relays

1492-W, -R, 700-H Relays

1492-W, 700-H Relays

External Diameter (mm)

from 0.276 in. (from 7.0 mm)

from 0.276 in. (from 7.0 mm)

from 0.276 in. (from 7.0 mm)

from 0.276 in. (from 7.0 mm)

0.1620.193 in. (414.9 mm)

0.1850.229 (0.268) in. (4.75.8 [6.8] mm)

0.2290.276 (0.335) in. (5.87.0 [8.5] mm)

Snap-In Hinged Markers

1 Requires cable ties.

Requires Cat. No. 1492-GMC

Preferred availability cat. nos. are bold.

NEMA Terminal Block Accessories

1.25 (31.8 mm)

.013 (3.2 mm)

1.50 (38.1 mm)

HM1 provides IEC 947 IP2X finger protection.

Preferred availability cat. nos. are bold.

NEMA Terminal Block Accessories

Number of the Same-Size Wires Per Terminal

Fingersafe Terminal Blocks

Fingersafe Terminal Blocks

Number of the Same-Size Wires Per Terminal

1 Dimensions for other colors are identical.